Jinx: Between A Squeeze🤝 And A Crack ⛓️‍💥 – part 2

Please support the authors by reading Manhwas on the official websites. This is where you can read the ManhwaJinx  But be aware that the Manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. Here is the link of the table of contents about JinxHere is the link where you can find the table of contents of analyzed Manhwas. Here are the links, if you are interested in the first work from Mingwa, BJ Alex,  and the 2 previous essays about Jinx  The Secrets Behind The Floors and Between A Squeeze And A Crack – part 1

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining Manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

The Power of Voice

In the first part of this essay, I lingered on two gestures that never fully entered language: the squeeze of a hand (chapter 87), and the destruction of black glass under Baek Junmin’s foot. (chapter 87) Both moments operate under pressure, yet they belong to radically different economies. One gathers force inward to protect, contain, and care. The other expels force outward to fracture, dominate, and erase. The biggest difference is not intensity, but direction—and whether the other is held, or destroyed.

What remained implicit, however, was something more unsettling. In both cases, movement begins with voice.

In the bed scene, the sequence is precise. The champion whispers first. (chapter 87) He asks for strength and luck (chapter 87). Kim Dan answers with a gesture, the offered hand accompanied with a wish: (chapter 87). Only then does the squeeze occur. Words initiate connection; the body confirms it. Speech and gesture align. Pressure becomes care.

In the other scene, words are also present (chapter 87) —but they are refused. Baek Junmin is denied any possibility of reply—no space to answer, to justify himself, or even to speak back. (chapter 87) The screen interposed between them (chapter 87) functions as both a physical and symbolic barrier: it delivers judgment without permitting response. Deprived of dialogue, Junmin is pushed out of language altogether. What remains available to him is not speech, but the body. His answer therefore does not come in words, but through the hand (chapter 87) and then through the foot. (chapter 87) Not as dialogue, but as rupture.

Read this way, the attack on the television screen becomes fully intelligible. (chapter 87) The violence is not misdirected; it is precisely directed at the medium that silences him. The screen is the site of exclusion, (chapter 87) the object that speaks at him while preventing him from speaking back. Striking it is not an attempt to destroy an image, but to break through a barrier—to replace blocked language with immediate, corporeal force.

And now, my avid readers comprehend the illustration for Between a Squeeze and a Crack The champion’s voice represents a turning point. The title displays this difference. In both moments, the champion’s voice carries weight. What changes is not the force of the words, but the space in which they fall—and whether anyone is willing, or able, to answer them.

Part II begins at the moment when this difference becomes irreversible.

An Invisible Revolution: The Rising of the Dragon

Something changes in episode 87. And that shift does not begin with shouting, provocation, or scandal. It begins with voice seeking alignment.

Before the interview (chapter 87), before the challenge (chapter 87), the champion turns around. (chapter 87) He looks—not at the crowd, not at the institution, but at Kim Dan. The gaze matters. It establishes a circuit. Like a phone call finally answered, it places both on the same wavelength. Only then does the question come. (chapter 87) Here again, language and body are aligned. (chapter 87) Kim Dan answers—first with a nod, then with words. The response is clear, immediate, and embodied. And what follows is decisive: the champion raises his arm. (chapter 87)

He does not wait for the referee. He does not wait for the jury. He does not wait for the organization.

This gesture is easy to overlook. It is not aggressive. It is not loud. Yet it is quietly revolutionary. When contrasted with his previous matches (chapter 15) (chapter 40) (chapter 51), its meaning sharpens. For the first time, Kim Dan no longer occupies the position of fan or witness. He functions as judge and jury. 😮 And the champion acts accordingly. He declares himself the winner. (chapter 87)

Authority shifts before exposure occurs.

This is the missing step. Validation has already taken place. (chapter 87) Legitimacy is no longer awaited; it has been secured within the relationship itself. What follows is not a request for recognition, but its declaration. (chapter 87) Doc Dan is the one turning Joo Jaekyung into a champion, into the Emperor. And I doubt, MFC noticed this revolutionary gesture.

Therefore it is not surprising that shortly after the champion takes the microphone. (chapter 87) Joo Jaekyung is no longer a puppet or zombie, but a man with a heart and voice.

And the microphone is not incidental. By taking it, the dragon deliberately secures visibility, recording, and irreversibility. But more importantly, he seizes narrative control. (chapter 87)

The microphone is the institution’s tool. (chapter 46) It regulates turn-taking, determines who may speak, in what order, and under which framing. As long as it remains in the moderator’s hand, speech is mediated, filtered, and contextualized. Questions lead; answers follow. Meaning circulates vertically.

By removing the microphone from that circuit, the champion disarms the moderator. (chapter 87) The interview collapses. What remains is not dialogue, but unilateral address. This is why the moderator’s only possible response is an apology. (chapter 87) He no longer moderates; he reacts. He cannot redirect the statement, soften it, or translate it into spectacle. He can only acknowledge that something has escaped containment. The apology is not moral—it is procedural. It marks the moment the institution loses authorship.

What was once private and contained now enters public time without mediation. The champion is no longer being narrated (chapter 57); he is narrating. He does not answer a question (chapter 87) —he establishes a position. (chapter 87) And because this occurs live, the statement cannot be re-sequenced, reframed, or quietly absorbed later. In this moment, authority shifts again—not from fighter to organization, but away from the organization entirely. The champion speaks, as if MFC and CSPP were already secondary. The conflict no longer belongs to the apparatus that stages it. Wait a minute… CSPP? What is that?

This logo only caught my attention in the latest episode. However, it was already present in the beginning, but barely visible. (chapter 14) Yet, CSPP appears more and more insistently (chapter 87), even in the cage (chapter 87), contrary to before. (chapter 15) Either you only see the C or the name is placed out of the frame. (chapter 40) Yet it remains unexplained. What does it stand for in the world of Jinx? A sponsor? A broadcaster? The story never defines it explicitly—and that absence matters. What goes unnamed is often what exercises the most power. I will elaborate about it further.

Exposure, then, is not the cause of rupture. It is its consequence. The rupture occurs earlier, at the moment the champion looks for doc Dan’s gaze and opinion. That’s when the narration changes hands. Thus he raised his arm. What was once private and contained now risks exposure. (chapter 87) Hence the behavior of the wolf is filmed. At the same time, doc Dan appears much closer to the spotlight and the camera. Thus I deduce that in the future, doc Dan is about to enter into the spotlight. Some Jinx-philes are already speculating that his face could have been noticed by the cameraman and as such by the institution MFC or the antagonists.

This matters because the system surrounding him—MFC, CSPP, broadcast commentary, and the managerial logic embodied by Park Namwook (chapter 36) —depends on mediation. Delay. Scoring. Interpretation. The quiet redistribution of meaning after the fact. As long as nothing is said outright (chapter 69), control remains possible. Once speech becomes public, control becomes fragile.

The live broadcast sharpens this rupture. (chapter 87) Live means witnessed. And once witnessed, meaning no longer belongs to a single institution. It circulates among viewers: patients at the hospice (chapter 87), people in the seaside town, a public that exists before commentary can shape it.

Even the visuals insist on this distinction. When red, green, and white are mixed (chapter 87), they neutralize one another. The result is a muted, earthy tone—balance achieved through cancellation. That palette dominates the opening of the episode. It signals containment and fragile harmony. (chapter 87)

Baek Junmin’s shoe tells a different story. (chapter 87) The same colors appear, but they do not blend. They exist side by side, unresolved. Rage, greed, jealousy, emptiness—none neutralize the others. In chromatic terms, this is not balance but erosion. Because red and green are complementary opposites, their refusal to merge points not toward power, but toward self-destruction.

So now the question is no longer why Joo Jaekyung spoke. His speech was anticipated. In fact, it was partially scripted. The system expected resentment, accusation, even open hostility toward Baek Junmin—and in that sense, the champion’s words remained within the frame that had been imagined for him. His anger was legible, manageable, and therefore harmless.

The failure lies elsewhere. What happens when speech is anticipated—but its emotional and physical consequences are not? What happens when words fail to remain governable once they enter circulation? When images detach from their managers? When words no longer stabilize power, but instead generate rupture and conflict?

Part II addresses these questions sequentially: first through the fight and its language, then through the broadcast and mediation, and finally through the asymmetry of responses it produces.

Between a squeeze and a crack lies the instant when pressure stops circulating quietly and begins to transform the field itself. This part of the essay is about that instant—and about what happens when containment gives way to exposure.

The Fight as Language: Technique, Tempo, and Control

Before the speech, before the microphone, before the question that pretends to offer a choice, there is the fight itself. (chapter 87) And the fight already answers the questions the system hopes to postpone. What we see in the cage is not merely a contest of strength, but a clash of communicative regimes. How one fights here is inseparable from how one speaks, evades, provokes, or withholds.

Arnaud Gabriel’s strategy is immediately legible. He does not seek resolution; he seeks accumulation. (chapter 87) His movement privileges distance, tempo (chapter 87) and visibility. That way he gives the impression that he is superior to the former champion. The middle kick appears not as a finishing tool (chapter 87), but as an instrument of disruption—enough to score, enough to interrupt rhythm, never enough to end the exchange. The rest of his offense follows the same logic: repeated punches to the face (chapter 87), the hands, the shoulder. Targets chosen not for collapse, but for points. Not to silence the opponent, but to keep him talking through damage. The choice of targets is not arbitrary. The hands and the shoulder are not neutral zones. They are sites of vulnerability that presuppose knowledge. Arnaud Gabriel does not fight, as if he were discovering his opponent in real time; he fights as if he were acting on prior information. (chapter 82) He anticipated a diminished MMA fighter at the end of his career who would train at the hotel gym. His punches repeatedly return to the same areas—not to finish, but to aggravate. Not to silence, but to extract fatigue.

This matters because these are not weaknesses produced inside the cage alone. (chapter 87) The shoulder carries the memory of surgery and recovery. The hands mediate both offense and defense; exhausting them degrades reach, timing, and confidence. And breathlessness (chapter 82)—noticed earlier during training—signals something even more fragile: limits that are physiological, not tactical.

What the fight reveals, then, is a second layer of mediation. Gabriel’s strategy appears reactive, but it is in fact anticipatory. (chapter 87) It aligns disturbingly well with what had already circulated outside the match: commentary about tension, exhaustion, time away from competition. Whether through media narratives, observation, or informal channels of intelligence, the opponent’s body has already been translated into information.

This confirms something the system prefers not to name. In Jinx, fighters do not enter the cage as blank presences. They arrive already annotated. (chapter 47) Already discussed. Already framed. Gabriel’s reliance on point accumulation is inseparable from this logic. (chapter 87) He does not need to dominate the body; he needs to activate its known limits and let the scoring apparatus do the rest.

Seen this way, the fight mirrors the economy of speech that surrounds it. Information circulates before confrontation. Weakness is spoken elsewhere, then reenacted physically. The opponent is not answered directly; he is managed.

Against this backdrop, Joo Jaekyung’s refusal to continue circulating (chapter 87) —his decision to close distance, to counter decisively, to end the exchange rather than prolong it—appears less like impatience than resistance. He does not correct the narrative. He interrupts it.

This is important. Gabriel’s fight is structured around being seen. He “circles”, he lands, he retreats. He performs control without assuming responsibility for outcome. The commentators name it explicitly: (chapter 87) if he sticks to this strategy, he can rack up points and win by decision. Victory here does not come from transformation, but from endurance within the rules. It is a fight designed to be judged, mediated, interpreted later.

Under this logic, victory does not belong to the fighter who transforms the exchange, but to the institution that interprets it. This is not new. In episode 47, Park Namwook (chapter 47) articulates the same principle explicitly: not a knockout, not a decisive end, but a strategy that stretches time, drains energy, and leaves judgment in the hands of referees and juries. (chapter 51) The fight is no longer about what happens between bodies, but about who controls evaluation. And that’s how they could rig the match between Baek Junmin and Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 51) without ever appearing fraudulent.

By encouraging endurance, point accumulation, and delayed resolution, authority shifts away from the fighters and toward referees and juries. Decisiveness becomes a liability. Ambiguity becomes profitable. Read in this light, the director’s remark about young fighters lacking fighting spirit and being arrogant (chapter 70) acquires a different meaning. What he condemns as arrogance is not a moral failure, but a structural adaptation. These fighters have learned that they do not need to finish fights with a knockout. They only need to prolong them—to survive them—because the system will finish the sentence for them. Therefore, the moderator’s commentary during the match introducing the new Korean fighter takes on a clearer function. (chapter 71) He frames the rookie as someone “waiting for the right timing,” subtly suggesting a coming knockout rather than prolonged survival. The language is important: it reassures the audience that decisiveness still exists within the system, that power is merely deferred—not absent.

But this is precisely where the narration fails. The moderator’s interpretation is not an analysis of what is happening in the cage; it is a reassurance directed outward, toward spectators who still expect resolution. (chapter 71) The director is not persuaded. Hwang Byungchul reads the situation differently. He recognizes stiffness, fear, and overreliance on structure—not composure, not strategy. Where the moderator sees patience, the director sees hesitation. Where commentary insists on strategy, experience detects rigidity and lack of instincts.

This discrepancy matters. It exposes the gap between institutional narration and embodied knowledge. Commentary works to preserve belief in the system’s fairness and coherence; the director’s reaction reveals how deeply fighters have been trained to survive judgment rather than risk transformation. The moderator speaks to maintain the illusion of control. The director sees through it because he understands what a fighter looks like when he is no longer fighting to win, but to last.

Read this way, Arnaud Gabriel is not an anomaly but a template. His method externalizes power. By avoiding resolution, he transfers authority away from the cage and into the system that counts, frames, and decides. The longer the match, the greater this discretion becomes.

Under this light, the absence of strategic advisors for the match in Paris is no oversight. (chapter 81) It is an assumption: that the outcome no longer requires athletic intervention. The champion is treated as a finished product, a celebrity whose role is to endure visibility, not to alter the terms of the fight itself.

And this is precisely how Arnaud Gabriel behaves outside (chapter 82) and inside the cage. (chapter 87) Publicly, he is courteous. Measured. Even complimentary. (chapter 82) His mockery arrives only after contact has been broken—after the bell, after the exchange, after safety has been restored. (chapter 82) He remarks, not as confrontation, but as commentary. Like his fighting style, his speech avoids commitment. It is designed to sting without escalating, to destabilize without consequence. Gabriel never needs to raise his voice because the system will finish his sentence for him. His confidence does not announce itself; it is delegated. He hides arrogance and cynicism behind smiles (chapter 82), gentle and polite gestures, and tactical distance— away from the spotlight, away from overt confrontation. His restraint is not humility, but alignment. He performs civility so that judgment, narration, and authority can be outsourced to the institution. That’s why for him, fighting is strongly intertwined with fun and he sees himself more as a star than as an athlete. He is definitely influenced by MFC. Hence we can say that his suit mirrors his mind-set. Gabriel’s suit does not soften his presence; it disciplines it. The patterned fabric signals rigidity rather than elegance—structure over fluidity. It mirrors his fighting style: calibrated, rule-bound, resistant to improvisation. Nothing about his appearance invites rupture. Everything is designed to hold form.

Baek Junmin operates according to the same economy, even if his temperament is different.

Like Gabriel, he relies on intermediaries. (chapter 52) He lets others speak, provoke, circulate images, manage money, create pressure. (chapter 54) His power does not come from direct address, but from displacement. When he does appear, it is rarely to argue. (chapter 49) It is to smirk, to whisper, to apply pressure obliquely. In both cases, the logic is identical: control is preserved by never being fully present.

What distinguishes Joo Jaekyung in this fight is that he refuses this grammar. (chapter 87)

In the first round, his so-called inability to land a hit is not simply frustration or decline. (chapter 87) It is more observation. He allows the opponent to speak first—to reveal the structure of the exchange. (chapter 87) Gabriel runs, scores points, performs mastery. The system recognizes this as competence. (chapter 87) But competence is not the same as authority. The main lead was simply waiting for the right time.

The shift comes with the back kick. (chapter 87)

A back kick is not a display technique. It is a counter. It requires timing, proximity, and commitment. It is thrown not to accumulate points, but to end conversation. (chapter 87) When it lands, it collapses distance. It forces the opponent inward. And crucially, it targets the center of the body—not the face that earns applause, but the core that sustains movement.

What the kick takes away is not balance alone, but breath. (chapter 87) This matters. Breath is what allows speech, rhythm, and continuity. By striking the abdomen, Joo Jaekyung does not silence Arnaud Gabriel symbolically; he silences him physiologically. The cough is not incidental. It is the visible sign of a system failure. The “eagle”—the aerial, circling, point-accumulating fighter—cannot stay aloft once the diaphragm collapses. Flight gives way to gravity.

The follow-up matters even more. After the back kick, Joo Jaekyung closes in (chapter 87) and delivers an uppercut. (chapter 87) This is not escalation; it is completion. Where Gabriel sought to keep the fight open, Joo Jaekyung compresses it. He refuses the long exchange. He refuses circulation. He refuses to wait for judgment. His strategy is not to be evaluated later, but to be undeniable now.

The back kick strips Arnaud Gabriel of breath. (chapter 87) The uppercut strips him of orientation. (chapter 87)

Once the diaphragm collapses, Gabriel is no longer capable of regulating posture or timing. The uppercut intervenes at precisely that moment—not to add force, but to resolve imbalance. It lifts a body that can no longer stabilize itself and interrupts any attempt at recovery. What follows is not resistance, but collapse. The eagle does not land; it falls. Arms and legs fail at once, and with them the capacity to stay airborne. (chapter 87) This is not silence imposed from outside, but silence produced by gravity. Once the body crashes, breath cannot return, and speech has nowhere to perch.

This distinction matters. Gabriel’s entire mode of fighting—and speaking—depends on continuity: light contact (chapter 87), controlled retreat, smiling commentary, damage spread thin enough to remain narratable. From my perspective, pain, for him, has always been something deferred (spread across rounds), translated (into points, commentary, statistics) and mediated (by rules, referees, judges, replay). (chapter 87) But the uppercut ends that translation. Crucially, it is Joo Jaekyung who calls this strike a “tap.” (chapter 87)

The word matters. By naming the uppercut this way, the champion reframes violence from the inside. He is not minimizing the impact; he is exposing a hierarchy of force. What appears decisive to the audience is, for him, secondary. The real rupture has already occurred with the loss of breath, with the back kick (chapter 87). Compared to that, the uppercut is merely punctuation.

This inversion reveals how far he has moved beyond a point-based or spectacle-driven economy of fighting. The strike that looks spectacular is not the one that matters most. The decisive action is the one that interrupts breath, rhythm, and continuity — the one that makes speech, posture, and recovery impossible.

After it lands, Gabriel does not speak. He does not smile. He does not reframe. He remains grounded, silent, and exposed. (chapter 87) This is why the moment feels disproportionate. It is not simply that Gabriel is hurt; it is that he appears unprepared for pain that interrupts language rather than ornamenting it.

The protagonist’s fighting style mirrors his communicative behavior exactly: alignment. (chapter 87)

Where Gabriel and Baek Junmin rely on deferral, Joo Jaekyung insists on alignment. Where they speak around conflict (chapter 74) (chapter 82) (chapter 87), he speaks into it. Where their power depends on systems that can reinterpret outcomes, his depends on moments that resist reinterpretation. It looks as though the athlete has internalized surprise as a mode of operation. (chapter 87) Not surprise as chaos, but as interruption. Each decisive movement arrives before it can be absorbed by the system—before it can be scored, reframed, or deferred to later interpretation. The opponent is caught off-balance, but so is the moderator, whose script assumes predictability. Surprise here is not a tactic for winning exchanges; it is a tactic for breaking mediation.

This is why the moderator’s question is not accidental. It is an attempt to pull the champion back into a familiar structure: (chapter 87) Two options. Two lanes. A controlled fork in the road. The equivalent of Gabriel’s point-scoring strategy translated into language. But the fight has already shown us why this will fail despite the appearances

Joo Jaekyung has no interest in winning by decision—whether athletic or rhetorical. He does not want to be interpreted. He wants to be answered. (chapter 87)

Seen this way, the fight is not a prelude to the speech. It is its proof. The jinx mattered because it did not merely weaken the champion’s body; it rendered him structurally mute. (chapter 2) While the jinx held, action could still occur, but speech could not carry consequence. Words dissipated, were deferred, or were absorbed by systems designed to neutralize them. Powerlessness expressed itself as speechlessness.

What breaks in episode 87 is not luck, but that condition. The jinx no longer governs his relation to outcome. And the clearest sign of that release is not victory, but articulation. (chapter 87) He can now act in ways that resist reinterpretation—and speak in ways that cannot be postponed.

Surprise becomes possible, only once the jinx loses its grip. While cursed, every move was anticipated, rerouted, or explained away. Once uncursed, the champion no longer needs permission, timing, or validation from the system. (chapter 87) His actions arrive before meaning can be reassigned. His words arrive where no answer is prepared. In this sense, episode 87 marks the moment Joo Jaekyung becomes fluent in his own discipline. Not merely competent, not merely dominant, but articulate. His movements surprise (chapter 87) because they are no longer designed to be legible in advance. They are not bids for approval; they are declarations.

Where Arnaud Gabriel’s fighting style depends on being read, scored, and explained—on allowing the system to finish his sentence—Joo Jaekyung’s now depends on interruption. Each movement cuts across expectation. Each decision arrives before mediation can begin. Surprise is no longer an accident; it is his mode of expression. That’s how it dawned on me why he won this match so quickly after his first night with doc Dan (chapter 5) which had surprised his manager Park Namwook. (chapter 5)

The system believes it still governs outcomes because it confuses movement with control. Gabriel moves. Baek Junmin circulates. But neither transforms the field. Joo Jaekyung does. First with his body. Soon with his voice.

And once speech enters the same register as the back kick (chapter 87) —direct, unmediated, irreversible—there will be no neutral ground left to retreat to. (chapter 87)

Commentary as Control: When Mediation Rewrites the Fight

Before the microphone is seized (chapter 87), the fight has already been partially rewritten. Not by the fighters, but by the voice that accompanies them.

The moderator’s narration does not describe the fight; it scripts how the fight should be seen. (chapter 87) Here, the man praises the French sportsman while omitting the action from the Korean athlete. This distinction matters. Commentary during the fight in Paris is not a neutral layer added after the fact. It intervenes in real time, assigning meaning, value, and legitimacy to movements as they occur. What counts as action, what counts as damage, and what counts as dominance are not decided solely by bodies in motion, but by the language that frames them.

A telling discrepancy appears early. Joo Jaekyung advances and throws a punch. (chapter 87) Visually, contact is registered: the onomatopoeia “TAP” marks the moment. Something happens. And yet the moderator declares, unequivocally: “Joo can’t land a single hit.” The issue is not that the blow lacks force; it is that it is rendered nonexistent. Contact is reclassified as absence.

By contrast, when Arnaud Gabriel touches (chapter 87) — repeatedly, often against guard or shoulder— those same gestures are narrated as accumulation. (chapter 87) Circling becomes “control.” Light strikes become “points.” Endurance becomes strategy. The same physical economy is not evaluated differently; it is counted differently. (chapter 87)

This asymmetry is systematic. Gabriel’s movements are framed as strong and intelligent, even when they produce no decisive effect. The thing is that Joo Jaekyung can withstand such punches. He has long internalized to use his body as shield. Besides, his movements, when they do not immediately collapse the opponent, are either omitted or framed as failure. (chapter 87) The moderator does not ask whether Joo is absorbing damage; he announces that Joo is being outmaneuvered. He does not note that Joo remains squared, grounded, and facing his opponent; he insists that Gabriel is “running circles around him.” (chapter 87)

What emerges is not analysis, but instruction. The commentary teaches the audience what to recognize as skill and what to dismiss as noise. It does not reflect the fight; it pre-interprets it, guiding perception toward a point-based, decision-oriented outcome. Victory, under this narration, is not something seized—it is something awarded later.

This is why the strategy attributed to Gabriel fits so cleanly within the system. His fight is designed to be judged. He circles, touches, retreats. He avoids moments that resist reinterpretation. He never needs to raise his voice or force a conclusion, because the system will finish his sentence for him. Commentary, jury, and scoring will translate minimal impact into legitimacy. Joo Jaekyung, by contrast, does not fight to be translated. He absorbs, advances, closes distance. His guard is not praised as strength and resilience but dismissed as passivity. (chapter 87) His contact is not evaluated but erased. The narration does not merely favor Gabriel; it prepares the conditions under which Gabriel’s approach can win without ever having to end the fight.

Seen this way, the fight is not merely athletic. It is already political. The moderator’s voice functions as an invisible hand on the scale, redefining what counts as action before the judges ever speak. It was already palpable during the match between the main lead and the Shotgun, but now it becomes more obvious.

This is the context in which the later intervention must be read. When Joo Jaekyung takes the microphone (chapter 87), he is not interrupting a fair narrative. He is reclaiming authorship from a system that has already begun to speak over his body.

Moderation as Deflection: The Interview as a Managed Choice

By the time the microphone appears, the fight is already over—but control over its meaning is not. (chapter 87) This is where the moderator enters the cage and becomes visible. His intervention is not neutral, and it is not merely journalistic. It is managerial.

The structure of his question reveals this immediately. He does not ask one question, then wait. He asks two at once: how the champion feels and whether he has words for Baek Junmin. This is not conversational clumsiness; it is a framing device. The champion is placed in front of a forced alternative: personal affect or rivalry hype. Either answer keeps the discourse safely within the register of sport. Both options redirect attention forward—toward the next match—rather than backward, toward responsibility.

This is a classic diversionary tactic. By introducing Baek Junmin at this precise moment, the moderator collapses multiple narratives into one convenient axis: fighter versus fighter. Institutional involvement disappears. The CEO of MFC disappears. Any irregularity becomes merely interpersonal tension. The interview is designed not to elicit truth, but to channel attention.

That this is happening on a live broadcast matters. The moderator is not improvising; he is containing risk in real time.

Who Is Watching—and Why That Matters

But what the moderator miscalculates is not the champion’s temperament, but his audience.

This match is not being watched only by fans or analysts. It is being watched by patients at the hospice. (chapter 87) It is being watched by staff. It is being watched by Hwang Byungchul—someone who knows the champion not as a brand, but as a body, a history, and a visitor and former patient of that very place. These viewers are not consuming spectacle; they are witnessing continuity. They know the fighter as a person, and I suppose, it is the same for the inhabitants of the seaside town.

For them, Joo Jaekyung’s presence is not abstract. It is personal. They are watching because of him, not because of the event itself. The dragon is not just a celebrity for them, but someone who once occupied the same space they do now. This shifts the interpretive frame entirely. They are not primed to receive hype or promotional narrative. They are primed to notice discontinuity—moments where what is said no longer matches what they know of the body, the risk, and the cost.

The moderator speaks as if he is guiding interpretation. (chapter 87) But live broadcast does not guarantee interpretive obedience. It only guarantees exposure. For the inhabitants and patients of the hospice, authority does not circulate through the microphone. It circulates through familiarity. They have no relationship with the moderator—no shared past, no shared vulnerability. With the champion, they do. His words carry weight precisely because they are grounded in recognition, not mediation. When he speaks, he is not framing the event for them; he is interrupting the frame itself. That’s why I believe not “motherfucker” will catch their attention, rather the other statement “playing dirty”. (chapter 87)

The Champion’s Speech as Refusal of Explanation

This is where the champion’s response becomes decisive—not because of what it clarifies, but because of what it refuses to clarify. (chapter 87) Contrary to the moderator’s method, Joo Jaekyung does not explain. He does not narrate. He does not contextualize. He speaks about a stunt. A trick. He names the existence of manipulation without supplying its mechanism.

This is not accidental. It is the inverse of commentary logic. Where the moderator’s role is to tell viewers how to see what just happened, the champion’s declaration does the opposite: it destabilizes perception. It introduces doubt without closure. It forces questions instead of answers. The speech functions less as accusation than as riddle. Let’s not forget that for that tie which was turned into a defeat, many people were involved: the MFC security guards, the intervention of doctors, the corruption of the jury, referee and moderator and the switched spray (its fabrication…).

This is precisely what the moderator and MFC did not anticipate.

Had the champion named the trick explicitly—had he described the spray (chapter 69) , the switching, the method—the institution could have responded. Clarifications could be issued. Liability could be managed. But by speaking elliptically, by pointing to manipulation without anatomizing it, the champion places the burden of interpretation onto the audience. And MFC can not deny the existence of an incident in the locker room.

And that audience includes people who already trust the main lead, his strength and his selflessness. (chapter 62) They are not close enough to trust the system blindly.

Why This Speech Is Dangerous to the System

For viewers in the seaside town, the declaration invites curiosity. For hospice patients, it resonates with lived vulnerability. For Hwang Byungchul, it can also activate memory (chapter 87) — of past matches, past compromises, past blindness. He is not being told what to think. He is being prompted to remember the suspension which he thought, his pupil deserved. (chapter 57)

This is the opposite of what moderation is designed to do. The moderator attempts to redirect attention toward Baek Junmin and the future. (chapter 87) There will be a match soon. The champion pulls it backward, toward unresolved causality. The moderator offers a spectacle that can be consumed. The champion offers a fracture that must be examined.

This is why the subsequent apology for profanity is so revealing. It is the only response available. Language has slipped beyond containment, so the institution retreats to formality. Civility replaces substance. That way, the athlete can be criticized for his language. He doesn’t appear as refined or proper. The reality is that he portrayed Baek Junmin as a cheater.

The Larger Diversion at Work

Seen in this light, the behavior of the CEO and the woman in red becomes legible. By foregrounding the incident in the States (chapter 69), by allowing attention to cluster around foreign misconduct (chapter 69) and public embarrassment (chapter 69), they redirect scrutiny away from the quieter, more actionable crime: the switched spray and the rigging of the game. Scandal abroad is survivable. Manipulation at home is not.

The champion’s speech threatens this balance. Not because it exposes everything, but because it exposes enough. (chapter 87) It disrupts the economy of managed ignorance. It creates a situation in which silence no longer stabilizes meaning. The incident is no longer buried, it is gradually coming to the surface,

The moderator was not asking two harmless questions. In reality, he was offering a script. And for the first time, the champion declined to read from it. Hence he insulted the actual champion.(chapter 87)

The Most Dangerous Word

The danger is not the profanity. It is what the profanity makes available.

When Joo Jaekyung says (chapter 87), he is not losing control. He is actually speaking on doc Dan’s behalf, as he has long recognized how the incident with the switched spray affected his lover. Hence he had pushed for further investigation later. He is more than just refusing the moderator’s script and naming his opponent directly, outside institutional mediation. The word does not function as an insult alone; it functions as a key.

Once spoken on live broadcast, it authorizes a shift in narrative terrain—from the fight to the past.

In a system that already treats Joo Jaekyung as a celebrity rather than an athlete (for more read my analysis “The Secrets Behind The Floors “], language is no longer evaluated for meaning but for usability. The insult “motherfucker” becomes extractable evidence. It invites biography. Not training history, but origins.

Raised by a single father who was not only violent, but also a drug-addict, a gambler and a mobster. Police records. (chapter 74) Early incidents reframed as character. Let’s not forget that he was stigmatized as a thug by the members from Team Black too. (chapter 47) Nothing new needs to be invented. Only reassembled. They know about the dragon’s past, because they brought Baek Junmin, someone who resented the celebrity for his wealth and fame.

This is how reputations are dismantled without contradiction. A scandal could finish his career, thus the manager silenced the incident with Choi Heesung’s fake injury. (chapter 31) The system does not deny the champion’s words ; it reclassifies them. What was a refusal of manipulation becomes “anger issues.” What was naming becomes “acting out.”

The word “motherfucker” is especially volatile because it summons the mother into the narrative. Her return—whether literal or discursive—does not need to accuse the champion. (chapter 72) It only needs to repeat an already accepted story: abandonment as necessity, violence as justification, disappearance as victimhood. A story the system knows how to circulate. And Hwang Byungchul never questioned her decision so far.

In that configuration, the champion’s speech is no longer debated. It is overwritten.

This is why the insult matters. Not because it is crude, but because it cannot be neutralized without reopening the past. The curse does not expose Joo Jaekyung. It gives the system permission to try. And this is the cost of refusing the script. However, what the schemers fail to recognize is that the champion is no longer influenced by the past and his origins. He received his absolution from the director Hwang Byungchul: (chapter 78) Secondly, Kim Dan is now able to distinguish the past from the present. Finally, thanks to doc Dan (chapter 62), he did so many good deeds in the seaside town that the inhabitants and the patients from the hospice won’t accept such accusations. I believe that such people won’t see “motherfucker” as a problem at all, they will rather see it as a part of his role after the match. What will remain in their mind is rather the accusation and riddle he voiced: the stunt Baek Junmin played.

CSPP and the Economy of Broadcast

What ultimately exposes the fragility of the system in episode 87 is not the champion’s aggression, but the infrastructure that was supposed to absorb it. The live broadcast does not merely transmit the fight; it reorganizes responsibility. And this is where CSPP becomes impossible to ignore. (chapter

CSPP is not presented as a television channel. The fight in the States was explicitly sold on PPV (chapter 87), which already tells us that CSPP does not function as a simple broadcaster. My idea is that CSPP operates as an intermediary apparatus: a company that packages events, sells broadcasting rights, coordinates visibility, and transforms violence into consumable spectacle. In other words, CSPP does not show fights; it produces events. This explicates why CSPP was present right from the start (chapter 14), but barely visible. But the moment it caught my attention in Paris, I realized that its increasing visibility displays the success of MFC as company. Observe that when the champion faced Randy Booker, the weight-in took place on the same day than the fight and in the arena, not at a prestigious hotel like in Paris. Here, the champion held a conference many days before the weight-in, and the latter took place the night before the match with Arnaud Gabriel. Secondly, you can observe the success of MFC through the banners. In Busan, the website of MFC was posed in the background next to CSPP. (chapter 14) In Seoul, when the star faced his old rival, there is no website on the banner (chapter 50), only MFC and CSPP. But in Paris, it is now totally different. (chapter 87) Thanks to CSPP, I noticed Joo Jaekyung’s true role. He is the one who made MMA fighting and MFC so popular! He is a trendsetter. He is indeed making history! And since CSPP and MFC are strongly connected to each other, it implies that CSPP as an organization is earning more and more money as well.

This is consistent with how the logo appears gradually in the narrative. In Paris, CSPP is omnipresent in the cage (chapter 87), on the banner, and on the stage and probably in promotional material , yet remains narratively undefined. That absence is not accidental. CSPP functions precisely where definition would impose accountability. It sits between MFC, sponsors, pharmaceutical interests (chapter 48), and distribution platforms, insulating each layer from direct responsibility. If something goes wrong, blame can always be displaced sideways.

CSPP and the Architecture of Visibility

CSPP enters the narrative quietly, but never innocently. Its function is not to comment on fights, nor to judge them. According to my observations and deductions, CSPP controls something more fundamental: when, how, and for whom events become visible. It is not a television channel. It does not merely broadcast. It packages, licenses, and distributes attention. And this becomes clear once we follow the timing.

Early revelations about Joo Jaekyung—his injury (chapter 35), his suspension (chapter 52), the causes for his defeat —usually surface in the evening or late at night (chapter 54). They circulate when attention is thin, fragmented, and easily exhausted. These disclosures are technically public, yet functionally muted. They exist without witnesses who can gather, discuss, or respond collectively.

As MMA gains popularity within the story, this pattern shifts. News about Joo Jaekyung begins to appear during the day. (chapter 57) (chapter 70) His matches are scheduled at hours accessible even to a Korean hospital (chapter 41) or hospice patients. (chapter 87) This is not coincidence. The schedule itself signals that Joo Jaekyung has become a ratings anchor—a figure around whom time is organized. He is no longer merely an athlete; he structures attention. Seen in this light, the late-night scheduling of the Korean rookie’s fight (chapter 71) becomes intelligible. It is not a mark of anticipation, but of expendability. The match is placed where attention is thinnest, where failure or success carries minimal consequence. By contrast, Joo Jaekyung’s fights are positioned to be seen. The asymmetry exposes how dependent MFC’s visibility economy is on him—not as a competitor, but as the primary organizer of audience attention.

This is precisely when CSPP becomes more visible.

CSPP’s logos multiply as control becomes more precarious. Its presence in the cage, on banners, and in broadcast framing (stage) increases not because it is expanding, but because it needs to be seen owning the frame. Visibility here is defensive. The more unstable meaning becomes, the more insistently CSPP marks the space as regulated, licensed, and sanctioned.

The contrast with Baek Junmin is instructive. His early fights are difficult to trace. Kim Dan cannot find information online. (chapter 47) His presence circulates through curated highlights and controlled conference footage rather than open broadcast. (chapter 47) His rise is engineered through selective visibility. (chapter 47) Weak opponents are chosen. (chapter 47) His image is inflated before he ever faces Joo Jaekyung. CSPP does not need to expose him fully; it needs only to prepare recognition. However, CSPP is an official company, they can not control rumors among fighters. (chapter 47) Thus the manager suggested this to his boss just before: (chapter 46) By mentioning the existence of spies, he incited the main lead to keep his distance from the doctor and the members so that the rumors about the underground fighting wouldn’t reach his ears.

This explains the asymmetry in scheduling as well. When defeat is anticipated for Joo Jaekyung—Busan (chapter 14), the United States, Paris—the fights are placed in high-visibility slots. Loss must be witnessed. Decline must be shared. By contrast, the fight between Baek Junmin and Joo Jaekyung takes place in the morning (chapter 49), a time of dispersed attention, private viewing, and reduced collective response. Visibility is not maximized; it is managed. (chapter 49) CSPP’s role, then, is not neutral mediation. It is temporal governance. It decides when exposure becomes dangerous and when it becomes profitable. It does not silence events; it times them.

This also clarifies why Baek Junmin’s championship appears so late, almost as an afterthought. (chapter 77) Once Joo Jaekyung does not contest the loss of his title—once he does not sue, demand more investigation, or interrupt the administrative process— MFC and CSPP no longer need to justify anything. Delay becomes normalization. Silence becomes confirmation.

What CSPP ultimately sells is not fights, but legitimacy through circulation. As long as conflicts remain within the frame of scheduled events (chapter 87), licensed images, and mediated commentary, the system holds. But the moment violence spills into spaces CSPP cannot package—off-camera, unsanctioned, criminal—the entire structure becomes vulnerable.

This is why Baek Junmin’s trajectory (chapter 87) is dangerous not only for MFC, but for CSPP itself. If his connections to the underworld surface, CSPP is no longer a distributor of sport, but a conduit for illicit spectacle. Contracts dissolve not because violence occurred, but because violence escaped framing.

CSPP thrives on controlled exposure. What it cannot survive is uncontrollable visibility. And by focusing on this aspect, it dawned on me that CSPP could have footage of the fight in Seoul. This distinction clarifies an earlier anomaly that otherwise remains unresolved: the Seoul fight.

Joo Jaekyung was injured, when he entered the scene. (chapter 49) Under normal medical protocol, this should have stopped the fight immediately. (chapter 41) No athlete should perform when injured. Yet MFC Medical remains silent, the staff simply treats the wound. The bout proceeds. Only later—after attention has shifted, after consequences have begun to circulate—does the same medical authority step forward to issue disciplinary sanctions and a suspension (chapter 52).

The reversal is telling. Medical authority here does not operate preventively, but retroactively. It does not protect the athlete at the moment of risk; it activates only once visibility becomes dangerous. This explains why a trick was played at the health center. It was to divert attention from their own complicity.

Seen through the logic of CSPP, this makes sense. If CSPP governs circulation, then footage of the Seoul fight does not disappear—it is archived. The problem is not the absence of evidence, but its containment. (chapter 52) There were cameras in the arena. What cannot be allowed to surface is proof of foreknowledge: that an injured athlete was permitted to fight under institutional supervision. Thus it raises the question if the match in the morning was broadcast on TV.

This explains the sudden relocation of scandal to the health center. By staging conflict there, the system launders responsibility. (chapter 52) Structural complicity is translated into an individualized incident. What occurred in the cage is no longer the issue; what occurred afterward becomes the narrative.

In this light, the suspension is not punishment. (chapter 52) It is a containment mechanism. It freezes exposure, recenters authority in bureaucratic procedure, and prevents uncontrolled questions from forming. CSPP’s role is not to deny visibility, but to delay and reroute it until meaning can be safely absorbed.

What emerges is not a conspiracy, but a pattern: intervention follows visibility, not injury. Authority responds to exposure, not to risk. CSPP is the mechanism that makes this inversion sustainable—until visibility escapes its frame.

What the system fails to recognize at this point is that the champion’s speech (chapter 87) and Baek Junmin’s reaction belong to the same event, even though they unfold in different spaces. (chapter 87) Joo Jaekyung speaks publicly, but sparingly. He does not explain. He does not accuse in detail. He names only enough to destabilize the frame: a “stunt,” “playing dirty,” a past match that no longer sits quietly in memory. His words are not designed to persuade; they are designed to unanswered. Joo Jaekyung doesn’t care about his rival’s opinion or innocence. The words remain unresolved. They enter broadcast time without closure.

CSPP and MFC attempt to absorb this rupture by doing what it always does: redirecting attention, normalizing tone, apologizing for profanity, and re-centering the narrative on rivalry and future spectacle. (chapter 87) From the perspective of the institution, the danger has been defused. The spotlight has been shifted back to Baek Junmin. The next fight is already being imagined.

But this is precisely where the miscalculation occurs. First, Baek Junmin hears something entirely different. What reaches him is not the insult, but the accusation. Not “motherfucker,” but “stunt.” (chapter 87) Not provocation, but exposure. This explains his reaction at the office. He destroys the television. And he does not prepare for a rematch, but for retaliation. But why is he so angry? He receives the words as theft. What reaches him is not the insult, but the suggestion that his victory—already fragile, already mediated—has been publicly reclassified. The words “stunt” and “playing dirty” do not accuse him in detail; they do something worse. They strip legitimacy. In his mind, he had finally achieved his goal: prove his superiority to Joo Jaekyung and live in the spotlight. (chapter 87) In a single sentence, the match is no longer remembered as a win, but as something tainted. He understands that the spotlight is no longer safe. Like mentioned before, he chooses to show his true self: a criminal. If the logic of broadcast begins to question tricks rather than celebrate rivalry, then CSPP becomes vulnerable. An underworld connection, once exposed, does not merely threaten a fighter; it threatens contracts, rights deals, and legitimacy.

This logic is not unprecedented. It echoes the historical trajectory of PRIDE Fighting Championships [which I had mentioned in a different essay Unsung Hero : Rescues in the Shadow], whose spectacular rise was inseparable from television exposure—and whose collapse followed once the connection between broadcast, organized crime, and event production could no longer be contained. In that case as well, violence was not the problem. What proved fatal was uncontrollable visibility. Once media circulation exposed what had previously been managed behind the scenes, legitimacy evaporated faster than contracts could protect it.

The parallel sharpens what is at stake in Jinx. MFC’s vulnerability does not lie in brutality, nor even in corruption, but in its dependence on televised containment. As long as speech, images, and outcomes remain governable, the system holds. Once television ceases to stabilize meaning—once it begins to expose rather than frame—power unravels from the inside.

Seen in this light, the danger is not that combat sports are violent, but that they are visible. And visibility, once it escapes its managers, has a history of collapsing institutions that believed spectacle would always protect them.

This is why CSPP and MFC become powerless in that moment. Thus the TV screen gets destroyed. CSPP and MFC can apologize for profanity, but it cannot erase the doubt now attached to Baek Junmin’s title, as the incident with the switched spray has been recognized by MFC and even treated by MFC medical. To conclude, the damage is semantic, not procedural.

The destruction of the television is therefore not rage at insult, but rage at loss of ownership over meaning. (chapter 87) Baek Junmin understands that what was taken from him is not a belt, but the story that made the belt matter. He has been repositioned—from winner to suspected cheater—without trial, without rebuttal, and without recourse.

From his perspective, the system has failed him. The apparatus that once guaranteed controlled visibility has allowed a sentence to circulate that cannot be neutralized. He has followed the rules of managed ascent, only to discover that a single, unscripted utterance can undo it.

This is the precise moment where institutional miscalculation becomes personal. And it is this perceived injustice—being robbed in full view—that makes Choi Gilseok’s permissive “by all means” possible. (chapter 87)

This is where CSPP’s position becomes the most precarious of all. If Baek Junmin’s ties to illegal fighting or organized crime surface publicly, CSPP is the first entity that cannot claim ignorance. It is the company that sold the event, packaged the narrative, and guaranteed its legitimacy. Unlike MFC, which can hide behind sport governance, or individual managers who can be scapegoated, CSPP’s value depends entirely on credibility. Once that credibility collapses, so do its partnerships.

Seen this way, Baek Junmin is not the mastermind of the schemes. He is their residual container. He absorbs the consequences of financial losses (chapter 46) that began elsewhere—losses already acknowledged when Choi Gilseok brought him into the system in the first place.

This is the deeper irony. The live broadcast was meant to neutralize confrontation by redirecting it. Instead, it amplifies instability. Words that were supposed to fuel hype begin to corrode trust. Visibility, once an asset, becomes a threat.

Conclusion: When Speech Breaks the Frame

The failure examined in this part does not lie in miscommunication, provocation, or loss of discipline. It lies in miscalculation. The system anticipates speech—but only as performance. It anticipates words that can be framed, apologized for, redirected, or folded back into rivalry and spectacle. What it does not anticipate are the consequences of speech once it escapes those circuits. The patients of Light of Hope and the inhabitants from the seaside town will definitely side with the athlete.

What happens, then, when speech is anticipated but not governable?

The fight provides the first answer. (chapter 87) Technique becomes language. Point accumulation, endurance, and delay reflect a world in which outcomes are meant to be evaluated rather than decided. Within this economy, decisiveness is a liability, and ambiguity is profitable. Joo Jaekyung’s refusal to prolong exchange—his choice to interrupt rather than circulate—marks the first rupture. The fight is no longer a prelude to speech; it becomes its proof. (chapter 87) The jinx that once rendered him powerless and speechless dissolves as he finds a language that cannot be scored.

The broadcast provides the second answer. (chapter 87) CSPP does not fail because it broadcasts the moment, but because it cannot contain what follows. Live transmission turns control into exposure. Apologies manage tone, not meaning. Scheduling governs attention, not interpretation. Once words enter circulation without mediation, images detach from their managers. Visibility ceases to stabilize power and begins to redistribute it.

The responses provide the final answer. Institutional calm persists. Procedures continue. But elsewhere, the effects are immediate and bodily. Baek Junmin experiences not insult, but dispossession. (chapter 87) His reaction reveals the asymmetry at the heart of the system: speech that appears harmless within spectacle can devastate outside it. A single unresolved sentence is enough to fracture legitimacy that took years to assemble. Neither MFC nor CSPP witness his outburst. Secondly, by grabbing the microphone, Joo Jaekyung is little by little taking control of the narrative, but more importantly he is choosing the timing! (chapter 87) So far, he only spoke in front of people during a conference or after a match. He could never choose the topic either. (chapter 30) This implies that he won’t remain passive and silent like in the past, relying on structure and institutions (Entertainment agency…) and accepting to become a scapegoat. (chapter 54)

Taken together, these moments show that power in Jinx does not collapse because truth is revealed. It destabilizes because meaning can no longer be timed, framed, or absorbed. (chapter 87) Once speech escapes governance, it does not clarify—it unsettles. It does not resolve conflict—it displaces it.

Part II has traced this shift step by step: from fight to broadcast, from mediation to rupture. What emerges is not the triumph of a voice, but the exposure of a system that depended on voices remaining manageable. Between a squeeze and a crack lies the instant when pressure stops circulating quietly and begins to alter the field itself. This is the moment when containment gives way to consequence—and when power, finally, has to reckon with what it can no longer control.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Between A Squeeze🫶 and A Crack 💢 -part 1

They Held Hands, But…

They held hands.
They held hands. (chapter 87)
They are so cute. 😍

This refrain summarizes much of the immediate reaction to the chapter. Attention clustered around the opening scene: the quiet morning moment in which the champion squeezes the doctor’s hand after asking for luck. (chapter 87) The intimacy of the gesture (chapter 87), its tenderness, and its symbolic weight were widely commented on—sometimes to the exclusion of almost everything else.

In the aftermath of the chapter, the author Mingwa herself remarked on this reception. On X, she noted—half amused, half ironic—that although Baek Junmin appeared (chapter 87) and an entire match took place, readers were largely talking about the introduction alone. 그나저나 이번화 나름 ㅂㅈㅁ도 나오고 경기도 했는데 다들 맨앞 도입부만 얘기하셔서 너무나 커엽군요,, (손잡았어 웅성웅성) Mimicking the collective reaction with a playful “They held hands!”, she described this selective focus as 커엽군요—not reproachful, but gently teasing.

This imbalance is understandable. The preceding chapters centered predominantly on the main leads (chapter 84) and the progression of their relationship, attuning readers to intimacy (chapter 85), care, and emotional release. When the chapter opens with a tactile, reassuring gesture, it naturally confirms that reading mode. The squeeze feels like a culmination.

Yet the chapter does not end there. By focusing almost exclusively on that moment, readers risk overlooking the significance of the final scene (chapter 87), where a very different gesture unfolds. (chapter 87) There, Baek Junmin rejects restraint, pushes away guidance, and verbalizes a resolve shaped not by trust or release, but by anger and revenge. (chapter 87) This closing moment is not incidental; it is placed in deliberate contrast to the opening.

The chapter is structured around these two gestures. One dissolves a belief rooted in ritual and control, the champion’s jinx. The other inaugurates a trajectory driven by wounded pride and escalation. Read together, they form a single movement—one that unfolds between a squeeze (chapter 87) and a crack (chapter 87).

Between a Squeeze and a Crack: Two Gestures, Two Logics

The chapter is structured around two gestures that appear simple, almost inconspicuous, yet articulate two radically different ways of relating to control, desire, and action.

One is a squeeze of the hand. (chapter 87) The other is the crushing of glass underfoot. (chapter 87) Between them unfolds a decisive split. The squeeze is not an act of domination. It is measured, contained, and reciprocal —an act of protection. The champion’s hand does not merely touch the physical therapist’s; it covers it. (chapter 87) The gesture encloses rather than exposes, shielding the other instead of pressing down on him. Force is present, but it is regulated and oriented toward care. The champion does not grasp to hold on longer than necessary; he squeezes, then stops. The gesture culminates in a line that matters far more than it seems at first glance: “That’ll do.” (chapter 87) This sentence marks a limit. It is not indifference, but acceptance. The champion has just registered the doctor’s surprise (chapter 87) — the slight jolt, the hesitation—and he responds by stopping. The restraint is not automatic; it is chosen. He does not ask for more reassurance, more certainty, or more support, even though he clearly desires it. Instead, he recognizes sufficiency.

What unfolds here is a careful negotiation between selfishness and selflessness. (chapter 87) The gesture still serves his need—he seeks strength, grounding, and reassurance—but it refuses to extract more than the other can freely give. (chapter 87) He allows himself to receive without insisting, to take comfort without turning it into a demand. Let’s not forget that after the tap, doc Dan had already started moving his hand away, though his fingers were brushing slightly his. (chapter 87) So the doctor’s support was indeed limited in time. So the stop of the champion ‘s squeeze (chapter 87) is therefore not a withdrawal, but an ethical adjustment: the moment at which desire acknowledges the other’s boundary and accepts it as final.

In that sense, the squeeze does not prove generosity; it proves restraint. It shows a willingness to carry what remains unmet rather than convert it into pressure. This is why the gesture concludes where it does. Not because the need disappears, but because it is no longer permitted to override respect.

In doing so, he abandons the logic that previously governed him—the belief that repetition, ritual, or escalation could secure an outcome. He would have sex, until his partners passed out. (chapter 33) Humbleness here (chapter 87) is not merely the expression of modesty, but the conscious recognition of limits: the willingness to accept uncertainty without compensating for it through excess, and the refusal to impose oneself on another. The gesture exposes a desire for respect toward Kim Dan; the champion knows his shyness and calibrates his touch accordingly, stopping before closeness turns into coercion. (chapter 87) The hand, as an instrument, reinforces this meaning. It reaches horizontally toward another human being. It creates proximity, connection, and grounding. (chapter 87) Nothing mediates the gesture. There is no object, no talisman, no substitute. Meaning is produced entirely through contact.

The final gesture operates according to the opposite logic. (chapter 87) The foot does not protect; it exposes. It descends vertically, asserting weight rather than relation. Where the hand encloses, the foot bares. The glass shatters under pressure, turning reflection into sharpness. What was once a surface becomes a source of wounds. It does not regulate force but releases it. Where the hand stops (chapter 87), the foot escalates. (chapter 87) The glass shatters, not to restore anything, but to discharge tension. This is not violence directed at a person, yet it is unmistakably expressive. It replaces connection with spectacle and containment with excess. Unlike the squeeze, the crack does not conclude itself. It invites continuation. The gesture is driven not by sufficiency, but by the refusal of “enough.” Here, greed is not merely material; it is existential. It manifests as the desire for the last word, total vindication, and unrestrained agency.

The contrast extends beyond movement into atmosphere. (chapter 87) The opening scene unfolds in a space that feels inhabited and shared, composed in softer shades that emphasize stillness and presence. The final scene is colder, darker, sharper. (chapter 87) Motion replaces quiet. An object enters the frame, absorbing force and redirecting it away from human contact. Where the first scene restores continuity—between bodies, between effort and outcome, between present and future (chapter 87) —the second collapses time inward. Baek Junmin does not act toward what is coming; he reacts toward what has already been. His violence is not exploratory but recursive. (chapter 87) It invokes the past as a template, attempting to reinstate an earlier hierarchy in which domination was secure and uncontested.

The gesture is therefore not simply destructive, but regressive. By striking, he tries to repeat a former position—acting like he wasn’t my gopher back in the day—as if the present could be coerced into mirroring that memory. This is why moderation is impossible. Repetition does not recognize limits; it demands reenactment. What breaks under this logic cannot be repaired because it was never oriented toward the future in the first place. It leaves only fragments—evidence of an attempt to overwrite change rather than accommodate it.

What ultimately sharpens the contrast between the two gestures is not only the difference between hand (chapter 87) and foot (chapter 87), but the difference between human presence and object substitution. In the opening scene, meaning emerges exclusively between two people. Nothing stands in for the other; nothing absorbs the gesture on their behalf. The squeeze requires mutual presence and ends precisely because it is shared. Its limit is ethical as much as physical. The final gesture unfolds in the absence of such reciprocity. Baek Junmin does not direct his force toward another human being, but toward an object. This displacement is not incidental. The object absorbs what no one else does. It becomes the recipient of rage, humiliation, and wounded pride. In doing so, it exposes a fundamental loneliness. Violence no longer seeks recognition from another person; it settles for impact.

The object in question matters. The Shotgun does not destroy a random item, but a television screen (chapter 87)—the very surface on which images circulate, words are fixed, and visibility is regulated. The screen does not reveal truth; it organizes perception. It is where victories are staged, reputations stabilized (chapter 46), and statements acquire permanence through broadcast. (chapter 87)

By turning on the screen, The Shotgun does not challenge the system itself (chapter 87); he reacts to what it has already done to him. What breaks is not the logic of spectacle, but his ability to endure exposure. The screen cracks, yet remains standing. This first rupture interrupts the image, but not its effect. The words spoken through it persist. They cannot be retracted, reframed, or silenced after the fact.

Thus he strikes again. (chapter 87) Using the ashtray, the “demon” shatters the screen into debris. At this point, the object has already lost its function. The broadcast is long over; the image is long gone. Yet the violence continues. He steps forward and crushes the remaining black shards underfoot (chapter 87), as if determined to annihilate even the remainder. The escalation exceeds necessity. It is no longer about disabling a device, but about confronting something that refuses to disappear.

This escalation becomes even more revealing when read against the opening sequence of the chapter. The three acts of destruction mirror, in distorted form, the three steps through which closeness was established earlier. In the morning scene, proximity unfolds gradually and remains contingent on consent: first the whisper (chapter 87), then the pause; then Kim Dan’s tentative tap (chapter 87); finally the squeeze (chapter 87), held only until it must stop. Each step waits for response. (chapter 87) Each movement depends on acknowledgment. The sequence concludes because it recognizes a limit.

At the office of director Choi Gilseok (chapter 87), the same tripartite structure is emptied of reciprocity. The first strike cracks the surface. The second shatters it into debris. The third crushes what remains. Where the opening scene pauses, this one accelerates. Where the whisper waits, the blow overrides. Where the squeeze ends itself, the violence repeats because it cannot conclude. The symmetry is formal, but the logic is inverted: one sequence builds relation through restraint; the other pursues erasure through excess. (chapter 87) In the latter, escalation is uninterrupted. At no point does Director Choi Gilseok intervene. He does not place a hand on Baek Junmin’s shoulder again, does not issue a command, does not impose a limit. (chapter 87) Whether he has already left the room or chooses deliberate avoidance is ultimately secondary. What matters is the absence itself.

That absence exposes a failure of containment. Authority is present in name, but not in function. Choi Gilseok cannot—or will not—stop his fighter. His invisibility transforms into passivity and complicity, not because he endorses the violence, but because he allows it to proceed unchecked. Power here no longer circulates through guidance or control; it dissolves into abdication. Yet this abdication is not uniform. It is selective.

Earlier in the narrative, Director Choi reacts strongly when his authority is verbally challenged. (chapter 49) When Joo Jaekyung addresses him with open disrespect, the breach of seniority provokes immediate outrage. (chapter 49) Intervention follows quickly. The insult is not tolerated (chapter 49) because it threatens hierarchy itself. Choi’s anger is genuine in that moment and it reveals what he truly guards: status, order, and the visibility of respect.

In contrast, Baek Junmin’s behavior provokes no such response. He brushes past instructions (chapter 87), slaps away physical restraint (chapter 87), and continues escalating without repercussion (chapter 87). The difference is telling. Where Choi once asserted authority to defend rank, he now withdraws it in the face of volatility. Baek’s aggression does not offend hierarchy in the same way; instead, it destabilizes it. And Choi does not confront destabilization. He avoids it.

A final irony sharpens this configuration of power. Neither Choi Gilseok nor Baek Junmin is aware of the protagonist’s true rank. (chapter 78) Both continue to perceive Joo Jaekyung as nothing more than a fighter (chapter 87) —talented, profitable, but ultimately subordinate. (chapter 87) This assumption governs how they speak to him, how they threaten him (chapter 49), and how they imagine their leverage over him.

Yet this perception is false. Joo Jaekyung is not merely an athlete within the system; he occupies the same structural level as those who presume to manage him. He is the owner of Team Black. His position aligns not with fighters, but with directors. The irony lies in the fact that the system itself enables this misrecognition. Authority is not distributed according to legal ownership, but according to visibility and habit.

This is already visible earlier, when the “hyung” attends directors’ meetings on the champion’s behalf. (chapter 46) His presence creates a convenient fiction: those around the table come to believe that he is the owner, or at least the one who truly governs the gym. Joo Jaekyung’s absence is interpreted not as autonomy, but as immaturity or dependence. Authority, once again, attaches itself to performance rather than reality.

The warning issued by the gym’s leadership makes this distortion explicit. (chapter 46) Even after boundaries are formally stated, Park Namwook continues to rely on seniority to address the champion (chapter 46) as if he were a child or an employee—someone to be corrected, instructed, and disciplined. The warning does not alter behavior because it does not challenge the underlying assumption: that Joo Jaekyung’s place is below them.

This misreading has consequences. Because Choi Gilseok and Baek Junmin both believe they are dealing with a fighter who must answer to managers, coaches, and institutions, they overestimate their capacity to contain him. They imagine leverage where there is none. They threaten exposure, punishment, and exclusion—tools that function only if the target depends on the system for legitimacy.

What they fail to see is that Joo Jaekyung no longer does. He doesn’t care about his image after challenging Baek Junmin. (chapter 87)

But let’s return our attention to the scene at the gym office. (chapter 87) This asymmetry exposes the limits of Choi Gilseok’s power. His authority functions only when obedience is already plausible. It depends on recognition rather than enforcement. When faced with a figure who neither seeks approval nor acknowledges restraint, Choi’s authority collapses into silence. The absence of intervention is not neutrality; it is an admission of impotence.

In that sense, Baek Junmin is not merely uncontrolled — he is uncontrollable within the existing structure. Choi’s refusal or inability to intervene reveals that the hierarchy he enforces is performative, not structural. It governs appearances and etiquette, not escalation or consequence. What remains once those appearances are ignored is not authority, but avoidance.

This is why Choi’s passivity matters narratively. By failing to stop Baek, he becomes an accomplice to excess without ever authorizing it. He does not direct violence, but he creates the conditions under which it can proceed. Power, here, does not flow downward or circulate relationally; it evaporates at the moment it is most needed.

In this sense, Baek Junmin is not merely acting out of rage. (chapter 87) He is acting in a vacuum created by institutional withdrawal. Thus the thug starts talking to himself loudly. This is not a dialogue, but a monologue. It was, as if he was trying to reassure himself about his power and connection. The director’s inability to regulate his “star” mirrors the waves in the last panel. An ocean can not be contained or restrained. In addition, his lack of restrain reflects the broader collapse of moderation within this economy. Where restraint once required oversight, its absence permits excess to define the relationship. What unfolds is not rebellion against authority, but the revelation that authority was already hollow.

This repetition is revealing. Each act answers the same stimulus, yet fails to neutralize it. The destruction does not bring release because the provocation was never material. The television has already fulfilled its role; the words spoken live cannot be undone. (chapter 87) What Baek attempts to destroy is not the object, but what it represents: the irreversibility of public speech, the collapse of secrecy, the loss of narrative control.

The black glass fragments make this failure visible. (chapter 87) They do not restore darkness; they scatter it across the floor. The act does not erase visibility but multiplies its traces into debris. This is not a cleansing destruction. It is an attempt at erasure that arrives too late, producing residue instead of resolution.

Seen in light of Baek Junmin’s habitual reliance on whispers (chapter 49), handshakes, and private humiliation (chapter 49), the gesture becomes clearer still. He is accustomed to violence without witnesses, to domination shielded by proximity and secrecy. He was always the man in the shadow. The live broadcast deprives him of that refuge. (chapter 87) For the first time, he is confronted with words that circulate beyond his control.

Both sequences (chapter 87) also unfold under the sign of privacy. (chapter 87) Nothing from either scene is leaked to the audience within the story. No cameras intrude on the morning room; no spectators witness the destruction that follows. In both cases, what happens remains offstage, contained within enclosed spaces.

Yet the function of privacy differs radically. In the opening scene, privacy protects vulnerability. It creates a space in which hesitation, consent, and restraint can exist without performance. The absence of witnesses allows closeness to remain unexploited and unrecorded. Privacy here is not concealment, but care. (chapter 87)

The destruction scene also takes place out of view, but for the opposite reason. Privacy no longer shelters vulnerability; it shields waste. Hence the thug used an ashtray to damage the TV screen. The object exposes the truth about this gym: it is just a cover for thugs. Additionally, the ashtray allows violence to escalate without immediate consequence, to repeat without interruption. What is hidden is not intimacy, but loss of control. The same absence of witnesses that preserves dignity in one scene enables denial in the other. This parallel sharpens the contrast further. Privacy is not neutral. It amplifies what already governs the gesture. Where restraint is present, privacy sustains it. Where limits have collapsed, privacy becomes an accomplice.

What surfaces here (chapter 87) is not pure aggression, but fear. Rage functions as its mask. The insistence, the repetition, the overkill all point to an inability to tolerate being seen, named, and fixed in public space. Crushing the screen is not an assertion of power, but a response to exposure—a desperate attempt to silence what can no longer be taken back. (chapter 87) He is announcing a shift of identity.

Up to this point, Baek Junmin still oscillated between two positions: the shadow fighter (chapter 74) seeking legitimacy, and the underground enforcer shaped by violence, order and debts (chapter 47). The broken screen already signaled that he no longer cares about how he is seen. (chapter 87) This line confirms what replaces that concern. He is ready to be seen as he is, without mediation, without justification. Leaving the shadow does not mean entering the light. It means abandoning concealment.

What he exposes are not hidden virtues, but true colors. The phrase is not a threat designed to intimidate an opponent into caution; it is a declaration of readiness to abandon restraint. He no longer intends to pass as a disciplined athlete governed by rules, training, or institutional limits. He is prepared to act as a bully and criminal —someone for whom violence is not a means within a system, but an identity in itself.

This is why the line follows the destruction of the screen so closely. (chapter 87) Once image no longer matters, there is nothing left to protect. Reputation, legitimacy, and future standing cease to function as brakes. What remains is the body and its capacity to harm. The statement therefore does not project confidence about the outcome of a match; it projects indifference toward consequences. In that sense, Baek Junmin is not stepping out of the shadows to claim recognition. He is stepping out to remove the mask. The system demanded that he appear controlled, profitable, and presentable. (chapter 47) By rejecting visibility and embracing excess, he also rejects the last requirement that tied him to that system.

What he is ready to expose is not truth, but himself.

Just as importantly, the damaged object does not belong to him. (chapter 87) Baek Junmin does not need to clean the mess, replace the screen, or account for the damage. He can afford indifference because responsibility is externalized. This is where materialism enters the gesture. (chapter 87) In his logic, what is destroyed can be replaced—by money, by compensation, by someone else’s labor. The gesture therefore carries no sense of loss. It is pure discharge. Where the hand-holding scene ends in sufficiency (chapter 87), this act ends in non-attachment. That non-attachment is not freedom; it is dispossession. Because nothing belongs to him, nothing binds him. The violence does not commit him to consequence. He does not have to stay, repair, or answer. (chapter 87) The object takes the blow and disappears from relevance, just as people do in his worldview once they cease to be useful or respectful. This is why the destruction feels so pronounced. It is not driven by concern for outcome. Baek Junmin does not care whether the screen works afterward, just as he does not yet care how events unfold. What matters is the act itself—the assertion that he can still act, still impact, still dominate a space that otherwise refuses him recognition. Under this new light, it becomes palpable that Baek Junmin’s resent and rage represent a liability to Choi Gilseok and his backers, the pharmaceutical company. (chapter 48) And their collaboration is founded on money laundering!! The shooting star is in reality (chapter 47) a meteor bringing calamity, once it lands on the Earth. Baek Junmin is about to face “reality” very soon.

Placed next to the opening scene, this contrast becomes stark. (chapter 87) There is no money, no power… between them. One gesture creates meaning because it acknowledges another human and accepts limitation. The other destroys an object precisely because no human is there to receive the force. One restores continuity; the other exposes isolation. Between them, the chapter reveals not only two trajectories, but two economies of value: one grounded in presence, the other in replacement.

Two pairs, two economies of power

What ultimately distinguishes the two dynamics is not intimacy versus violence, but how power is situated and what it depends on. In one case, power emerges through limitation; in the other, it is sought through displacement. The difference is not emotional, but structural. In the morning scene, power does not circulate vertically, but it also does not dissolve into symmetry. What changes is not the existence of power, but its source.

When the champion leans in and whispers, (chapter 87), he is not performing vulnerability for reassurance, nor delegating responsibility. He is explicitly naming Kim Dan as his source of energy. This matters. In earlier chapters, strength was something to be extracted through action—through sex, repetition, or coercive certainty (Chapter 2). Here, strength is no longer something he takes. It is something he receives. (chapter 87)

This is not a weakening admission. It is a reorientation. The champion does not ask Kim Dan to guarantee victory, to protect him from loss, or to secure the outcome. He asks for presence. What sustains him is no longer a ritualized act performed on another body, but the continued existence of a relationship in which he is accepted despite his flaws. (chapter 87) Kim Dan sleeping openly, showing his face, remaining there without fear—this is read by the champion as tacit trust. That trust becomes energy. In other words, this scene serves as the positive reflection of the argument in the locker room: (chapter 51)

The jinx (chapter 87) collapses precisely here. The old belief system operated on compensation: anxiety required action; uncertainty demanded escalation. Sex functioned as a mechanism to overwrite doubt. In this scene, no such mechanism is activated. The chapter makes this shift legible through space. When the champion rises from the bed, his movement is shown in full: he steps away from Kim Dan and crosses the room. (chapter 87) Yet he does not open the brown door. There is no pause at the threshold, no transition panel suggesting entry into another enclosed space. Instead, the next frame places him directly in the living area of the suite. The cut is continuous, not elliptical.

This matters because the brown door cannot be the suite’s entrance. (chapter 87) We have already seen the entrance elsewhere, and its placement does not align with this angle or proximity to the bed. Within the logic of a hotel suite, the remaining option is functional rather than transitional: the bathroom. In earlier chapters, that space was explicitly associated with ritual (chapter 75) —showering, cologne, self-regulation before a match. Here, that sequence is conspicuously absent.

The absence is not neutral. Mingwa does not show him choosing another ritual; she shows him skipping one. (chapter 87) No water, no mirror, no scent. The champion moves forward without cleansing, without recalibration, without the preparatory gestures that once framed his readiness. The bathroom—previously a site of purification and self-conditioning—remains closed, unused, and irrelevant.

What replaces it is not another ritual, but continuity. He enters the shared living space already grounded. The confidence he carries does not come from resetting himself, but from what has already occurred. Kim Dan’s presence, his sleep, the unguarded exposure of his face—all of this has already done the work that ritual once performed. There is nothing left to correct, neutralize, or overwrite. To conclude, this omission is not accidental. By abandoning the shower-and-cologne ritual, the champion abandons the idea that he must transform himself to be worthy of victory or public acceptance. He no longer needs to sanitize desire, image, or fear. What sustains him has already been secured before the match begins: recognition without conditions.

Power, then, is not extracted from superstition, domination, or bodily expenditure. It is grounded in continuity. Kim Dan’s presence does not ensure success, but it makes uncertainty bearable. That is the decisive shift. The champion no longer acts to silence fear; he acts while carrying it. And because he no longer believes that ritual determines outcome, he can later speak freely on live television. He is now confident, as he feels supported by doc Dan. (chapter 87) The profanity is not recklessness—it is evidence that image management has lost its hold. The champion does not stop caring about how he is seen; he narrows the field of recognition. Public perception no longer governs him (chapter 87) because it no longer defines his worth. What matters now is not the crowd, the broadcast, or the institution—but the single person whose presence already secured his sense of legitimacy before the match began. Thus after the match, he asked for the physical therapist’s approval and recognition: (chapter 87)

In short, the whisper does not mark dependence, but emancipation. (chapter 87) By replacing “I must do something” with “you are here,” the champion exits the economy of compulsion and enters an economy of trust. Victory will still matter—but it no longer needs to be purchased in advance.

The dynamic surrounding Baek Junmin operates differently. His position has always depended on external validation—rankings, victories (chapter 69), recognition, and above all visibility. Yet this visibility is curiously incomplete. Despite his victory, Baek Junmin is not immediately present as a public figure. He appears as a result (chapter 52) —his name, his win—but not yet as a narrative subject.

Only later, in episode 77 (chapter 77) does the story formally reveal his identity as champion. Until that moment, he remains strangely undefined, as if held back from full exposure. This delay is not incidental. It reflects a controlled form of recognition: Baek Junmin is allowed to win, but not yet to be seen. It already exposes that his success or victory is not clean. (chapter 87)

In this sense, the former underground fighter has not disappeared, but been contained. His past is not erased; it is suspended. (chapter 47) Visibility is granted selectively, not as self-expression, but as an institutional function. He exists within the system, but not yet fully in the public gaze. Even when violence or illegality intervenes, it does so in service of legitimacy. Until now, Baek Junmin has relied on the legal system (chapter 69) to carry him forward: sanctioned fights, official narratives, public status. Crimes may occur along the way, but they remain hidden, delegated, or absorbed by others. Power, for him, is something that must appear legitimate, even when it is not.

The destruction of the screen marks the point where this arrangement begins to fracture. (chapter 87) The legal economy no longer guarantees dominance. Public speech escapes control. (chapter 87) Visibility becomes a threat rather than a resource. In response, Baek does not retreat; he escalates. What we witness is not yet a full turn toward the underground, but the precondition for it: the realization that legality no longer secures power. (chapter 87) In this moment, Baek Junmin is no longer speaking as an athlete anticipating a rematch, nor as a rival operating within institutional rules. The phrasing “He has no idea who he’s messing with” does not refer to skill, ranking, or preparation. It signals a different register of power altogether—one that lies outside competition and beyond merit.

The threat is deliberately vague. He does not name a tactic, a plan, or a legitimate advantage. Instead, he invokes reach. The implication is relational rather than athletic: access, leverage, intermediaries. Power here is imagined as something that can be mobilized indirectly, through others, rather than exercised personally. This is where the “angel of death” reading becomes relevant—not as a literal figure, but as a symbolic posture. Baek frames himself as someone whose influence does not require visibility or accountability. Risk is no longer borne by the speaker. It is transferred, outsourced, or enforced through an unnamed elsewhere. Violence becomes atmospheric rather than explicit.

This is where the contrast between the two pairs sharpens. One trajectory exits the economy of compensation—the belief that force, ritual, or excess can neutralize uncertainty. The other moves toward a system where uncertainty is resolved through coercion rather than consent. One abandons the jinx by accepting risk. The other approaches a space where risk is relegated, outsourced, or enforced.

What separates them, then, is not morality, but dependency. The champion no longer depends on systems that promise control. Baek Junmin still does—and when that promise fails, the search for power does not stop. It changes terrain. Up to this point, Baek Junmin’s power has been structurally protected rather than personally secured. His victories, rankings, and public status were carried forward by the legal economy of the sport, even as acts of sabotage or coercion occurred in its margins. Crucially, this system did not require his full awareness to function. Violence was absorbed, displaced, or misattributed by intermediaries, allowing legitimacy to remain intact on the surface. Baek benefited from this arrangement without having to own it. Authority appeared lawful, outcomes appeared earned, and responsibility flowed elsewhere.

That arrangement begins to collapse here. Once public speech escapes control and visibility can no longer be managed retroactively, legality stops functioning as insulation. What follows is not yet a plunge into the underground, but the moment where reliance on institutional protection becomes untenable—and the search for power must change terrain. (chapter 87) Strangely, the director of King of MMA has just assured him his full support (chapter 87), but this was not enough for the “demon”. What the “new champion” failed to realize is that gaining the champion belt didn’t mean the end of his achievement. The reality was and is that he would be challenged constantly. Even when crimes are committed around him (chapter 50), they remain structurally hidden, absorbed by intermediaries, or misattributed. (chapter 69) Violence is laundered through legitimacy. The system continues to present him as a contender, even as it quietly tolerates sabotage and manipulation. Importantly, Baek Junmin does not need to know every detail for this economy to function; it protects him by design.

The scene in chapter 87 marks the moment where this economy begins to fail him. Public speech, live broadcast, and irreversible visibility introduce a variable that cannot be managed retroactively. Unlike clandestine acts or whispered humiliations, what is said on air cannot be displaced, denied, or quietly corrected. The legal system does not offer erasure; it offers record.

This is where the alternative economy becomes legible. Underground fighting (chapter 47), illegal gambling, and criminal enforcement operate on a different logic: outcomes are secured not through recognition, but through coercion and tricks; not through visibility, but through fear and secrecy; not through procedure, but through immediacy. There, a defeat is more like a death sentence. (chapter 47) Where the legal economy requires patience and exposure, the illicit one promises certainty and silence.

By contrast, the champion’s gesture in the opening scene binds him more firmly to the legal economy precisely because it accepts uncertainty. Redistributed power cannot be weaponized quickly. It resists conversion into domination. That resistance is what dissolves the jinx—and what makes the two trajectories incompatible.

This is how mediation works in that relationship. Kim Dan’s presence does not absorb excess; it sets a limit that is respected. Joo Jaekyung does not outsource control. He exercises it on himself.

The dynamic between Choi Gilseok and Baek Junmin operates according to a different economy. Formally, theirs is a boss–employee relationship. (chapter 52) In practice, hierarchy barely functions. Authority exists without discipline, protection without accountability. Baek Junmin is not positioned among other fighters, nor anchored in a collective. Thus he is not truly celebrated at the restaurant after the tie. Thus the fighters mentioned the director Choi Gilseok’s financial success or the odd behavior of Joo JAekyung. (chapter 52) Besides, he watches the match alone (chapter 87), from the director’s office—at the center of power, yet fundamentally isolated. This spatial detail matters. It signals both exclusion and entitlement. He does not belong, but he feels authorized to occupy the space.

When Choi Gilseok touches Baek Junmin’s shoulder, the gesture is corrective. (chapter 87) It is meant to halt escalation, to reassert moderation, to momentarily reintroduce limits. Baek’s response is immediate: he slaps the hand away. (chapter 87) This rejection is not rebellion in the classical sense. He is not trying to overthrow authority; he is refusing mediation. In his mind, limits no longer apply to him. He has been granted license without ownership. It was, as if the championship belt had freed the fighter from social norms and laws. Shortly after, “By all means” (chapter 87) removes the brakes while leaving responsibility elsewhere. It sounds like a free pass for the “criminal” in the end.

The final scene also marks the quiet dissolution of the association between Choi Gilseok and Baek Junmin. Although the director speaks in the plural—“we will use all means necessary”—the scene itself contradicts that claim. Spatially, Choi remains behind Baek, positioned as if backing him, yet excluded from his line of sight. The demon does not turn toward him, does not respond to him, and does not share affect or intent. The “we” exists only rhetorically. In practice, the scene contains only two figures: Baek Junmin and his imagined adversary. The director is already irrelevant.

This staging contrasts sharply with the earlier locker-room confrontation between Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan, (chapter 51) where proximity forced acknowledgment and power was renegotiated face-to-face. (chapter 51) In the office, no such negotiation occurs. (chapter 87) Baek Junmin’s refusal is not confrontational; it is dismissive. (chapter 87) He does not reject authority—he bypasses it. The champion belt appears to function, in his mind, as a form of exemption: a signal that dependence, seniority, and mediation no longer apply. Whether this belief is justified remains open. What matters is that Baek Junmin acts as if it were. In doing so, he exits not only a partnership, but the structure that once contained him.

Placed side by side, the two pairs reveal two economies of power. In one, influence circulates through presence, restraint, and mutual risk. In the other, power is maintained through delegation, insulation, and the removal of limits. One dynamic produces responsibility by accepting vulnerability. The other produces entitlement by severing accountability.

This is why the outcomes diverge so sharply. Where one relationship closes a cycle of superstition and control, the other opens a trajectory of escalation and downfall. Not because one side loves and the other hates, but because one accepts limits—and the other has been told there are none.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Secrets Behind The Floors 🔑🔍

Since a new chapter is released today, this analysis can not be long. I started composing just before the release of episode 86. Yet I was not able to finish it on time, hence I postponed it, as I knew that my avid readers would be more interested in the interactions between doc Dan and Joo Jaekyung in the bedroom. 🌶️😂

Introduction — Why Floors Matter When Everyone Looks at the Couple

Most readers of Jinx focus on the obvious: the central couple, their attraction, their conflicts, their intimacy (chapter 85). Against this emotional core, elements such as carpets, hallways, floors, and room layouts may seem secondary, even irrelevant. (chapter 85) Why care about the color of a carpet or the direction a door opens (chapter 85), when the real story unfolds between Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan?

Yet it is precisely through these overlooked details that the narrative reveals something essential. (chapter 82) Floors and patterns are not neutral decoration. They function as a parallel narrative system—one that tracks changes in status (chapter 85), exposes the actual situations in which the characters are placed (chapter 85), and helps us locate spaces and relationships within the hotel architecture itself. In other words, the floors do not merely frame the story; they add a spatial depth that sharpens our understanding of the “characters.” (chapter 82)

My attention was first drawn to this system through a seemingly trivial observation: the carpet in the restaurant where the team dines at the restaurant of the hotel. (chapter 85) Its ornate red-and-gold pattern had already reappeared in the press conference venue, though here, it was covered by a black staircase leading to the stage. (chapter 82) (chapter 82) One might think, the only information we get is that MFC had booked a conference room at the hotel where Team Black is staying. However, in the States, the carpet of the hallway at the hotel had a similar pattern. (chapter 37) This similarity and repetition caught my attention. It suggests continuity between public spectacle and private space, between what is shown and what is concealed. Following this thread led to a broader realization: the floors simultaneously signal elevation and confinement. They show who appears powerful—and who is, in fact, enclosed.

From that moment on, it became impossible to ignore what the architecture was doing. The story of Jinx is not only written on bodies and faces, but also under the characters’ feet. (chapter 37)

The Carpet as a Double Register: Status and Situation

The first function of the recurring floor patterns is to mark status. The restaurant and conference carpets belong to spaces of visibility and performance. They are the domains of reputation, hierarchy, and spectacle. Fighters shine, journalists observe, managers negotiate. The gold tones evoke prestige, success, and imperial grandeur—fitting for a man nicknamed The Emperor. (chapter 82)

But this is only half of the story.

The same patterns also describe the actual situation of the characters. (chapter 85) The intersecting lines resemble a net or wire fence. Because of their golden color, the danger is masked by luxury. What looks like elevation can also be read as enclosure. The higher the status appears, the more invisible the constraints become. And now, you comprehend why at the conference, the red-golden carpet was covered with a black stage. (chapter 82) It was to mask the true fate of fighters in general, they are trapped in a system where they are exploited. They can only exit such a system, where their career reach their end.

This dual function—status marker and situational indicator—becomes clearer, when we compare the French hotel to the American one. In the United States, a similar pattern appears in the hallway near the rooms, but there the lines are not fully closed, are less rigid and oppressive. (chapter 37) It is in that hallway that Kim Dan collapses after drinking a drugged beverage. He literally falls onto the carpet, on his knees. The trap activates—but not on its intended target.

This detail is crucial. The beverage was delivered by someone connected to Choi Gilseok and Heo Manwook (chapter 46), not by MFC directly. The scheme exists, but it is imperfect. Joo Jaekyung is not truly “caught” in that moment, which explains why the plan ultimately fails.

When the same visual language reappears in France, now under the umbrella of MFC itself, the implication changes. The trap is no longer improvised. It is institutional. (chapter 85) Don’t forget that this match had been presented as an invitation from the CEO. (chapter 69) As you can see, the pattern of the carpet could be seen as an evidence for a trap, and the “Emperor” is their target once again. Their plan is to end his career so that all the incidents and crimes from the past can be buried.

Another detail reinforces how central the floor patterns are to the scene: there are two distinct carpet designs present linked to the conference. Alongside the geometric, fence-like pattern associated with luxury and institutional order, a second pattern appears in the hallway (chapter 82) —one that unmistakably recalls an animal skin, resembling a leopard or panther coat. This is not an abstract association, but a visual continuity within the story itself.

It is precisely on the geometric carpet that Arnaud Gabriel approaches Kim Dan (chapter 82). The opponent stands on the surface that embodies order, hierarchy, and control, and behaves accordingly. He flirts, comments on the doctor’s eyes, and treats the moment as harmless. Then he turns his back. (chapter 82) He never steps onto, nor does he seem to register, the animal-patterned carpet nearby, as doc Dan was standing on a white-off carpet. In other words, Arnaud Gabriel interacts only with the space that reflects the institution’s worldview.

The champion’s reaction exposes what that worldview ignores. Once the official from MFC translates the remark, Joo Jaekyung’s response is immediate, physical and almost uncontrollable. (chapter 82) This is not the response of a neutralized Emperor, but the instinctive surge of a predator whose territory has been violated. The scene echoes an earlier, more intimate image from the bathroom in chapter 30, (chapter 30), where Joo Jaekyung appeared wearing leopard-patterned pajamas. The animal imagery was already present then, but dormant. Here, it reawakens.

This is where MFC’s miscalculation becomes visible. They mistake enclosure for domestication, hence we have the golden cage: (chapter 85) They believe that status, luxury, and isolation are enough to tame the Emperor. Yet the leopard has never been erased—only restrained. The golden cage does not eliminate his dangerousness; it merely hides it from those who assume obedience has replaced instinct. By turning his back, the opponent symbolically aligns himself with the institution’s blindness. He believes the champion is contained and probably diminished. He is wrong. (chapter 82)

Thus, the carpet reveals more than a trap. It exposes a false sense of control. While the fence appears tight and escape seems impossible, the presence of Kim Dan at the table changes the equation entirely. (chapter 85) The champion is not alone inside the cage. He is supported, grounded, and no longer isolated. What MFC fails to see is that this support does not weaken the predator—it stabilizes him. And a stabilized predator is far more dangerous than a cornered one. For years, Joo Jaekyung’s violence was reactive, triggered by threat, humiliation, or loss of control. Such a fighter is powerful, but predictable. He can be provoked, exhausted, and manipulated.

Kim Dan changes this equilibrium. By anchoring the champion emotionally and physically, he removes the constant background noise of fear, resentment, and isolation. Joo Jaekyung no longer needs to fight the environment itself. His aggression is no longer dispersed; it is focused. This is precisely what MFC miscalculates. They believe possession equals control. They assume that calming the fighter makes him easier to manage. In reality, it makes him harder to deceive. Kim Dan’s role is decisive here. He has become the true owner of the “beast”, but MFc has not detected this change. Moreover, his closeness and experience with other fighters allows him to gain knowledge. (chapter 47) Through him, Joo Jaekyung gains access to a form of knowledge the institution does not control. The beast is no longer driven blindly forward; it is guided.

In this sense, ownership shifts. Not legally, not contractually, but functionally. MFC may hold the paperwork, but Kim Dan holds the leash — not to restrain the predator, but to direct its attention where it truly matters. That is why this support is threatening. Not because it domesticates Joo Jaekyung, but because it makes him lucid.

This exposes how significant the pattern in Jinx are. While the geometric design signals status, enclosure, and the institutional trap, the animal pattern points to instinct, territoriality, and latent violence. Together, they show the limits of MFC’s control. The champion may be placed inside a golden cage, but his nature has not been erased. It has merely been ignored by those who believe that prestige and containment are enough.

Floors as Spatial Evidence: Mapping the Hotel

The patterns do more than symbolize. They also locate.

By following changes in carpets, tiles (chapter 85), wall colors, corridor width, and interior layout, it becomes possible to reconstruct the hotel’s internal geography with considerable accuracy. (chapter 84) These visual cues distinguish floors, mark thresholds between zones, and separate different kinds of isolation. The hotel ceases to function as an abstract backdrop and instead reveals itself as a structured environment in which hierarchy is materially inscribed.

This becomes particularly clear when examining Kim Dan’s room. His corridor shares certain elements with Park Namwook’s room, for example, his door is opening outwards (chapter 85) (chapter 82) and he has no cupboard in the corridor of his room. However, if you look carefully, you will notice that doc Dan’s room has three different types of floor: in the corridor, (chapter 85) (chapter 84) (chapter 85) The corridor seems to have white linoleum covered a dark brown carpet, similar to the one in his bedroom. However, observe that the manager’s entrance has the same tiles than in the hallway. (chapter 82) Finally, the wooden or gray walls and the rich brown carpet (chapter 85) reminds us of the champion’s living room in the hotel. (chapter 82) This clearly exposes that doc Dan’s room is not a normal room. It exceeds that basic category. It is larger, brighter, and arranged for comfort. The interior layout is particularly revealing: the bathroom is located close to the bedroom (chapter 85), while the entrance to the room is set at a noticeable distance from both the bed and the couch. (chapter 85) This spatial separation creates a protected inner zone, shielding the sleeping and living areas from the corridor. Combined with the presence of a couch, a large window (chapter 84), and abundant light, the room reads as a space designed for rest and continuity rather than mere overnight use. While it is not a suite, it is unmistakably superior to the manager’s accommodation.

Park Namwook’s room, by contrast, is located at the end of a corridor , a position that at first glance might suggest privilege but here functions very differently. The hallway leading to it is narrower and visually compressed, framed by dark tiles both at the bottom and the top of the walls. The color palette is heavier, and the space feels closed in rather than elevated. The end-of-corridor placement does not open onto a decorated or transitional space; instead, it reinforces isolation and marginality. The fact that he was carrying toilet paper in his hand indicates that his bathroom is right next to the entrance of the room. Everything is pointing out that his room is much smaller and less comfortable, as the floor is the same than in the corridor. This means that he can hear noises coming from the hallway. There is no architectural generosity, no suggestion of comfort or expansion. Even before any narrative confrontation occurs, the architecture signals decline. The manager’s authority is no longer supported by space; it is spatially undermined.

Then there is the champion’s suite. Room 1704 occupies a categorically different position within the building. Situated on the top floor, it combines vertical elevation with spatial separation. Since the door is opening inwards, it indicates that the space in the corridor is larger than the physical therapist and the manager’s. Secondly, observe that the floor in front of his suite is different, a combination of marmor and white tiles. There’s a pattern. (chapter 85) (chapter 85) And now look at the bottom on the right, you can recognize the same floor in the corridor. Joo Jaekyung has a cupboard in his corridor. The corridor leading to it changes again in both flooring and framing, and the area outside the door is treated almost like a private antechamber, as there is an opened area with decorative elements rather than bare walls. (chapter 85) Inside, the suite unfolds across multiple rooms, (chapter 85) clearly separating living space from bedroom (chapter 82), and extending outward through more than one balcony. (chapter 82)

The suite’s scale and elevation construct Joo Jaekyung as both privileged and isolated. He is placed above the rest of the team not only symbolically, but physically. Crucially, the floors and layouts allow us to perceive this isolation long before the characters articulate it themselves. The architecture expresses hierarchy, separation, and solitude in advance of dialogue, making the champion’s position within the system visible before it is ever named.

Through these observations, I could determine the rising of doc Dan and downfall of the manager. Because of doc Dan, Park Namwook has been relegated to the average staff, he is no longer a close advisor of Joo Jaekyung. His room is situated far away from the emperor, which also explains why the former would often ask for the physical therapist’s advice. (chapter 82) And the moment I had this realization, architecture, once again, speaks first, my attention returned to the hotel in the States. (chapter 37)

Two Hotels, One Logic: The Abuse of the Suite

The comparison between the French and American hotels reveals a repeating structural injustice. To understand it, one must first recall where the champion’s room was located in the United States. In chapter 37, Joo Jaekyung is shown sleeping in the same hallway as Kim Dan and the other fighters. (chapter 37) This detail is crucial. It explains why he can hear their laughter and smell the food they are eating. (chapter 37) Architecturally, he was not isolated. Despite his status, he remained embedded within the collective space of the team.

At first glance, one might therefore conclude that no suite had been booked for him. That assumption would be wrong. In the United States, a suite had indeed been reserved for the champion. (chapter 37) Besides, Episode 40 confirms that Joo Jaekyung did occupy an imperial suite: the interior layout includes a door separating the bedroom from another room (chapter 40), a feature characteristic of a suite rather than a standard hotel room. The issue, therefore, is not the absence of a suite, but how that suite was positioned and managed.

In the American hotel, the imperial suite was located on the same floor and corridor as the fighters and staff. This spatial choice stripped the suite of its primary function: protection through distance. Anyone circulating in the hallway could approach the champion’s door without obstruction. Access was not controlled by elevation or separation, but normalized through proximity. This is why the suite’s title proves misleading. It signaled privilege, but did not enforce insulation. I would even say, the name of the room was a subterfuge. In truth, he is not really treated like an Emperor, rather as a special fighter..

This lack of isolation becomes particularly problematic when considering the later incident involving a drugged beverage. (chapter 37) Because the suite was embedded within a shared corridor, an intruder could approach the champion’s room without attracting attention. (chapter 37) The danger did not require exceptional access. It was enabled by the layout itself.

The situation is further aggravated by what the suite already contained. Alcohol was present in a room officially (chapter 37) intended for weight-cutting and post–weight-cut recovery. This detail exposes a managerial failure rather than a hotel failure. The environment was not curated around the champion’s physical needs. Discipline was demanded of his body, but not enforced in his space. Meanwhile, fighters and coaches purchased junk food behind the champion’s and Kim Dan’s back, reinforcing the gap between stated goals and actual practice.

When the incident was discovered, responsibility became easy to deflect precisely because the environment had been left porous. Blame could be shifted onto individuals, while the structural decision that enabled access remained unaddressed. (chapter 37) The hotel itself cannot be held fully responsible; the problem lies primarily with MFC’s room allocation and the manager’s acceptance of that configuration. Yet the American hotel reveals an additional layer of vulnerability that complicates the picture.

The rooms in the United States appear to lack basic security features. (chapter 37) There is no visible keycard system, and no clear indication of an interior lock. (chapter 37) This absence is striking, especially when contrasted with the Paris hotel (chapter 85), where doors are equipped with keycards and locks on both sides (chapter 82). While this could be attributed to an artistic omission, the consistency of the Paris depiction suggests otherwise. The difference feels deliberate.

This lack of security would explain several narrative details. It clarifies how Joo Jaekyung could barge into the room shared by Kim Dan, Potato, and Oh Daehyun without resistance. (chapter 37) Access was not negotiated; it was simply taken. The architecture allowed it. The space did not protect its occupants.

It also invites a reevaluation of the hotel’s status. Despite hosting a star athlete, the American hotel does not appear to be particularly upscale. Its corridors are shared, its rooms unsecured, and its boundaries easily crossed. This also casts new light on an earlier detail that initially seemed contradictory. Joo Jaekyung is described as occupying an imperial suite (chapter 37), and yet he can hear the fighters laughing, drinking, even smell what they are eating late into the night. (chapter 37) At first glance, this appears implausible. A suite, by definition, should insulate its occupant from such disturbances. His bedroom is not situated next to the corridor. (chapter 37) But once we recognize that the American hotel is not an upscale establishment, the contradiction dissolves. Thin walls, poorly insulated doors, and shared corridors would allow sound to travel easily. The problem is no longer proximity alone, but material insufficiency. The suite’s title promises prestige, but the building itself cannot sustain it.

This detail matters. The champion is not merely irritated by noise; he is physically prevented from resting, from isolating himself, from preparing properly. His authority is symbolically affirmed, yet materially undermined. He is expected to perform discipline in a space that does not protect him from others’ excess. (chapter 37) This stands in sharp contrast to the Paris hotel, whose layered security and spatial hierarchy signal both wealth and control. (chapter 85) Back then, Kim Dan was treated materially like the fighters, regardless of the manager’s verbal insistence that he was a senior figure. (chapter 7) Status was asserted rhetorically, but not enforced spatially, exactly with Joo Jaekyung.

Not only does the hotel in the States fail to protect the Emperor’s rest — it fails to support his training. Another telling omission confirms that the American hotel was never designed to host an elite athlete. There is no dedicated training space. No gym. No room adapted to a champion preparing for a return match. This absence explains several scenes that might otherwise appear excessive or out of character.

In the United States, Joo Jaekyung is forced to train outside the hotel (chapter 37), negotiating access with local coaches and nearly getting into a physical altercation before being allowed to use their facilities (chapter 37). Only after asserting himself does he gain permission to train. Even then, the gym he ultimately uses is unremarkable — functional, crowded, and indistinguishable from what any average fighter might access. There is nothing exceptional about it.

Paris exposes the contrast. There, Joo Jaekyung can train directly at the hotel. (chapter 82) The infrastructure finally aligns with the demands placed on his body. This shift is not a luxury; it is a correction. It reveals retroactively how deficient the American setup was — and how little institutional care surrounded the champion at the time.

This context reframes the mockery from Arnaud Gabriel in Paris. (chapter 82) The remark does not stem from arrogance alone; it is grounded in observation. The training space available to Joo Jaekyung at the hotel is not designed for an elite athlete, even less for MMA fighters. (chapter 82) It is a generic fitness room intended for ordinary guests. There are no heavy bags, no proper equipment, no environment suited to the demands of a reigning champion. (chapter 37) This is precisely why his training must be adapted, restrained, and partially improvised.

In this sense, Paris does not represent a full correction of the American situation. The champion receives a better room, greater isolation, and visible markers of prestige, but not an infrastructure tailored to his profession. He is accommodated as a celebrity, not prepared as an athlete. The hotel offers comfort, discretion, and image management — not performance support.

This distinction is crucial. In the United States, Joo Jaekyung was treated as neither: neither celebrity nor protected asset, merely another fighter exposed to noise, intrusion, and neglect. In Paris, he is finally elevated — but only halfway. The space now safeguards his image, not his craft. (chapter 82) The mockery from Arnaud Gabriel therefore strikes a nerve, because it exposes the gap between how the champion is presented and how he is actually supported.

What changes, then, is not the logic of neglect, but its form. In America, the failure was crude and structural. In France, it is refined and symbolic. The champion is displayed, isolated, and celebrated — yet still required to adapt himself to spaces that were never designed for someone like him. In other words, he is treated like a celebrity, but not as an athlete!!

This shift becomes visible in the body itself, through the exercises Joo Jaekyung performs. In the United States, his training relies heavily on brute force (chapter 37): heavy weights, aggressive repetitions, exercises that strain joints and demand endurance through pain. The body is treated as something to be pushed, exhausted, and dominated. In Paris, by contrast, his leg training changes. (chapter 82) The movement is more controlled, more fluid, and visibly gentler on the joints. The goal is no longer to overpower the body, but to preserve it.

This contrast is not incidental. It reflects a deeper transformation in the nature of his fighting practice. Through Joo Jaekyung, MMA itself begins to shift away from its earlier association with brutality and borderline criminality. The introduction of a dedicated physical therapist, the adjustment of training routines, and the emphasis on longevity over raw destruction all point in the same direction. Fighting is no longer framed as survival at any cost, but as a profession that requires care, planning, and restraint.

This also casts doubt on the manager’s claim that Joo Jaekyung had always been supported by the “best” specialists. (chapter 5) MMA is not baseball or soccer (chapter 54); it does not benefit from the same institutional prestige or resources. Earlier in his career, the champion was more likely trained to endure damage than to prevent it. What we see now is not the continuation of an elite system, but its gradual construction — one in which Kim Dan plays a central role. (chapter 81)

In this sense, the American hotel exposes a recurring contradiction: authority is proclaimed, but not supported by infrastructure. Protection is expected, but not provided. The environment mirrors the broader logic governing the team at that point—one in which discipline is demanded of individuals, while the system itself remains careless. Hence such an incident could take place. Here, they were not protecting their “Emperor”, (chapter 49), rather restraining him and as such exposing him to danger.

Seen this way, the incident is not merely the result of personal negligence or malice. It is the product of a space that fails to distinguish between ranks, fails to secure its occupants, and ultimately fails those it claims to serve. I would even add, it exposes the blind trust in MFC.

Paris marks a clear contrast. In France, Joo Jaekyung’s suite is no longer embedded within the team’s circulation space. It is situated at the top of the building, separated from the fighters and coaches, and placed at the end of a corridor. (chapter 85) This time, his room is not described as suite, but the number 1704 (chapter 85) reveals its true position. The hotel has maximum 9 floors, so the number 17 is a reference to a wing. Elevation produces isolation. Distance produces control. He is treated like a star, but not like an athlete.

The logic, however, remains the same. Space is still used as a managerial tool. What changes is the position of the actors within it. Park Namwook is relegated to a lesser floor, visually and architecturally diminished. (chapter 82) Kim Dan, unexpectedly, receives a room that is larger, brighter, and more comfortable than the manager’s. This redistribution of space signals a redistribution of importance within the team. This indicates that his status is not only superior to the fighters, but also to the other hyungs (coach Yosep and the manager Park Namwook).

To conclude, the floors tell the story before the characters do. In the States, the injustice is not shouted. It is built. The suite was intended for a very specific function: the weight-cutting session (chapter 37) and the post–weight-cut recovery. (chapter 37) It was never designed for comfort, while in Paris the suite exists to deceive Joo Jaekyung and his team. It is there to make him think, he is receiving special treatment. That’s why in France, the logic persists, but the positions shift. Joo Jaekyung finally occupies the suite that matches his status. Park Namwook, relegated to a lesser floor, experiences a visual and narrative downfall. Kim Dan, unexpectedly, receives a room that is larger, brighter, and more comfortable than the manager’s. This reversal is not accidental. It marks a redistribution of importance within the team.

Doors, Access, and Delegated Authority

Not everything about access in Paris is restrictive. One detail complicates the picture in a productive way. How could the doctor barge in the athlete’s suite, if there is a lock? (chapter 82) Kim Dan may indeed possess a keycard to Joo Jaekyung’s suite. If so, this is not a minor convenience. It constitutes a symbolic transfer of access. The physical therapist is granted proximity not merely to the champion’s body, but to his private space. Hence the athlete is not caught by surprise, he doesn’t even mind this intrusion or interruption. (chapter 82)

This possibility helps explain several managerial behaviors. Park Namwook repeatedly seeks Kim Dan’s opinion (chapter 82) and support (chapter 82), even in situations that should fall under his own responsibility. When he becomes sick, he does not contact Joo Jaekyung directly. (Chapter 82) Instead, he uses Kim Dan as a messenger. This choice is not neutral. It allows the manager to avoid direct criticism from the champion while simultaneously delegating responsibility onto the physical therapist.

If Park Namwook knows that Kim Dan holds access to the suite, this delegation becomes logical. (chapter 85) Kim Dan is positioned as an intermediary — not officially in charge, but functionally indispensable. Should the protagonists fail to appear the next morning, the manager’s first instinct would not be to confront Joo Jaekyung, but to look for Kim Dan. Control is pursued indirectly. At the same time, when the manager announces the schedule for the next day (chapter 85), he expects everyone to wake up on time and appear at seven sharp. He doesn’t see it as his “task” to wake up the champion. Once again, he is delegating responsibility onto others. However, it is clear that he expects Joo Jaekyung to be awake early like he did before. So if the champion doesn’t appear on time, the manager’s decision should be to call doc Dan or visit his room. In his eyes, he is the one responsible for the champion!!

At the same time, access does not equal absence of boundaries. The existence of keycards and interior locks in the Paris hotel makes this clear. (chapter 82) Kim Dan’s ability to enter the suite in episode 82 does not imply unrestricted entry. It is situational. It is tolerated, perhaps even expected, but not automatic. (chapter 82) This is confirmed by contrast: on the night when Joo Jaekyung explicitly asks Kim Dan to come, Kim Dan waits outside. He knocks. He does not let himself in. The boundary holds.

This distinction is crucial. What matters is not who possesses a keycard, but who authorizes its use. In Paris, access is no longer governed by hierarchy or managerial convenience alone. It is regulated by consent. Joo Jaekyung decides when his space opens and when it remains closed.

Yet the system remains vulnerable. If Kim Dan does not answer, and if there is no Do Not Disturb sign, Park Namwook could still invoke institutional authority and ask hotel staff to open the doctor’s door. Let’s not forget that the night before, the doctor is not seen carrying his cellphone to the champion’s bedroom. Secondly, he had claimed to feel sick. (chapter 85) The couple’s absence and silence could generate panic. The potential for intrusion, in particular the doctor’s room, persists. Once again, conflict would not unfold through confrontation, but through space — through who is allowed to cross a threshold, and under what pretext.

The floors make this tension legible in advance. They do not erase boundaries; they reveal how fragile and contested those boundaries remain.

The Golden Cage and the End of the Emperor

Joo Jaekyung’s nickname, The Emperor, only makes sense as long as MFC supports him. An emperor without an empire is not powerful; he is isolated. The golden carpets, the luxury halls, and the elevated suite all contribute to this illusion of sovereignty. But they also define the boundaries of a cage. Hence they have planned his downfall, the hotel and its luxury (chapter 82) are there to deceive the main lead and his team.

The tragedy—and the irony—is that MFC forgets one thing: Joo Jaekyung is no longer alone in that cage.

Kim Dan is inside with him, therefore he is the only one wearing the jacket Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 85) And Kim Dan is the only person in this structure who is not part of the trap, (chapter 80) for his contract is limited not only to Joo Jaekyung, but also in time. He was never a fighter, hence he is not part of MFC at all contrary to the other hyungs.

The Unnamed Role — When Care Replaces Authority

This brings us to the question that runs quietly through the story: why can Joo Jaekyung not define Kim Dan’s role? (chapter 40)

It is tempting to answer: because he is a sex partner. But that explanation is insufficient. Kim Dan is also his physical therapist, officially responsible for his body. Over time, he becomes something more: the person who regulates stress, controls access and his food (chapter 82), manages recovery, mediates between the champion and the outside world, and quite literally holds the key. He even controls his image. (chapter 82) These are managerial functions.

But naming Kim Dan as a manager would expose the failure of Park Namwook and, by extension, MFC itself. It would mean admitting that institutional authority has been replaced by personal care. That is why the role remains unnamed. It exists in practice, but not in language. Thus expect a new version of this scene soon: (chapter 40) And if this comes true, then the athlete’s answer will be totally different: (chapter 40) Doc Dan is not one among others, but the BEST physical therapist. He is also a champion (chapter 86), for he helped him to recover and maintain his form in such a short time. He is the only one who can assist him to regain his title. The athlete will reveal doc Dan’s gift and special status to others.

The floors reveal this displacement long before the characters can. 😮

Conclusion — What the Floors Foretell

By reading the floors as markers of status, indicators of situation, and tools of spatial orientation, a coherent pattern emerges across both hotels. Elevation coincides with enclosure. Luxury disguises control and manipulation. And institutional power repeatedly misreads its own architecture.

The likely next move is already written into the building. (chapter 85) When the manager goes looking for control, he can look for Kim Dan due to the warning DND. And when he does, he will discover that the structure he relied on no longer answers to him.

The secrets behind the floors are not just secrets. They are warnings.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Hot 🌶️ Sparks 🎇, Feverish 🌡️ Reality (part 1)

Introduction — Dream, Magic, or Something Else?

Many Jinx-lovers were genuinely happy watching how the champion interacted with Doc Dan during that night. He was caring (chapter 86), gentle, attentive (chapter 86) — asking questions instead of imposing answers (chapter 64). For Joo Jaekyung’s unconditional stans (and I count myself among them), such an attitude (chapter 86) can easily be read as proof that the protagonist’s good heart has always been existent, but it was barely visible. Compared to earlier chapters, the contrast is now undeniable. And yet, I would like to pause you right there.

Because focusing solely on the champion’s behavior risks missing the most decisive movement of this night. Joo Jaekyung’s transformation did not begin in episode 86. Long before that, he had already started changing — sometimes suddenly (chapter 61), sometimes awkwardly (chapter 80), sometimes inconsistently (chapter 79), but unmistakably . (chapter 83) Tenderness, concern, even a certain form of devotion had appeared earlier (chapter 40), albeit in ways that were often overlooked, (chapter 18) misunderstood or poorly timed. This night (chapter 86) does not initiate his metamorphosis.

So what, then, makes it feel so different?

When confronted with a night filled with stars (chapter 86), sparks (chapter 86), and softness, many Jinx-philes might instinctively describe it as magical. The imagery invites such a reading. After all, we have seen similar nights before. The night in the States shimmered with illusion (chapter 39); words were spoken, confessions made — only to dissolve with memory. (chapter 41) The penthouse night echoed A Midsummer Night’s Dream (chapter 44), suspended between intoxication and desire, intense yet fragile. Both nights felt unreal, and both were later reframed as mistakes (chapter 41) — moments to be erased rather than carried forward. (chapter 45). This raises an essential question. Is episode 86 (chapter 86) a renewal of those nights? Another dream layered over the past? A repetition disguised as healing? Or, on the contrary, is this the first night that resists enchantment altogether?

This question matters because in Jinx, nights are never judged by themselves. Their true meaning is revealed afterward — in the morning (chapter 4), in the return of light (chapter 66), in what remains once the sparks fade. A dream dissolves with daylight. Reality does not.

This is why it would be misleading to read episode 86 primarily as evidence of the champion’s improved behavior. Such a perspective encloses the night within its warmth and risks mistaking tenderness (chapter 86) for final transformation. The real shift occurs elsewhere — more quietly, and perhaps more unsettlingly. To grasp the nature of this night, we must follow more importantly the doctor and his interaction with his fated partner.

What changes here is not only what Joo Jaekyung does, but how Kim Dan perceives (chapter 86), processes, and responds to it. How he hesitates (chapter 86), reflects, and allows himself to reconsider what this moment can mean — and what it can lead to. (chapter 86) It is through this inner recalibration that we can begin to determine whether this night belongs to the realm of dream, repetition, or reality. Only by tracing the doctor’s perception can we understand what truly starts flowing here.

To approach this question, the analysis will move through several successive angles. It will begin with the symbolic and mythological references that frame episode 86, before turning to earlier nights that echo visually or emotionally within it. From there, attention will shift to forms of communication, considering how speech, silence, and gesture are arranged across these scenes. The analysis will then examine repeated actions and how their placement within the narrative differs from one moment to another. Only with such a progression can the nature of this night be reconsidered.

From Solar Heat to Electric Current

Many Jinx-lovers instinctively read episode 86 as a romantic turning point because the night looks “magical”: stars (chapter 86), sparks, that strange shimmer that seems to hang in the air (chapter 86). Why? It was, as if their dream had come true. However, is it correct? Is it not wishful thinking? What if this night is not magical at all? What if its true signature is not enchantment, but electricity—a current that interrupts, tests, and resets? 😮

To grasp this, we must first return to the symbolic regime that used to govern the champion’s presence. In earlier chapters (think of the awe and distance around chapters 40–41 and again later), Joo Jaekyung often appears as a solar figure (chapter 40) in Kim Dan’s perception: overwhelming, radiant, dominant, a heat-source that does not negotiate. (chapter 41) The sun can be admired, feared, and endured—but it cannot be questioned. (chapter 58) It simply shines, and the one who stands in its light adapts. This explicates why the physical therapist would choose silence and submission over communication. (chapter 48)

The Invisible Energy

Nevertheless, the excursion in episode 83 and 84 begins to dismantle this solar grammar, though at the time, its meaning is easy to miss. (chapter 83)

The shift away from solar symbolism does not announce itself loudly. It is embedded in the setting itself, almost too obvious to be noticed. An amusement park functions entirely on electricity. (chapter 83) Every ride, every light, every scream suspended in midair depends on current: motors accelerating and braking, circuits opening and closing, energy stored, released, and cut off. (chapter 83) Roller coasters do not move by heat, charisma, or sheer physical force; they move because electricity flows through them. The Viking ship swings (chapter 83) because current allows it to swing. The Ferris wheel ascends (chapter 83) because circuits hold — and descends because they release.

And yet, precisely because this energy is expected, it becomes invisible.

Neither the characters nor most Jinx-philes initially register electricity as a symbol. It is too familiar, too infrastructural. Electricity does all the work, but it remains background noise. This invisibility is not accidental. Unlike the sun — which imposes itself visually, hierarchically, almost tyrannically — electricity operates silently, relationally, conditionally. It does not dominate the scene; it enables it. It exists only as long as connections hold.

When Electricity Fails

This distinction matters, because electricity only becomes perceptible when it fails. (chapter 84)

The Ferris wheel breakdown in episode 84 is therefore not a minor technical inconvenience but a crucial narrative rupture. The moment the current cuts out, movement stops. Height becomes dangerous. Time suspends. Panic enters the frame. The announcement that “the earlier technical issues have been resolved” (chapter 84) explicitly names what had previously gone unspoken: the rides function only because current flows. When it disappears, the illusion of effortless motion collapses.

And it is precisely at this moment — when artificial motion halts — that Joo Jaekyung becomes active in an unexpected way. (chapter 84) The Ferris wheel has stopped. The current is gone. The carefully regulated system that lifted, rotated, and sustained them is no longer in control. Yet movement does not disappear entirely. It mutates. When the champion shifts his weight, grips the structure, reacts instinctively, the cabin begins to shake. Panels emphasize instability: creak, swish, ack. The motion is no longer generated by electricity but by the body itself.

This moment is crucial. The shaking exposes a hierarchy reversal. Human strength now surpasses mechanical control. The ride no longer dictates sensation; the occupant does. And this excess of physical force — uncontrolled, unmediated — becomes unsettling rather than triumphant. Kim Dan immediately responds by asking him to sit down, to stop moving, to restore balance. Stillness, not action, becomes the condition for safety.

From Motion to Speech

What follows is telling. Deprived of the park’s mechanical rhythm, Joo Jaekyung does not compensate by acting more. He compensates by speaking. (chapter 84) Stranded above ground, stripped of the park’s mechanical rhythm, he apologizes. (chapter 84) Not theatrically, not performatively, but awkwardly, haltingly. His body exposes his discomfort (chapter 84) and fears. He avoids the doctor’s gaze, crosses his arms (chapter 84) or squeezes his arm (chapter 84). The cessation of electrical motion coincides with a shift in his own mode of action. Where the park depended on current to keep things moving, he now moves without it. The absence of electricity forces something else to surface: responsibility, attention, presence. Additionally, this sequence anticipates what will later unfold more fully. Proactivity is no longer expressed through force or motion, but through articulation. Words stand for action and have weight. The champion’s future action is announced here, quietly: he will no longer push forward by shaking the structure. He will move by sharing thought, by naming feeling, by allowing himself to be affected.

The interruption of electricity does not merely stop the ride. It forces a change in how agency is exercised. Under this new light, my avid readers can grasp the true life lesson the athlete received at the amusement park, the importance of communication and attentiveness.

As a first conclusion, the amusement park juxtaposes two forms of energy: mechanical electricity and human vitality. The first is regulated, automated, predictable — until it fails. The second is volatile, embodied, responsive. When the Ferris wheel stops, the mechanical system collapses, and a different kind of current emerges: emotional, relational, biological.

Yet, only in retrospect does this moment reveal its deeper logic. I am quite certain my followers are wondering how I came to pay attention to electricity which led to new observations and interpretations. It is related to the “electrical night” in the hotel!

Electricity and Sex

What strikes immediately in episode 86 is not tenderness, nor explicit care, nor even novelty of behavior — but density. The night is saturated with sparks (chapter 86), (chapter 86) jolts, sudden contractions of the body (chapter 86). Kim Dan is repeatedly shown convulsing, gasping, losing linear thought, and it is the same for the MMA fighter. Panels insist on interruption: jolt, tingle, broken breath, aborted sentences. The doctor’s body behaves as if struck, especially in this image. (chapter 86) It is at this point that a phrase surfaced in my mind — instinctively, almost involuntarily. A phrase we use in French when something intangible yet decisive occurs between two people: Le courant passe. Literally, the current passes. Idiomatic meaning: they are on the same wavelength, something connects, communication flows. However, here, the current is not the product of civilization, but of nature. Two people interacting with each other. And it is precisely because of the unusually high frequency of sparks and jolts in the illustrations that a belated realization imposes itself: nature, too, produces electricity — through storms, through thunder.

Joo Jaekyung’s Day and the Thunder

This raises a necessary question: where was the thunder before, as Jinx is working like a kaleidoscope?

One might be tempted to point to episode 69. (chapter 69) A storm was announced back then. And yet, upon closer inspection, no thunder was ever shown there. There was tension, there was excess, there were dark clouds (chapter 69) — but there was no strike, no discharge, no interruption. The imagery remained continuous, fluid, enclosed within the logic of escalation rather than rupture.

The thunder appears in the amusement park. 😮 One detail initially seems insignificant, almost too mundane to merit attention: the day itself.

The excursion in episodes 83–84 takes place on a Thursday. At first glance, this appears to be nothing more than a scheduling detail. And yet, Thursday is not a neutral day. Linguistically and mythologically, it carries a charge. Thursday is Thor’s day. This latent mythology quietly materializes through two objects, the drakkar (Viking boat) (chapter 83) and the hammer (chapter 83). In Roman terms, Thursday corresponds to dies Iovis — Jupiter’s day — the god of thunder. Both gods are strongly connected to thunder and as such current.

The narrative does not underline this fact. It does not name the god, invoke mythology, or frame the excursion as symbolic. The reference remains dormant. But dormancy is not absence. It is latency. This is where the symbolism stops being latent and becomes functional.

The reference to Thor and Jupiter (which was already palpable in earlier episodes -chapter 67-; for more read my analysis Star-crossed lovers 🌕) is not decorative mythology; it introduces a dual model of power that the narrative begins to test on Joo Jaekyung himself. Thor (chapter 83) is the son: impulsive, embodied, excessive, a god who discharges energy through impact. Jupiter, by contrast, is the father (chapter 83): regulating, sovereign, stabilizing, the god who governs the sky rather than striking it. Thunder belongs to both, but it manifests differently depending on position in the lineage. What matters is not which god the champion “is,” but that he oscillates between them. This oscillation becomes legible through the hammer.

The hammer game appears after the champion’s moment of physical discomfort and jealousy. (chapter 83). Before striking anything, he is already unwell: angry overstimulated and complaining, visually reduced to a childlike register. This matters. The hammer does not create excess — it receives it. (chapter 83) It offers a sanctioned outlet for surplus energy that has nowhere else to go. However, contrary to the past, the physical therapist becomes the beneficiary of the athlete’s greed and jealousy. He receives a teddy bear. The hamster doesn’t witness the punching incident, he only sees the result: care and affection. (chapter 83)

Unlike boxing, unlike punching a sandbag (chapter 34), the hammer gesture is not confrontational, for the machine is immobile. There is no opponent. (chapter 83) The arm rises and comes down. The movement is vertical, not horizontal. It does not engage another body; it obliterates resistance. This is not combat but discharge.

In that moment, Joo Jaekyung performs Thor. Not metaphorically, but structurally. He channels excess into a single, downward strike. The absurd score — 999 — is not triumph; it is overload. (chapter 83) Too much energy released at once. The system registers it, but cannot contain it. This means, the record won’t be registered and as such “remembered”. In fact what mattered here was the prize, the teddy bear, and restored self-esteem of the athlete. He could offer a present to doc Dan which the latter accepted without any resistance. (chapter 83) The pink heart indicates the presence of affection and gratitude. And crucially, this act restores balance. After the hammer, the champion is no longer visibly overwhelmed. He has expelled what needed to leave. This shows that the champion is learning to manage his jealousy differently.

This prepares the next transition. Once the excess is discharged, he can shift position. The childlike Thor-state gives way to something else: regulation, provision, containment. This is where Jupiter enters — not as domination, but as adaptive authority. The same character who was dazed now intervenes calmly, mediates interaction, hands over the teddy bear, anticipates need. Son and father coexist not as contradiction, but as sequence.

This duality is essential for what follows. Because thunder is not continuous like the sun. It interrupts. It breaks a state, resets a system, and allows a new configuration to emerge. That is its narrative function here. This means that the athlete’s attitude can no longer be generalized, as such reproaches or description wouldn’t reflect reality. But let’s return our attention to the thunder causing a short circuit and reset.

The Ferris wheel breakdown completes the logic. When electricity fails, mechanical motion stops. When motion stops, the champion’s bodily excess becomes dangerous. When excess becomes dangerous, restraint is required. And when restraint is required, speech replaces force. The apology does not come despite the breakdown, but because of it. The system has been reset. This is why the amusement park is not merely foreshadowing but training.

The champion learns, physically and symbolically, that energy must circulate differently depending on context. Sometimes it must be discharged. Sometimes it must be restrained. (chapter 86) Sometimes it must be transmitted through words rather than bodies. This is not moral growth; it is adaptive intelligence.

Doc Dan and the Thunder

And this is precisely what reappears in episode 86. (chapter 86)

There, thunder returns — no longer as mechanical failure, but as biological event. The sparks and jolts saturating the panels are not just erotic embellishment. They reproduce the same logic of interruption and reset as well. Kim Dan’s body reacts as if struck by current. Thought fragments. Linear continuity breaks. “I can’t think straight” is not poetic confusion; it is systemic overload. I would even say, we are witnessing a short circuit which can only lead to a reset.

A thunderstorm does not persuade. It forces a reboot. In other words, this night stands under the sign of reality despite the sparks. Electricity is real and even natural.

The crucial difference is that this time, the current does not come from machines, nor from spectacle, nor from a game. It emerges between two bodies. This is why le courant passe becomes more than metaphor. The current does not dominate; it circulates. It requires two terminals. It only exists because both are present and conductive. And now, you comprehend why the champion was attentive (chapter 86) and asked questions to his sex partner. The current stands for communication. (chapter 86) Therefore it is not surprising that doc Dan starts looking at his fated lover. Imagine what it means for the athlete, when the “hamster” is staring at him, though he is a little embarrassed. Finally, he is truly looking at him. The champion loves his gaze. And now, you comprehend why the “wolf” listened to the “cute hamster” and stopped leaving marks.

In this sense, the hammer returns one last time — transformed. (chapter 86)

What struck metal in the amusement park now strikes the psyche. Not as violence, not as domination, but as reset. The phallus functions here exactly as the hammer did earlier: a tool of discharge that interrupts an old state and makes a new configuration possible. The result is not surrender, not illusion, but recalibration. Joo Jaekyung is once again releasing his “energy” (chapter 85), but this time, its nature has changed. It is no longer jealousy or anger, but love and desire. Hence the current is not colored in red, but white and pink. (chapter 86) It is not a flame like here , but a thunder and as such it is still restrained and regulated.

This is why episode 86 does not feel “magical”, once the structure is visible. Magic enchants without consequence. Thunder alters systems. After a strike, nothing resumes exactly as before.

And that is the point.

The champion is no longer a sun that burns from a distance. He has become a figure capable of switching modes — son and father, Thor and Jupiter, discharge and containment. And Kim Dan, having undergone the reset, is no longer operating on inherited assumptions (chapter 86) or second-hand data. New information must now be gathered. New meanings must be negotiated. Because Joo Jaekyung acts differently (son-father), the doctor is incited to discuss with his fated lover and not to generalize. He is pushed to become curious about the main lead and even adapt himself in the end.

The system has rebooted. What follows will not be repetition — because the thunder forced a reset. What follows will be movement and reciprocity — because current has begun to pass from one side to the other and the reverse. A new circle has been created.

Dream Nights and Drugged Time: Why Chapters 39 and 44 Could Not Last

If episode 86 confronts us with electricity as reset, then we must return to the earlier nights that failed — not because desire was absent, but because time itself was compromised.

Many Jinx-lovers remember the night in the States (chapter 39) and the penthouse night (chapter 44) as emotionally charged, intense, even pivotal. Confessions were made. Bodies responded. Vulnerability appeared to surface. And yet, both nights collapsed almost immediately afterward. What was felt (chapter 44) did not endure. What was said did not bind. What was shared did not accumulate into change.

Why?

The simplest answer would be to blame the champion’s behavior. But this explanation is insufficient — and, in fact, misleading. The deeper issue is not ethical failure alone, but structural impossibility. These nights were built on illusion. And illusion, by definition, cannot sustain time.

Let us begin with the night in the States.

In chapter 39, Kim Dan experiences desire (chapter 39), arousal, and emotional exposure under the influence of a drugged beverage. His body reacts strongly, almost violently. His speech loosens. He confesses. (chapter 39) He voices feelings that he has never dared to articulate consciously. Many readers interpreted this moment as a breakthrough — the first time the doctor allowed himself to want.

And yet, the morning after reveals the fatal flaw: he does not remember. (chapter 40)

Memory loss is not a narrative convenience here. It is the core of the scene’s meaning. Without memory, desire cannot transform into intention. Without intention, intimacy cannot become choice. What remains is sensation without authorship.

In other words, the confession existed — but outside time.

The body spoke, but the self could not claim it. The night produced intensity, not continuity. More importantly, it denied Kim Dan the possibility of return. Because he did not remember, he could not revisit the moment, reinterpret it, or choose it anew. Desire occurred — but never became decision. The night passed through him without granting him authorship. At the same time, Joo Jaekyung made sure with his joke (chapter 41) that doc Dan shouldn’t remember that night. This remark left a deep wound on doc Dan’s soul and mind, thus he hoped not to look like a fool in episode 86. (chapter 86) In this panel, we should glimpse a reference to the night in the States as well, and not just to the night in the penthouse.

The intensity of that night is why the champion’s later obsession with recreating that night is so telling. (chapter 64) Deep down, he hoped that such a night had been real. That’s why he asked shortly after their return about this particular night. (chapter 41) The event floats, unmoored, like a dream recalled only by one participant. I would even add, the amnesia from the doctor even afflicted a wound on the main lead. This explains why in Paris, he keeps asking doc Dan if the later is well and is not suffering from a fever. (chapter 86) He wants to ensure that his fated lover won’t forget this night. He is doing everything to avoid a repetition from that “dream or fake night”, where the physical therapist acted as the perfect lover, but forgot it. However, observe that here, the champion is touching doc Dan’s forehead, a sign that he is making sure that doc Dan is not “lying” by coercion or submission. At the same time, such a gesture reinforces my interpretation: thanks to the “thunder”, heat is generated. “Le courant passe” (the current passes) through physical contact, that’s how they create intimacy and understanding.

The penthouse night in chapter 44 follows a similar structure, though its emotional register differs.

Here, it is Joo Jaekyung who is intoxicated. (chapter 44) The setting is elevated, luxurious, almost theatrical. The doctor is brought into a space of power that is not his own. (chapter 44) By acting that way, the athlete created a false impression of himself, as if he was still rational and clear-minded. Again, desire unfolds. (chapter 44) (chapter 44) Again, closeness occurs. And again, the aftermath reveals the same fracture.

The champion does not remember fully (chapter 45) and later wants to even forget it. (chapter 45) Why? It is because contrary to the night in the States, the MMA fighter left traces on doc Dan’s body (chapter 45) and he can not deny his own involvement and actions. Hence the doctor is left alone. Only he can recall this “dream”. (chapter 44) But memory alone is not power. Remembering without the other’s participation transforms recollection into isolation. Kim Dan cannot confront, confirm, or renegotiate what happened, exactly like the champion did in the past. Meaning freezes instead of evolving. Striking is that he came to associate feelings with addiction. (chapter 46) No wonder why later doc Dan had no problem to reject the athlete. And for him, the next morning became a cruel reality, even a nightmare. It wounded doc Dan’s heart and soul so much that he learned the following lesson: to not get deceived by impressions. Hence in Paris, Doc Dan tries to explain the change of the champion’s attitude with drunkenness. (chapter 86)

What matters is not simply abandonment, but asymmetry of consciousness. While Joo Jaekyung remembers the night in the States, the other remembers the night in the penthouse: (chapter 44) One participant is altered. The other must carry the weight of meaning alone. The night does not end in shared reflection, but in silence and absence.

In both cases, the problem is not sex. It is not even exploitation or ignorance— though both are present. The problem is that time cannot flow forward from these nights.

Why? Because drugs suspend causality.

Under intoxication, actions do not generate obligation. Words do not demand response. Feelings do not require follow-up. The night becomes sealed — intense within itself, but cut off from before and after. This is why these encounters feel dreamlike in retrospect. Not romantic dreams, but dissociative ones.

And Jinx insists on this reading visually.

In both chapters, speech is unstable. (chapter 44) Words blur, vanish, or are forgotten. Even gestures go unnoticed: a kiss, an embrace or a patting. Memory fractures. The morning after is defined not by continuity but by confusion. The body has moved forward, but the narrative has not.

This logic culminates in the fireworks scene of chapter 84 (chapter 84)

Fireworks are often read as romance. But here, they function as warning. Fireworks illuminate the sky briefly, brilliantly — and then disappear. They leave no trace. And crucially, during this display, words are literally blurred. (chapter 84) Speech bubbles lose clarity. Confessions are obscured. The reader is denied access to meaning. Fireworks, like drugs, produce intensity without duration.

This is the crucial distinction that Part I prepared us for: heat versus current. Heat lingers. It can smother. It can burn. But it does not require connection. Current, by contrast, only exists if two points remain linked.

Chapters 39 and 44 are nights of heat. Bodies respond. Desire flares. But no circuit closes. No loop remains intact long enough for time to resume. This is why these nights are doomed — not morally, but structurally.

And this brings us to a crucial observation that many readers overlook.

In both of these earlier nights, questions are absent.

No one asks: “Are you okay?” (chapter 39) (chapter 44) It was as if these nights could only exist under altered states — as if clarity on either side would have made them impossible.
No one asks: “Do you remember?”
No one asks: “Why are you doing it?” “What does that mean to you?”

Speech exists, but it is not dialogic. It does not seek the other’s subjectivity. It spills, confesses, demands, judges or disappears. But it does not circulate. This is why, despite their intensity, these nights do not move the story forward. They collapse inward.

Episode 86, by contrast, will confront us with something radically different: a night that asks questions. (chapter 86)

But before we get there, we must acknowledge what these dream-nights leave behind.

They teach Kim Dan that desire is dangerous when it appears without agency. That closeness can dissolve overnight. That bodily truth does not guarantee recognition or even knowledge. And perhaps most importantly: that remembering alone is a burden. (chapter 86) This is why, when electricity returns in episode 86, it does not revive heat. It interrupts it. (chapter 86) That’s the reason why the athlete stops for a moment and asks doc Dan, if he needs a break. (chapter 86) This question is important because doc Dan admits his confusion and ignorance. He confesses to himself that he “knows nothing” not only about himself, but also about his fated lover. (chapter 86) The night is no longer sealed. It is permeable. Time resumes. (chapter 86) This signifies that thanks to the “champion’s thunder”, doc Dan was able to leave the vicious circle of “depression”. At the same time, such a confession implies that doc Dan’s present is no longer determined by the past and prejudices. And that is precisely why it matters.

From Drugged Time to Embodied Presence

If the earlier nights failed because time itself was compromised, then the question that naturally follows is this: what allows time to resume?

Chapters 39 and 44 taught us that intensity alone is not enough. Desire flared, bodies responded, confessions surfaced — and yet nothing endured. Not because feeling was false, but because consciousness was fractured. Words existed, but they did not circulate. Memory existed, but it was asymmetrical. Each night collapsed into silence the moment it ended.

Episode 86 emerges precisely at this fault line.

At first glance, it might seem quieter. Less dramatic. Less overtly confessional. And yet, this apparent restraint is deceptive. What changes here is not the presence of desire, but the medium through which meaning passes. What circulates between them in this night is not nostalgia, not projection, not even hope — but presence.

The sparks that punctuate episode 86 are not metaphorical excess. (chapter 86) They function as temporal markers. A spark exists only now. It has no duration. It cannot be stored, recalled, or anticipated. It appears — and vanishes. In this sense, electricity becomes the perfect visual language for the present moment itself.

Unlike heat, which lingers and can smother, current demands simultaneity. It requires two points to be active at the same time. The moment one withdraws, the circuit breaks. Sparks therefore signify not passion remembered or desired, but attention shared. This is why the night in episode 86 feels radically different from earlier encounters. At the end of episode 86, Kim Dan is no longer trapped in the past — replaying humiliation, abandonment or knowledge (as such arrogance). Nor is he projecting into the future at the end — fearing consequences, punishment, or loss. (chapter 86) For once, his thought does not spiral backward or forward. It halts. He decides to follow his heart again. (chapter 86)

The phrase carpe diem applies here not as romantic indulgence, but as psychological fact. To seize the day is not to ignore reality; it is to suspend temporal distortion. (chapter 86) In this night, neither character is reliving an old wound nor rehearsing a future defense. They are not remembering a dream. They are not trying to recreate one. They are simply there.

Electricity makes this visible. The body jolts. Thought fragments. Linear narration breaks. But unlike the drugged nights, this fragmentation does not produce amnesia. It produces grounding. Kim Dan’s repeated confusion — “I can’t think straight” — is not dissociation. (chapter 86) It is the absence of rumination.

This is what distinguishes presence from illusion. Illusion detaches the body from time. Presence anchors the body in time.

The sparks, then, do not represent chaos, rather emancipation and liberation. (chapter 86) Therefore the “hamster” can not control his voice and body. The sparks represent contact without temporal displacement. Both characters inhabit the same instant, without substitution, without rehearsal, without erasure. The present is no longer something to escape or survive. It becomes something that can be shared. That’s the reason why the two main leads are talking to each other.

And this is precisely why meaning finally begins to circulate.

If the first part (From Solar Heat to Electric Current) and second part ( Dream Nights and drugged time) traced how electricity replaces heat, and how illusion breaks time, then the next part turns to the most unsettling shift of all: the disappearance of words — and the emergence of the kiss as language.

No Words, But a Kiss: When Communication Changes Form

One of the most striking features of my illustration for episode 86 is the near absence of visible speech bubbles — even when Joo Jaekyung is clearly speaking. His mouth is open, his body leans in, his posture is attentive, and yet language is visually de-emphasized. Words are present, but they no longer dominate the frame.

By contrast, the star with the cut-off speech bubble appears elsewhere — suspended, incomplete. Language has not disappeared; it has lost its authority. It exists, but it is no longer imposed, no longer unilateral, no longer protected by distance.

This visual shift matters. (chapter 86) In earlier chapters, words often preceded erasure: confessions spoken under intoxication (chapter 10), statements blurred by drugs (chapter 43), sentences remembered by only one side. (chapter 39) Language functioned as exposure without continuity. Here, the narrative refuses that pattern. (chapter 86) It withholds verbal dominance so that something else can emerge. Kim Dan’s answer does not come in words. It comes as a kiss. (chapter 86) This gesture must not be misread as avoidance (silencing) or impulsivity. It is neither silence born of fear nor surrender to sensation. It is embodied communication — a mode forged by a history in which words were unsafe, unreliable, or followed by disappearance. The kiss articulates what cannot yet be stabilized in language without being lost again.

It says: I am here. And more importantly: I accept this moment. Not the future. Not the consequences. The present. But this action catches the MMA fighter by surprise, as in the athlete’s mind, Doc Dan has never initiated a kiss before except in the States, but the doctor doesn’t remember it. At the same time, it is clear that the athlete has not been confronted by his own amnesia concerning the night of his birthday: doc Dan had kissed him there too, thus the celebrity had been able to make doc Dan smile (chapter 44) and even laugh…. if only he could remember that night…

Crucially, this act in episode 86 (chapter 86) cannot be neutralized by Joo Jaekyung’s habitual reflexes — the “it’s nothing” (chapter 79), the “never mind”, (chapter 84) or it is a mistake, the easy erasure that once dissolved meaning after the fact. The kiss interrupts that mechanism. It produces a pause that cannot be talked over. It forces reflection. (chapter 86) Joo Jaekyung will have to ponder on the signification of such a kiss.

For the first time, meaning does not vanish once contact is made.

The kiss therefore marks a decisive transformation in how communication functions between them. Words are not rejected; they are postponed. Language is no longer the condition for intimacy, but its consequence. What circulates first is presence.

And this is why the kiss belongs structurally to the logic of current introduced earlier. Current does not explain itself. It passes — or it does not. It requires proximity, consent, and mutual contact. Once established, it cannot be undone by denial. Hence the champion reciprocates the gesture. (chapter 86) He is even kissing with open eyes, as though he desired not forget this wonderful night. In episode 86, communication no longer seeks to protect itself through speech. It risks itself through embodiment. And that risk, precisely because it is accepted rather than anticipated, changes everything.

First Conclusion — When Conditions Change

With the symbolic framework established, the earlier nights revisited, and the forms of communication closely examined, the analysis has already progressed far enough to reconsider the nature of the night in episode 86.

By moving through these successive angles — from mythological and elemental references, to nights compromised by illusion, to the transformation of how meaning is exchanged — one point becomes clear: this night is not just defined by intensity, tenderness, or redemption. It is also defined by changed conditions.

When electricity replaces heat (chapter 86), power ceases to be unilateral and becomes relational (sky and earth). Thunder does not linger or dominate; it strikes, interrupts, and resets. The champion is no longer read as a solar figure imposing force from above, but as a conductor within a circuit that requires reciprocity.

When the earlier nights are reexamined, their failure appears not as emotional insufficiency but as structural impossibility. Desire existed, but time could not flow. Drugs suspended causality, fractured memory, and sealed each encounter inside itself. What remained were dream-nights — vivid, intense, and ultimately unsustainable. Yet, they left wounds. (chapter 86) At the same time, it becomes clear that this moment in Paris embodies the convergence of two memories and two nights which helps them to recreate a new night marked by desires and communication. So this night will generate new memories and push them to redefine their relationship.

Finally, when attention shifts to communication itself, episode 86 reveals a decisive reconfiguration. (chapter 86) Meaning no longer relies on speech that can be blurred, forgotten, or denied. It circulates through presence. The kiss interrupts fear without abolishing clarity. Kim Dan does not forget the future; he accepts the risk of setting it aside. For the first time, current passes while both remain conscious, present, and aware.

One image quietly condenses this transformation. (chapter 86)

Kim Dan almost sits on Joo Jaekyung’s lap. (chapter 86) Earlier in the narrative, this posture belonged to another body. (chapter 19) The grandmother’s lap structured Kim Dan’s understanding of safety, endurance, and knowledge. Sitting there meant being held — but also being taught how to survive through sacrifice, silence, and self-effacement. That worldview sustained him, but it also confined him.

In episode 86, the posture is almost repeated — but the figure has changed.

This is not a romantic substitution. It is a symbolic shift. The body that now supports Kim Dan does not transmit inherited rules or fixed certainties. It asks questions. It pauses. It waits for response. He is actually more sitting between his legs or on his arms. In this moment, Kim Dan is no longer receiving knowledge about how to endure the world; he is participating in how to inhabit it.

From this point, a first answer to the guiding question emerges.

Episode 86 is neither illusion nor culmination. It does not redeem the past, nor does it erase it. It alters the framework within which meaning can circulate. Time resumes not because wounds have healed, but because they are no longer governing the present by default.

What remains unresolved — and what now demands further attention — is what follows from this shift.

If communication has changed form, how does unpredictability change meaning? If presence has been established, how does recognition operate without erasing the past? And if two nights once marked by failure now converge within the same moment, what does that convergence produce?

These questions open the next stage of the analysis.

The following sections will therefore turn away from possibility and toward consequence: how agency is reclaimed, how repetition acquires new ethical weight, and how two previously incompatible trajectories finally begin to add rather than cancel each other out.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Sweetest 🍭 Downfall 🧴🪮Ever

Notice: Right now, I am quite overwhelmed with work (grading papers, staff meetings etc), hence I can only write one essay after each episode.

Introduction – Where it begins

I have to admit that I had not anticipated a smut-scene in episode 85. On the other hand, it makes sense, for it is the night before the match, it is jinx-time. At the same time, their physical reunion (chapter 85) represents the positive reflection of this night (chapter 58) (chapter 58) (chapter 58), when the physical therapist chose to give up on the athlete and stop listening to his heart. Here, I am not only referring to the numerical symmetry but also to the doctor’s shifting vision of Joo Jaekyung.

In both episodes 58 and 85 (chapter 85), Jaekyung appears with a towel around his neck. This simple object evokes water and sweat, but in Jinx, these elements are never neutral. They are tied to one of the champion’s earliest traumas: the humiliation of being called “dirty” (chapter 75) and “smelly” as a child. This is why Jaekyung learned to perfuse his body with cologne after every shower (chapter 75) and why physical proximity has always carried the risk of shame. Hence he kept people at arms length. In chapter 40, when he rescued Kim Dan from the security guards, he kept his distance (chapter 40) — he had not yet showered, for the towel on his shoulders was stained with blood. Mingwa was indirectly referring to the champion’s psychological wounds. (chapter 40) It was, as if the fear of smelling “wrong,” of being perceived as contaminated, was still dictating his movements. Hence he could only claim doc Dan as one of his own, but not as his “physical therapist” or even “family”. And interesting is that doc Dan copied his attitude. In the hallway, he maintained a certain distance from the athlete. (chapter 40)

But in Paris, the presence of that same towel (chapter 85) suggests something very different. He has just stepped out of the shower, which means he is clean, his hair hanging down, still wet. (chapter 85) This striking detail is that he clearly left in a hurry: contrary to all earlier scenes where he sprayed himself with cologne (chapter 40) the moment he dried off (chapter 75), here he has not perfumed himself at all. (chapter 85) His hair is unstyled, his scent unmasked — and yet he approaches Dan without hesitation. He even kisses him. The item that once symbolized rejection now signifies trust: without fragrance, he is certain that doc Dan will not call him “dirty,” will not recoil, will not shame him. What once provoked distance becomes an unexpected bridge, revealing that Jaekyung is finally letting someone remain close, when he feels most vulnerable. The night in Paris does not simply suggest a return of desire; it announces the return of hope (chapter 85) and trust — and perhaps even the moment when Dan chooses, for the first time, to be honest with his own body and heart.

And yet — hidden beneath the sensual reunion and the echo of that earlier night — something else begins to unravel. Something softer, sweeter, far more dangerous for a man who once prided himself on standing above everyone else. For the first time, we witness the champion’s downfall — not a collapse of strength or dignity, but the collapse of the walls he spent years building. A downfall so gentle that it goes almost unnoticed, except by the one person who has always watched him closely: Doc Dan. (chapter 85)

After all, it takes a certain kind of irony for a man called “the Emperor” to experience his most significant fall at the very moment he carries someone else to bed (chapter 85) — fulfilling, without knowing it, a secret wish the physical therapist has harbored since childhood (chapter 61) [I will elaborate it further later]. And perhaps this is why the moment feels so disarming: because the downfall is not tragic but tender, not humiliating but intimate. Sweet, even.

But to understand why this ‘downfall’ is the sweetest one Joo Jaekyung has ever lived, we must first return to the moment it truly began — not in the bedroom, but hours earlier at the dinner table (chapter 85), when a single careless comment shattered the champion’s composure and revealed just how fragile his newfound hope really was.

The First Tremors

What caught my notice is that the physical therapist is the only one wearing the jacket with Joo Jaekyung on it! (chapter 85) In contrast, both Park Namwook and coach Jeong Yosep wear generic MFC T-shirts. (chapter 85) Mingwa is not simply dressing characters — she is revealing loyalties. The manager and coach are aligned with the institution MFC; Dan alone is aligned with the man, Joo Jaekyung. This quiet visual contrast already hints at the emotional imbalance that will unfold in the next few panels.

The first tremor begins at the dinner table, where the manager suddenly brings the physical therapist back to reality. (chapter 85) Dan is lost in his thoughts — anticipating the night ahead with the champion — and has barely touched his food. Park Namwook notices this. One might think, such a remark displays the manager’s concern for the main lead’s well-being. However, the manager adds that the other members of the team are all almost finished. With such a remark, it becomes clear that the manager is urging the protagonist to finish his plate. Although Park Namwook addresses Dan as if showing concern, the content of his remark betrays his true priority: not Dan’s well-being, but the team’s schedule. By pointing out that ‘the rest of us are almost finished,’ he urges Dan to keep pace, treating him as staff who had to follow the group rather than someone with personal needs. As you can sense, schedule is essential for the manager. However, because doc Dan couldn’t reveal the true reason behind his behavior, he gives an excuse for his lack of appetite. (chapter 85) He merely says he feels “a little queasy.” The irony is striking. In English, queasy is not a neutral word: it suggests nausea, a churning stomach, a sensation often associated with disgust or repulsion. And although Dan’s discomfort has nothing to do with Jaekyung, the word itself carries an emotional weight the champion is highly sensitive to. It brushes against an old, unhealed wound — the childhood humiliation of being called “dirty,” “smelly,” or somehow “wrong.” But doc Dan was not telling the truth, this explains why the main lead refused the medication from the manager right away. (chapter 85) As you can see, the first disturbance comes from Park Namwook. But this doesn’t end here.
He questions the physical therapist — not the fighter — and asks whether he is nervous about tomorrow’s match. The question is innocent, but its implications are not. By speaking to Dan rather than to Jaekyung, Park is unconsciously revealing his neglect toward his boss and champion. Secondly, with this remark “That’s understandable, since it’s been a while for you”, he reminds the champion of two things which have been tormenting him: not only the last match with Baek Junmin and Doc Dan’s vanishing, but also their night together before the Baek Junmin match, when Dan left after sex without looking back. (chapter 53) The manager’s words bring Joo Jaekyung back to reality and its uncomfortable truth that Dan’s presence now is still bound to a contract — temporary, contingent, never fully his. In other words, with his remarks, Park Namwook is reopening old wounds which shows his total blindness and lack of finesse and of empathy. He treats the last match, as if nothing bad had happened. The incident with the switched spray is simply erased.

Thus Jaekyung’s reaction is immediate: his mouth tightens in visible dissatisfaction. (chapter 85) It is a controlled expression, not a loss of composure, but it reveals irritation and intense gaze — the kind that arises when a sensitive subject is touched too directly. Park’s comment awakens a memory whose meaning has changed: back then, he accepted Dan (chapter 53) leaving without thinking; now, after Dan vanished from his life entirely, that earlier departure feels like a sign he failed to read. Park’s question brushes against this bruise, and Jaekyung’s lips reflect the discomfort.

As for the second tremor, it does not come from Park Namwook. It comes from Potato. (chapter 85) The younger fighter suddenly bursts into panic, declaring how nervous he would be in Jaekyung’s place, how his heart would be pounding out of his chest. His outburst is sincere, naïve, and completely focused on the champion — he never once considers Dan’s feelings. Yet these words strike deeper than he intends. At the mention of a pounding heart, Jaekyung’s eyes lift upward in a brief, involuntary movement. It is the smallest gesture, but it exposes everything he wishes to hide. Because his heart is pounding — but not for the match. It is because of doc Dan!

Potato unknowingly names the very thing Jaekyung is trying to keep steady: the nervousness and anticipation of the night ahead, the fear that history might repeat itself, and the desire that has been building for a long time. Unlike Park’s comment, which triggered irritation, Potato’s words hit the emotional center. This upward glance is the second tremor, the moment the façade slips just a little too far. Surrounded by people who see everything except the truth, Jaekyung reaches for the one thing he can control. He taps his phone and, in full view of the table, sends a message to Dan: (chapter 85) “Come to my room at 11.”

It looks like dominance, but it is driven by something far more fragile: (chapter 85) the need for reassurance, the wish to rewrite the pattern of the past, the quiet hope that Dan will not leave him again — not tonight and not afterwards.

This is where the Emperor’s downfall begins: with a tightened mouth, an upward glance, and a message sent to steady a heart that refuses to stay calm.

The Long Wait

If the dinner scene revealed the cracks in the champion’s composure, it also exposed something equally revealing about the manager. For Park Namwook, the real opponent is not Arnaud Gabriel — it is time. This explicates why the manager announces their departure at 7.00 am sharp, though the Emperor’s match is at noon. (chapter 85) Schedules are his armor, punctuality his hiding place. Whenever something threatens to slip beyond control, he retreats behind procedure.

This is why he suddenly takes an interest in Dan’s appetite. (chapter 85) His comment about the untouched plate is not born of concern; it is born of urgency. The faster Dan finishes, the sooner the table can be dismissed, and the sooner Park Namwook can send the champion to his room under the comfortable pretext of “rest.” (chapter 85) For him, “rest” is not a recommendation —
it is a containment strategy. This explains why the manager is not looking at the Emperor, when he tells him: “Jaekyung, go to bed early tonight, okay?”. Why? Because he doesn’t want a discussion. If he avoids eye contact, Jaekyung cannot object — the instruction is meant to be received, not answered. He is expecting obedience, nothing more. Therefore it is not surprising that the manager smiles (chapter 85), as soon as the athlete stands up right after his recommendation and announces he is now returning to his room.

Once Jaekyung is hidden behind a hotel door, quiet and unmonitored, nothing can be blamed on the manager anymore. If the champion sleeps poorly? Not his fault. If he feels sick? Not his fault. If emotions become volatile? Certainly not his fault. He will always be able to say: “I told him to go to bed early.”

What he wants is not Jaekyung’s well-being. What he wants is a clean conscience. But we have another example for his flaw. (chapter 85) A day and night without complications. A scenario in which no one can accuse him of negligence, if something goes wrong tomorrow. And Mingwa already exposed this flaw only seconds earlier. When Dan finally gives an excuse for his lack of appetite — “I’m feeling a bit queasy…” — the manager immediately reframes it as Dan’s recurring personal weakness: “It’s too bad you have trouble eating whenever we go abroad…” (chapter 85) With this single sentence, he erases the actual causes of Dan’s digestive problems — the fact that the therapist had been mistreated, overworked, stressed, ignored, even drugged during their last trip to the States. None of that exists in Park Namwook’s mind. In his version of reality, Dan’s discomfort is an inconvenience, not a symptom of mistreatment.

And here, his solution reveals everything: he immediately offers medication. Not help. Not care. Not attention. He treats doc Dan the same way than Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 54)

A pill — the fastest way to silence discomfort without having to see it. “Too bad” is not sympathy (chapter 85); it is avoidance. It exposes a man who does not want to be burdened by emotions, who cannot hold another person’s vulnerability without trying to shut it down. To him, Dan’s nausea is a logistical issue, not a sign of human distress.

Park Namwook’s flaw is not malice. His flaw is cowardice toward feelings — his own and those of others.
And this flaw will matter the next morning, when the Emperor and/or the doctor do not appear at 7:00 a.m. sharp, and the manager finally discovers that schedules offer no protection against the consequences of neglect.

But let’s return our attention to the manager’s recommendation to the champion: (chapter 85) He reacts with almost visible relief, when the champion stands up from the table. (chapter 85) He has no idea about the text message — no suspicion of anything planned for later. He sees only what benefits him: Jaekyung leaving on his own. Perfect. The fighter is out of sight, out of reach, and most importantly, out of his responsibility.

He doesn’t ask where Jaekyung is going. He doesn’t check if he’s alright. He doesn’t wonder whether something is wrong. He simply lets him go.

But this is exactly where the real question begins — a question the manager can never ask, only Jinx-philes: If Jaekyung returns to his room so early… what does he actually do until 11 pm?

What makes the evening in Paris so striking is the contradiction between time and behavior.
From the moment Joo Jaekyung sends the text at 7:02 p.m (chapter 85) and leaves the table shortly after, until the doctor knocks on his door at 11:00 p.m (if we assume that he went there at 11 pm)., almost four hours pass. (chapter 85) In theory, this is the perfect window to do what he used to do in the States (chapter 38) and Korea (chapter 48) before a big fight: watch his opponent’s videos, study their habits, rehearse counters. If we only looked at the clock, we might assume he spent the evening thinking about Arnaud Gabriel.

But the narrative context says the opposite.

Just before he leaves the table, Jaekyung has been hit by two painful reminders (chapter 85) linked to doc Dan, not Arnaud Gabriel. First, through Park Namwook’s question and tone, he is dragged back to the night before the Baek Junmin match — the night when sex with Dan was followed by distance, and then by disappearance after the fight. Second, Dan’s “queasy” excuse scratches an old wound: the fear of being perceived as disgusting or unwanted. Both moments are about abandonment and rejection, not competition. It is right after this double sting that he sends the message. In that instant, his thoughts are circling only one point: will Dan come to accept me, or will he pull away again?

That is the emotional seed of the long wait. This explains why they are on the bed, the athlete complained: (chapter 85) He had to restrain himself due to doc Dan. (chapter 85) From 7:02 onward, the question is no longer “How do I beat Gabriel?” but “How do I win doc Dan’s heart?” The clock from 7:02 to 11:00 p.m. stops being a “training window” and becomes an emotional countdown. He is no longer the champion preparing for an opponent—he is the man hoping not to be abandoned again. This is why the later scene at the door feels so contradictory: when Dan finally arrives, Jaekyung behaves like someone who couldn’t wait. (chapter 85) He opens the door and immediately grabs him inside (chapter 85), cutting off any possibility of hesitation. The way he drags him over the threshold, presses him against the wall (chapter 85), kisses him, lifts him (chapter 85) and carries him to the bed — all of that oozes urgency. Hence he doesn’t place his lover delicately on the bed, he rather pushes him down, thus we have the sound PLOP: (chapter 85) This is not the controlled, casual emperor of old; it is someone who has been holding back for hours and refuses to risk even a second in which Dan might change his mind.

And yet, visually, we know he has just finished showering. (chapter 85) His hair is still down and wet; the towel is still around his neck. That detail destroys the idea of a carefully structured pre-match evening. If he truly wanted a calm, professional night, he had four hours to shower, dry his hair, apply cologne, and settle. Instead, he postpones the shower so long that he is still damp when he opens the door.

In other words, he waited until the very last minute to get ready. This creates a striking contrast: he had four hours, yet he looks as though he prepared in a hurry. So what exactly did he do during this lapse of time? 😮

This is what every Jinx-lover should wonder. And given Jaekyung’s personality — his directness, his physicality, his awkwardness with emotional communication — a new hypothesis imposes itself. He did not study Gabriel. He studied how to please doc Dan. I am suspecting that he might have watched porno for that matter. Don’t forget this scene on the beach: (chapter 65) and the comment of the champion in front of this movie: (chapter 29) Moreover, I consider this scene (chapter 85) as a new version of Choi Heesung’s advice: Doc Dan just needs to sit back and enjoy!! (chapter 31) Joo Jaekyung is now doing everything, as deep down he wants to become the perfect lover! And how had I described the night in the States? Back then, the hamster Dan had become the champion’s perfect lover, especially because he had kissed his face, hugged him and confessed to him. (chapter 39) But if his fear to lose doc Dan was so huge, why did he ask him to come so late then? (chapter 85) It is the same hour than in the States. (chapter 38) One might reply that the athlete desired to maintain appearances and as such to hide his suffering and anxiety. In other words, he was hiding his emotions behind routine, Jinx-sex would always start at 11 pm. However, this idea is not entirely satisfying because once doc Dan was in his room, the fighter was no longer hiding his emotions and desires. (chapter 85) That’s the reason why I am suspecting another cause for this time 11 pm. In my opinion, it is related to the athlete’s traumas: the physical abuse from his father (chapter 72), when the latter would return late from his “work” and the death of his father (chapter 73).

After the painful reminders at the table — the allusion to the Junmin night and Dan’s “queasy” excuse that scratched an old wound — his entire focus shifted. He could no longer risk repeating the dynamics of the past. In his mind, the only way to ensure that Dan would not disappear again was to do better, physically, in the one domain where he feels competent. So it is not far-fetched to imagine him watching tutorials or videos, searching for techniques, guidance, or advice he never received from anyone. He has one mentor in intimacy, Cheolmin, but the latter has only appeared once. No model to imitate. No words for tenderness. But he can learn through action, through practice, through imitation. And suddenly, this would explain everything that happens later.

It explains why, once doc Dan stands at his door, he behaves with such urgency. He grabs him immediately, pulls him inside, presses him against the wall while holding his face tenderly (chapter 85), kisses him with a force that has been building for hours. He had been so absorbed — so busy learning, rehearsing, imagining — that he realized only late that it was almost time for Dan to arrive. The rushed shower is not laziness; it is evidence that his preparation was of another kind altogether.

And then Dan appears. And this alone must have boosted Jaekyung’s ego in a way nothing else could. (chapter 85) Because doc Dan could have refused. He could have used his queasiness as an excuse, could have stayed in his room, could have claimed exhaustion. Instead, he obeyed the request — a request sent by someone who had hurt him deeply in the past. Doc Dan’s arrival is proof that he is not rejecting him. Proof that the night is real. Proof that the attempt to do better might actually matter. At the same time, doc Dan couldn’t miss the true meaning behind this text sent in front of others: the athlete’s anxiety and suffering. (chapter 85) This explains why his worried gaze followed his fated partner. (chapter 85) In other words, the text had a different meaning. It was not an order, but rather a wish…and it had nothing to do with his match against Arnaud Gabriel. During that night, Joo Jaekyung is not seeing a surrogate fighter in front of him or a sex toy, but his real partner, his future boyfriend. This means, this night stands in opposition to the one in the penthouse: (chapter 53) He is gradually moving on from his belief and jinx, he is even now prioritizing his love life over work!! If Park Namwook knew, he would get so shocked and scared… he would yell at him for causing a mess, for neglecting his “work”.

Under this light, it becomes comprehensible why Jaekyung takes his time for the first time. (chapter 85) This is why he touches Dan’s face instead of flipping him over.
This is why he kisses slowly, repeatedly, almost reverently. He knows that doc Dan likes nipple foreplay.
This is why he carries him in his arms (chapter 85) instead of carrying him over his shoulder. And this is why he suddenly engages in a new kind of foreplay — licking Dan’s leg (chapter 85) and anus (chapter 85) — something he has never done before. This does not come from instinct. It comes from intention. It comes from effort. It comes from learning. He is indeed showering doc Dan with love and tenderness, therefore it is not surprising that the “hamster” is moved sensually and emotionally. Exactly like during the Summer Night’s Dream, he is reaching nirvana, hence Jinx-philes are constantly seeing stars,. (chapter 85)

In short, the four hours did not shape his body for the match. They shaped his behavior for doc Dan.

The long lapse of time reveals a man who was not preparing for Arnaud Gabriel at all — but preparing for the one person whose opinion governs his heart. And when that person actually stands at his door, the tension of those hours condenses into the urgency of his welcome, the care of his touch, and the new tenderness of his actions. Everything in that moment — from the haste of his shower to the way he drags Dan inside — points toward a single truth: something fundamental in Joo Jaekyung has shifted.

And this brings us to the real meaning of the essay’s title.

The Truth Behind The Title

Many readers, seeing The Sweetest Downfall Ever , might assume that the downfall refers to Joo Jaekyung’s current behavior: his neglect of sleep in favor of desire, his single-minded focus on sex the night before the match, his impulsive decision to carry doc Dan to bed (chapter 85), or even the looming risk of professional failure. Others might think the downfall describes Dan’s new physical position — head lowered, body lifted (chapter 85) — or the emotional slip that comes with resurfacing feelings: the therapist losing distance, falling back into intimacy. All of these readings sound plausible at first glance. (chapter 85) But the truth behind the title is far simpler, far more literal, and yet far more symbolic.

The downfall begins with his hair. For the first time, he is letting his hair down. (chapter 85) This visual shift, subtle yet radical, is the origin of the title.

And under this light, the meaning behind my illustration becomes clearer. This is why I chose pink “hair” for the background — not merely as decoration, but as a visual clue. The color evokes warmth, softness, and vulnerability: the emotional terrain Jaekyung steps into the moment gravity pulls his hair out of its rigid form. But why is this detail meaningful?

Because the idiom “to let your hair down” carries centuries of emotional and cultural weight.

When we read this historical meaning through the lens of Mingwa’s imagery, Jaekyung’s hair becomes more than a style choice. It becomes a confession. (chapter 85)

Letting his hair down means dropping the persona. Letting his hair down means allowing himself freedom.
Letting his hair down means entering intimacy — not performance.

It is the visual act of stepping away from the rigid social restraints imposed by MFC, public expectations, masculinity, and even trauma. And with this understanding, the transition becomes effortless:

For years, Joo Jaekyung’s hair has signified his status. (chapter 85) Styled up, hardened with gel (chapter 30) , perfectly arranged — it is the crown of the Emperor, the symbol of his control, his discipline, and the myth that MFC sells:
Joo Jaekyung, the untouchable. Joo Jaekyung, the brand. Joo Jaekyung, the man who never bends. (chapter 82) When the hair stands, the image stands.

But in Paris, for the first time, the hair falls. (chapter 85)

Even before chapter 85, Mingwa prepares the audience for this silent rebellion. Two days before the match, he wears a cap (chapter 85) — but not the way adults or professionals usually do.
He tilts it up, exposing his entire face. Teenagers wear their caps like this: loose, careless, unguarded, more concerned with comfort than appearance. And suddenly, Jaekyung looks younger — not in age, but in spirit. His gaze is no longer shadowed by the bill. It is fully visible, open, almost soft.

Then comes the wolf-ear headband at the amusement park (chapte 85), a gesture that would have been unthinkable for the Emperor of MFC. It is ridiculous, childish, playful — and he wears it anyway. Not for the crowd, not for the cameras, but because Dan asked him to wear one too. So he placed it on his head. It is the second stage of the downfall: the moment where he stops caring about the star image that has governed him for years. The moment where he allows himself to be seen as something other than a fighter. The wolf ears, like the tilted cap, signal a shift toward youthfulness, toward softness, toward an identity unshaped by branding. And yet, both items share something important: they still control the hair.

The cap hides it. The headband frames it. In both cases, the hair remains managed, held in place, contained.
This means that the “rejuvenation” we observe in these scenes is still superficial — a flirtation with freedom rather than freedom itself. (chapter 85) The cap and wolf ears make him look younger, even boyish, but they do not dismantle the structure around him. They soften the edges of the Emperor, but they do not dissolve the crown.

He looks more approachable, but not yet vulnerable. He looks less like a weapon, but not yet like a man. He looks playful, but not yet liberated. However, when he is seen with his hair down (chapter 85), he looks exactly like the little boy in the picture: (chapter 71) So doc Dan could recognize the little boy in the athlete, the more he sees the protagonist with his hair down. Furthermore, I noticed that contrary to season 1, Doc Dan has now more memories of the “wolf” facing him. (chapter 85) In the past, he would more look at him from behind: (chapter 35) (chapter 35) Seeing his face reflects not only the increasing care for each other, but also the improving communication between them.

And this is also the moment where the narrative contrast becomes striking. While Joo Jaekyung’s appearance is drifting backward toward youth, Arnaud Gabriel’s beard makes him look older, (chapter 85) more mature, more “masculine” in the traditional sense. This explicates why the stylists had to dress him up. (chapter 82) Yet such an intervention did more than prepare him for the cameras — it tightened the restrictions around his own image, reducing the fighter’s rights over how he appears to the world. With the suit, he appeared older and more powerful. The French fighter leans into age, while the Korean champion leans into youth — a symbolic inversion that reinforces the central tension in the Paris arc: Gabriel performs adulthood; Jaekyung rediscovers the adolescence he never lived. (chapter 85) But just as Jaekyung begins to slip into these youthful, softer identities, MFC reasserts control.

But MFC has its own ritual of restoration. At the photo shoot, the stylists immediately return him to form: (chapter 85) hair up, face polished, a look engineered for posters and rankings. He becomes once again the Emperor — the man who must appear older, sharper, more intimidating, more manufactured.

And this is exactly why the next transformation hits so hard. When Dan arrives at 11 p.m., Joo Jaekyung opens the door with his hair down, still dripping slightly from a rushed shower. This is not the Emperor. This is not the brand. This is not the legend presented in MFC 317. (chapter 79) This is the boy from the childhood photograph.

The hair-down Jaekyung is younger, wilder, softer (chapter 85) — someone who belongs not to MFC but to himself. Someone capable of affection. Someone whose emotions sit close to the skin. Someone who has stopped pretending. He is able to smile genuinely.

“Letting one’s hair down” is an idiom meaning to stop performing, to stop controlling oneself, to finally relax into authenticity. As you can see, Mingwa uses the concept (letting one’s hair down”) literally and metaphorically at once. The physical gesture (his hair falling) expresses the emotional one (his defenses lowering).

And suddenly, the birthday illustration released earlier this year makes sense. In the rain, with his hair heavy and unstyled, his gaze dark and sensual, Jaekyung appears nothing like the commanding emperor. He looks free — freed by weather, freed by desire, freed from roles. It was foreshadowing, not just fanservice. It announces the end of the « jinx » in reality.

Which brings us to the second reason “downfall” is the perfect word. “Downfall” often describes the collapse of status — the fall of kings, the ruin of reputations. And here, too, the meaning applies. Because by letting his hair down, Joo Jaekyung risks the downfall of the very myth that protects him.

He is neglecting his work. He is prioritizing Dan over rest. He is engaging in a long, indulgent foreplay the night before his comeback match — a foreplay so attentive and sensual that Dan wonders what changed. This is not the Emperor. This is a man who is slowly abandoning the throne.

And Mingwa multiplies the symbolic echoes:

  • Downfall as rain:
    Heavy rain makes hair fall, obscures vision, exposes vulnerability.
    It is no coincidence that the birthday art shows him wet — nature brings him down to earth.
  • Downfall as emotional collapse:
    His confrontation with memories at dinner destabilizes him.
    His desire for Dan overwhelms him.
    His anxiety about losing Dan drives him.
  • Downfall as public risk:
    If he wins and hugs Dan in front of cameras out of gratitude and affection — a real possibility given his new softness — he could expose their bond publicly.
    This would be the ultimate downfall of the Emperor image:
    the revelation that he is not a remote titan but a man in love.
  • Downfall as liberation:
    The fall from the Emperor’s pedestal is not a tragedy.
    It is freedom.

And this is where the meaning circles back to sweetness. However, this also signifies that he is escaping the control of MFC and as such he represents a source of danger for the organization.

When Jaekyung whispers, “Why the fuck do you taste so sweet today?” he is not describing Dan. (chapter 85) He is describing himself. His sweetness is the taste of freedom — freedom from performance, freedom from control, freedom from MFC, freedom from fear. He is enjoying this moment. Dan tastes sweet because Jaekyung is finally tasting the life he never allowed himself to want.

So the “downfall” of the title is not the fall of a champion.

It is the fall of a mask. A downfall so soft that it feels like surrender, so intimate that it feels like seduction, and so liberating that it becomes — unmistakably — sweet. Because the moment Jaekyung lets his hair down, he becomes someone who can fall in love. And perhaps someone who can finally be loved in return.

And now, you are probably thinking, this is it! But no… because we have the long wait the next morning!

Room 1704: The Number of Unscheduled Freedom

While the night in Paris reveals how quietly the Emperor has begun to fall, the true test of his transformation arrives the next morning. If letting his hair down marks the softening of his identity, what happens next exposes something even more subversive: Joo Jaekyung begins to let go of time itself. Because in Paris, time belongs not to MFC, not to Park Namwook, and not to the match — but to room 1704, (chapter 85) the one place where schedules dissolve, rituals are forgotten, and the fighter finally sleeps like someone who no longer needs to brace for survival.

Room 1704 is not just a hotel room; it is the numerical mirror of Jaekyung’s internal shift. It reduces to the number 12, and this detail offers a far deeper layer of meaning than coincidence. Twelve is the number of completeness. It marks the end of one cycle and the threshold of another. In numerology, it unites the energy of new beginnings (1) with the harmony of partnership (2) to form the creative expansion of 3. This blending transforms 12 into a symbol of spiritual awakening and divine order — a moment where the earthly and the transcendent briefly touch. It is no accident that the number appears in so many foundational structures: twelve months shaping the year, twelve zodiac signs forming the cosmic wheel, twelve tribes anchoring a nation, twelve apostles guiding the birth of a new faith. Across cultures, twelve signifies not closure, but transition: the release of what binds and the emergence of a new form.

Seen through this lens, room 1704 becomes the perfect setting for the champion’s inner shift. He does not simply enter a hotel room; he steps into a symbolic space where an old identity completes itself and a new one quietly begins. Twelve encourages letting go, surrendering rigidity, and allowing transformation to unfold. And this is precisely what happens that night. In room 1704, Joo Jaekyung lets his hair down, lets his guard fall, lets Dan remain close, and lets go — without yet realizing it — of the rituals and defenses that once defined him. The number that governs the room marks the moment where the Emperor’s earthly order dissolves, making space for an awakening shaped not by hierarchy or discipline, but by intimacy and partnership.

And the room itself reinforces this symbolism. Above the couch hangs a painting (chapter 85) The image is dreamlike: there are white horses with wings, a Pegasus-like creatures and angels. Their outlines are soft, almost blurred, as if painted in the air rather than on canvas. This is no random hotel decoration. A Pegasus traditionally symbolizes deliverance from earthly burdens, escape from oppression, and ascension into a higher realm; angels, of course, signify protection, guidance, and spiritual renewal. Together they transform the couch area into a symbolic threshold: the boundary between the profane world (MFC, schedules, fear, trauma) and a space touched by something gentler, freer, almost sacred.

The Pegasus-and-angel painting above the couch does more than sanctify room 1704—it also illuminates something that has quietly shaped Dan’s entire emotional life: his relationship to the couch itself. (chapter 21) The image of winged rescue and divine protection hangs over the very piece of furniture that, throughout the series, has functioned as Dan’s private sanctuary. This is not incidental. In Jinx, the couch is tied to his deepest memories of care and abandonment, and Mingwa activates this symbolism each time Dan gravitates to it.

Why did Dan’s nightmare of abandonment strike precisely, when he fell asleep on the couch? (chapter 21) Why does he consistently feel safer on the couch than in a bed? (chapter 29) Why, after the second swimming lesson, did he refuse to return to the bed (chapter 81), even though he was exhausted? Why does he place the teddy bear (chapter 84) —his last substitute for lost parental affection—on the couch and not on the bed? And finally, why has he always harbored the secret wish to be carried to bed, as confessed through his memory in chapter 61? (chapter 61)

The answers converge: the couch is Dan’s liminal space, the threshold between being left behind and being held, between cold reality and the remnants of tenderness he once knew. Note that there is no couch in the halmoni’s house. (chapter 10) Secondly, at no moment, we ever witness the grandmother carrying the little boy to bed. Either she is rocking him to sleep outside the house (chapter 47) or he is already in the bed. We never see her bringing him to bed.

Thus I came to develop the following theory. In childhood, before everything collapsed, the couch was the place where doc Dan waited for his parents to return from work—the place where he sometimes fell asleep with his teddy bear, only to be lifted and carried to bed by someone who loved him. It was brief, fragile, but it became etched into him as the last ritual of genuine care, before the world turned harsh. This would explain why he has internalized such gestures: (chapter 44), (chapter 44) traces from parents. And now, you comprehend why the hamster could never truly rest in the bed. The couch is therefore not an adult preference; it is a trauma imprint. Resting there feels safe because beds—large, empty, abandoned spaces—became reminders of whoever no longer carried him. Hence it is no longer surprising that he woke up, when he sensed the vanishing of warmth. (chapter 21)

This is why Dan puts the teddy bear on the couch (chapter 84): the bear stands in for a lost comforting presence. It also represents the main lead, Joo Jaekyung. The latter is gradually reentering in the physical therapist’s heart and life. Therefore it is not surprising that there, he squeezes the hand of the toy. It is also why Doc Dan curls around it like a child who deep down hopes to be chosen, lifted, and held. And it is why, even as an adult, his body still whispers the same yearning: someone, please carry me to bed again.

Placed in this context, the painting above the couch in room 1704 becomes profound. The winged horses represent rescue; the angels represent guardianship. They hover above the very place where Dan’s old wound meets the possibility of healing. And on this particular night, the symbolism is fulfilled: the man he once feared, the man who once hurt him, becomes the one who finally lifts him —not to discard him, not to dominate him, but to carry him to bed with the gentleness he has been unconsciously longing for since childhood. Under this new perspective, it becomes comprehensible why doc Dan often never realized that the athlete had often fulfilled his wish (chapter 29, chapter 40, chapter 65, chapter 68, chapter 79)

The couch, the painting, the number 1704—all align to mark this night as a turning point. A moment where old scripts collapse, where Dan’s abandonment narrative begins to loosen, and where Joo Jaekyung unknowingly steps into the role that no one has fulfilled since Dan was small: the one who does not leave him sleeping alone, but brings him into warmth.

And this is precisely what the number 1704 suggests. Reduced to 12, it carries the connotations of completion, awakening, divine order, the closing of one cycle and the opening of another. The Pegasus and angels above the couch echo that meaning visually: a silent promise that something in this room will lift rather than trap, heal rather than wound.

It is striking, too, that the imagery concerns flight—wings, ascension, rising above earthly weight. (chapter 85) For Joo Jaekyung, whose entire identity has been built on gravity, discipline, and the hardness of the body, this painting becomes an unconscious prelude to what he is about to do emotionally: let go, descend from the Emperor’s pedestal, and allow himself to be vulnerable. For Dan, the angels evoke the comfort and innocence he lost in childhood, the tenderness he has been deprived of for years. The painting therefore mirrors both men: the fighter who needs freedom, and the healer who needs protection.

Placed above the couch, it becomes the room’s spiritual anchor. It blesses the space without the characters realizing it. It reframes the night not as moral failure but as transformation. In this light, the “downfall” in the title is not the collapse of a champion — it is the completion of a cycle. A descent that is also a rising. A falling-away that creates room for renewal. Twelve crowns the night not with the end of something, but with the birth of something sweeter. Observe that around the painting, the pattern on the wall looks similar to snow flakes. It’s no coincidence… a synonym for “home”. A visual whisper that what happens here is not corruption but ascension and even “Nirvana”. That’s why I have the feeling that both or one of them might not wake up on time.

The first sign that room 1704 operates under new rules appears through a small but powerful object: the Do Not Disturb sign. (chapter 85)

For years, nothing in Jaekyung’s life has been allowed to interrupt the routine designed to keep him winning. His schedule is a fortress — wake up early, drink milk, shower and perfume, style hair, prepare body, prepare mind. Every minute is accounted for. Every ritual restores the Emperor identity. No step can be skipped.

But the moment Dan enters room 1704, the fortress cracks. The DND sign goes up. This implies that Joo Jaekyung might be able to sleep better and longer after this “hot night”.

And this tiny act holds enormous consequences. Park Namwook’s entire identity as manager is built on timing. He hides behind schedules the way Jaekyung once hid behind performance. (chapter 85) His mantra — 7:00 AM sharp — is not about concern. It is about control. If he arrives very early with his star, he believes that he has done his job. It is now MFC and Joo Jaekyung’s responsibility to decide about the match. Striking is that in the States, doc Dan woke up at 10. 26 am (chapter 85) and he was still able to arrive on time in the arena. (chapter 40) For me, it is a clue that the manager would always request to meet around 7.00 am, when the match was at noon. But what should do the athlete do during all this time? He can only get nervous and feel pressured.

This is where the true problem begins. A fighter scheduled to rise at dawn for a noon match is being set up to fail. The human body performs best roughly four or five hours after waking; having a good breakfast, for a match at midday, the ideal waking time would be closer to 8:30 or 9:00. Yet Park Namwook forces the entire team into a rhythm that has nothing to do with physiology and everything to do with his own fear of unpredictability. In other words, he is not managing an athlete — he is managing his anxiety.

The timing is disastrous for someone like Joo Jaekyung, whose insomnia is a recurring wound in the story. Sleep is the one ressource the Emperor chronically lacks, and the one thing he finally has a chance to experience now that doc Dan is beside him. (chapter 81) I noticed that in different scenes from season 2, the athlete started waking up later and even after doc Dan. (chapter 66) But the manager’s rigid schedule threatens even that. An early morning summons drains the fighter’s cortisol reserves before the match has even begun, creating a long, empty corridor of waiting — a period where tension, anxiety, fatigue, and irritation ferment in the body. Instead of resting, centering, and preparing, the champion would spend hours fighting against the clock imposed on him.

And this, ironically, is precisely what Park Namwook wants: a day without surprises, without emotional complications, without having to shoulder responsibility if something goes wrong. By bringing the team down to the lobby at a painfully early hour (chapter 85), he can tell himself that he has done everything correctly. From the moment they arrive, the rest is “not his problem.” His scheduling is a shield — not for Jaekyung, but for himself.

This reveals a harsh truth about his management style. He values predictability over performance, procedure over well-being, optics over actual athletic needs. And because he interprets punctuality as competence, he assumes that an early arrival protects him from blame. Whether the star sleeps well, eats well, or preserves his mental focus does not matter. What matters is that the boxes are checked, the appearance of order is maintained, and the responsibility is successfully transferred upward.

But what happens if the Emperor does not appear at 7:00 AM? (chapter 85) What happens if the room 1704 — with its quietly glowing DND sign — refuses to open?

Suddenly the carefully constructed ritual collapses. The manager may be standing in front of the door early in the morning, but the DND sign renders him powerless. He cannot knock insistently, he cannot demand entry or yell, and he certainly cannot ask hotel staff to open the door or to call the athlete. Any attempt to violate a guest’s privacy would not only break hotel policy — it could lead to a lawsuit, a breach-of-contract scandal, or even an international incident involving their star athlete. One angry complaint from Joo Jaekyung could cost the hotel its reputation, and one misstep from Park Namwook could cost him his career. And because he knows the champion had been drinking after the “loss” (chapter 54) , he might even jump to the wrong conclusion: that Jaekyung drank again — this time behind his back. (chapter 82) The irony is striking. Two days before the match, it was Park Namwook who overindulged with the others, yet he may now project that same carelessness onto the athlete. In his mind, the DND sign does not simply mean “rest”; it becomes a warning signal, a possible confirmation of the irresponsibility he fears but has never actually witnessed. Thus I can already imagine him panicking.

And this is exactly what terrifies him: there is no legal or professional ground on which he can force the champion to obey the schedule he imposed. For once, he cannot hide behind authority. He cannot produce documents or procedures to justify intervention. He cannot shift responsibility to MFC.

He is trapped in a situation where doing nothing is dangerous, and acting is even worse. One might object and say that he can still call the two protagonists. However, the doctor didn’t bring his cellphone to the room. (chapter 85) Secondly, it is possible that the athlete’s cellphone runs out of battery, especially if he watched so many videos the night before. However, if the staff knows about the DND, the manager can not ask the desk to call Joo Jaekyung either.

But the most destabilizing element of all is that he cannot even determine whom to blame — the physical therapist who may have encouraged the fighter to rest longer, or the champion who dared to let doc Dan sleep past the artificial boundaries the manager set in place or even slept longer by inadvertence. Another important aspect is the text from the champion. (chapter 85) Here, it is not written 11.00 pm, so the message could be read as 11.00 am. So this message could be read like this. He wanted to rest till 11.00 am. This could represent an evidence that champion chose to act behind Park Namwook’s back and trust Doc Dan more than Park Namwook.

The hierarchy reverses itself in an instant: the Emperor is untouchable, and the manager is the one who risks punishment.

For the first time, Park Namwook may have to confront the truth he has avoided for years: that his role as manager is ornamental, that he has never truly controlled the Emperor’s time, and that his authority dissolves the moment the athlete chooses to prioritize his own needs or his lover’s needs.

In that paralysis, old coping strategies return. He may blame Dan for keeping the champion awake. He may blame the champion for irresponsibility. He may fear that the match will suffer and that this failure, unlike all the others, will reflect poorly on him. One thing is sure: the manager can not leave the hotel without the wolf, and the latter will refuse to leave doc Dan behind either. As you can see, this night stands under the sign of “partnership” and the manager is now excluded.

However, inside room 1704, none of this external pressure exists. Because of the painting, I deduce that this room stands for intemporality. It was, as if time had stopped flowing. For the first time in years, Joo Jaekyung sleeps without fear. Without nightmares. Without counting breaths. Without bracing for violence. Without packing his trauma into the muscles of his back. Why? Because Dan is there. Not touching him — simply present. The presence alone rewrites the body’s memory.

And here lies the narrative genius: if Dan wakes first, he will instinctively protect that peace. He knows how vital rest is. He knows how Jaekyung has struggled to breathe, to sleep, to function. He knows the psychological cost of insomnia. He may silence alarms, block the manager from entering, or simply remain beside him until Jaekyung wakes naturally.

Which sets up the coming conflict:

If Jaekyung wakes late — later than the 7:00 AM schedule —he will not have enough time for his rituals.

  • No milk to ground him
  • No cold shower to reset his body
  • No perfume to cover the phantom scent of childhood shame
  • No hair styling to reinstall the Emperor crown

But none of this would matter, as long as doc Dan accepts him like that. However, it is clear that the fight will take place no matter what, as this match will be shown on TV! How do I know this? A match scheduled at noon on a Saturday is not designed for a French television audience — it is one of the least convenient viewing times for locals. But it aligns perfectly with broadcast windows in Korea and the United States, which means the bout is already plugged into international programming. In other words, the machinery is running. Cameras will roll, sponsors will expect coverage, and the event cannot be canceled simply because the champion oversleeps. The celebrity can arrive late, for he brings money. Joo Jaekyung will walk into the arena not as the branded champion, but as the man from room 1704 (chapter 85), a man who slept deeply, whose hair still remembers being down, whose body still carries Dan’s warmth. And this is the true downfall: He risks entering a match not as the Emperor, but as himself. And such a transformation could make people realize how young the “MMA fighter” is in the end. At the same time, his late arrival could create the illusion that the Emperor is not mentally and physically ready for a fight so that Arnaud Gabriel underestimates his opponent.

But here’s the irony — this may be the very thing that makes him stronger. Room 1704 becomes the space where the champion’s trauma evaporates, where instinct replaces ritual, where softness replaces armor. If he oversleeps, it means he felt safe — an emotional victory far more significant than a title defense.

For Park Namwook, however, oversleeping is a managerial nightmare. It is disorder. It is unpredictability. It is autonomy — the one thing he cannot manage. And when he stands before the DND sign, powerless, he may finally realize that his control and authority were always an illusion. He is not the boss or the owner of the gym. The Emperor no longer belongs to schedules, rituals, or institutions. He belongs to the one person behind that door. And that would be doc Dan who overlooked everything in Paris: his food (chapter 82), his look (chapter 82), his free time and took care of the champion’s emotional needs. In Paris, the « hamster » became the champion’s manager de facto, the unofficial right-hand. That’s why if they are late and they need a scapegoat, the manager can blame the physical therapist for the « delay », he would always come late to appointments (chapter 17: meeting the doctor) and to the fights (Busan, in the States).

Room 1704 is not the site of a downfall. It is the site of awakening.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Words 🎆The Firework 🎆 Stole 🥷 (second version)

Finally a Love Confession?

Among all the scenes in Jinx, none has ignited more speculation than the moment inside the Ferris wheel cabin—those few seconds when Joo Jaekyung’s lips move (chapter 84), the fireworks erupt, and Kim Dan turns his head too late. (chapter 84) Readers have replayed the blurred panel again and again, straining to decipher the muffled shapes of his mouth. Some are convinced that this is the confession, the moment the wolf finally says aloud what his body has been whispering for months. One Jinx-phile, @4992cb even insisted she had cracked the code: five syllables, just enough to match the Korean 좋아해 김단 (jo-a-hae Kim Dan)—“I like you, Kim Dan.”

And truthfully, the scene encourages such a reading. Fireworks often accompany love confessions in East Asian media (chapter 84) —especially Japanese summer festivals where boys and girls, dressed in yukata, confess beneath crackling skies. Fireworks symbolize joy, romance, fleeting courage. It is no wonder many readers assumed that Mingwa was drawing on this cultural grammar: purple night sky, glowing lights, two lonely figures suspended above the world. A confession seems almost inevitable. And if it truly was a love declaration, then the champion’s refusal to repeat himself (chapter 84) would make perfect narrative sense—confession lost, moment gone, courage spent.

But before we accept the romantic surface, we must pause. Something about the staging feels off—deliberately off. Why would Mingwa construct a confession that the receiver cannot hear? (chapter 84) Why give Kim Dan the long-awaited moment he has yearned for, only to snatch it away with the noise of exploding light? Yes, despite his words, Kim Dan still had the hope to be loved by the athlete. Hence he kept thinking about the athlete’s motivations for his “stay and care at the seaside town”. (chapter 62) (chapter 77) Why does Joo Jaekyung speak exactly when the fireworks begin, as if choosing the one moment when he is guaranteed to be drowned out? (chapter 84) And most importantly: what emotion pushed him to open his mouth in the first place? (chapter 84) Was he truly confessing love—or was he trying to verbalize something far more raw, far more primitive, far more difficult?

Before we can decode the stolen syllables, we need to examine the entire machinery around this moment: the champion’s posture, the lighting, the soundscape, the timing, and the emotional triggers accumulated over previous chapters. Only then can we begin to understand what he tried to say, and why the author ensured that Kim Dan—the boy who has always longed to be chosen—could not hear it.

The Mechanics of a Stolen Confession

Everything about the Ferris wheel cabin — the positioning, the posture, the lighting — undermines the idea that Joo Jaekyung was intentionally directing his words toward Kim Dan. The mechanics of his body say more than the bubble ever could. To begin with, Jaekyung is not fully facing Kim Dan when he begins to speak. (chapter 84) How do we know this? His body tells the truth before any words do: his torso is angled half-way toward the window and half-way toward Kim Dan, caught between desire and retreat. His arms remain crossed — a classic defensive posture — as if he is bracing himself against the very feelings he is trying to verbalize. This is not the stance of someone delivering a confident love confession; it is the posture of a man attempting something dangerous, something he is afraid to expose.

Only his head turns slightly toward Kim Dan, a diagonal tilt rather than a direct orientation. (chapter 84) It signals hesitation, testing the water, not a deliberate act of addressing someone face-to-face. And the light confirms this: the violet firework glow still falls on the same side of his face as in the previous panel, proving that he did not rotate his body or head enough to truly face Kim Dan while speaking. (chapter 84) He remains more oriented toward the window, toward the blur of lights outside — toward a safer, less intimate direction.

This halfway posture makes everything clear: Jaekyung is speaking from a place of longing mixed with fear, practicing honesty without yet daring to look directly at the person who provokes it. It is because as soon as his fated partner asks him to repeat, he turns slightly his head away, to the window. (chapter 84) When someone truly wants to be understood, they turn instinctively toward the listener. But when Jaekyung turns away, he is not refusing vulnerability — he is choosing fear. Turning his head toward the window is an instinctive retreat into the only safety he knows: distance.

This is crucial: he begins to speak while refusing to meet the therapist’s gaze. (chapter 84) The words escape sideways — literally.

Then comes the second mechanical detail: timing. He opens his mouth precisely at the moment the fireworks erupt. Deep down, he knows the noise will drown his voice. This is not accidental. It mirrors episodes 76(chapter 76) and 79 (chapter 79), where he “speaks” only when the other man cannot truly hear him. At the hostel, the mumbling was barely audible: yet according to my observation and deduction, doc Dan seems to have caught something. as later we discover this scene from the champion’s memory: (chapter 77) He already knew that the athlete was standing next to him. However, observe that this vision focused on the doctor’s gaze was accompanied with silence. This means, doc Dan acted, as if he had heard nothing. So if he heard, what did the physical therapist catch exactly in the kitchen? “I lost…”, but it was devoid of any context. Doc Dan had no idea what the director Hwang Byungchul had advised to his former student. (chapter 75) He could not know that “I lost” referred to something far more intimate: Jaekyung losing control over his own emotional detachment, he was totally vulnerable in front of doc Dan. His heart was stronger than his “mind and fists”. Naturally, if Kim Dan interpreted the phrase at all, he would connect it to the only “loss” he understood: the tie with Baek Junmin. A humiliating defeat. A source of shame. This misinterpretation perfectly explains why in the cabin, the hamster immediately assumes that the champion is once again determined to regain his title: (chapter 84) He is taking the champion’s words at face-value. (chapter 77) He trusts the explanation Jaekyung himself gave under the tree. And here lies the deeper revelation: Kim Dan’s misunderstanding exposes the true meaning of the tree confession. Why did Jaekyung suddenly accept the match? Why frame it entirely in terms of “I need you for these two fights”?

Because work was the only safe language he had left for reconnecting with the therapist. He could not say, “Please stay with me.” He could not say, “I don’t want to lose you.” So he said the only thing he believed he was allowed to say:
“I need you for my return match… and my title match.”

It is a substitution — a mask — a plea disguised as practicality. (chapter 84) A deadline designed to keep Kim Dan close without revealing the depth of the emotional dependency underneath. Finally, before we even analyze posture or timing, we must acknowledge the ghost that is sitting inside the cabin with them — Jaekyung’s own admission of dishonesty. Just minutes earlier, the narrative revealed again a thought he had never dared to voice aloud: (chapter 84) This line is essential, because it exposes the truth behind every failed confession that came before it: Jaekyung did not rekindle with doc Dan with honesty. His first instinct was deception (lie by omission), not vulnerability. Keeping Kim Dan near him mattered more than telling him the truth. So his “love” was still more influenced by possessiveness.

And that is precisely why his apology in the cabin lands with such weight. (chapter 84) For the first time, he admits wrongdoing without deflecting, without rage, without pride. This apology is not strategic; it is confessional. A tone we have never heard from him before. It is no coincidence that just before, he employed this expression: (chapter 84) This is the language of surrender — not to defeat, but to vulnerability and selflessness. The champion who once insisted on keeping Kim Dan “one way or another” (chapter 84) now articulates the opposite impulse: the willingness to release him, to give him a choice. (chapter 84) Kim Dan can actually never forgive him. He is giving up, on his possessive love — the possessiveness that fueled all his earlier attempts to hold onto Dan through contracts, pressure, intimidation, manipulations or work-related obligations.

Here, his grip loosens. Here, his desire is no longer expressed as ownership, but as remorse. And this shift matters profoundly for the blurred confession. (chapter 84) By apologizing, Jaekyung crosses a threshold he has never crossed before: he speaks without power, without defense, without dominance.
For the first time, he tells Kim Dan something that is not a command, not a justification, not an excuse — but a truth about himself. Yet this emotional shift, as liberating as it is, does not make him ready to say “I love you” or even “I like you” in a clean, intentional, adult way. In fact, the opposite is true. When guilt falls away, he does not step into romantic maturity — he reverts to emotional childhood. This explicates why later he felt so embarrassed on his bed, hiding his face under the pillow. (chapter 84) Thus for me, in the cabin the champion became, for a moment, the boy with no mother’s gaze, no father’s protection, no safe place to rest. He must have said something cheesy, something a young person would say. Purity returns before experience does. Honesty returns before articulation. And in that moment inside the cabin, Mingwa makes a decisive artistic choice: we do not see Jaekyung’s eyes. (chapter 84) The panel hides them completely — not out of convenience, but out of protection. It is as if the author herself shields the wolf’s vulnerability from the reader, granting him a moment of privacy at the precise instant he attempts something emotionally dangerous.

Just as in episodes 76 and 79, his words are not fully directed at Kim Dan. They are spoken near him, not to him.
They slip out sideways — half internal, half external — the verbal equivalent of a heartbeat too quiet to be called speech. In other words, what happens inside the cabin is not the flowering of romantic eloquence. It is the first trembling attempt of someone who has never been loved to express the only version of love he knows: instinctive, needy, unpolished, raw.

This is why he cannot possibly be saying a line as adult and structured as “I love you” or even “I like you.”
Such sentences require three things he does not possess yet:

  1. A sense that he himself is lovable → he does not. Hence he still views himself as nonredeemable and as a burden.
  2. A sense that Kim Dan feels the same → he has no proof. Besides, doc Dan keeps avoiding his gaze, feels uncomfortable in front of him. He is not speaking his mind. He keeps reminding him of their limited contract.
  3. A sense of equality in the relationship → they are not there yet. Joo Jaekyung feels now inferior with all his sins and wrongdoings. Due to his last words, it becomes clear that he is not expecting something in return.

What he can say at this stage — and what fits the emotional mechanics of the scene — is something far younger, far simpler, far more primal, like for example “Stay with me” or “I want to kiss you ” or “I want to hold you”…

These are not love declarations. They are the vocabulary of a neglected child whose first experience of safety has finally returned — and who now fears losing it more than anything else.

And crucially, this would explain everything about the staging:

  • why he chooses fireworks (the sound protects him from being truly heard),
  • why his body angles away (he speaks sideways, not directly),
  • why his voice is blurred (because the reader is not meant to hear it yet),
  • why he panics when Kim Dan asks him to repeat,
  • why he instantly retracts with “Never mind.”

A man confessing love does not recoil. A child confessing need always does. It is also why the author hides the line. Not because it is a grand romantic confession, but because it is too emotionally naked, too immature, too early, too cheesy. A sentence like “I wish to …”, whispered by a man who has never held anyone without ownership, is more intimate than any polished “I love you.”

And Mingwa knows it. The confession is blurred not because it declares love, but because it reveals Jaekyung’s inexperience with love. He can finally be honest — but he cannot yet be articulate.

He can reach — but he cannot yet claim. He is pure — but not ready. Hence later, he is seen wearing a white t-shirt for the first time. (chapter 84) This pigment stands for innocence, purity, new beginnings and even equity.

That is why the fireworks stole the words. (chapter 84) Because they were not yet meant to be received, only meant to be released. The fireworks allow him to finally attempt a more honest sentence, but in conditions where it cannot reach its target.
Noise replaces courage.
Light replaces eye contact.
Fear replaces clarity.
A man who has only just begun to tell the truth about his wrongdoing cannot yet tell the full truth of his love.
His apology creates the emotional opening — but it also exposes how unprepared he is to verbalize the feelings that have been building silently for 84 chapters. So far, he has never verbalized his desires and emotions, hence he kissed doc Dan right away in the swimming pool. (chapter 81) Yet this is also the limit of what he can say.

But let’s return our attention to the scene in the penthouse (chapter 79), which is similar to the scene in the kitchen and at the amusement park. Though the star was once again mumbling, this time Doc Dan reacted to his words. However, Jinx-philes can sense a divergence between the other two scenes (chapter 76) (chapter 84). It is because doc Dan was looking at him this time: (chapter 79) Thus he could see the athlete’s mouth moving and hear sound. Nevertheless, observe that the moment the wolf reached to the doctor’s words, he bowed his head and looked down. From this (chapter 79) to this (chapter 79) As you can sense, he fears his lover’s gaze, a new version of this situation: (chapter 79) However, he doesn’t fear coldness, but ridicule and mockery, the father’s gaze: (chapter 73) Under this light, people can grasp why Joo Jaekyung was not facing doc Dan directly in the cabin. To conclude, the mechanism is identical, but amplified. (chapter 84) Instead of mumbling, he lets the fireworks perform the silencing. It is not that the environment interrupts him; it is that he chooses a moment when interruption is guaranteed. However, one detail caught my attention: he’s getting physically closer to Doc Dan!! The distance is getting reduced. It was, as if he was practicing how to confess his affection. And so far, he never used the words « I love you ». (Chapter 44) (chapter 76) At the same time, Jinx-philes can detect the existence of another common denominator: the physical therapist’s gaze.

The Spark behind the Wolf’s Confession

To understand the blurred sentence — the words the firework stole — we must first shift our attention away from language entirely and back to what truly matters in this scene: vision. What drives Joo Jaekyung to the brink of confession in chapter 84 is not romance, nor timing, nor even the apology he had just managed to deliver. It is Kim Dan’s gaze. (chapter 84) He is moved by such a pure gaze, full of awe.

The panel makes this undeniable. Before speaking, the champion is watching the therapist’s face illuminated by fireworks, softened into wonder. (chapter 84) This is not the gaze of a caretaker, nor a tired worker, nor a subordinate fulfilling a duty. It is the open, trusting gaze of a child witnessing beauty. And for Joo Jaekyung, that gaze is both intoxicating and devastating.

The champion has lived his entire life without soft eyes directed at him. His mother, always drawn from behind, is eyeless — a woman who never truly saw him. (chapter 73) Besides, the head of her position is indicating that she was not looking at her son, the boy was hiding his face from Joo Jaewoong and his mother. Then his father mocked him, degraded him, and used resemblance as an insult: (chapter 73) Moreover, Hwang Byungchul reduced him to a lineage of failure or talent, not a person deserving recognition. He constantly compared him to his father (chapter 74) or his mother (a poor but good mother), he was not seen for whom he was: a child, a boy. Jinx consistently links sight with recognition, and recognition with love. (chapter 53) Jaekyung has never been granted either. (Chapter 45) Thus when he got upset with the present, he indirectly expressed the wish to be « looked at ». Moreover, in his visions or memories, this is what he keeps seeing: (chapter 54) (chapter 75) Doc Dan’s gaze!

This is what makes the locker-room scene in chapter 51 so crucial. Kim Dan looks at him with shock, vulnerability, and a plea: (chapter 51) And for the first time, Jaekyung freezes. (chapter 51) His breath catches; his eyes widen. It is the moment he realizes his mistake. He never thought that doc Dan had been trusting him. That moment marks the first rupture in his emotional armor, not only because it hurt, but because it revealed. He realizes with terror that he wants to be seen by Kim Dan, but when he faced such a gaze, he could only feel guilty and bad. Thus it is not surprising that later, his nightmare let transpire his guilty conscience. (chapter 54) He is the one who made his fated partner cry. No wonder why he first tried to find a new toy, he felt uncomfortable.

In the Ferris wheel cabin of chapter 84, he encounters his fated partner’s gaze again — (chapter 84) but now it is purified, childlike, unguarded. Kim Dan glows under the fireworks, mesmerized by beauty instead of violence, by wonder instead of fear. And Jaekyung wants — desperately — for that softness to be directed at him. Not at his victories. Not at his muscles. Not at the persona he built to survive. But at the man beneath all of it. A man worthy of admiration, affection, safety. A man who could be held, kept, loved. That’s why I wondered for a while if Joo Jaekyung had not copied Arnaud Gabriel’s flirt (chapter 82), as the champion has always used his surroundings as a source of inspiration. (Chapter 29) It would also fit with 5 syllabes in Korean. And it would be cheesy too. Yet, I have my doubts about this theory which I will explain further below. Nevertheless, one thing is sure. The champion loves the doctor’s eyes and they have the power to move not only his heart but also his mouth. He is encouraged to verbalize his emotions.

This is the true trigger of the confession. Not desire in the adult sense, and certainly not a strategic “I like you” or “I love you,” but a longing to be seen — and therefore, to be wanted. Every wound in Jaekyung’s life is tied to vision: the eyeless mother who vanished, the father who asked whether she would even want to live with him if she saw what he had become, the locker-room moment that shattered his self-perception. All of this returns when he sees Kim Dan’s shining eyes reflecting the fireworks.

He wants those eyes turned toward him with love. Not gratitude. Not dependence. Not fear. Love. What he wants most
and what he fears most come from the same place: Kim Dan’s gaze. (chapter 84) The gaze under the fireworks triggers emotions in him. Thus he blurted out something. But for me, he does not know how to say “I love you.” He cannot even say “I like you.” Those sentences belong to someone who has matured emotionally — someone who can identify feelings properly, but so far he keeps saying: “to stay by his side” and his « affection declarations » were all linked to negativity.. Thus my idea was that Joo Jaekyung could have said this: “I want to hold you!” (안고 싶어 너). Let’s not forget that so far, the champion had never expressed such a longing before; a warm embrace. He would always follow his instincts: (chapter 4) (chapter 43) (chapter 69) The hug represents a metaphor for “staying by his side, for home and to be seen”. Moreover, in French embrasser can mean kiss and hug. And strangely, I noticed that the protagonists were never looking at each other during an embrace. (chapter 44) And let’s not forget that such a gesture is strongly intertwined with “childhood”. (chapter 65) It is for “babies”. No wonder why he retracted immediately.

To conclude, the words that escape him in the dark — too soft to be caught, swallowed by the firework’s explosion — become the linguistic equivalent of reaching toward warmth without daring to touch it. The sentence he forms must fit his emotional stage: childlike, inexperienced, driven by instinct rather than maturity. It must reflect longing, not possession; desire, not declaration. And it must match the blurred outline of five syllables we see in the panel. (chapter 84) 안고 싶어 너: I want to hold/hug you!

The Secret behind the Blurred Words

And now, you are wondering what other secret could be hidden behind these words. It is related to the physical therapist him. Why did Mingwa, the goddess of “narrative fate”, ensure that doc Dan couldn’t hear the athlete’s words? (chapter 84) First, recall that in the previous parallel scenes (76 and 79), doc Dan is portrayed as someone who doesn’t hear Jaekyung’s confessions. But as I argued earlier, we must question whether this is truly the case — especially the one in episode 76. The panel arrangement suggests that something was heard, but not acknowledged. Then during the fireworks, he does not say, “I couldn’t hear what you said.”
He says: “I didn’t catch that.” “Catch” implies arms, grasping, holding — the very things stolen from him as a child.

And then comes the detail that betrays everything: the small drop on his cheek. A sign of discomfort… and something deeper: recognition. The drop on his face was not present before. (chapter 84) For me, everything points to the same conclusion: doc Dan might have heard something — but he cannot yet allow himself to process it.
This denial explains his expression in the shower at the hotel: (chapter 84) Here, the doctor looks sad and wounded. His eyes are unfocused — he is not seeing the present. The water running down his eyelashes gives the impression of tears, even though he is not crying. His gaze is distant, fixed on something internal. His mouth looks tense, almost trembling. The mouth especially is a clue: Kim Dan’s emotions always gather there when something from the past resurfaces.This is the expression of someone thrown into an involuntary flashback. He is inside a memory. This explicates why this scene is similar to the champion’s shower after the latter had met Baek Junmin: (chapter 49) (chapter 49) Both scenes show a man pulled violently into a buried memory. Thus, my assumption is simple: the champion said something that pierced straight into Kim Dan’s oldest wound and brought his trauma to the surface. And this brings me to my next observation. Inside the cabin, there are not two people — there are three: the champion, the therapist, and the Teddy Bear. (chapter 84) Furthermore, we have a window. We have a phone (dead, but present). We have a childlike toy — symbol of stolen innocence. (chapter 84) And now, look again at episode 19: (chapter 19) A window with no view. Three figures: halmoni, the boy, and the phone placed between them like a knife. And the sound structure is identical, but reversed:
silence – sound – silence in episode 19
vs
sound – silence – sound in episode 84, as the Teddy Bear is a silent “witness”. In both scenes, something is stolen.
In both scenes, a child loses something he cannot name. Thus, what Jaekyung said must have resembled the emotional tone — if not the wording — of the words spoken over the phone on that catastrophic day.

This explains why Kim Dan ends the scene wearing black instead of white. (chapter 84) It is not a fashion choice. It marks the moment when innocence collapses and the past reopens.

And now compare the cabin (chapter 84) with the memory that precedes the parents’ disappearance. You will notice the huge difference: the overwhelming silence inside the house. The halmoni sits beside the phone. She must have heard everything. She must have heard the child as well, if the latter spoke She holds him tightly by the shoulder — as if trying to support him. (Chapter 19) To conclude, she knew something was happening. This recollection represents a repressed memory, and so far doc Dan has always avoided to face his biggest fear: his abandonment issues and the loss of his “parents”. (chapter 56) In other words, wearing black is more than just a change of personality or mourning. It becomes the color of mystery, the beginning of descent into truth. (chapter 84) However, observe that doc Dan is holding, even squeezing the teddy bear’s hand, a sign that he is rekindling with his lost childhood. We are getting closer to the revelation behind the photograph — the day doc Dan has never willingly shown to Joo Jaekyung.

(chapter 19). Observe that in the penthouse, doc Dan has never placed the frame (chapter 79) on the night table.

And what is the other denominator between episode 19 and the amusement park?

Theft.
Stolen childhood.
Stolen confession.
Stolen clarity. (chapter 84)

Exactly like in the cabin, (chapter 19) the words on the phone are inaudible. And now, you comprehend why I came to link the athlete’s blurred words to embrace and longing, as the grandmother’s embrace couldn’t diminish or erase the child’s pain. Finally, Jinx-philes can detect another pattern, the absence of gaze. Not only the boy can not see the person on the phone, but also the characters are turning their back to the readers which reinforces the mystery surrounding the conversation and the reactions of the listeners.

Now, connect it with the lost teddy bear (chapter 21) and (chapter 47). Dan once had toys — proof that once, someone loved him enough to give him gifts which contrasts to the wolf’s childhood. (chapter 84) Every time innocence is ripped away, a teddy bear disappears from the story.

So what if Jaekyung’s whispered sentence — a gift of raw affection — triggered the memory of another gift? What if the words under the fireworks echoed the tone of something said just before Dan’s world collapsed?

If this is the case, then doc Dan did not miss the confession entirely. (chapter 84) He remembered something far more painful. It is important, because by remembering his past, he can regain his own identity and get stronger mentally and emotionally. The scene in the cabin represents the positive version of the locker room, which signifies the return of “trust”. That’s why I am more than ever convinced that something at the weight-in (chapter 82) will happen linked to the protagonists’ past (recent and childhood). Let’s not forget that doc Dan still has no idea what Joo Jaekyung went through after his departure: the slap, the drinking, the headache and the indifference of Team Black, just like the athlete has no idea about the blacklisting and bullying in the physical therapist’s past. (chapter 84) So by wearing black, doc Dan indicates that he is gradually becoming responsible for Team Blackand Joo Jaekyung the athlete. (chapter 84) They should realize that their life is not so different from each other, in fact they share the same pain and trauma.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Love 💘 is in the Air 🌬️🎶(part 1)

When Air Becomes Emotion

There are chapters in Jinx that feel like pauses in the storm, moments when the story seems to inhale before beating again. Chapter 83 is one of them. At first glance, it resembles a “date”: the two men wear complementary headbands — white and black, (chapter 83) mirroring the contrast of their clothes and their personalities — and the champion even leans in to lick a smear of ice cream from the therapist’s finger, an image so intimate that any passerby would mistake them for lovers. And yet, not quite. The physical therapist approaches the outing as part of his job, a therapeutic break meant to soothe his patient’s nerves (chapter 83), while the athlete approaches the day with a far more personal hope. He stages the rides strategically, intending to appear strong and reliable so that his companion might grow frightened and instinctively reach for him (chapter 83) — just as he once did in the swimming pool. (chapter 80) Beneath the surface, what looks like a date is a carefully orchestrated attempt to recreate closeness without naming it. To conclude, whereas the episode flirts with the aesthetics of a date, the intentions behind it remain mismatched, unspoken, and unresolved. It is not an official date, yet it does not behave like a simple work-related excursion either, and we as readers are left suspended in that tantalizing in-between space — as if the very moment were hanging weightless above the ground, waiting for someone to name what it truly is.

As we follow them through the amusement park, we sense something shifting. The air itself seems to vibrate (chapter 83), charged with a warmth that seasoned Jinxphiles will recognize immediately: a tension between joy and tension, duty and desire, wind and water. And then we see him — the usually anxious physical therapist — smiling with his eyes closed, arms raised, as if offering himself to the sky and joining his “companions”, the clouds. In this panel, his hands — so often clenched, overworked, or trembling from exhaustion, fear or anger — are finally resting, suspended in a gesture of pure lightness and ease.

This moment is more than simple amusement; it is a brief liberation from the weight he has carried for years. For the first time, the man who usually survives on caution allows himself to rise, to laugh, to surrender to the wind. He appears almost weightless — as if something inside him has quietly unclenched. And as I watched this unexpected lightness unfold, something else surfaced just as naturally: a melody. Soft at first, almost accidental. It felt as though the chapter itself were humming in the background — John Paul Young’s Love Is in the Air.

Its melody, repetitive and gently rising, mirrors the slow ascent of the Ferris wheel: a circular motion that builds toward a quiet crescendo. And what might strike you — almost instinctively — is how naturally the lyrics seem to align with the chapter’s emotional beats, as if each verse echoed a panel.

— suddenly these lines become more than a melody. They become a key to understanding what neither the fighter nor the therapist dares to say aloud. (chapter 83) The song becomes more than a soundtrack; it becomes an interpretive key, guiding us through the protagonists’ unspoken emotions and shadowed hesitations.

At the same time, chapter 83 mirrors earlier moments of their story—especially the opening episode and the charged night-and-morning sequence of chapters 44 (chapter 44) and 45, where desire blurred into illusion and (chapter 45) reality collided with unspoken longing. The tension between dream (chapter 83) and waking life, quietly present in the lyrics themselves, resurfaces at the park amusement as well — though its meaning will become clearer as we look deeper. In season 1, the boundaries between the celebrity fighter and his therapist were blurred in ways neither of them understood: professional on the surface, intimate in practice, yet undefined in essence. Physical closeness existed, but emotional clarity did not. Now, in the bright openness of this amusement-park afternoon and evening, we are invited to look again. What exactly is their relationship here? A supervised rest day? A moment of companionship? The first fragile step toward something tenderer that neither man is ready to articulate?

And if their bond no longer fits the categories imposed by their roles, then we are left with the question that rises with them into the purple sky: What is love—when the line between duty and desire dissolves into the air itself?

Dan — “Love is in the air, everywhere I look around”

The first verse of the song insists on perception — on looking, hearing, sensing the presence of love in the world before one dares to name it. And this is precisely what happens to the physical therapist in chapter 83. When he sees a child running toward a mascot for a hug (chapter 83) or a family laughing together (chapter 83), something in him shifts so quietly that one might miss it at first glance: he smiles. (chapter 83) Not out of politeness, not to reassure someone else, not through exhaustion or habit. He smiles because he witnesses joy — and for once, it does not make him feel smaller. It does not activate the reflexes of deprivation or fear that shaped his life from childhood to early adulthood. On the other hand, the smile he gives in that moment is not radiant, not wide, not unguarded. It is a grin, a restrained upward curve that reveals both warmth and hesitation. His joy is present — unmistakably so — but it is still contained, as if his body has not yet learned how to express happiness without caution. This small, hesitant grin shows us a man who is beginning to open, yet still holds himself back, afraid of wanting too much.

And what makes this expression so striking is what it lacks. There is no envy in his eyes. No longing to trade places with the laughing family. No bitterness. No “why not me?” His gaze does not grab at the happiness he sees; it simply receives it. This absence is meaningful. For someone who grew up experiencing loss, scarcity, and emotional withholding, joy witnessed in others often triggers one of two reactions:

  • greed (“I want that, too.”)
  • hurt (“Why can’t I have that?”)

But Dan feels neither. He simply watches and grins — shyly, lightly, almost apologetically — as if happiness is something he is allowed to observe but not yet to claim. The expression reflects the quiet discipline of someone who has spent years dampening his own desires so he wouldn’t be disappointed. His joy is limited, yes, but also genuine. It is the joy of someone who is relearning safety through the world around him, step by delicate step.

And this is precisely why the grin matters. It shows that his emotional defenses are beginning to loosen, but not collapse. He allows the warmth of the scenery to touch him, without reaching out for more. He permits himself to feel — but in moderation, in the smallest possible dose that won’t frighten him. It is, therefore, the perfect visual embodiment of the song’s opening line:

because for the first time, he is looking around with the capacity to notice, even if he still doesn’t dare to hope.

Back in episode 1, the world was something he endured: every sound (chapter 1) reminded him of responsibility , every sight (chapter 1) pulled him back to duty or scarcity. Happiness belonged to others; he lived on the margins, always working, always surviving. But here, in the brightness of the amusement park (chapter 83), his gaze is finally unshackled. He looks outward and takes in the warmth of strangers’ affection without translating it into loss or longing. (chapter 83) Like described above, he is neither envious nor resentful. Instead, he experiences a fragile form of joy — not through himself, but through others. It is indirect happiness, a borrowed ray of light, but it is still happiness.

This scene reveals a subtle but profound transformation: the world no longer feels hostile. For a child who grew up believing that everything — security, love, parents — could vanish without warning or bring pain, the outside world was always tinged with danger. Now, for the first time, it becomes a landscape where he feels safe (chapter 83), though an accident could actually occur there. This contrasts so much to his thoughts in episode 1. (chapter 1) The amusement park becomes a place in which love exists openly, visibly, harmlessly. The lyrics capture this awakening beautifully: “And I don’t know if I’m being foolish… but it’s something that I must believe in.” (chapter 83) This is exactly what his smile expresses. He has no proof that love could include him. No certainty that he deserves it. No assurance that daring to hope won’t lead to disappointment. And yet, he believes — not because someone reassures him, but because his own senses finally give him permission.

When he smiles at the child or the family, he is not imagining himself in their place, nor projecting himself into some idealized domestic future. He simply lets the warm air settle in his chest. Happiness exists. It exists near him. It exists without punishing him. And if it exists, then perhaps — perhaps — he is not excluded from it forever. This is the first real beat of hope, the quiet reawakening of a heart that has spent too long underwater. The therapist who once sank in the pool out of fear now rises through the air of the amusement park simply by witnessing life unfold around him. His joy does not come from the ride; it initially comes from seeing love in the air, exactly as the song describes.

Yet this joy remains delicate, tentative — the kind that sits quietly at the edge of his lips. His smile is not wide or unguarded; it is a small, restrained grin, (chapter 83) a gesture that reveals how carefully he still manages his own emotions. For a man who learned early in life to minimize his desires to avoid disappointment, this gentle openness is already a form of courage. And then something unexpected happens.

Dan — “Love is in the air, In the risin’ of the sun


The moment he realizes that the fighter (chapter 83) — the man who seems invincible and superior in every domain — has never been to an amusement park, a spark ignites inside him. (chapter 83) His heart, which moments earlier beat quietly in observation, begins to race with excitement. For the first time, he is equal to the athlete. At the same time, for the first time, he is the one with experience or power. 😲 How so? For the first time, age becomes real (chapter 83): the physical therapist is twenty-nine, the athlete twenty-six.

Dan’s seniority — long irrelevant, long suppressed — begins to surface, not through conscious thought, but through instinct. He does not step forward because he is older; he steps forward because, for once, he knows something the fighter does not: his own desires. His body moves before his mind names the change. His voice lifts before he understands. (chapter 83) He suddenly steps into a role he has never been allowed to inhabit before: that of the knowledgeable one, the guide, the hyung.

And this moment exposes a quiet truth about his past that the story had always hinted at: he has never been allowed to inhabit his age. (chapter 78) Dan’s lifetime of passivity did not come from lack of intelligence or lack of will; it came from conditioning. He was raised by a guardian who loved him, yes, but who also unintentionally infantilized him. He was not allowed to question her words and decisions. His grandmother, who was not just older but twice his senior in authority, experience, and certainty, occupied every position of knowledge in his life. She decided what was dangerous, what was sensible, what was allowed, and what was forbidden. Her worldview dominated so completely that Dan’s own judgment never had room to form. His grandmother’s authority was absolute — not malicious, but unquestioned — and Dan learned very early that his role in the household was not to decide but to obey.

The clearest illustration appears in Chapter 7, when she panics about the money he could spend for her treatment and immediately demands: (chapter 7) As if a twenty-nine-year-old man — a working professional — were incapable of making a responsible financial decision. Dan’s “Of course not!” is instinctive, defensive, almost childlike, exposing the emotional hierarchy between them. In her eyes, he is not an adult with agency, but a boy who must be corrected, cautioned, overridden.

And yet — paradoxically — he was forced to become an adult far too early which the grandmother acknowledges. (chapter 65) However, observe that here, she feigns ignorance, she doesn’t know the origins of this metamorphosis. On the other hand, it is clear that she is well aware of the cause. He worked to support them both. He paid the hospital bills. He negotiated the debts. He shouldered the responsibility of survival.

And the greatest irony? The debt is in his name. (chapter 17) Legally, financially, the burden is his. But emotionally, symbolically, he was never allowed to own that responsibility; it was neither recognized nor validated. Instead, his grandmother continued to treat him as a child incapable of navigating the world on his own — even though he was the one saving them both.

This contradiction shaped him: He learned duty without authority, responsibility without recognition, adulthood without autonomy. He was taught to carry the weight of the world but never the permission to decide how to carry it. And now, we finally comprehend why the physical therapist remained so passive throughout Season 2. By giving him choices (chapter 77) and asking for his opinion (chapter 83), Joo Jaekyung is liberating his fated partner.

And this is precisely why the moment in Chapter 83 hits so deeply. (chapter 83) For the first time, he is not the silent follower but the one who leads. For the first time, his taste and desire matter.
For the first time, he is allowed to choose — where to walk, what to try, how to spend the day.

And in that instant, something long-suppressed rises to the surface: the part of him that was never permitted to grow up. His racing heart is not just excitement; it is the awakening of a self that had been dormant for years — the self who finally, quietly, steps into the light. As if echoing John Paul Young’s quiet promise,
“Love is in the air, in the risin’ of the sun,”
something inside him rises too — a self long buried under duty and financial strain. Chapter 83 unfolds beneath the sun, but its emotional lighting belongs to him: not chronological morning, but the symbolic morning of a man finally waking up. We see this most clearly in the moment he blushes and murmurs: (chapter 83). His face, half in shadow and half in light, appears as though it is gradually emerging from darkness. It feels like dawn breaking across his features — the soft illumination of newfound boldness, desire, and possibility. Even if the scene takes place in the afternoon, his face carries the light of morning, the brightness of a heart beginning to beat for itself. (chapter 83) And this is why his heart speeds up. Why he blushes. Why he suddenly moves with purpose. Why he becomes the guide: “I’ll be your guide today!”

This is not merely excitement. It is the first time his joy has weight and his seniority has meaning. It is the first time he can lead without fear. It is the first time he can offer joy rather than labor. In this fleeting, luminous moment, the therapist steps into the adulthood he earned long ago — not out of duty, but out of freedom. And paradoxically, by stepping into adulthood, he is finally allowed to reclaim something he was robbed of: childhood. Thus he receives a huge Teddy Bear from the athlete. (chapter 83) The toy from his childhood had vanished, probably thrown away because it had lost its role and doc Dan had no longer the time to play. At the same time, we should question ourselves who had offered it to doc Dan. (chapter 47)

The man who had to shoulder debts, bills, and survival before he even finished school now gets to experience what ordinary children take for granted — wearing a headband, tasting ice cream, pointing excitedly toward the next ride.
His joy is not childish; it is restorative. It is the healing of a stage of life he never truly lived. And with every shift of light and fresh air, a new part of Dan awakens — his agency, his boldness, his playfulness, even his shy but stubborn desires. (chapter 83) And this awakening has another consequence: for the first time, money disappears as a source of fear.

Dan, who used to feel uncomfortable in front of presents or at the slightest expense, suddenly moves with ease. (chapter 83) He accepts the fighter’s generosity without guilt (chapter 83), yet offers his own in return — buying the drinks, fetching the ice cream, participating in the flow of giving rather than shrinking from it. (chapter 83) No one questions cost; no one frames affection as financial burden. This reciprocity is gentle, natural, unspoken. It stands in stark contrast to Heesung (chapter 32), who immediately reduced generosity to calculation. He implied that doc Dan couldn’t afford it. His smile was a lure; his kindness, a transaction.

But with Jaekyung, Dan is not a debtor or a burden. Money stops being a battlefield. He is simply someone who can say yes and accept a huge Teddy Bear. (chapter 83) In fact, he loves the “gift”. He is someone who can offer something back (the drink, but also concerns (chapter 83) Someone who can choose.

Here, in the sunlit corners of the amusement park, the therapist is no longer the boy (chapter 65) who was forced into adulthood nor the adult who was treated like a child. He is finally both: (chapter 83) That’s the reason why Mingwa placed a boy with his father between the couple in this image. At the same time, she also insinuated that Joo Jaekyung was acting not only as a father, but also as a “boy”. That’s why love is in the air… they come to accept their true self. The two protagonists are both adults and kids!
Now, doc Dan is free enough to play and enjoy the rides (chapter 83), and respected enough to lead. And in that rare space, something long dormant begins to bloom, the return of the little boy’s innocence and smile! (chapter 83) “Love is in the air, In the whisper of the trees” Keep in mind that according to my interpretation, the tree embodies the physical therapist.

Just two people sharing the cost of a shared day — naturally, effortlessly, without negotiation. It is a small detail, but it signals a tectonic emotional shift: he no longer sees himself as someone who must earn affection through restraint, sacrifice, or poverty. He no longer sees himself as a burden!

Joo Jaekyung — “Love is in the air, in the thunder of the sea”

If Dan awakens in air, Jaekyung is pulled, almost violently, toward water. (chapter 83) The second half of the verse — “in the thunder of the sea” — finds its embodiment not in waves or ocean spray, but in a wooden flying boat swinging high above an amusement park. (chapter 83) It is here, of all places, that the façade of the undefeated champion bends, flickers, and reveals the frightened boy hiding beneath the man. (chapter 83)

At first, the athlete walks through the park with a confidence bordering on theatrical. He speaks like someone who knows the rules of amusement rides (chapter 83), although the knowledge is borrowed, second-hand, quoted from “the guys at the gym.” He buys cute headbands (chapter 83), pays for almost everything (chapter 83), selects a giant teddy bear as a prize. He tries to perform adulthood, to appear experienced, reliable, worldly — the one who leads. That’s why his reaction after the ride on the boat resembles a lot to the father: scared of rides (chapter 83) And yet this performance is delicate. One touch is all it takes to fracture it. (chapter 83) Because the truth is that Jaekyung, too, is both an adult and a child. Thus the author used many “chibi” in this chapter: (chapter 83) He is the man who finances the day, but also the boy who has never stepped inside an amusement park. (chapter 83) He is the warrior who never loses, but also the boy who becomes jealous of a rollercoaster because it made Dan smile. (chapter 83) He is the emperor of the ring, but also the boy whose innocence was stolen far too early through neglect, violence, and trauma.

This duality surfaces even during the ride moves. (chapter 83) When he sees Dan laughing with the wind in his hair, he is first moved. (chapter 83) For the first time, he truly notices the doctor’s joy and happiness. However, later his thoughts tighten into a childish pout: (chapter 83) The jealousy is not malicious — it is heartbreakingly sincere. It belongs to someone who has never been the source of gentle affection. Someone who has always been valued for power, not warmth. Someone whose earliest memories taught him that attention comes only when he performs. What he fails to notice that he is still behind the doctor’s happiness. How so? It is because he was the one who had suggested this trip!!

But let’s return our attention to the boat, the ride who combines water and air. The great athlete — the dragon of the cage, the man who terrifies opponents simply by standing in front of them — folds inward like a frightened child. (chapter 83) As the ride swings, his fingers clamp around the safety bar, his head drops, his breathing stutters, and his posture collapses into defensive instinct. The motion is too familiar. Too close to something his body remembers even when his mind tries to forget. One might think, it is related to his fear of fall. However, it is only partially true. His dizziness on the flying boat is not simply fear of a ride, nor the comedic reversal of roles between the fearless champion and the timid therapist. It is the physical echo of a lifetime of trauma — the kind the body never forgets.

A fighter’s training does not harden the vestibular system; it punishes it. Years of repeated blows (chapter 72)— even those that fall short of a diagnosable concussion — accumulate inside the inner ear like invisible fractures. The system responsible for balance, spatial orientation, and visual stabilization becomes worn, over-calibrated to impact but under-prepared for fluctuation. A man can be conditioned to withstand punches that would floor an ordinary person, yet still falter when the world tilts beneath him.

This is exactly what we witness on the flying boat. Jaekyung turns pale long before the motion becomes violent. His breathing shifts. His body stiffens. He clings to the safety bar not out of embarrassment, but because his senses are betraying him. These are classic signs of vestibular sensitivity — the lightheadedness, the nausea triggered by visual motion, the momentary whiteouts where vision loses stability, the delayed recovery after sudden shifts in height. Boxers experience it. Wrestlers experience it. MMA fighters live with it. But Jaekyung’s case carries a sharper edge.

Because his vulnerability is not merely the byproduct of sport.

It carries the ghost of childhood instability — the disorientation of being struck by someone who should have protected him, the instinctive bracing for impact, the nights when the world spun not from amusement but from fear. (chapter 72) The body he trained into steel was built upon a nervous system shaped by violence. Let’s not forget that before his father died, the latter hit his head with a bottle once again. (chapter 73) Finally, he started fighting at such a young age, (chapter 72), actually boxing at such a young age is limited to non-contact activities like footwork drills, shadowboxing, jump rope, basic strength & coordination, bag work with very light gloves. So there is no sparring, no head contact. (chapter 72)

It can survive force, but unpredictability — the rocking of a boat, the sudden drop of a height — awakens old alarms he never learned to silence. And now, you comprehend why Mingwa placed this panel just before they got on the boat! (chapter 83) This is what his father should have done in the past.

This is why the flying boat becomes his “thunder of the sea.” Not a thrill. A warning.

While Dan rises with the air (chapter 83) — light, joyful, awakened — Jaekyung is dragged back toward the element he once drowned in. His dizziness is the somatic memory of a boy who learned to endure chaos by stillness, who now finds himself unable to breathe when the world refuses to stay still.

And yet, even after this destabilizing moment, the athlete refuses to give up (chapter 83), thus they try other rides. It is important, because it implies that Joo Jaekyung is gradually leaving the water! This explicates why later something extraordinary happens. (chapter 83) He opens one eye — just one — and in that tiny gesture, the entire emotional axis of the chapter tilts. It is not the instinct of a fighter checking his surroundings; it is the instinct of a man searching for someone. The flying boat lurches beneath him, the air rushing past in violent arcs, yet all his focus narrows to a single point of stillness: Kim Dan.
(chapter 83) This moment mirrors Dan’s earlier “sunrise” panel, but in reverse. Where Dan’s face emerged from shadow into light, Jaekyung’s eye emerges from strain into clarity.
Where Dan stepped into awakening, Jaekyung clings to consciousness, seeking an anchor.

And that is why this panel is so quietly devastating. He does not open his eye to judge the ride or assess danger;
he opens it to find the lightness he cannot produce within himself, due to the guilt he is carrying in himself.

He is pale, dizzy, destabilized — the seat rocks like a wave he cannot fight — and instinctively, his gaze reaches outward for the one thing that steadies him. And there he sees it:

Dan smiling. Dan at ease. Dan radiant in the wind. (chapter 83)

It hits him like a beam of sunlight breaking through nausea, fear, and vertigo. (chapter 83) In the song’s language, this is his “rising of the sun” moment — not because he feels lightness, but because he perceives it in someone else. The warmth he cannot generate becomes visible in the face of the man beside him.

For Dan, love rises like morning.
For Jaekyung, love enters like light through a crack — a single opened eye.

And in that sliver of brightness, he breathes again. It is a pure parallel to the song’s line — “Love is in the air, everywhere I look around” — because that is exactly what he does: he looks around, and his gaze lands on Dan. The doctor’s smile becomes the only stable point in the shifting world. Jaekyung’s competitiveness, his jealousy of the rollercoaster, his greed for Dan’s smile — all of it collapses into something softer once his body falters.

For the first time, he allows himself to rely on someone else. To conclude, the ride — with its water-like arcs and unpredictable shifts — becomes a symbolic reenactment of the environment that shaped him. This is the song’s “thunder of the sea”: violent motion, destabilizing memory, fear disguised as nausea.

Yet despite his struggle, something remarkable awakens. Joo Jaekyung is still enjoying his time with his fated partner. Thus he wished to stay longer there. (chapter 83) It is because he enjoys listening to doc Dan. He enjoys his voice and words. This is not the internal voice of a fighter; it is the voice of someone falling in love without yet understanding how strong his feelings are.

He is too dizzy to perform adulthood, too overwhelmed to hide behind rank or reputation. The fragility he has always repressed leaks through every line of his body — and for the first time, he lets it. Thus he follows his heart and wins a huge teddy bear and buys headbands.

To conclude, the flying boat marks the moment (chapter 83),when Joo Jaekyung is stripped of his armor. The amusement park returns him to something raw, trembling, unfinished. But instead of shame, there is warmth. Instead of anger, there is gratitude. (chapter 83) Instead of retreat, there is reaching — a quiet but unmistakable reaching toward the man beside him. The problem is that he is still too scared to voice his thoughts in front of the physical therapist.

This represents another step of Jaekyung’s transformation: the shift from solitary dragon to partner, from survivor to someone who longs to be understood. And here, the parallel with his earlier metaphor becomes striking.
Back in Chapter 29, he described challengers as hyenas nipping at his heels , (chapter 29) a swarm of predators waiting for him to slow down. His career was an ocean of teeth and waves — constant motion, constant danger. Thus I detected a progression. In episode 69, he jumped onto the boat (chapter 69), then at the amusement park, the boat was in the air (chapter 83) Thus I deduce that the boat is “the last wave” he rides.

Once it stops, his world no longer moves with the violence of water. When he ascends the Ferris wheel (chapter 83), he rises into air — the first air he has breathed without fear.

He leaves the sea behind. He leaves the waves of fighters behind. He leaves the ocean of survival behind. Therefore I am sensing that the athlete is about to change his career and path. He will stop acting as a fighter only. That moment of ascent — quiet, suspended, pink-lit — is the moment he finally becomes what he was always meant to be: not prey chased across waves, not a beast trapped in turbulence, but a dragon lifting into the sky.

And the first breath of that ascent — the first hint of air entering lungs long constrained — begins beside Dan, in a gently swinging gondola at sunset.

The two men meet there in the subtle overlap between air and sea —
between awakening and unraveling,
between lightness and instability,
between childhood and adulthood.

The whisper of the trees meets the thunder of the sea.
And the love that neither can yet name floats quietly between them.

The Ferris Wheel — Where Dream and Reality Finally Meet

The emotional architecture of Chapter 83 only reveals its full depth when placed beside the earlier night-and-morning dyad of Chapters 44 and 45. Those chapters form a pair of opposites: a false dream (chapter 44) followed by a false dawn. Chapter 44 unfolds in artificial night — neon (chapter 44) and night lamp (chapter 44) — a landscape where nothing is stable and nothing is truly felt. Jaekyung is drunk, his consciousness slipping in and out of awareness; Dan, overwhelmed and inexperienced (when it comes to relationship), projects meaning onto a moment that cannot hold it. He wishes time would “stand still,” but he is wishing against reality. The entire scene is built on one-sided desire. The intimacy is sensory, not emotional. Dan longs to “get to know” (chapter 44) someone who is not present, rather drunk. But getting to know someone means communication. It is precisely the illusion captured in the song’s confession: I don’t know if I’m just dreaming… I don’t know if I see it true… And he wasn’t seeing it true; he was dreaming alone.

Then comes Chapter 45 — cruel daylight, harsh and flat, the sun stripped of warmth. (chapter 45) Morning light becomes a scalpel. There is no magic left, no gentleness, no room for misunderstanding. Jaekyung’s bluntness (chapter 45) annihilates the illusion Dan had constructed the night before. This is not heartbreak; it is disenchantment, the almost physical pain of realizing a moment meant nothing to the other person involved. Chapter 44 was the dream, and Chapter 45 was its punishment. Together they show a relationship out of sync, two people whose desires never touch at the same time. One wishes for home and attention, while the other has no idea that he is loved. So far, he has never heard this: “I love you”. One tries to reach out emotionally, while the other remains absent. However, when they are both lucid, none of them are totally honest, as they are self confused. Thus they are in two different worlds.

Chapter 83 is the first time those worlds merge. Hence we have the purple sky! (chapter 83) This scene confirmed my previous interpretation about the symbolism of the blue/golden hour.

Everything that failed in Chapters 44 and 45 is repaired — not by repetition, but by transformation. (chapter 83) The setting is no longer artificial night nor cold morning. It is true daylight — warm, golden, forgiving. Both men are fully conscious. Both are vulnerable. Both are honest. Both are sober. And for the first time, both want the same thing at the same time. This mutuality is the quiet miracle that turns an ordinary Ferris wheel cabin into a sacred emotional space. When Dan looks toward the horizon and murmurs, (chapter 83), the wolf thinks, with disarming sincerity, he is thankful toward the physical therapist. ” The wish that destroyed them in Chapter 44 now binds them together in Chapter 83. Suspended high in the sky, they share the same breath, the same light, the same fragile desire. This is where John Paul Young’s lyrics finally find their home: And I don’t know if I’m being foolish… don’t know if I’m being wise… but it’s something that I must believe in… and it’s there when I look in your eyes. And now it is the champion’s turn to become brave and confess his feelings to doc Dan, but like it was just revealed: Joo Jaekyung refused to repeat his confession! (chapter 83)

And the Ferris wheel forces them to talk to each other and face that truth. Unlike that night when Jaekyung could simply roll over and fall asleep, or that morning when Dan could retreat into silence, the Ferris wheel offers no escape route. They are trapped together — enclosed, elevated, suspended. Neither can walk away. (chapter 45) Neither can pretend not to feel. Neither can avoid the other’s gaze. They must see each other as they are, in that moment. And miraculously, neither flinches. There is no denial, no deflection, no cruelty. Only two men who finally dare to look. Whereas Chapter 44 let them hide behind darkness and drunkenness, and Chapter 45 forced them into cold exposure, Chapter 83 holds them in a gentle, suspended in-between: the space where dream and reality finally meet.

And Mingwa gives this moment a witness (chapter 83) — the enormous Teddy Bear Jaekyung won earlier that day. In the cramped Ferris wheel cabin, the bear sits with them, silent and soft, absorbing every unspoken emotion. It becomes the guardian of the day’s truth, the counterweight to the night of Chapter 44. Nothing from this moment can be denied, rewritten, or dismissed as drunken illusion. The bear remembers. It carries the warmth of Dan’s rediscovered childhood, the soreness of Jaekyung’s fear on the boat, the sweetness of their awkwardness, the courage of their mutual wish. Later, when Dan sees the bear again, he will remember not the fear of falling, not the dizziness, not the awkwardness — but the moment Jaekyung looked at him and apologized to him. Hence later the doctor is seen looking at his present (chapter 84) and holding the bear’s hand. (chapter 84) The bear contains the view, the sunset, the air, the honesty — everything that neither of them can run away from now.

This is why the Ferris wheel scene is more than a romantic interlude; it is a structural correction of the narrative wound created in Chapters 44 and 45. It does not repeat the night. It redeems it. It heals the morning. It merges the suspended magic of Chapter 44 with the daylight honesty of Chapter 45 — but only because both are willing, present, open. For the first time, their timing aligns. For the first time, neither is dreaming alone. For the first time, love is truly in the air, not as fantasy nor delusion, but as a shared, breathing reality. But wait… in episode 84, there is no “I like you,” no dramatic declaration, no romance in words. So it looks like my association was wrong. (chapter 84) Instead, what rises between them is something quieter and far more intimate: penance. The fighter does not confess love; he confesses his faults. He does not offer desire; he offers regret. In Jinx, this is the deeper beginning of love, because an apology centers the other person’s pain rather than one’s own feelings. Then Jaekyung admits he was wrong, he gives Dan something far more valuable than a confession — he gives recognition. The hamster has rights, he can express his thoughts and feelings.

This is why the air in the cabin feels charged despite the lack of explicit emotion. Love appears not as a statement but as a change in behavior, a cessation of superiority, a willingness to repair what was broken. For the first time, they meet on equal ground: the athlete stripped of his dominance, the therapist freed from his habitual submission. Neither plays a role; both simply exist honestly in the same small space. They are both humans.

And in this suspended moment, John Paul Young’s refrain drifts quietly into the scene—not as music, but as meaning. Because what unfolds in the cabin is exactly the tension the song names:

Both men stand at that threshold. Dan is wise enough to hope again, hence he is holding the teddy bear’s hand (chapter 84), but foolish enough to remain cautious and remain silent. (chapter 84)

Jaekyung is foolish enough not repeat his words (chapter 84) (chapter 84), but wise enough to regret immediately. (chapter 84) He is also wise enough to care deeply and repair instead of demand. Thus his apology feels so genuine.

Their intimacy is not built on certainty but on uncertainty bravely shared. Not on declarations, but on communication—hesitant, imperfect, but real. Not on fantasy, but on the courage to face each other without hiding. And that’s the common point between these two places in the air (chapter 45) (chapter 84) (chapter 84) Both men are not brave enough to confess their true feelings to their fated partner. Hence both came to regret their actions. (chapter 46) (chapter 46) The champion also played “dumb”. Thus the pillow got punched later. (chapter 84) He shouldn’t have thrown away his “feelings”. So by rubbing the hand of the toy, doc Dan is gradually expressing the return of “his greed and hope”.

The Ferris wheel becomes the place where foolishness and wisdom merge, where vulnerability replaces power, and where air itself begins to carry the shape of a future neither of them can yet name…but both can finally feel.

I was almost finished, when chapter 84 got released. Hence I could enrich the last part.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Watery Point 🔵 Of No Return ⤵️

Water and Power

Two years ago, I published the analysis At the crossroads: between 🤍, 💙, and ❤️‍🔥 and it has become the most read essay on my blog. [27.3 K views] It traced Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan’s first day off together—the fateful swim in chapters 27-28 —when Joo Jaekyung’s apparent selfishness became the catalyst for Kim Dan’s first spiritual awakening. There, the water served as both mirror and baptism: a liquid threshold through which the doctor began to accept sexuality not as sin or submission, but as part of being alive. I had compared the athlete to a dragon holding his yeouiju. The pool stood for motion, rebirth, and the courage to breathe underwater—to trust one’s body rather than deny it.

Though the grandmother was never mentioned, I had sensed her ghostly presence in the grandson’s thoughts and actions. In her youth, the ocean looked beautiful to her (chapter 53), yet she kept her distance. Observe that she only talked about one time experience. She sensed its danger and built her life on the solid ground of caution, duty, and control. In other words, she belongs to the world of the shore (chapter 53) —the solid, the measurable, the safe. Her fascination with the sea’s beauty reveals the limits of her perception: she judges by what is visible, by surface calm and reflected light. The ocean entrances her precisely because she refuses to imagine what lies beneath. For her, beauty is something to be looked at, not entered. Depth implies risk; darkness suggests loss of control.

That is why she keeps her distance. She fears what cannot be seen or accounted for — the unseen currents, the hidden life beneath the glittering skin of water. Her faith is built on appearances, not intuition; on the stability of the shore, not the movement of the tide. Thus I deduce that she never learned to swim. To her, entering the water would mean surrendering control, accepting fluidity, and admitting the existence of life below the surface. This means, swimming would expose the falsehood of her philosophy. That’s why I come to the following deduction that to her, swimming was unnecessary; one simply had to stay on land and hope never to fall in. But the pool, unlike the ocean, demanded a choice: enter, move, the pleasure of being below the surface (chapter 28) and learn that not everything can be postponed or entrusted to someone else. Water, in this sense, rejects fatalism. It calls for motion, for risk, for personal responsibility.

What the grandmother built on faith in others was quietly undone by breath and muscle. (chapter 80) And that intuition resurfaced and was confirmed in episode 80, when another day off brings the couple back to the pool. This time, the doctor steps into the water willingly. (chapter 80) He is no longer the man waiting to be rescued; he is the man learning how to swim. The champion’s words (chapter 80) distill the new doctrine: don’t wait for salvation (chapter 80), create your own buoyancy. Between the first swim (chapter 27) and this second lies the true point of no return—where superficial judgment turns into reflection, dependency into self-trust (chapter 80) and the rejection of powerlessness, (chapter 80), and fear of closeness (chapter 28) into the first stirrings of love (chapter 80).

Shin Okja’s private religion was one of delegation: wait for the right person, the right moment, the right help to come. That’s why she never got the chance to return to the ocean. (chapter 53) Safety lay in patience and dependence. Even when she later spoke with the champion by the sea, she avoided mentioning the ocean —as if to deny that any movement beyond her control could exist.

(chapter 65)

One might argue that I am overinterpreting, since the grandmother’s presence seems unrelated to the swimming pool and tied instead to her graduation gift—the gray hoodie. (chapter 80) Yet her absence from the pool scene is precisely what reveals her theology of avoidance. The pool was never her domain because her life revolves around work, not pleasure. She has no notion of rest without guilt, no concept of joy detached from utility. For her, swimming would appear frivolous—something “unnecessary” as long as one stays on solid ground. Jinx-philes should keep in mind that she never gave such a task to Joo Jaekyung. Her instructions to him were always practical, delegating care outward: take him back to Seoul, bring him to a big hospital and make sure he’s safe. (chapter 65) When she sees them together, her first reaction is not pride or relief but mild reproach— doc Dan should have left already. (chapter 78) The subtext is unmistakable: she expected obedience, efficiency, not attachment. Furthermore, her final instruction—“Make sure you see a doctor regularly” (chapter 78) sounds like ordinary concern, yet it hides her familiar logic of blame. It is as if she were implying that Joo Jaekyung has failed to fulfill her favor because Kim Dan has resisted care. In her eyes, the grandson is still the one responsible for trouble; the athlete’s role remains that of the dependable proxy who must “fix” him. What makes this moment striking is her tone of urgency, so unlike her habitual fatalism. The woman who once repeated “I’m the same as always” (chapter 65) suddenly speaks as though time is running out. (chapter 78) Her words, however, do not signal newfound insight—they only reinforce her desire to keep control, to ensure that someone else continues her mission of delegated care.

But what she interprets as negligence is actually independence. The champion is no longer following her religion of work and duty; he is inventing a new one based on choice (chapter 77), respect and care. What she calls delay is, in truth, meditation and transformation.

Presents: The Gray Hoodie and the Lady

If the grandmother’s religion was built on work, the gray hoodie was its sacred relic. (chapter 80) It was her graduation gift, yet it had nothing to do with his new profession or status. In contrast, the first episode already shows Kim Dan in a blue therapist’s uniform, name tag neatly pinned — a garment he must have purchased himself. (chapter 1) Traditionally, a graduation present helps the recipient embark on a career — like for example, a watch, a suit, or even a briefcase — symbols of adult entry into the job market. By offering him a hoodie instead, she unconsciously devalued her grandson’s professional worth. The garment belongs to the domestic sphere, not the workplace; it wraps him in comfort rather than readiness. In a moment meant to celebrate his arrival into public life, she reinscribes him into the private one — the house, the caretaker role, the obedient child. He doesn’t look like someone who went to university.

The gesture, whether she intended it or not, tells him that his identity has no market value beyond her recognition. The gift affirms warmth but denies competence; it soothes rather than equips. In addition, the grandmother’s choice of a hoodie exposes her lack of investment in that future. Her pride ended at the diploma; what came next was his responsibility. (chapter 47) There was no curiosity about his career, no acknowledgment of his competence—only the quiet satisfaction that through her endurance, she had produced a “doctor.” In the graduation photo, she even wears the mortarboard herself, smiling with the pride of someone who believes the diploma justifies a lifetime of sacrifice. Her grandson’s success confirms her own virtue; his “adulthood” validates her survival. This question to the athlete exposes her lack of interests in his profession: (chapter 65)

But her act of giving, like her act of living, was book-keeping disguised as affection. (chapter 41) While dying, she reduces love to an equation of productivity: “Dan, it’s important to give back as much as you take.” The verb do anchors her worldview — love must be measurable, visible, earned through action. To do good by someone means to labor for them, not to rest beside them. What caught my attention is that neither doctor (chapter 27) nor the champion employs the expression “vacation” or “break”. (chapter 80) Why? It is because they never experienced a break. We have to envision that the “hamster” must have followed his grandmother, when he was not busy studying or working. Both main leads never experienced a real vacation. They say a day off, as if the day itself didn’t really exist, as if it were a temporary pause between “real” time. In their inherited logic, only work gives time its value; everything else evaporates. The grandmother’s way of loving has turned rest into an absence, something unworthy of being named. However, observe that there’s a gradual change in doc Dan’s vocabulary: (chapter 80) The problem is that for the hamster, only the athlete is worthy of getting his rest. It still doesn’t belong to his world.

Shin Okja’s universe contains no category for leisure, play, or shared time; such things produce nothing, and what produces nothing has no value. Even when she worries — “You haven’t eaten?” (chapter 5) the focus remains mechanical. Eating is fuel; sleep is maintenance. But rest, in the sense of surrender, stillness, or joy, is foreign to her lexicon.

Her self-image as a tireless worker (chapter 47) is, in truth, a legend she wrote about herself. When Kim Dan recalls that “she’s never had a day’s rest,” the statement reveals more about his belief than about her reality. The woman who claimed endless labor also knew the comfort of “weekends” (chapter 30) — she watched The Fine Line, the very drama that made Choi Heesung famous. The detail seems trivial, yet it exposes everything: she had leisure (chapter 30), she simply refused to call it that. Watching television was permitted because it was passive, solitary, and could be rationalized as recuperation, not pleasure. In contrast, genuine rest — time shared, chosen, or joyful — never existed in her vocabulary. What she denied was not the existence of rest but the act of resting with him. She kept her downtime to herself, as if peace were a private possession. For her, love meant providing, not accompanying. Yet true care requires presence — sharing is caring, as the saying goes. [For more read this essay: Sharing is caring ] To share one’s time is to acknowledge another person’s worth beyond utility. Shin Okja never did that; she offered comfort but withheld companionship.This is why Kim Dan later struggles to accept that Joo Jaekyung is willing to spend his own time on him — the champion does what the grandmother never did: he makes room for him in his rest. His attempt is to make the main lead smile, to make him happy.

Her statement in chapter 65 — (chapter 65) displays that she perceives her grandson’s exhaustion not as suffering but as malfunction, as if the human were a device that could be recalibrated through work and pills. That’s why her favors revolves about living conditions, but not about his “happiness”. Perhaps she genuinely hoped that the drugs and the stability of a “regular job” with the champion would realign him, as though routine alone could fix what grief and deprivation had unbalanced.

What she never imagines, however, is that balance might emerge not from regulation but from relationship — not from control, but from the unpredictable rhythm of living. Thus the readers can hear or sense the heart racing of the protagonists.

But let’s return our attention to the grandmother. Because she keeps an account, affection becomes another form of work, and gratitude a form of repayment. She cannot imagine love that simply exists — it must be done. Every gesture had to be accounted for and eventually entered into the invisible ledger of “what I’ve done for you.” For her, a gift was never spontaneous; it was a transactional record. It had to suggest effort without truly requiring it—so she could later recall it as proof of trouble taken. But why is she doing this? Ultimately, Shin Okja’s greatest flaw is not cruelty but distrust. She never truly believes her grandson can stand on his own. She fears that he might take the wrong path. (chapter 65) Her constant bookkeeping—every favor tallied, every gift framed as trouble—betrays a hidden fear: that if she stops keeping score, she will lose him. Rather than grant him autonomy, she entrusts him to another caretaker. Sending him to the champion is not an act of faith but of resignation, a way to offload responsibility while maintaining the illusion of control.

When she “went out of her way,” she made sure the phrase itself became part of the gift. The author let transpire this philosophy in two events. In an earlier memory, the child Kim Dan watches his grandmother return home from the cold night (chapter 11), scarf tied under her chin, carrying a single sweet bun. She doesn’t need to say she “went out of her way”—her action already proclaims it. The effort is the gift. (chapter 11) That simple walk to the store becomes a moral event, proof of affection through fatigue. (chapter 11) Even the smallest purchase is framed as sacrifice. The sweet bread itself—a cheap red bean bun—is less nourishment than testimony: “Look what I endured for you.” If he had followed her, he would have seen that it didn’t take so much effort and money to buy the “present”. Finally, he had to share the sweet bread with his grandmother.

This moment sets the pattern for her entire philosophy of giving. Love must be earned through trouble; care must leave a trace of effort. The gesture matters more than the joy it brings. In her world, affection is always accompanied by labor, and gratitude becomes indistinguishable from guilt.This pattern repeats across her life. To “go out of one’s way” (chapter 80) becomes both proof of care and a claim for repayment. Hence she went to school or university for the ceremonies. However, such an action stands for social tradition and normality. She gives little, but ensures it feels heavy. Each offering, no matter how modest, is wrapped in the language of fatigue and obligation. The child, in turn, learns that to be loved is to feel guilty, and to receive is to incur debt.

The hoodie later inherits this same emotional script. It’s the adult version of the birthday bun: humble, practical, and accompanied by invisible conditions. Both are gifts that measure sacrifice, not joy. When she says she “went through so much” to raise him, she isn’t lying—she is testifying, recording her hardship in fabric and flour. However, pay attention to the picture from the hamster’s memory: (chapter 47) Where is the gray hoodie? That day, he only received a bouquet of flowers. Its absence in the photo is revealing. A gray hoodie would have looked out of place beside formal suits and robes; it would have exposed her thrift. The omission is both aesthetic and psychological: she hides the evidence of small-minded practicality beneath the spectacle of maternal pride. What was invisible at the ceremony later re-emerges in episode 80 (chapter 80), and with it, the emotional economy she built.

It is not far-fetched to imagine that the hoodie came paired with a favor or transaction (chapter 53) —perhaps the signing of the loan. “You’re a doctor now; you’ll pay it off quickly.” (chapter 80) In her eyes, generosity always justified expectation. The flowers were for display; the hoodie was the contract.

That’s why her gifts always come from the same palette: dull, neutral, gray. Even the birthday sequence is bathed in that dim, ochre light where warmth looks like exhaustion. The gray hoodie continues this chromatic philosophy—safety without brightness, affection without ease.

This explains why the hoodie feels less like a present and more like a receipt. At the same time, it denies him “adulthood” too. A sweater, not a suit; warmth, not celebration. Its comfort masked her emotional distance and her disinterest in his career. She gave him something to wear at home—a garment of rest that forbids real rest—because her world allowed no leisure without guilt.

Her sense of time mirrored that logic. She lived oriented toward the past (chapter 65) and the future (chapter 78), rarely the present. Hence she shows no real joy about their visit before their departure. Life for her was a chain of recollections and predictions: what she had done (chapter 65), what he would one day repay (chapter 47). The present moment existed only as a bridge between past sacrifice and future obligation. The embrace is conditional — a rehearsal for independence, not tenderness. In that instant, love is already an investment waiting for return. The teddy bear pressed between them, once a symbol of innocence and comfort, becomes collateral in this emotional economy: the pledge that he will someday “grow up,” earn, and pay back the care that raised him. Even at the graduation, she treated the day not as fulfillment but as record keeping. (chapter 47) The bouquet of flowers visible in the picture served as public proof of pride, while the hoodie—cheap, colorless, and private—belonged to the closed economy of obligation.

The scarf later mirrors this same logic, but in reverse. (chapter 41) When Dan gifts his grandmother an expensive scarf, he hides its true price — “I got it for a bargain” — repeating her own pattern of disguised generosity. She sees through the lie, teasing him for “spoiling” her, yet she accepts the luxury without feeling guilty. The scarf becomes her version of the hoodie: a fabric trophy of moral worth. But its later disappearance is revealing. In season two, she wears it (chapter 56) shortly after her arrival at the hospice, never again. When she greets Joo Jaekyung, the scarf is gone (chapter 61). Why? One might reply that the scarf lost its value, especially since she is living next to the director’s room. I doubt that such men would pay attention to such an object. Another possibility is that she fears its brightness might betray her neglect, for the champion has lived with her grandson for a while. How could she display silk while her grandson owns almost nothing? (chapter 80) The missing scarf thus exposes both her superficiality and exaggerated generosity. Her affection, like her pride, is short-lived — decorative rather than enduring. Should Heesung ever visit her, (chapter 30) one can easily imagine the scarf’s reappearance: the fabric of self-deception, ready to flatter, to perform, to erase guilt under the sheen of respectability. She already acted like a fan girl in front of the celebrity. (chapter 61)

The pattern of her giving finds its quiet conclusion in episode 80. When Kim Dan rediscovers the hoodie, his first smile fades into silence. (chapter 80) The gesture that once symbolized love now feels like pain and loss. The signification of the gift has changed. What once wrapped him in safety now weighs like absence — the fabric retains the shape of someone who is about to vanish. His silence is not understanding but hurt, a wordless awareness that affection can curdle into memory. The audience, not the character, perceives that with the grandmother’s approaching death, her ledger is about to close. The gray fabric, once proof of her sacrifice, will lose its moral weight; her “gesture” will expire with her. Yet Kim Dan may not yet realize that this very ending could one day free him. The book-keeping dies with the bookkeeper.

This moment also reveals why he remains wary of other people’s gifts. (chapter 31) When Heesung offers flowers “to get closer,” Kim Dan’s face mirrors the same unease: affection presented as transaction, intimacy disguised as generosity. What the actor calls closeness, the doctor feels as imbalance — the same emotional distance that Shin Okja’s presents once produced. Her gifts, meant to bind, isolated him instead; they built a hierarchy where gratitude replaced equality. Each present widened the gap between giver and receiver. To be cared for was to be indebted.

From this upbringing stems Kim Dan’s reflexive equation:

Each time someone offers him something, he instinctively feels burdens (chapter 31) and tries to refuse it. (chapter 31) (chapter 80) “You don’t have to go through all this trouble.” The line is not modesty but defense. To him, receiving kindness creates imbalance. His grandmother’s “help” was always instrumental; every act of support came attached to sacrifice: “I went through so much for you.” The hoodie thus becomes a moral anchor, a fabric reminder that love must always be earned and repaid.

Guilt as Love Language.

Because of this, Kim Dan experiences love only through fatigue and suffering. He feels cared for when someone worries (chapter 67), loses sleep, or pays a price. He interprets Joo Jaekyung’s concern as “trouble,” Heesung’s gifts as “too much.” In his mind, affection is inseparable from cost:

If you love me, you must pay for it. And if I accept your love, I’m guilty.

Caretaker Identity and Self-Erasure


To escape that guilt, he lives as a helper. (chapter 80) “I’ll stay in the background.” His self-worth depends on not burdening others. His words let transpire that he has never been Shin Okja’s first priority in the end. The hoodie reinforces that psychology—it is not a professional outfit like a suit or briefcase would have been, but a teenager’s garment, meant for the domestic space rather than the adult world. It literally arrests his growth, keeping him in the house and under her logic. Thus it is not surprising that after receiving his diploma, he still took part-time jobs.

Gifts as Triggers of Anxiety

When others try to give him something—Heesung’s flowers, Jaekyung’s wardrobe—his first instinct is panic. “What do I do? It’s all so expensive.” He expects a hidden price: affection, submission, repayment. Every gesture of generosity recalls the old bargain with his grandmother.

Repetition Compulsion

He repeats the same dynamic with new authority figures. With Heesung, he suspects every gift hides control. With Joo Jaekyung, he accepts care only to reduce someone else’s burden. When the champion lies—“These brands sent the wrong size; I was going to throw them out anyway”—Kim Dan hears not kindness but necessity. Refusing would mean waste, and he has long internalized that nothing must ever be wasted. So he accepts—not out of entitlement, but as an act of thrift, a way to help the giver by taking what is “useless.”

And yet, through this misreading, something begins to shift. The logic of guilt quietly bends toward mutual release. Jaekyung sheds excess; Dan sheds shame. The exchange of clothes becomes an exchange of burdens.

Gray: The Color of Suspension.

The hoodie’s color captures the entire tragedy of their old world. Gray is neither black nor white—it refuses decision, blending work and rest, love and obligation. It is the color of compromise, of deferred joy, of life half-lived. Gray also carries another meaning beyond monotony. It fuses black and white — two opposites that, when mixed, erase each other’s clarity. The hoodie’s color therefore reflects the fused identity of grandmother and grandson: their lives blended until he became her shadow. Her pride shone only through his dimness. To live in gray meant to live as her reflection — never as himself. The color embodies both her dominance and his self-erasure. When Kim Dan finds it again in episode 80, his first smile fades into silence. (chapter 80) The object that once expressed care and promised safety now mirrors grief. The gray fabric absorbs the light around him, turning into the shade of everything unspoken between love and duty.

The hoodie, once a symbol of endurance, now becomes a relic of a world where love meant survival. To wear it again would be to stay in that twilight. To put it away is to risk color, to learn to live in the present tense.

The Wardrobe: Undoing the Gray Religion

If the gray hoodie was the relic of Shin Okja’s work-based faith, Joo Jaekyung’s wardrobe (chapter 80) is the site of its quiet destruction. His act of giving reverses every law the grandmother ever taught. First, he does not “go out of his way.” The clothes are delivered effortlessly, without fanfare or moral accounting. (chapter 80) There is no speech about sacrifice, no self-congratulation. (chapter 80) By erasing the gesture of “effort,” he removes the emotional price tag that once accompanied every gift.

Second, he tells a deliberate lie: that he did not spend a dime, that the brands sent the wrong sizes. This white lie has healing power. It dismantles the logic of debt that rules Kim Dan’s psyche. (chapter 80) If the grandmother’s motto was “I went through so much for you,” the champion’s is “It’s no big deal.” Generosity becomes invisible, unburdened, and therefore trustworthy.

Third, he offers not one item but an entire range. (chapter 80) The row of garments invites choice — a concept absent from Shin Okja’s universe, where love came in single doses and with strings attached. Here, the doctor is asked to select what he likes, to exercise taste, to inhabit preference. The abundance of options grants him agency, dignity, and the right to refuse.

Fourth, note the nature of the clothes: they are not sportswear. (chapter 80) These are professional garments — coats, shirts, and slacks suitable for the workplace, not the gym. They restore the image his grandmother’s hoodie had erased. In offering these, Joo Jaekyung is not only dressing him but reframing his social identity: from dependent to equal, from housebound caretaker to visible professional. This means that they are bringing him into the adult world. Yet this also creates a paradox — wearing such refined clothes will attract attention, making it impossible for Kim Dan to “stay in the background.” (chapter 80) They will incite him to voice more his thoughts, to become stronger as a responsible physical therapist. The wardrobe, like a mirror, forces him into presence. This means that he is losing his identity as “ghost”, which was how the halmoni was perceived by the athlete. (chapter 22)

Symbolically, the location intensifies the gesture: the clothes are placed inside the champion’s own wardrobe. (chapter 80) The two now share a domestic and symbolic space. What once separated their worlds — fame, class, gendered roles — begins to dissolve thread by thread. The actor Choi Heesung’s remark, that gifts can “bring people closer,” (chapter 30) becomes unexpectedly true here. The wardrobe bridges the distance that the grandmother’s gifts had always created.

When the champion remarks, (chapter 80) he implies that these items would just go to waste. Therefore he completes the reversal. Waste, once the grandmother’s greatest fear, becomes the vehicle of grace. By claiming the clothes are “leftovers,” he removes their monetary and moral value; they are no longer costly. In accepting them, Kim Dan does not incur debt — he prevents waste. (chapter 80) This is why his hesitant and embarrassed gratitude, framed against a background of dissolving gray waves, feels so transformative. The air behind him ripples as if washing away the residue of his old faith.

The striped blue-and-white shirt he finally chooses carries its own quiet symbolism. (chapter 80) Yet unlike gray — the color of fusion and loss of identity — these shades remain distinct. They do not blend but alternate, acknowledging the coexistence of two identities: the doctor and the man, the caregiver and the self. In contrast to the grandmother’s world, where love meant absorption and sameness, Joo Jaekyung’s gesture affirms difference. The champion does not swallow him; he gives him space.

At the same time, the stripes hint at the complexity of Kim Dan’s inner life. Beneath his apparent passivity lies rhythm, variation, and resilience — qualities long suppressed by duty and guilt. The pattern becomes a visual metaphor for the layered texture of his heart.

By filling the wardrobe with clothes of different colors, the champion quite literally brings light and time back into Kim Dan’s life. The new hues break the monotony of gray (chapter 80); they mark the passing of days, the return of seasons, the rediscovery that not every morning has to look the same. Variety itself becomes a form of freedom. When the wolf once complained that all his shirts looked identical, he was unknowingly naming what both of them lacked: differentiation, spontaneity, change. Through this act, he restores color not only to the doctor’s wardrobe but to his emotional world — a quiet resurrection through fabric.

Finally, the celebrity’s next gesture — teaching him how to swim — extends this transformation. If the grandmother’s graduation gift (the hoodie) kept him grounded and homebound, neglecting his future and career, the champion’s “lesson” propels him toward movement and autonomy. (chapter 80) Swimming means survival without the shore; it is the art of staying afloat without a hand to hold. In this sense, Joo Jaekyung’s care points forward, not backward. He offers not protection but potential, not memory but future.

The wardrobe, then, is not a storage space but a threshold — between debt and desire, between inherited caution and chosen freedom. And now, you comprehend why the doctor chose to seek refuge and support, when he feared to sink. (chapter 80) The “hamster” had instinctively turned to the only person who had ever offered him help without cost.

In reaching for the champion, he does not regress into dependence; he reaches toward a new form of trust, one that no longer confuses care with control. To let himself be held is not to return to childhood, but to unlearn fear. The act of seeking support becomes the first stroke of a new swimmer — hesitant, but free.

This scene also recalls the image of the Korean dragon and its yeouiju — the luminous, wish-granting jewel said to contain both wisdom and life energy. The dragon’s power is not innate; it is completed and elevated by the jewel. Without the yeouiju, it cannot ascend to the heavens — strength without meaning, force without direction.

When Kim Dan finally pulls Joo Jaekyung into his arms (chapter 80), the myth reverses. The dragon—once feared, untouchable, wrapped in rage and solitude—is suddenly embraced by the very being he once believed too fragile for his world. The power dynamic inverts: the human shelters the beast.

In that gesture, the legend of the Korean dragon and its yeouiju gains a new form. The jewel is no longer an external object of desire, but a state of being—mutual recognition. By holding the dragon, Kim Dan becomes the hand that completes the circle, allowing power to flow again. The yeouiju exists between them, not in either of them: it is the bond itself.

For the champion, who has long carried the invisible scar of disgust— (chapter 75) —this embrace is nothing short of salvation. The man who once fought to wash off shame through endless training now finds himself accepted in his unguarded state. He doesn’t need to mask his trauma with perfume (chapter 75), the imagined smell, or cleanse his skin of battle; he is held and, therefore, purified. Through Dan’s arms, he rediscovers his value and humanity—the dragon touched and not destroyed. He is worth of being embraced, even if he is already so old!

This reversal has immense symbolic power. The yeouiju is no longer something the dragon must seize; it is something that recognizes him back. (chapter 80) When Kim Dan holds him, the light of that jewel shines from within the dragon himself. Power and tenderness, once enemies, coexist in the same body.

For Kim Dan, this act also signals a new allegiance. He is no longer in service of duty or debt—no longer the caretaker bound to an old creed of sacrifice. By choosing to embrace Joo Jaekyung, he chooses his friend, not his “master.” He decides who is worthy of his trust, and in doing so, reclaims his agency.

The dragon, embraced rather than worshiped, rises stronger. The yeouiju—the bond, the shared heartbeat—no longer lies at the peak of a mythic mountain but glows quietly between two exhausted men who have stopped running from touch.

The gray world — the realm of thrift, debt, and book-keeping — dissolves into color and movement. Blue and white ripple through the water, reflecting not fusion but harmony. For the first time, love does not demand payment; it breathes.

Arc 8 – The point of no return

The shape of the 8 itself evokes both the infinity loop and the closed circuit: two halves endlessly reflecting each other, each incomplete without the other’s motion. It is the symbol of reciprocity, but also of a threshold — the moment when balance can no longer be postponed. Once complete, the loop allows no intrusion — it admits no third. The number’s symmetry carries both union and exclusion: whatever falls outside its rhythm disappears.

This is the geometry of Jinx’s emotional world in Arc 8. The loop that once included a third observer — the grandmother’s watchful eye, the manager’s interference, the actor’s rivalry and resent — now folds inward, leaving no aperture for control. The form itself performs the story’s evolution: dependency becomes reciprocity; triangulation dissolves into dual motion. And now, you comprehend why Mingwa included a new outburst of the wolf’s jealousy. (chapter 79) This is one part of the new circle. Jealousy is the residue of imbalance — the echo of the 7 within the 8. In the numerology of Jinx, the 7-chapters, like for example episode 7 (chapter 7), episode 18, where the champion had sex because of this statement (chapter 18),episode 34 with Choi Heesung (chapter 34) or episode 52, where the former members of Team Black and expressed their disdain and jealousy toward the main lead (chapter 52)

But Arc 8 changes the equation. For the first time, both protagonists risk loss because they have something — and someone — to lose. The return of jealousy is therefore not regression but proof of attachment and the occasion to improve their personality (chapter 79), the final test before the circle closes for good.

Eight is the reversal digit, where hidden motives come to light and attachments are tested. Between 7 (chapter 47) and 8 lies that invisible hinge: the death of the old economy of love and the birth of a new one.

Thus, Arc 8 becomes the arena of triangular pressure. The grandmother’s possessive nostalgia (she sees herself as the mother, doc Dan as the boy and the champion as her surrogate husband) (chapter 78) mirrors Park Namwook’s managerial anxiety (chapter 61) and Heesung’s residual rivalry and resent. Each acts as a different face of control: the woman binds through guilt, the manager through hierarchy acting as the owner of the athlete’s time, the actor through charm and deceptions. Together they form the triad that tries to reopen the circle closed in the pool. Let’s not forget that the athlete chose to take a day off on his own accord (chapter 80), but he had just returned to the gym. It is no longer the same training and routine.

Park Namwook in particular represents the system that resists intimacy. His “interference” is not random but defensive: he fears that Jaekyung’s change and his attachment to the physical therapist (the promise to teach the doctor to swim implies that he will focus on other things than MMA) will unbalance the professional order. In the symbolic arithmetic of the story, he inherits the number 7 — the unstable, the one who can no longer maintain symmetry.

Jealousy, then, becomes not corruption but purification. It exposes what still belongs to duty and what belongs to choice. Through these frictions, Kim Dan is compelled to speak for himself, to claim the very agency his grandmother once withheld. It makes the protagonists to perceive people in a different light and move away from their self-loathing, passivity and silence.

When he does, the circle of the 8 stabilizes at last. The old triangle — grandmother, doctor, and debt — gives way to the new one: champion, doctor, and trust. In the Arc 8, the color gray finally meets its antidote: blue. 💙What was once the hue of exhaustion and suspended time becomes the pulse of renewal. The blue heart 💙, which first appeared in my earlier essay At the Crossroad, returns here as the emotional compass of both men.

In Jinx, the white heart with the gray hoodie belongs to the past — to the grandmother’s logic of duty, guilt, and caution. Blue, by contrast, is the color of water, movement, and breath. It signals the capacity to feel without measuring, to give without debt. When Kim Dan accepts the new clothes, he does not merely change garments; he crosses from the gray zone of survival into the blue realm of relation. His heart, long muted by obligation, begins to circulate again.

The blue heart marks this point of no return: once it beats, neither man can retreat into solitude. Its rhythm unites the wolf and the hamster in a shared tempo — one that excludes the third, but not the world. For the first time, affection no longer obeys the law of bookkeeping. It flows.

The ocean, once feared and distant, now extends inward, beating quietly beneath their joined silhouettes. The gray relic of the past lies folded away, and in its place, something transparent begins: a friendship that breathes like water — uncounted, unowned, and alive.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Missed Party 🥳🎉

People might have been wondering why I haven’t published anything after the release of episode 78. My silence is linked to my health. I was sick exactly like Joo Jaekyung. I had to remain in bed for a while. But enough about me.

When Doc Dan returned to Team Black, the fighters were so overjoyed that they immediately proposed to celebrate his comeback with a party. (chapter 78) Their noisy excitement — hugs, wishes, smiles, jokes, even talk of meat — gave the impression of a long-awaited reunion. Yet the suggestion was cut short by Jaekyung, who rejected it like this: (chapter 78) In other words, a party was “missed.” At first glance, this might appear to be an exception, a rare moment of denial in a story otherwise filled with shared rituals. Readers might recall the welcome party (chapter 9) in episode 9, the champion’s birthday dinner (chapter 43) in episode 43, the talk of hospital get-togethers (chapter 61), or the festive tone of fighters after director Choi Gilseok’s victory (chapter 52).

But the closer one looks, the clearer the pattern becomes. The missed party is not an isolated accident; it is the rhythm of Jinx itself. Whenever celebration hovers near — a victory, a birthday, a reunion, even a funeral — someone is not present. In addition, the celebration arrives too early, too late, in the wrong place, or in the wrong form. Jaekyung wins titles, but the gym shares the glory while he remains uncelebrated. (chapter 41) Why did they not organize a party in Seoul to celebrate his victory in the States? Dan devotes himself to work, but his departures are marked by silence (chapter 53) rather than farewell. (chapter 1) The few rituals that do occur — a premature birthday cake, a noisy hug, puppies chasing after a car — (chapter 78) always miss their mark, either hollow in substance or unseen by the very people who should be honored.

The title The Missed Party therefore names more than one canceled occasion. It captures the way the two protagonists move through a world where rituals of belonging are constantly distorted or denied. And in a culture where such celebrations carry deep social weight, the absence is all the more striking. The missed party becomes the haunting motif of their lives: recognition always promised, but never truly given.

The Meaning of Parties in Korea

In Korean culture, parties and team dinners (hoesik) hold a strong ritual function: they create bonds, display hierarchy, and confirm belonging within a group. Farewells, birthdays, and victories are all expected occasions for collective recognition. Yet in Jinx, these moments of celebration are strangely absent or hollow. When Jaekyung wins, his fee doubles, but no feast marks his achievement. Instead, the manager presents the “wolf” as his “trophy”. To conclude, others share in the reflected glory while the champion himself remains excluded, a fighter without a banquet. (Chapter 41) And this absence of recognition and respect is mirrored in the physical therapist’s position. He is not surrounded by the fighters and included by the manager. He is standing on the sideline. It was, as though his good work was not recognized . (Chapter 43) Even the “dragon’s” birthday, supposedly a day of personal celebration, is reduced to an awkward dinner at his expense, with a cake arriving a day too early (chapter 43) or gifts from sponsors and fans he never wanted. (Chapter 41) In Germany, it is considered as a bad omen to celebrate a birthday too soon. Rituals that should affirm intimacy instead expose distance and lack of respect.

A striking contrast appears in chapter 52, when the fighters from King of MMA (chapter 52) gather at the very restaurant used for Jaekyung’s birthday. This time the feast is paid for not by him, but by Choi Gilseok — the rival director who had just won money betting against Jaekyung. The excuse for the banquet is twofold: the humiliation of the champion’s tie and the arrival of new members. Yet the sponsor of the event is absent, his presence felt only through the bill he covers. Unlike the wolf, whose victories go unmarked, Choi Gilseok uses food and drink to project power and buy loyalty. Yet, this celebration with the absent director displays not only hypocrisy, but also resent and jealousy due to the selection of the location. The cruel irony is that Jaekyung’s fall is more celebrated than his rise. (Chapter 52)

This cultural backdrop makes the silences and absences in the Korean Manhwa all the more striking. Parties are repeatedly mentioned but rarely materialize, and when they do, they are strangely hollow. In chapter 61, for instance, a nurse suggests inviting the star to their next hospital get-together. (Chapter 61) The excitement is palpable — “loyalty” and celebrity sparkle in their eyes — but what stands out is the way Dan is erased in the process. They do not invite him; they want access to the famous fighter through him. His role is reduced to a conduit, the man who happens to be “close with Mr. Joo.” The irony is brutal: after two months of work in the hospice, Dan has never once been shown attending such gatherings himself. His own belonging is not on the table. He is used as a bridge to someone else’s fame, while his own exhaustion and lowered gaze silently testify to his exclusion.

But wait — is Dan not also responsible for his isolation? At no moment does he try to be close to them. He avoids their chatter, keeps his distance, and carries himself like someone already half absent. Chapter 56 seems to confirm this impression: even approached by one of the nurses, doc Dan uses work to avoid their company. (chapter 56) However, this is just an illusion. What caught my attention is that the nurses wondered themselves why such a skilled therapist would come to a small-town hospital. (chapter 56) They speak about him, as though he had no reason to stay there, as if he were a stranger passing through. Right from the beginning, he was treated unconsciously as temporary, someone whose presence required explanation rather than welcome. Finally, no party was held for him, no ritual of inclusion was offered. His distance and their detachment mirrored each other, producing the silence that would later define his departure. (chapter 78)

The paradox becomes even clearer when we turn to the star himself. Despite his status as champion, he never receives a proper victory celebration. After each match, we never see a celebration. (chapter 5) It ends either in the car or in the locker room. (chapter 15) The high peak of his celebrated victories takes place at the gym where Park Namwook gather the fighters in front of the Emperor congratulating himself for his “good work” and the spectators for belonging to a winning team. (chapter 41) Yet no feast is held for Jaekyung, no toast to his perseverance. The two men at the center of the achievement are left without ritual acknowledgment, while the institution absorbs the honor. They remain a wolf and a hamster without a feast — fighting, winning, but never celebrated for who they are. And now, you understand why the manager could make such a suggestion at the hospital: (chapter 53) For him, the physical therapists were just tools and as such replaceable.

Even Jaekyung’s birthday party in chapter 43 reveals this paradox. (chapter 43) A birthday, especially in Korea, is typically a family-centered celebration, held at home or among close friends. Yet Jaekyung’s “party” takes place in a restaurant, under Yosep’s casual announcement that they would be having a “dinner party.” (chapter 43) The phrasing itself is odd, almost bureaucratic, as though the event were an obligation rather than a gift. Jaekyung himself had to pay the bill, reversing the usual logic of being celebrated. They even started eating before which is actually a huge violation of social norms. The cake appeared the day before his real birthday, an empty gesture more about timing than sincerity. And while fans and sponsors showered him with gifts throughout the month, Jaekyung revealed that he didn’t want any of them. The ritual forms were there — cake, dinner, presents — but the meaning was absent.

But there is another telling absence: Dan himself was left in the dark about the “surprise.” (chapter 43) The fighters never included him in the planning, as if they feared he might leak the secret. In reality, this exclusion only repeated his deeper past: once again, he was not considered part of the group’s inner circle. Had he been told, he might have brought the card and the gift of his own, softening the sting of Jaekyung’s reaction. (chapter 45) By keeping Dan in the dark about the “surprise,” the fighters created another problem. Their silence pushed him to offer his own present on the same day as the gifts from sponsors and fans — exactly the kind of attention Jaekyung resented. He had already said he did not want those presents, and now Dan’s sincere gesture was placed in the same category, indistinguishable from the flood of unwanted offerings. What could have been a private, meaningful moment was absorbed into the hollow ritual of the group. Hence the champion never got to read his card! (chapter 43) In trying to celebrate, the team only ensured that both Jaekyung and Dan felt more isolated than ever. Instead, his silence reinforced the impression that he was peripheral. Unconsciously, Team Black treated him not as one of their own, but as an outsider to be managed. And even within the celebration, another absence was visible: Potato was missing, and no one seemed to notice. (chapter 43) The party did not affirm Jaekyung’s existence, nor Dan’s place beside him. It only reinforced their shared isolation, hidden under the noise of clapping and cheers.

Thus, Jinx presents us with a paradox: in a culture where parties are essential rituals of belonging, both Dan and Jaekyung remain excluded. They are surrounded by the signs of festivity, but the substance is always missing. Their lives are structured not by recognition but by its absence, not by celebration but by silence.

Dan’s Missed Parties

If the star’s parties are hollow, Dan’s are almost nonexistent. The only party where we see him smiling is his birthday, when he was a little boy. (Chapter 11) One might think, this celebration embodies a perfect birthday party. However, observe the absence of friends. It took place during the night too, a sign that his birthday was not celebrated properly. Everything implies his social exclusion. This made me wonder if this memory represents the only birthday party he ever had with Shin Okja. His life is a sequence of departures without ritual, absences without acknowledgment. Each time he leaves a place of work or community, he slips out like a ghost, denied the closure that parties are meant to provide.

At the hospital in Seoul, where he endured the predatory advances of the director, his dismissal was brutal and final. (Chapter 1) He was not only fired but blacklisted, erased from his profession’s networks. No farewell dinner was organized, no colleagues thanked him for his work, no one marked his departure. (Chapter 1) His stay had been so brief as well. Besides, his absence was engineered to be total, as though he had never existed. The very ritual that should have affirmed his contributions instead became a ritual of erasure.

At the gym, the pattern repeated itself. The spray incident turned him first into a scapegoat. Park Namwook yelled, the fighters remained passive, and even Jaekyung rejected his presence. In the space of a few minutes, Dan was ostracized, his innocence ignored. (Chapter 50) Then later the athlete questioned the physical therapist’s actions and told him this (chapter 51) out of fear and pain, the physical therapist thought, he was fired. Once again, he left in silence, unacknowledged. No one stood up for him, no one tried to reintegrate him, no farewell was offered. (Chapter 53) And keep in mind that according to me, in this scene, the manager already knew the truth. So he had a reason to dismiss a farewell party. The absence of ritual here was particularly cruel: Dan had given his skills and energy to the fighters, but his exit marked him only as disposable.

The hospice, where he briefly found genuine warmth, provided no closure either. When he left for Seoul, the staff were shocked, even saddened — but his departure was so sudden that no send-off was possible. (Chapter 78) Their affection was genuine, but the ritual was missing. Dan slipped away in silence, just as he had at the hospital and the gym. In the panel, what caught my attention is the reaction of the director. He is crying while keeping his distance, a sign that he is the one the most affected by doc Dan’s departure. For me, the author is alluding to the director’s regrets. If only he had treated doc Dan better… only too late, he had recognized that he had become accustomed to his presence. Doc Dan had always been a silent but active listener.

This absence of farewell may stretch back to his earliest traumas. If his parents truly died by suicide, it is possible that Dan never attended their funeral. Poverty, shame, and debt may have erased even that ceremony, leaving him with no closure for the loss of his own family. We can use Joo Jaewoong’s funeral as a source of inspiration. (chapter 74) The silence of his grandmother on this point suggests that even the most basic ritual of mourning was denied him.

The pattern becomes symbolic in the death of the puppy. (Chapter 59) Only Dan and the landlord marked the event with a quiet burial. Since no one knew about it, it left the ritual incomplete. For Dan, the small act was meaningful, but its invisibility to the larger community echoed his own life: recognition always hidden, always partial, never public.

Even in moments that looked like parties, Dan was left on the margins. Jaekyung’s birthday party, with its cake and noisy cheer, contained an intimate truth: Jaekyung’s sudden, raw confession, (chapter 43) This was the real heart of the evening, the only moment where ritual turned into intimacy. And yet even this was missed by Potato, who was absent at that crucial moment, lingering elsewhere with Heesung. The party’s form was there, but its essence — the recognition of Jaekyung’s loneliness and Dan’s importance — was overlooked by the two men at its center due to the presence of alcohol.

Thus, Dan’s life is a chain of missed parties. At the hospital, the gym, the hospice, even at funerals, he departs without recognition. And when celebrations do occur, the essential truth is missed — noticed only by those who are absent, while those present look away.

The Puppies’ Party

Nowhere is the irony sharper than in chapter 78, when the puppies run after the departing car. (Chapter 78) To them, departure is not tragedy but play, a noisy farewell parade. Their barking and chasing become a spontaneous party, a joyous ritual of attachment. (Chapter 78) It is pure, instinctive, and alive. And yet, neither Jaekyung nor Dan sees it. Shut in the car, burdened by urgency, contracts, and exhaustion, they miss the little parade given in their honor.

The contrast is devastating. Humans, with their expectations of formal ritual, repeatedly fail to mark Dan’s contributions. They miss every opportunity to acknowledge him. But the animals, in their innocence, succeed where people fail: they celebrate simply because they care. The puppies recognize bonds better than the humans who claim to love him.

What makes this little parade even more striking is that the puppies do not separate between wolf and hamster. Their joy is directed at both men together, at the bond symbolized by the car’s departure. (Chapter 78) In this sense, the puppies achieve what the humans cannot: they recognize attachment without division, gratitude without debt. Their farewell is not tied to work, contracts, or hierarchy, but to presence itself. (Chapter 78) By running after the car, they express loyalty and responsibility, acknowledging the care they have received. It is the only party in Jinx that includes both protagonists as they are — not as worker and champion, not as scapegoat and boss, but as a pair worth celebrating. Finally, they have no idea that the couple plans to return soon, as they have no notion of time. (Chapter 78) Striking is that here, doc Dan is making a promise to Boksoon and her puppies, but the latter have no idea. Therefore imagine this. On the weekend, the moment the car approaches the landlord’s house, the puppies will recognize them and celebrate their return! And this time, both characters will witness this welcome party: (chapter 78) How can doc Dan not be moved and even smile? Why did the champion reject the landlord’s suggestion (taking a puppy)? He had no time… Having a puppy will not just force him to slow down and take his time, but also attract real and genuine attention from the members of Team Black. (Chapter 78) The animals would even change Joo Jaekyung’s behavior and the fighters’ perception of their hyung. (chapter 78)

The Illusory Reset

When Dan returns to the gym, the fighters smother him with hugs and noisy affection. They beg him not to leave again, propose a welcome party, and act as if everything is back to normal. (Chapter 78) But this “reset” is an illusion. Dan is only contracted for two matches. Interesting is that no one is capable of perceiving the truth, as the main lead’s explanation is ambiguous. (Chapter 78) He doesn’t limit the number of matches, only that he will focus on the “wolf”. So for them, his return is not limited in time. Nevertheless, his paleness and dark circles speak louder than their words: he is exhausted, fragile, still haunted.

The fighters, however, do not see his state. (Chapter 78) They are more worried about another possible departure than about his condition, as though his leaving again would be a greater tragedy than his ongoing suffering. This exposes that the members are not totally oblivious and their reunion is not a repetition of the past. On the other hand, warm words and a noisy welcome are enough for them. They take his generosity for granted, just as they always have. Therefore they ask for his magic hands. (Chapter 78) Their celebration is shallow, a ritual meant to restore their own comfort rather than acknowledge his reality.

Here, the cultural weight of parties in Korea sharpens the irony. Gatherings are strongly intertwined with alcohol (chapter 9), and abstaining from drink often means being excluded from group belonging. Yet Dan, on medication, cannot drink. His doctor’s recommendation makes it impossible for him to participate in such “public” rituals. Even the customary sharing of a huge bowl — a symbol of intimacy and unity — must be avoided. For Jaekyung, who once used alcohol to dull his own struggles, (chapter 54) this becomes another reason to refuse such parties: they risk exposing Dan to temptation and harm. Park Namwook, knowing Jaekyung’s history of drinking, has no interest in promoting such events either. (Chapter 78) Hence the latter has no interest to organize a welcome party and even maintain the ritual with the bowl!! What might appear to others as grumpiness or stinginess is in fact a form of protection.

In contrast, Potato embodies another response. (Chapter 78) Having missed Dan most deeply during his absence, he now wishes to spend as much time as possible with his hyung. His longing shows that no party with Heesung and the landlord — no noisy drinking night — (chapter 58) could fill the hole left by Dan’s departure. But his form of attachment is still caught in the ritual of surface-level affection. What Potato craves is real closeness, hence he keeps hugging the physical therapist, (chapter 78) but what he proposes are the same shallow gestures that miss the truth of Dan’s fragility. The chow chow’s words — “Nothing beats seeing you at the gym” — unintentionally reveal this dependence. On the surface, it is a casual expression of joy and longing. Yet beneath it lies another truth: if the hamster were to leave Team Black for good, the gym would eventually lose all its members. From the start of the story, Dan has embodied teamwork. He is the glue that holds the fighters together, not by authority or charisma, but by care. Without him, unity dissolves into rivalry and noise. The irony is that the fighters sense this truth but cannot articulate it. They attempt to celebrate his return with hugs and the promise of a party, as if rituals could substitute for recognition. In reality, what they crave is not the feast but the fragile cohesion that Dan alone brings.

Striking is that Jaekyung’s refusal of the welcome party is linked to his position as director of the gym. It marks a turning point. Indirectly, he rejects the idea by redirecting the fighters’ attention. He points out their indifference toward him. For the first time, the athlete is voicing his dislike openly, he felt excluded. Due to this combination, the athlete doesn’t realize that he rejected the party, as if he refused to participate in hollow rituals that only disguise exhaustion and perpetuate harm. (Chapter 78) It becomes clear that for the athlete, such parties built on illusion can only harm Dan further. To conclude, thanks to his intervention, he protected the hamster from rituals that mistake noise for acceptance and even care. (chapter 9)

Park Namwook’s position within Team Black also sheds light on the dynamic of missed parties. In earlier chapters, he was the one who orchestrated gatherings (chapter 26), or allowed whether welcome parties or surprise celebrations or pre-match meals (chapter 22). These events were never about genuine recognition but about maintaining power and appearances, boosting morale, or reminding the fighters of their dependence on the team structure he managed. The “surprise” birthday party in chapter 43 bore his fingerprints, (chapter 43) yet he stayed conspicuously absent when the cake was presented, only appearing later at the restaurant. (chapter 43) This absence is revealing: Namwook preferred to avoid direct conflict with Jaekyung’s visible displeasure, leaving the awkward burden of paying and performing to the champion himself to Yosep. In other words, his parties were tools of control, not gifts of belonging. By chapter 78, however, the balance has shifted. (chapter 78) Standing in the back, Namwook watches as Dan returns and is embraced by the fighters. He notices a “different vibe” between the two leads, but fails to grasp what it means. Doc Dan is actually free and has the upper hand in their relationship. Hence he can no longer ask this from doc Dan: (chapter 36) Doc Dan should put up with everything. What he cannot admit is that Dan is no longer replaceable. (chapter 78) Once erased, the therapist now belongs; once central, the manager is now the outsider. Namwook is pushed into the very silence he once imposed on others. The irony is sharpened when Jaekyung openly asserts his authority: (chapter 78) With that, the wolf reclaims his rightful place. In other words, by respecting the hamster, the protagonist is learning to protect his own dignity and interests. (chapter 78) Namwook’s illusion of control dissolves, his “decisions” and rituals losing their force. Even the proposed welcome party collapses in an instant when Jaekyung refuses, proving that Namwook no longer directs the rhythm of the team. The missed party is thus his own as well: the final chance to assert authority through ritual slips away before his eyes, leaving him stranded on the margins of the very world he once managed. And in this reversal lies a striking symmetry: the silence that once excluded Dan now excludes Namwook, completing a cycle of poetic justice. What Dan endured in season one (chapter 41), sidelined and voiceless, is now mirrored in the manager’s quiet erasure.

If Dan’s health were to worsen, the most striking reversal might occur: a match could be cancelled not because of the champion, but because of his therapist. Such a possibility would mark a profound shift in the logic of Team Black. In season one, Jaekyung fought regardless of his condition; his insomnia, shoulder injury, foot injury and depression were ignored, never reasons to stop the machine. Dan was expected to keep patching him up in silence while the show went on. But if a fight were cancelled due to Dan’s weakness, it would confirm his irreplaceable place in the system. The team’s future would depend not only on the fists of the champion but on the presence of the man who heals him. For the wolf, this would be more than logistics: it would be a choice of care over profit, proof that he has reclaimed his authority to protect rather than exploit. And for Namwook, such a cancellation would represent his ultimate defeat. A missed party of the grandest kind — a fight night erased from the calendar — would signal the collapse of his management logic. (chapter 69) Yet unlike all the hollow celebrations that came before, this missed event would finally have meaning. It would not be absence through neglect, but absence as recognition: proof that Dan’s life matters more than ritual, profit, or performance.

The Real Parties They Missed

If there was ever a “real” party in Dan’s life, it was the small gathering by the seaside with Heesung, the landlord, and Potato. (chapter 58) A simple evening of drinking and laughter, it gave him a fleeting taste of inclusion outside the world of gyms and hospitals. Yet even this was flawed: Dan’s health made alcohol dangerous, and Jaekyung never knew of the event. For him, it became another missed party, a moment of warmth hidden from his eyes.

The traces of this seaside evening resurface in chapter 78, when Potato joins the fighters to welcome Dan back. Unlike the others, however, he arrives noticeably later. (chapter 78) This delay suggests a split loyalty: while the team is already celebrating, Potato is likely still tied to Heesung, perhaps even speaking to him on the phone. His tardiness betrays how his heart is pulled in two directions — caught between the actor’s orbit and the gym’s renewed center around Dan. Yet the embrace of the fighter, and his tearful reaction at seeing Dan again, show that his real place lies with Team Black. (chapter 78) The return of Dan shifts Potato’s focus: he no longer has to trail after Heesung, but can make his hyung and his own career a priority once more.

And here lies the seed of conflict. In chapter 59, (chapter 59) Potato had made a promise to treat Dan to a meal if he ever returned, squeezing his hand with the sincerity of a puppy. That promise, innocent as it seemed, carried a hidden trap: in Korea, such “treats” almost always involve alcohol. And he could try to recreate the party on the coast. Potato, unaware of Dan’s medical restrictions, may offer him exactly what he must refuse. Only Jaekyung knows the truth of Dan’s fragile health; only he can act as his shield against such misplaced affection. Secondly, Potato possesses pictures of the puppies (chapter 60), which he took on the day one of them died!

What makes this tension more explosive is the role of Heesung. He alone knows that Jaekyung resorted to drinking after Dan’s departure (chapter 58), and his presence ties alcohol directly to the champion’s vulnerability. At the same time, Potato’s loyalty is beginning to shift. He once orbited Heesung like a hidden lover, but Dan’s return rekindles his attachment to the gym and as such will affect his relationship with the gumiho. (chapter 78) The “puppy” now prefers Dan’s company at the gym to the actor’s beck and call. The small seaside party that once united them may become the fault line that divides them: an invitation, a bottle of soju, a clash between past habits and new priorities. For Jaekyung, it will be the ultimate test — not whether he attends the party, but whether he transforms it into something different, a celebration without alcohol, a ritual of care rather than destruction. As you can see, I am expecting the return of the fox Heesung.

And yet, even beyond the noisy welcomes and the hidden seaside gatherings, the theme of absence reaches into the most intimate farewells. When Dan prepares to leave the hospice, he leans toward his grandmother, seeking an embrace, a moment of warmth that could ease the separation. (chapter 78) But she does not return the gesture, as she might believe that he is just holding her straight. Her arms remain still, her body heavy with silence. Instead she talks, urging her grandson to leave the place as quickly as possible. So she doesn’t enjoy this moment. What should have been a small celebration of love — a hug of recognition, a party for two — dissolves into emptiness. Halmoni, who had always claimed to be his anchor, fails to give him the ritual of belonging he craves. The one gesture that could have affirmed their bond is withheld, turning tenderness into yet another missed ceremony.

Hwang Byungchul mirrors this failure in his own way. (chapter 78) Sitting stiffly in his hospital bed, he waves away any possibility of affection. His body language, arms crossed, his words reduced to commands about training, erase the emotional bond that might have connected him to Jaekyung. Where halmoni’s silence is passive, Byungchul’s is active — he refuses intimacy, replacing it with obligation. For both figures, farewell becomes an empty form, stripped of the recognition that makes partings bearable. In these moments, the absence of a hug, the denial of tenderness, is more devastating than the loudest rejection. It is a party that never begins, a rite of passage left unspoken.

This is crucial, because in Korean culture, embraces are rare, and when they occur, they carry profound weight. To hug someone is to cross into genuine intimacy, to declare loyalty and affection without words. The absence of such a gesture from halmoni and the director therefore marks not just emotional distance but outright exclusion. They cannot — or will not — celebrate Dan or Jaekyung as individuals worthy of deep affection. they only know pity, pride or annoyance. Their failure underlines the story’s central rhythm: the rituals that should affirm identity are constantly missed, postponed, or corrupted.

Placed against these failures, the quiet “parties” between Jaekyung and Dan acquire even greater weight. A home-cooked meal,

(chapter 22) (chapter 13) a breakfast in silence (chapter 68), the embraces in the dark (chapter 66) (the wordless recognition of suffering) — these become the true celebrations of Jinx. They lack alcohol, noise, or spectacle, but they carry sincerity. They reveal that belonging can be built not through grand gestures but through repetition, through the transformation of fleeting kindness into ritual. This implies the existence of conscious and choice. And yet, these moments remain fragile. After their return to the penthouse, there is no shared meal, no laughter, only nostalgia and sadness. (chapter 78) Even Jaekyung is troubled by the reminder that Dan’s stay is temporary, as if the very walls of the penthouse resist turning into a home. (chapter 78) In other words, the wolf’s task is no longer to win battles in the ring but to protect these fragile celebrations — to make Dan feel at home, to turn missed hugs into embraces, missed parties into warm meals, missed gestures into habits of care. Only then can the cycle of exclusion be broken. Only then can “The Missed Party” become, at last, a real one.

Conclusion

Both protagonists are marked by missed celebrations. Dan’s life has been a chain of exclusions: fired without farewell, blamed without defense, departing without closure. Even in death — (if we include the theory of his parents’ vanishing), the puppy’s burial — rituals of belonging were denied. Jaekyung, for his part, wins victories without feasts, carrying glory without intimacy.

The fighters and nurses offer illusory parties, mistaking noise for recognition, affection for change. But the true parties are elsewhere: in the puppies’ joyous run, in the hidden rituals of wolf and hamster [the embrace, (chapter 68), the shared meal (chapter 68) and in the landlord’s quiet kindness (chapter 78). For me, it is no coincidence that the senior followed them to the street and waved at them! (chapter 78) He expressed not only his genuine feelings, but also his longing: he hoped to see them soon. He had come to appreciate their presence which is not related to their work. The Missed Party becomes not a single absence, but the haunting rhythm of the entire narrative: recognition always arriving too late, always seen by the wrong eyes. And perhaps the story’s promise lies here — that one day, the real party will finally be held, not in karaoke bars or gym halls, but in the unbreakable bond of two men who learn what true friendship and belonging mean. This means, the more the champion and his fated partner develop new routines, the more it will affect the gym and as such Park Namwook, which can only feel more and more excluded.

PS: If in the next chapter, the night continues, then I can’t shake the feeling that Joo Jaekyung might pat doc Dan’s head and not yank his hair, like he announced it. (chapter 78)

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Song 🎼Of Life 🌳🪲

Introduction – Life, Sound, and Seasonality

A single cicada pierces the silence. (chapter 77) One tree, one voice, one yard — and yet the chapter closes not with human speech, (chapter 77) but with this fragile chorus of sound: chirp, chirp, chirp, whoosh. The choice feels deliberate, unsettling. Why does Mingwa give the final word to nature? Why let the cicada and the tree, not the champion or the doctor, occupy the last panel? Why offer us a rhythm so fleeting, so fragile, instead of the solidity of spoken language? (chapter 77)

The question lingers because silence (chapter 77) defines the scene as much as sound does. Between the two men, honest words fail. One proposes deals, bargains, contracts (chapter 77) — the same old language of power — while the other listens (for the most part of the time), seemingly passive, letting the conversation wash over him. Yet beneath these little moments of awkward stillness, another layer pulses: the soundscape of life itself. (chapter 77) The cicada sings not out of calculation, but because it must. The summer is nearing its end. The branches of the tree move not with intention, but with rhythm due to the wind. (chapter 77) Both are ungoverned, unowned. Both remind us of temporality: cicadas live only a short time above ground, trees sway but remain rooted, summer heat will fade into autumn. The backdrop insists on limits the characters refuse to see. Neither the doctor nor the athlete pay attention to their surroundings and see nature, too focused on the presence of the other.

And yet, the framing provokes further unease. The cicada is solitary, (chapter 77) not part of a swarm. The tree stands alone in the yard, (chapter 77) separated from the other trees and the vegetable plots, more ornament than sustenance. Is this tree a symbol of rootedness or of isolation? Is the cicada a reminder of vitality or of brevity? Why end with nature (chapter 77), when the story is about human bonds (chapter 77)? Perhaps because nature itself becomes the mirror — exposing the illusion of control, the futility of contracts, the precariousness of voices that are not truly heard.

More questions press in. Why does Jaekyung’s supposed change feel at once moving but also hollow? Why does Dan’s passivity strike us as both annoying and deeply human? Why does the cicada’s song seem more alive (chapter 77), more honest, than anything either man manages to say? (chapter 77) Are we witnessing growth, or a repetition with a new mask? Rhythm, or song?

This chapter demands we hold these contradictions without resolution — at least for now. Life here is not only about seasons and maturation, but also about the unpredictable song that emerges in the gaps of silence, in the fragile moments where genuine speech fails. Why else end with the tree and the cicada, if not to suggest that the real heartbeat of the story lies outside the men’s grasp?

The Tree, the Wind, the Sun and the Cicada

As you can sense, nature is now writing the rhythm of the protagonists’ lives, though none of them grasps it. Why? It is because they don’t hear the cicada’s song and appreciate the shadow from the tree. Both still cling to the illusion of control — Jaekyung through his fighter’s creed of schedules (chapter 77), contracts, and matches; Dan through his low self-esteem, his sense of duty and repayment of debts (chapter 77). Yet the cicada’s song interrupts their exchange (chapter 77), cutting through human words to remind us that time is not theirs to master. If nature is the true composer of this tale, then what are they but its creatures — a cicada on the trunk, a tree standing silently next to the characters?

The champion’s unheard song

But which figure embodies the cicada and the tree? Everything is pointing out that Joo Jaekyung is the cicada. (chapter 77) Observe that after each thought (chapter 77) or suggestion from the MMA fighter, the cicada’s song appears, as if the insect was echoing the human. (chapter 77) And now, you comprehend why the author (chapter 77) ended the episode like that. (chapter 77) The cicada, exactly like the celebrity, was waiting for an answer or more precisely looking for a companion. (chapter 77) Yes, the melody of this little insect is actually an appeal for mating.

In other words, the cicada’s voice in Jinx is not random background noise. (chapter 77) It displays that this cicada is rather late in his search for his mate. Since, in the real world, male cicadas sing only to attract a mate before their imminent death, its song in Jinx appears even more as an urgent appeal, not to the world in general, but to one listener, one partner. If Jaekyung is the cicada here, then his “song” is his repeated deals, his desperate way of seeking a bond he cannot name. He wants intimacy with doc Dan, but he can only cloak it in the language of contracts and obligations.

That’s why the episode ends with the chirp chirp and the sound of the branches. There still exists a gap between them. Joo Jaekyung was not able to cross the line: intimacy. In reality, he views doc Dan more than as a physical therapist. The athlete failed to convey his true emotions and thoughts due to his immense guilt: (chapter 77) (chapter 77). He is the cicada, because he feels powerless in front of doc Dan. Or we could say, he is the cicada due to his self-loathing. Hence he feels so small. On the other hand, observe that he doesn’t expose his vulnerability to doc Dan. He appears strong, independent and determined in front of the physical therapist. (chapter 77)

Thus the athlete chose to rely on the language he masters: deals. And this makes sense once we recall his past. Physical therapists in his life (chapter 1) have always been temporary, rotated and replaced like disposable tools. (chapter 53) Never once did he sustain a long relationship with one which was definitely influenced by his manager. Even now, with Dan, he cannot cross the invisible line between professional and personal (chapter 77) life, between contract and confession. Instead of admitting his own desires and true needs, he offers a time-limited deal: a future that already announces separation. (chapter 77) It is no wonder that his voice and the cicada’s noise blur into one rhythm — restless, repetitive, transient. (chapter 77)

The Cicada’s Life

But there exists another evidence for this interpretation. The little insect spends two to five years underground before it emerges, molts, and sings — a lifespan that eerily mirrors the champion’s career.

He entered the global stage at twenty (chapter 75), and now at twenty-six (chapter 75), like the cicada in its final molt, he sings louder than ever, defiant against the silence that waits for him. (chapter 77) His entire existence is noise, presence, demand: every word in this chapter punctuated by the chirp of the cicada, as if his voice itself were inseparable from its call. And the choice for the cicada is no coincidence, for in East Asian cultures, cicadas often stand for rebirth and transformation because these creatures go through 5 metamorphosis and spend years underground before finally breaking free into the light. To conclude, Jaekyung, too, has been buried in survival, in the underground world of his trauma and the MFC system. This means, like the cicada that takes years of unseen preparation before its brief summer of song, Jaekyung has reached the peak of his arc. His final metamorphosis is imminent — and now, you comprehend in the introduction why I pointed out that the athlete’s metamorphosis felt hollow or at least not complete. In reality, he is still under the influence of Park Namwook. Keep in mind that in the car, he expressed the absence of desire to fight, his mental and physical exhaustion: (chapter 69) Under the tree, the “fighter” is acting, as if he was strong and healthy again! (chapter 77) He has already accepted the fight in the fall (chapter 77), while in the car, he was still hesitant.

The Ant and The Cicada

Here the fable of The Cicada and the Ant from Aesop casts its shadow. The cicada sings recklessly, wasting summer in song while the ant toils and prepares. Jaekyung is the cicada, immersed in the immediate, deaf to winter’s approach; Dan has lived like the ant (chapter 57), sacrificing joy for survival, laboring without song. But Mingwa overturns the moral. The grandmother embodies the ant’s labor (chapter 62), turning Dan into a beast of burden — obedient, exploited, mute. The landlord has a similar mind-set (chapter 77), yet he diverges from Shin Okja, because he is aware of the importance of rest. Moreover, we see him working next to the two “kids”. On the other hand, note that doc Dan is working once again during his free time. (chapter 77) Shin Okja’s hoarding brought no music, no life which contrasts a little to the nameless farmer: (chapter 77) His words are linked to music. Yet, if we compare the champion with the grandmother, the cicada fills the silence with sound (chapter 77), making the tree’s presence visible. If the ant embodies survival without joy, the cicada insists on life even in its brevity.

But the cicada carries yet another, subtler illusion. It sings in heat and brightness, as if conversing with the sun itself. (chapter 77) To our ears, its music feels like a hymn to light—a celebration of the afternoon. The insect appears to believe the sky is its partner: I sing because the sun hears me. Yet the sun never answers. It is too distant, too indifferent. The cicada’s true companion has always been the trunk under its feet—the tree that holds it up, the branches that amplify its vibration, the roots that fed it in secret while it was buried as a nymph. The duet we hear is not with the sun; it is with wood and leaf, with the body that can actually respond—the tree that answers song with a rustling whoosh. (chapter 77)

A Lifetime Deal: the Cicada and the Sun

This misrecognition is Jaekyung’s, exactly. For years he has believed his real partner was the spotlight—the blinding, artificial sun of the ring. Titles, cameras, crowds: a heliocentric religion where the brighter he burns, the more “alive” he must be. And Park Namwook officiates that faith. He is the high priest of the false sun—controlling calendars, selling narratives, promising glory (chapter 75) (bench-talk during the night under a street lamp “let’s make history” pitches), always angling the wolf toward the next blaze. Under that light, every human bond is recoded as use: therapists rotate, friends become assets, even pain becomes a publicity arc. The “spotlight” warms (chapter 77); it never cares. It cannot hold you when the lights go out.

So what, in truth, lets the cicada sing? Not the sun. The mate and indirectly the tree. And this leads to my next observation. Doc Dan is the tree, but the sick doctor has no idea about his true nature. (chapter 41) (chapter 77) He is the surface that carries Jaekyung’s vibration, the structure that turns his noise into presence. Even underground, the cicada nymph lives by roots—its unseen life depends on the tree’s hidden water. It serves as their burials too. Likewise, Jaekyung’s fiercest seasons have been fed by quiet, unglamorous care: taped hands, worked tendons, meals cooked at dawn, a body coaxed back from ruin. The sun applauds; the tree sustains.

This reorders the scene in chapter 77. Every time Jaekyung makes a proposal—“two matches,” “debt cleared,” “contract ends”—the cicada answers, chirp, chirp, as if the insect were echoing the man. But hear it more precisely: he keeps singing upward (chapter 77), toward the sun that will never reply. The only answer available is lateral, beside him—the whoosh in the leaves, the breath of the tree. And that is Dan. The real dialogue of the chapter is not man ↔ spotlight, but cicada ↔ tree: chirp answered by whoosh, willpower answered by presence. Is this not beautiful?

Here the warning sharpens. The sun is a spectacle that consumes. Namwook’s “solar” system—rankings, schedules, comeback arcs—demands continuous radiance from a body that has already confessed fatigue. A cicada can sing itself to death.The star risks doing the same—confusing performance with relationship, mistaking visibility for intimacy, burning precious time before he has learned how to live. If he keeps treating the spotlight as companion, winter will arrive while he is still calling to a sky that cannot hold him. If so, he will end up alone, a warning Hwang Byungchul expressed on the rooftop. (chapter 75) This shows that the athlete has not found the right answer yet. He only focused on this aspect: doc Dan (chapter 76) But the director had told him this: (chapter 75) He should pay attention to his surroundings which doesn’t only include doc Dan, but also the puppies, the trees, the ocean, the sun etc.

This solitude is already foreshadowed. On the bench, Jaekyung mirrored Dan’s own posture of resignation: (chapter 77) he sacrifices himself for others. He agrees to his manager’s demands, he prioritizes Dan’s recovery and desires, he helps the landlord for the doctor’s sake and in the process he erases himself. Thus he has no time for himself and his “family”. He still has no private life. (chapter 77) At no moment, he is mentioning Hwang Byungchul or the landlord. He goes further—he defines himself as a shackle, an anchor weighing Dan down. The language is borrowed directly from Dan’s own vocabulary: (chapter 77). In a grim symmetry, both men come to see themselves as burdens, unworthy of being chosen, each convinced he is dragging the other down. Under this new perspective, my avid readers can understand why I perceived no deep change in the wolf, he is still defining himself as a fighter and champion, nothing more.

This raises the following question. How can the champion fight with such a mindset? (chapter 77) Each match will only bring him closer to separation. Whether he wins or loses, the outcome is the same: Dan will leave. (chapter 77) His mind will never be at peace. That certainty can only gnaw at him, poisoning his training with dread. He can no longer imagine a victory that can be shared, nor a defeat that can be softened. Glory and suffering alike will be stripped of their meaning, because both exclude the very person he longs to share them with, if the doctor agrees under these conditions. (chapter 77) He won’t be able to enjoy their time together either, always thinking of the separation. And this is exactly why episode 77 feels like the culmination of an old rhythm of blindness — first staged in episode 11 (chapter 11), replayed in episode 58 (chapter 58), and now revealed in its bleakest form on the bench.

  • Episode 11: Dan on his knees, begging for help, is met not with recognition but with Jaekyung’s misinterpretation. The champion, unable to read the doctor’s suffering, turns the plea into a promise of “fun.” Dan’s misery is swallowed in pleasure’s disguise.
  • Episode 58: At the landlord’s gathering, the others dance, drink, and laugh while Dan sits silent and withdrawn. Again, suffering and loneliness are silenced by entertainment. His isolation deepens because those around him are blind to his exhaustion, masking solitude and absence with noisy joy.
  • Episode 77: Finally, on the bench, there is no misinterpretation and no distraction — yet no joy either. (chapter 77) Both men hold popsicles, and both let them melt away. The sweetness drips into nothingness. Neither finishes the treat; neither savors the moment. The popsicles are wasted like their time together, like their words unsaid. Life is slipping through their hands, uneaten, unlived.

Here the symmetry sharpens: in 11, while Jaekyung seized the opportunity to have fun at Dan’s cost; in 58, others’ play excluded the physical therapist altogether; in 77, the absence of play exposes the core truth — neither man knows how to enjoy the present. However, the cicada’s noise stands for entertainment and short-lived happiness which means that the “goddess” Mingwa is indirectly warning her figures, not to waste time and enjoy the present. They should confess. At the same time, she is underlining the importance of “health” and that “illness” should be taken seriously.

This is Dan’s tragedy: despite knowing life’s fragility – chapter 59- (the puppy’s burial seared death into his memory), he still cannot taste life. The sweetness of the moment melts as passively as he endures it. Yet it is also Jaekyung’s tragedy, because by calling himself a “shackle” (77), he steps into Dan’s shoes: burdened, unworthy, longing — and unheard. What was once Dan’s silent plea for companionship is now Jaekyung’s, but this time it is Dan who cannot perceive the truth, too focused on himself and his self-loathing.

The bench thus becomes the mirror of episodes 11 and 58, binding them into a single arc. It shows how fun, sweetness, and joy — the song of life itself — are continuously misplaced, misread, or wasted between them.

Once again, Jaekyung finds himself racing against time (chapter 77). In the past, he fought to shorten it—to end fights quickly, to push through exhaustion, to prove himself before fate closed in. Now he fights to prolong it, to stretch the fragile terms of this contract, to squeeze eternity into borrowed weeks. Yet the irony is merciless: the more he tries to hold on, the more unbearable his solitude becomes. Every strike, every victory, every step forward is also a countdown toward the moment Dan vanishes from his side. Thus I can only deduce that he is doomed to lose his “match” in the fall, if he doesn’t postpone it.

The Rootless Tree

If Jaekyung is the cicada, Dan is the tree. But not any tree: he is the one standing in the corner of the yard, silent, enduring, and taken for granted. (chapter 77) A tree provides shade, stability, and wood — others rest beneath it, lean against it, even cut it down when it no longer “produces.” That has been Dan’s role in life: used by the grandmother, landlord (chapter 77), the director of the hospice and even patients as a background presence, dependable (chapter 71) but voiceless. His attraction to Shin Okja’s wedding cabinet makes sense here. (chapter 19) The cabinet, crafted from dead wood and mother-of-pearl, is civilization’s tree: beautiful, heavy, but lifeless. It embodies control and permanence, much like the grandmother’s treatment of him — precious in appearance, mute in agency. When Dan strokes it longingly in chapter 19 (chapter 19), he projects himself onto it and his grandmother, identifying with its polished silence. By chapter 53, however, the tone shifts. (chapter 53) The cabinet becomes a burden, an inheritance of death and stasis that he must abandon, just as he begins to sense the need to step beyond his grandmother’s shadow.

The parallel runs deeper. A tree, unlike a cabinet, is alive. (chapter 41) But life requires care: water, soil, and balance between sun (chapter 41) and shade. This means that trees need care, yet the problem is that since they grow patiently, people take them for resilient. Nevertheless, the illness of a tree (parasites, fungus) can be difficult to perceive because signs are not always obvious and can be confused with normal growth patterns (falling leaves due to the season). This mirrors doc Dan’s conditions. He is blamed for his sickness, as he has a weak constitution (chapter 21) or he is neglecting himself (chapter 70). Thus I see Dan’s decline, his exhaustion, his silence at the bench in chapter 77, as a reflection of this reality: he is not being tended like the tree in the courtyard which contrasts to the way the chili peppers are treated. (chapter 77) He is not bringing any fruit or nourishment. However, a tree serves as a habitat for animals (birds, insects…) Additionally, notice his hands — almost lowered throughout (chapter 77), even when holding a Popsicle. (chapter 77) Doc Dan doesn’t eat, doesn’t raise his hands, doesn’t claim space. He neglects himself as others have neglected him. In the last panel, one detail caught my attention: with one hand, he is holding his wrist. It was, as though he was trying to stop himself from eating the Popsicle.

And yet, in chapter 41, under a vast tree, (chapter 41) his posture was different. Then, he looked up. He opened his palm toward the light, acknowledging that a tree does not live for utility alone but breathes and feels. (chapter 41) That was the moment he realized he had caught feelings for Jaekyung. The tree embodies life, hence there is this expression: “The tree of life”. Under this new perspective, it becomes comprehensible why the main lead came to associate rest and companionship to a walk through the woods. (chapter 47) The symbolism is sharp: a tree in a forest is never lonely. Surrounded by others, it becomes part of a living community. Dan’s nightly walks (chapter 65) — through woods, past the grave of the nameless puppy — reveal his repressed longing: to mourn, to belong, to root himself in a place where companionship is natural, not demanded. He is indeed longing for recognition and care.

The contrast could not be clearer: the grandmother abandoned her furniture in Seoul, and now she prepares to abandon him the same way (chapter 57), treating him as a cabinet to be left behind or a baggage to be passed on. (chapter 65) But Dan is not furniture. He is a tree, and the forest remains his true horizon. His illness, his exhaustion, his silence are not fate; they are symptoms of neglect. What he longs for — and what his love for Jaekyung first awakened — is to step into the woods, to be among companions, to be cared for as living. I would even add that deep down, he is neglecting himself in order to receive care: (chapter 76) What he expressed in front of the champion was actually reflecting his own desires. But so far, no one is willing to stay by his side and take care of him, when he is sick. Exactly like the athlete, the main lead was not allowed to become “sick” in the end, as he had to support his grandmother.

The tree in myth and ritual embodies the axis of existence itself: roots sunk into death, trunk standing in life, branches reaching toward heaven. Roots hold what is buried — the puppy’s nameless grave (chapter 59), the parents never properly mourned, all the grief denied him. The trunk carries scars, weathering seasons while others lean against it — the image of Dan’s silent, taken-for-granted endurance. And it is precisely on the trunk, in the realm of life itself, that the cicada sings. (chapter 77) Jaekyung’s restless call resounds through Dan’s endurance: his silence becomes resonance, his shade becomes sound. His song fills the air, making the tree’s existence suddenly audible, visible, alive. (chapter 77) This mirrors their relationship: the champion’s presence — disruptive, insistent — compels Dan out of muteness, dragging his quiet endurance into resonance. Where the grandmother reduced him to labor and servitude, Jaekyung insists, almost violently, that Dan should be free and heard. That’s the reason why I am expecting a huge change in him in the next episode (78). Besides, doc Dan’s number is 8!

This is why the symbolism of natural burials resonates so strongly. In South Korea, groves are increasingly chosen as final resting places, where ashes feed the soil and the deceased “return to the bosom of nature.”

Dan has never been permitted to visit a burial — neither for his parents, nor for his own grief, the loss of the puppy. Is it a coincidence that the doctor is never seen going to the burial site for the puppy after that fateful night? It is because he has never been taught how to be vulnerable and to mourn. The vanishing of the parents was never brought up. (chapter 57) And because I made the connection between the main lead and the tree, another association came to my mind: the picture of the smiling Kim Dan with his grandmother in front of the hydrangeas. (chapter 65)

This plant blooms brilliantly but requires constant shade and water — fragile beauty that cannot be uprooted without withering. For me, they echo the absent mother: ornamental, dependent, ultimately unsustainable. However, this photography exposes not harmony but hierarchy. Shin Okja stands proudly before the blooms, lush plants that demand water and shade in abundance, while the mother lingers blurred in the background. The image suggests exclusivity: the grandmother has never been able to pay attention to more than one person at a time. For me, she used the little boy as her excuse to claim care for herself — because she “took care of him,” she believed herself entitled to receive attention in return. The hydrangeas thus mirror her role: fragile in appearance, but voracious in need, drawing resources to herself and leaving others in the shadows. The mother, displaced into the background, must have felt the loneliness of someone perpetually excluded from this one-sided economy of affection. Even Dan’s duck-printed shirt reinforces the point. The duck belongs to the pond, a space of water and cyclical nurture, yet there is no pond in the picture. Moreover, the “pond” is not freedom but a closed circuit where water flows only to the hydrangea. The child, like the duck, does not swim freely; he is displayed as proof of the grandmother’s virtue, her moral claim to attention. In this way the photograph unveils a disturbing inversion: Shin Okja as the hydrangea that consumes, Dan as the duck that justifies her entitlement, and the mother as the silent absence pushed beyond the frame. And since both are smiling in the picture, I assume that the photographer must have hidden their suffering behind the camera, which would mirror this scene: (chapter 58) In this panel, the tree in the corner of the yard is not visible, mirroring the exclusion of the main lead in this “happy scene”. This interpretation reinforces my theory that the treasured picture of doc Dan is actually an allusion to the loss of Eden and the grandmother’s sin.

To conclude, Doc Dan’s true longing, lies elsewhere. Not to stand as a solitary trunk in the corner of a yard, nor to be polished into furniture (Wedding Cabinet), nor to prop up fragile blooms — but to be part of a forest and as such to have a family, a home. So when Joo Jaekyung gives him the freedom to choose his path (chapter 77), he is actually pushing him to find his own roots. Thus the tree replies with his branches. (chapter 77) And here the sound symbolism crystallizes. While in the yard, the cicada chirps and the wind whooshes, in the champion’s bedroom, the sound “whoosh” (chapter 76) accompanied the ghostly illusion of Dan, a presence felt but no longer seen. As you can see, the sound exposes the doctor’s true life: he is a ghost, exactly like the tree in the corner of the yard. This means that we should expect doc Dan’s response to the champion’s offer in the next episode. However, this time, the physical therapist will make his own choice, not influenced by his grandmother, born from his true desire.

Sweetness and Fire – Red Bean, Chili, and the Melon

In the previous part, I already examined the signification of the popsicles. However, I didn’t study their flavors. Interesting is that each flavor mirrors the men’s inner stance toward life. (chapter 77)

Dan reaches for the red bean popsicle, the Bibibig (chapter 77). One might think, he selected it, because he likes it and as such has already tasted it. However, I can refute this perception. (chapter 16) When doc Dan was looking for a new place, he was eating a red bean bread in front of a freezer at a convenience story. The little boy in the background was looking for a popsicle himself. This shows not only the malnutrition of doc Dan’s from the past, but also his choices were influenced by his grandmother and her taste. In episode 11, the grandmother offered him red bean bread for his birthday (chapter 11), and his choice in the present is still shaped by her hand. In addition, red bean is sweetness born of endurance: boiled, mashed, sugared — a labor of patience. This reflects his childhood and life with his grandmother. Finally, the juxtaposition of doc Dan and the boy in front of the freezer serves as a metaphor: doc Dan still has the mind of a child. Interesting is that under the tree, doc Dan does not eat it. (chapter 77) The wolf has already taken a huge bite, while the 29 years old man’s lips barely touches the ice cream. Moreover, his statement (chapter 77) is not referring to the popsicle, but to the good news from the celebrity. This disconnection exposes the doctor’s lack of appetite and listlessness. He is not living, he is withering. Hence the popsicle melts untouched, a confession without words: (chapter 77) Dan continues to deny himself sweetness, continues to let what he desires drip away, uneaten. His passivity here is no accident — it is his illness, his habit, inheritance, the echo of a life where his own likes never mattered. At the same time, his behavior could be judged in a positive light: it displays his confusion and loss of identity as well. He didn’t reject the popsicle. He is at a crossroad, for he doesn’t know what he likes in life. He selected the red bean popsicle out of habit and politeness… but deep down, he didn’t feel like eating it. Hence he is not looking at his fated partner.

But red bean in Korea also carries another meaning: it is a ward against misfortune and evil spirits. Families once scattered red beans around the house after funerals or during rituals, believing their bitter-sweetness drove away bad luck. How ironic, then, that Dan’s uneaten popsicle becomes a symbol of this very curse. By refusing sweetness, by letting it melt away, he also refuses the power to ward off the misfortunes that have haunted his life. What should have been protection becomes waste. His own “amulet” is abandoned, just as he was. This could be seen as an allusion to a future collapse or incident in his life. Keep in mind that his suicide attempt has not been perceived correctly yet. Under the tree, it was reduced to an accident (chapter 77) or “sleepwalking” (chapter 77) and not depression!

On the other hand, Dan is not only red bean. He is also chili pepper: (chapter 77) sharp, hot, forged by survival. Chili peppers, introduced to Korea centuries ago, became a cornerstone of its cuisine — not only for flavor but as a sign of vitality and strength. They are hung in bundles outside homes to ward off bad luck, their fiery color a talisman of life-force. Doc Dan brings life into the champion’s life , pushing the athlete to change his habits. The physical therapist also burns (chapter 18), though he rarely lets it show. His fire erupts in flashes — anger, defiance, or hidden passion (chapter 44)— but most of the time it is suppressed, hidden like a chili dried and strung up, more symbol than taste. If the red bean is the sweetness he represses, the chili is the intensity he fears unleashing. Together, they reveal a man both sweet and burning, tender and scarred. His tragedy is that he has learned to mute both sides of himself — neither savoring sweetness nor embracing fire. By muting his own appetite, he also mutes his voice — which is why he cannot confess his feelings to the champion. (chapter 77) He refuses the penthouse not because he dislikes it, but because he has already grown attached to it, to its inhabitant, and to the bond he fears to name. To admit this attachment would be to risk exposure — to risk being seen and rejected once again.

For Dan, Jaekyung is not the cicada but the sun itself: (chapter 41) distant, unreachable, dazzling. The tree cannot imagine that the sun could notice its shade. To him, Jaekyung is both too far and too important, a star in every sense, while he himself remains a mere trunk at the margins — one physical therapist among many, a man without fame, without recognition. Thus his silence is not only fear but conviction: that he is invisible, that his love could never matter to someone who shines so brightly.

Jaekyung, by contrast, chooses melon. (chapter 77) Melon is not survival food, not inherited obligation. It is pure refreshment, fruit turned into summer sweetness. For once, he accepts it without protest, without remark, even tastes it. (chapter 77) The detail matters: this is not the strawberry of chapter 43 (chapter 43), presented on his birthday cake, but a quieter gesture of allowing sweetness into his body. Contrary to the past, he is now taking his time to eat it. (chapter 77) The melon popsicle hints at a shift. The cicada who only worked, only sang for survival in the ring, is beginning to taste life’s sweetness outside of it. However, his attitude changes, the moment he hears doc Dan’s refusal and hesitation. From that moment on, he can no longer eat the popsicle. (chapter 77) Thus I deduce that Joo Jaekyung must have enjoyed this brief moment with doc Dan under the tree. (chapter 77) Therefore we hear the cicada’s song.

And yet, their shared moment ends in waste. Neither finishes their ice cream. Both popsicles drip away in silence, signs of a larger failure: they cannot yet enjoy the present, cannot take in sweetness or fire without fear. This inability extends beyond food. It is mirrored in their blindness to life’s smaller joys — symbolized by Boksoon and her puppies. (chapter 77)

For the first time, the puppies appear directly before Jaekyung, (chapter 77) circling, playful, embodiments of innocence, pranks, and uncalculated joy. And yet, the champion does not see them. His gaze is elsewhere, fixed on Kim Dan and as such on promises, contracts and shackles, on the logic of debts and repayment.

Deals, Favors, and Shackles

This interpretation leads me to the following observation and question. Why are Boksoon and her puppies present under the tree (chapter 77), only to vanish soon after? (chapter 77) Their brief appearance offers a key to understanding the bind between Dan and Jaekyung. Boksoon approach the adults because of the popsicles, while the puppies are simply following their mother. The dog is drawn by the hope of food (chapter 77) — playfulness, comfort, life. But when no treat comes, they drift away. This is exactly what Dan longs for and exactly what he never receives: nourishment freely given, affection not tied to debt, contract, or favor. (chapter 13) His life has been shaped by exchanges where even love must be earned, and so he remains haunted by the sense that he is tolerated, not chosen. (chapter 19)

From the very start, the relationship between the hamster and the wolf has been trapped in this logic of contracts. In chapter 6, the penthouse agreement reduced everything to transaction : a fighter guarding his jinx, a therapist financing his grandmother’s care. (chapter 6) There was no cicada-song, no play — only sterile bargaining. Dan’s body and labor were priced; Jaekyung’s superstition was indulged. Both were tools, not partners.

Chapter 48 repeats the pattern in a darker key. Choi Gilseok offered another “contract,” one that smelled of temptation and corruption. (chapter 48) It was no real bargain, but a devil’s deal: short-term relief in exchange for entrapment in illegality. (chapter 48) Dan, swayed by Shin Okja’s illness (chapter 48), hid the meeting from Jaekyung. The secrecy itself poisoned the bond, culminating in the locker-room explosion. There Jaekyung hurled his cruelest accusation (chapter 51) : that Dan was obsessed with money. What Jaekyung failed to see is that this “obsession” was not Dan’s own desire, but Shin Okja’s influence. She had molded his tastes, his choices, his gifts (chapter 41) — even the act of repaying Jaekyung was her idea. Money became the currency of gratitude because she defined it so. Observe that her request from the celebrity evolves around money and time again: (chapter 65)

And favors, too, weigh like shackles. At the ocean, Shin Okja asked Jaekyung to take Dan to Seoul. (chapter 65) On the surface, it was framed as concern. But beneath, it was another manipulation: gratitude weaponized, agency erased. If Dan were ever to learn of this request, he would see himself once again reduced to baggage, carried not out of love but out of obligation. (chapter 77) Worse still, he would relive the sting of mistrust (chapter 51) — the same wound opened by Jaekyung’s suspicion in the locker room. To Dan, such favors are never gifts; they are veiled commands, proof that others act on his behalf because he cannot be trusted to act himself. Moreover, keep in mind that she denied him her request: (chapter 57), while she spent time with the champion on the beach. Xshe simply ignored his desire: (chapter 57) making decisions on his behalf without knowing his actual life. Her choices are based on the past and on her believes (television, trust in drugs and huge hospitals). She has no idea about his sleepwalking, his malnutrition, the incident with the switched spray, his blacklisting in Seoul …

This brings us to the bench in chapter 77. Here Jaekyung offers something new — or so it seems. (chapter 77) A finite contract: stay with me until the fight with Baek Junmin, then be free. Unlike the penthouse agreement, this one comes with an end date. But the language betrays him. It is still framed in terms of debt: (chapter 77) Shackles: the very word reveals the failure. A contract that was meant to liberate instead repeats the logic of bondage. While they are sitting next to each other, people might come to the following interpretation. They are equals contrary to the past: (chapter 6) (chapter 6) The reality is that this new offer doesn’t stand for equity and respect, rather servitude and submission. Something the doctor has already sensed: (chapter 77) He was already shocked how far the athlete was willing to go. Besides, he keeps wondering why the athlete would act this way: (chapter 77) As you can see, I have the impression that a quarrel between Shin Okja and her grandson could occur because of the celebrity, the doctor having the impression that he can not make his own choices, his life is ruled by Shin Okja (see chapter 2, 6 and 11).

Worse, Jaekyung introduces a word he has never voiced before: hatred. (chapter 77) In his mind, hatred is the imagined opposite of love — the binary hammered into him by his father. (chapter 73) Pride or shame, strength or weakness, love or hate: these were the categories of his childhood, the narrow spectrum in which he was trained to live. Resentment was inevitable, as natural as shadow beneath the sun. Jaekyung cannot yet imagine tenderness, attachment, or yearning as possibilities that stand outside this binary. He can’t anticipate that someone can be loved despite his flaws or wrongdoings.

And so the new contract fails, just like all the others. What Dan needs is neither another favor nor another deal, but the recognition of emotions that cannot be reduced to transaction. Gratitude is not enough. Obligation is not enough. To speak in terms of shackles and hatred is to miss the very heartbeat of life. Doc Dan wants to love properly and be loved. (chapter 71)

The truth has been there all along — whispered by nature, mirrored by Boksoon and her puppies. What Dan longs for is what the dog sought: a gift freely given, nourishment without condition. And what Jaekyung must learn is that between love and hate lies a spectrum of feelings unnamed in his vocabulary: tenderness, affection, vulnerability, confession. Until then, both men remain bound — not by contracts or favors, but by their own inability to imagine a bond beyond them. But they have the landlord by their side.

Notice how the landlord’s words (chapter 77) float with a note of music attached, as though he were not naming a financial debt but humming an invitation. Unlike Shin Okja, who used debts and favors as invisible shackles, the farmer’s “debt” carries no real weight of obligation. It is more like a pretext — a socially acceptable language that hides what he truly means: I enjoyed your presence, and I hope you’ll return.

That is why his request is so different from the grandmother’s. She demanded endless sacrifice, her “favors” becoming manipulative bonds (chapter 53) that left Dan trapped. The landlord, by contrast, knows limits. He praises without exploiting: “You’re doing better than anyone else here, the best!” But then, instead of pushing for more, he tells them to rest. He values their health, not just their productivity. In other words, he is not really an “ant” in La Fontaine’s fable, hoarding labor until exhaustion. He embodies a balance — work as a way to connect, not to consume.

Placed against the backdrop of chili harvests (chapter 77) — red, fiery, alive — his words gain even more resonance. Through the language of “work” and “debt,” he is offering something closer to companionship, a bond that extends beyond utility. If Shin Okja reduced Dan to a cabinet, the landlord gently places him back into the rhythm of life: song, labor, pause, and rest. This explicates why Jinx-philes could notice a glimpse of a smile on doc Dan’s face. (chapter 77) The landlord represents the link between the two insects in the end.

The Laughter Not Yet Heard Before Winter

The chapter ends warm, colorful, alive — cicadas singing, leaves swaying, ice cream dripping in the sun. (chapter 77) Yet where there is life, there is death. Nature teaches no illusion of permanence: every chirp already contains the silence that will follow, every green leaf already carries the memory of autumn’s fall. Jaekyung has only ever confronted death once, in the violent loss of his father (chapter 74), and since then he has refused to look beyond the ring. To him, the jinx belongs to matches, not to hospitals or funerals. He takes comfort in the grandmother’s words that she will choose her time of departure (chapter 65), never considering that illness could strike suddenly, that Dan’s health could collapse without warning, that Hwang Byungchul’s shadow could fade from the story altogether. Hence he imagines that they can visit Shin Okja regularly. (chapter 77) His eyes are locked on Baek Junmin, as if victory or defeat in the cage were the only horizon. (chapter 77) Yet, he is forgetting that he has already developed attachment to Shin Okja and even likes the director. Should the latter die, the star would be definitely affected, especially if he recalls their final moment together: the latter had a smile! (chapter 75) To conclude, he is still acting, as if he could control time and as such life.

Dan, by contrast, already knows that death waits close. (chapter 59) He buried his puppy at the edge of the forest. He spent some time by his grandmother’s side with the quiet resignation that each day might be the last. (chapter 59) For him, sweetness is fragile — a red bean bun, a fleeting popsicle — always on the verge of melting away. This is why silence overwhelms him on the bench: Jaekyung offers a contract, and as such the cicada calls, But Doc Dan’s own voice fails. Hence the wind answers (chapter 77) What he longs for is not a deal or a favor, but a confession — of love, of vulnerability, of fear.

Here the puppies and Boksoon hold the missing thread. (chapter 77) They appear in the yard, playful, unpredictable, embodiments of innocence and joy — yet Jaekyung does not see them. (chapter 76) He misses that for Dan, they are a source of comfort, tiny sparks of smile (chapter 57) in a life otherwise muted by burden. The tragedy is that Jaekyung himself is the only one who could give Dan that genuine laughter — the kind we glimpsed once, briefly, in chapter 44 (chapter 44) — but he does not yet grasp this. The reason is that he has repressed this night, the only smile he remembers is linked to Shin Okja. (chapter 77) Yet, she is no longer his source of “comfort”. (chapter 22) But the grandmother doesn’t embody jokes and games, only obligations and duties. So helping the grandmother doesn’t signify assisting his fated partner. Without pranks, without jokes, without the unpredictable gift of play, their bond risks becoming another duty, another sterile shackle.

And so the chili returns. (chapter 77) The wolf’s food has always been bland (chapter 22) — carefully measured meals from his nutritionist, even the doctor’s recent convalescent porridge of rice and chicken. (chapter 77) The male lead didn’t add abalone for example. But what if the athlete tasted something different? A hot, spiced dish, the kind that makes you laugh and cry at the same time? This is no abstract thought — Mingwa has already staged it in parallels. (chapter 37) In the States and in Seoul… After Heesung slept with Potato, he cooked him ramen studded with chili peppers. The gesture was not just breakfast but an intimate code, echoing the well-known phrase, “Do you want to eat ramen?” (chapter 35) — an invitation to closeness. Jaekyung might know the phrase, with his many partners before Dan, (special episode 1) but he has never truly eaten the ramen. Dan, ironically the virgin, has never received the invitation at all. The one ignorant of the metaphor has lived it (chapter 37); the one familiar with the code has never tasted its reality. 😂

This is foreshadowing. When Jaekyung finally accepts chili (chapter 77) — really eats it, really reacts — it will be the moment when bland survival gives way to fiery life. It will sting, it will burn, it may even make him cry, but those tears will not be the sterile sweat of weight-cutting or the hidden sobs of exhaustion. They will be tears shared, as laughter is shared, as sweetness is savored, as fire is embraced. This idea came to my mind because the athlete needs to learn the joy of mistakes! Once again, he offered a perfect deal, he fears to make mistakes… unaware that errors are part of life and should be embraced in the end.

Thus the title of this arc sharpens: The Song of Life is not only cicadas in the sun but also the spice that makes you choke and laugh (chapter 77), the puppy that dies yet leaves behind play, the silence that becomes confession, the contract that dissolves into companionship. Life and death are inseparable, grief and laughter intertwined, exactly like the day the athlete lost his guardian: (chapter 73) Joy and smile were followed by guilt (chapter 73), sadness and resent. (chapter 74)

The cicada sings because it will soon die. The tree sways because the wind reminds it it is not alone. And one day, Jaekyung will discover that the true ramen was never about the phrase, but about the burning, unpredictable, joyous taste of life itself.

This is the song hinted at in chapter 77. (chapter 77) Not just the Song of Life, but the song of life and death together — a melody where even the laughter not yet heard before winter has its place.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: You’re right 👨‍⚖️🤝

My avid readers might have been wondering why I haven’t released a single analysis yet. The reason is simple. I had a lot of stress at school (many staff meetings, school trips to plan etc), hence I had no energy left for Jinx. However, I want to publish one before the release of episode 77. Why? It is because this number is magical.

The release of chapter 77 comes charged with symbolic weight. In numerology, seven resonates with truth and inner searching and as such spiritual awakening; doubled, as in 77, it points to equity and communication — two forces balancing, two voices meeting. It is precisely this symmetry that hovers at the close of chapter 76, when Joo Jaekyung, long defined by victory, utters for the first time: “I lost.” (chapter 76) This admission is no mere reversal of pride. It gestures toward something Jaekyung has never known: an exchange that does not end in domination or silence, but in dialogue. For Kim Dan, too, it marks a turning point. (chapter 76) For the first time, he uses the expression you’re right in front of his fated partner. He seems to concede with this idiom. Yet this apparent submission hides a deeper reversal. By admitting Jaekyung never asked for his help, he redirects the exchange toward his own truth: the loneliness of having no one to care for you. (chapter 76) What unfolds in the kitchen is not a quarrel about porridge but a fragile recognition. Dan’s “You’re right” acknowledges Jaekyung’s perspective without bitterness, while Jaekyung’s “I lost”  (chapter 76) is his clumsy way of saying the same. Both, in their own idiom, admit the other is right — without denying their own truth. And tellingly, they deliver these words without facing each other. The absence of direct confrontation allows something new: not a fractured dialogue, but the first exchange built on respect. The opposite to these “challenges”: (chapter 9) (chapter 45)

Chapter 77 therefore promises not another contest of wills, but a true sharing of thoughts. The future episode, with its doubled sevens, embodies equity and communication: two truths, mirrored, balancing, a new version of the champion’s nightmare: (chapter 76) The kitchen scene closes one cycle and announces another. (chapter 76) What follows is an attempt to untangle why Jaekyung has always spoken in the language of winning and losing, how Dan has always yielded ground with his refrain “you’re right,” and why their exchange over porridge finally reverses the logic. The rest of the essay will trace how this “loss” becomes the champion’s first victory in love.

The Weight of Arguments in the wolf’s Life

Victory and loss — where does such a vocabulary come from? Such a mind-set seems almost natural for an athlete, whose life is measured in wins and defeats, belts and rankings. It is tempting, then, for Jinx-philes to assume it is Jaekyung’s own invention — the stubborn creed of a fighter who admits in chapter 76 that he was “single-minded about winning.” (Chapter 76) In this view, his fixation would be the product of ambition, pride, or ego: the expected cost of survival in a cage where only victory pays.

But that confession, full of sweat and self-loathing, risks being misunderstood if we take it at face value. The truth is revealed in the next panels: he never formed deep connections (chapter 76), because the adults in his life cut them off before they could exist. Winning became his only mode of survival because every formative argument in his youth ended in defeat, and not the kind decided by a referee. With his father, mother, coach, and manager, words never led to recognition — only to insult, silence, utility, or obedience. He learned early that dialogue could not protect him; only victory could. His victories were not chosen freely, but forced into being by guardians who made him feel like a burden, until relationships themselves became burdens.

Joo Jaewoon and laughs

With his father, argument was domination. Every interaction or exchange ended in violence or insult, the cruelest of which was the comparison to his mother:  (chapter 73) He was a loser because of his mother. To lose meant humiliation and rejection; to speak at all meant to invite contempt. The only possible rebuttal was victory — to prove through strength that he was not the pathetic, worthless child his father saw in him. Winning became his sole argument against a man who would never listen, the only way to resist being branded a loser.

This logic crystallized on the morning (dawn) of their last confrontation. Bleeding but defiant, the boy hurled back the father’s words: (chapter 73). It was not just defiance; it was a vow that victory would silence abuse once and for all. When he returned with the trophy, he shouted triumphantly, (chapter 73) ready at last to claim, “I was right.” Yet reality betrayed him. His father’s death denied him the only acknowledgment he had sought. (chapter 73) The words “I was right” died in his throat. He had proved himself, yet there was no one left to recognize it. His own prediction — that his father’s death would mean nothing — proved false. The absence cut deeper than the insults had, leaving Jaekyung not with triumph but with the bitter aftertaste of self-loathing. Victory had silenced his father, but it also silenced the son. He had proved himself, yet there was no one left to hear it. (chapter 74) At the funeral he remained dry-eyed, his face locked in shame (ch. 74). No one saw his guilt, but it consumed him: the one man he needed to hear “I was right” from could no longer answer. At the same time, his smile and laugh were also linked to misery. For Jaekyung, laughter was never the sound of joy, but the echo of mockery and rejection due to the father. Just as tears became tied to betrayal and abandonment through his mother, so too did his father twist laughter into a weapon (chapter 73) — every laugh at his expense reinforcing the verdict that he was weak, pathetic, a loser. In Jaekyung’s childhood vocabulary, neither laughter nor tears could carry warmth. Both were stripped of comfort and redefined as signs of humiliation and pain.

From then on, the champion’s victories were haunted. Each belt raised was a mute confession to a dead man, proof delivered into silence. What looked like arrogance from the outside was in fact self-loathing: every triumph reminded him of the futility of winning arguments when no one was left to listen.

The nameless mother and tears

With his mother, argument was absence disguised as care. Unlike his father, she did not break him with fists or insults but with promises and justifications that placed the burden on him. (chapter 72) To the boy, she was not silent at first: she must have definitely told him to become strong, to endure, to wait. She gave him her number, leaving the illusion that her departure was not abandonment but necessity. Victory and wealth became her conditions for love. That is why he swore over the payphone to work hard (chapter 72) and “make money” so she could return, and why after his father’s death he still hoped for her homecoming. (chapter 74) But when the calls went unanswered, her silence became the sharpest weapon of all. Her eventual reply (chapter 74) confirmed that his effort had never mattered. For the first time, he cried (chapter 74), his tears expressed not just grief but the recognition of betrayal. From then on, tears themselves became equated with loss, weakness, and abandonment. This is why, in the wolf’s nightmare, Dan’s crying form (chapter 76) appears: the sight of tears recalls the moment he unconsciously realized that even his mother’s “you’re right” was a lie. At the same time, those tears function as a mirror. The champion projects onto Dan the very weakness he has always forbidden himself to show. (chapter 76) That’s why they are facing each other. This vision confirmed my previous interpretation, the physical therapist is the athlete’s tender reflection.

Yet the nightmare reveals even more. Notice their positions: Jaekyung faces Dan as though locked in an argument, but the words he utters — “Where are you going?” — strike at the heart of his own abandonment. As a child, he had no right to question his mother’s departure; he could only trust her excuse. Now, in the dream, Dan becomes the mirror of every adult: the father who could not cry, the mother who perhaps cried but still left silently (chapter 76), the boy he once was who longed to weep but had to swallow it down. At the same time, Jaekyung himself occupies the place of the “adult” — (chapter 76) the sinner, the one guilty of causing tears. This double vision displays his self-loathing. Thus I deduce that before meeting doc Dan, in the wolf’s psyche, tears were not simply weakness but hypocrisy, a performance that masks betrayal. How do I come to this interpretation? It is because during their last phone call, the mother shed no tears (chapter 74), she only made requests! (chapter 74) Hence the wolf’s tears were quickly replaced by rage and violence. (chapter 74)

Yet the nightmare does more than replay old pain. (chapter 76) It stages his first fragile attempt at connection. The positioning is crucial: though Jaekyung stands opposite Dan as though in an argument, he shows an interest in his fated partner. He is curious and worried about him. For the boy who once believed strength and silence were the only defenses against humiliation, this hesitant query is revolutionary. He is no longer trying to win, but to reach. Hence he attempts to stop doc Dan from leaving. (chapter 76) His trembling hand upon waking (chapter 76) shows the yearning to be held, comforted, reassured — something he never received from either parent. He is not entirely responsible for the physical therapist’s suffering. And here lies the difference: Dan’s tears are not manipulative or hypocritical , like the ones Jaekyung suspects from his mother, but unfiltered honesty. He expressed his emotions, not just through tears, but also through body language! (chapter 1) He was shaking, he was bowing and asking for forgiveness! Dan embodies a form of vulnerability that is real, legible, and forgiving contrary to the mother. When the teenager heard his mother’s voice after such a long time, the latter never brought up her past action. She never asked him for forgiveness.

In this sense, the nightmare foreshadows Jaekyung’s confession in the kitchen. (chapter 76) By following him and acknowledging Dan’s suffering and sincerity, he begins to dismantle his old associations of tears with betrayal. Facing Dan means facing his inner child: the boy who once begged his mother to return, and who still waits to be told that his effort mattered. In this way, apologizing to Dan becomes a form of apologizing to himself — a step out of self-loathing and into the possibility of communication.

Hwang Byungchul and it’s not too late

If Jaekyung’s father embodied domination and his mother abandonment, Hwang Byungchul represented blindness and passivity disguised as authority. His flaw was not cruelty but compliance: he never questioned the “mothers” in his life — not his own (chapter 74), whose quiet devotion and silence kept the gym alive, nor Jaekyung’s, whose absence he accepted without challenge. (chapter 72) In fact, his own mother’s submission reinforced this flaw: her blind trust in her son, her refusal to question his choices and the boxing world, taught him that authority need not be examined, only endured or seen as trustworthy. For him, hierarchy was unquestionable, and so he perpetuated it. Thus he stands for lack of critical thinking. This is why, with Hwang, the vocabulary of “right” and “wrong” was never about dialogue but about obedience. No wonder why he became so violent at the police station. (chapter 74) Unlike Jaewoon’s domination or the mother’s evasive silence, Hwang cloaked his authority in the language of advice — yet beneath it lay a black-and-white dualism: winners and losers, villains and victims. Thus Joo Jaewoon was blamed for becoming a thug (chapter 74), while the wolf’s mother was a victim. He viewed her as a selfless and caring mother: (chapter 74)And observe how he provoked the main lead. (chapter 74) When Hwang sneers, “What, am I wrong? Come on, answer me!” he is not inviting dialogue — he is staging a trap. The question is rhetorical, a demand for submission. Let’s not forget that he had witnessed the phone call in front of the funeral hall, but back then he had done nothing. And when the boy hesitates (chapter 74), unable to answer, Hwang strikes him in the chest. (chapter 74)and justifies his action behind social norms. (chapter 74) In that instant, he takes the role of judge, referee, and executioner, collapsing “argument” into violence. The very words “Am I wrong?” contain the irony: the coach is less interested in truth than in reasserting his own authority. Silence is treated as guilt, hesitation as defeat.

When Jaekyung bowed to him (chapter 74), he effectively admitted “you’re right” to the coach. Yet this wasn’t simply genuine agreement — it was submission, respect mixed with survival. The director misread it as validation of his worldview. This only reinforced his certainty, encouraging him never to reconsider his role. (chapter 74) When the protagonist finally left, the director could declare with satisfaction: t(chapter 74).

Crucially, his phrasing matters: he does not say “I’m right,” nor does he grant the fighter subjectivity with “you’re right.” Instead, “that’s right” casts Jaekyung himself as the object of judgment — a boy who fits into Hwang’s pre-set narrative of failure. At the same time, this word “that” could be seen as a reference to social norms. The words externalize responsibility: “that” is what defines the relationship between the director and the main lead. They are not a team or a family. The director of the boxing studio was forced to become “responsible” for the teenager, because the police had called him, not because of choice or empathy. He had become his guardian from a moral and social perspective. (chapter 74) The reality was that the old man had never truly become the star’s home and family, which explains why he constantly leaned on other adults, the mother or the father, to provide the guidance he himself refused to give. At the same time, I come to the following deduction: he must have lost his boxing studio, and with its vanishing, the elder was forced to face “reality”: loneliness, sickness and absence of happiness in his life!

And even decades later, his mentality hadn’t changed. Speaking to Dan, he cast the same black-and-white judgment: (chapter 70) Once again, Jaekyung is reduced to “that bastard” — a label, not a person — while Dan is framed as the pitiable victim. The old coot remains the righteous observer, untouched by guilt, protected by a rhetoric that always shifts responsibility elsewhere.

But the champion’s visit changed everything. The boy he once pushed away, the “bastard” he never claimed, still remembered him and returned. (chapter 75) He was happy again, though he initially tried to hide it. We have to envision that before the wolf’s visit, the elder had to face what his own life outside the gym looked like: sickness, solitude, the collapse of the studio that had sustained him and came to resent the main lead. Yet, Joo Jaekyung’s behavior changed everything: (chapter 71) (chapter 71) Only during the champion’s visit, did his words alter.On the rooftop of the hospice, he finally tells Jaekyung: (chapter 75) This shift did not come from wisdom gained in the ring but from loss — the loss of health, the loss of the gym, the loss of illusions — and from Jaekyung’s loyalty, which pierced through his blindness. Interesting is that this time, he doesn’t give the answer to the athlete. He stops thinking “I’m right, you’re wrong”. He treats him as an adult, as a mature and thoughtful person. Through that fidelity, Hwang glimpsed at last what he had denied both himself and Jaekyung for decades: that victory alone cannot sustain a life.

This is where the contrast with Dan becomes stark. Hwang’s “that’s right” (chapter 74) avoids accountability, treating Jaekyung as an object who merely confirms the coach’s worldview. Dan’s later (chapter 76), by contrast, acknowledges the other as a subject. It respects Jaekyung’s perspective without erasing his own. To conclude, the director’s change of attitude signals that—even for the wolf—change is possible. (chapter 76) It is not too late. The question “Am I too late?” is the consequence of Hwang byungchul’s words and it gradually indicates the switch in the champion’s mentality. It is no longer about being right or wrong. However, the nightmare reveals another aspect: the world is not black and white, but grey. (chapter 76) Imagine for one week, the champion has been staying in bed sick and no one paid him a visit and took care of him. Not even doc Dan, who knew that the man was sick… an important detail which he didn’t reveal to his landlord. (chapter 76) Hence he remained silent and avoided his gaze. But like the director showed it, it is never too late: (chapter 76)

The Manager and His Hidden Disability

Park Namwook is often shown eyeless, as the latter are concealed behind his glasses. (chapter 69) Thus my avid readers might jump to the conclusion that his biggest flaw is blindness, similar to the director. Besides, I had often criticized him for his blindness and ignorance. However, this is just a deception. The manager’s real defect is actually his deafness. How so? He does not hear Jaekyung’s words (chapter 17) at all. The verity is that he refuses to listen to his thoughts and emotions (chapter 31) in good (chapter 45) or in bad times. It goes so far, he does not take his silences seriously, and does not register his pain. This explicates why the manager saw in the champion’s silence at the restaurant as an agreement for a new fight! (chapter 69) His role is not to guide or protect, but to extract: money, victories, publicity. (chapter 75) In my opinion, he is fighting against oblivion through the star. This hidden disability explains why the coach can never truly connect with the champion. He listens instead to other voices – the CEO of MFC (chapter 69), the rumors among the directors (chapter 46), the media (chapter 52), the sponsors (chapter 41), the spectators or “authorities”(chapter 36) — and reacts to them, even violently, as in chapter 52, when public criticism painted Jaekyung in a negative light. (chapter 52) The slap was less about Jaekyung’s behavior than about Namwook’s own fear of outside judgment. He was not listening to the man in front of him but to the noise around him. He feared losing control in the end, especially after the athlete’s words let transpire his true position at the gym: (chapter 52) His question is not mere anger. It is a confession of position — an inadvertent acknowledgment that he knows he is the true backbone of the gym. He is the one responsible, the one carrying the burden that Namwook refuses to admit. These words crack the illusion: the fighter is not subordinate, but owner. The gym lives because of him.

Namwook’s reaction is immediate and violent. He slaps Jaekyung, not to correct him, but to silence him. The blow is the physical embodiment of his deafness: he refuses to hear the truth, so he strikes to reassert control. In that moment, Namwook reveals his greatest fear — that the fragile hierarchy could collapse if the fighter’s voice were truly recognized. And this interpretation gets validated right after: he appears as the one dependent on the athlete. (chapter 52) He acted as a child, faked “tears” in order to use empathy to his advantage.

For Namwook, dialogue is irrelevant: he expects obedience, nothing more, similar to the director. However, there’s a difference between them. Hwang Byungchul felt pity for the little boy in the past (chapter 71), hence he tried to help in his own way. On the other hand, Park Namwook shows clearly no sign to be interested in the private life of his boss. He is preferring ignorance over “knowledge and connection”. (chapter 66) Despite the incident, the manager hasn’t changed yet. He clinched onto the past, thinking that everything will be like before, as soon as the athlete enters the ring. He images a return to normality with the next match.

And yet, signs of change creep in. In chapter 66, standing in the silence of his own wardrobe, the star repeats Namwook’s words to himself: (chapter 66) For years, he had accepted his manager’s judgments out of habit, mistaking silence for consent. But here, for the first time, the repetition feels deliberate — not resignation, but reflection (“though”). The phrase becomes a question more than an agreement: is he truly right? He is admitting this out of habit.

By chapter 69, the cracks widen. Driving alone, he clenches the wheel and admits inwardly: (chapter 69) His silence has shifted from obedience to suffocation. The weight of Namwook’s deaf authority is no longer bearable. And yet, even here, his confession is muted, confined to the private space of his car. He is not yet ready to speak the words aloud — not until someone appears who will listen.

Park Namwook’s hidden disability, then, is not that he cannot hear, but that he refuses to. Hence he becomes blind as well because of his greed and vanity. His authority depends on silencing Jaekyung’s voice, keeping him in the role of the commodity who produces money but never speaks truth. The moment that silence is broken, his position collapses. And the wardrobe and the car foreshadow this collapse — places of solitude where Jaekyung begins, at last, to hear himself. And here I feel the need to add another observation: (chapter 48) This scene was observed by Kwak Junbeom, so the latter could have reported it to the coach. If it truly happened, this would expose the coach’s deafness and cowardice. He chose passivity instead of confronting the doctor or the champion. That way, he avoided responsibility. And this brings me to my final conclusion concerning the deaf manager. His main way to contact the celebrity is the cellphone: (chapter 66) It is both his mask and his crutch — a tool for barking orders, never for dialogue. The moment the line goes dead, his authority collapses, for he has no other means of contact. His power depends on Jaekyung’s reception, not his own strength. In truth, the manager’s disability is exposed here: deaf to Jaekyung’s voice, he has trained himself to hear only the ring of a phone. A fragile authority built on silence, ready to crumble the instant Jaekyung decides to switch it off.

Conclusions: The true origins of the champion’s mind-set

From these four figures, Jaekyung inherited a devastating binary. Argument meant violence, silence, utility, or stubbornness and selfishness — never recognition. No wonder why the champion became so selfish. He never had the last word. They were all right, he was always wrong… while the verity is that they all failed him as elders. And beneath the silence grew self-loathing: every failure, every moment of doubt confirmed the voices of his past. If he was not winning, he was worthless. That is why his reflection here (chapter 76) must be read not as pride, but as a desperate shield against annihilation. In other words, in episode 76, the athlete is too harsh on himself, though I am not saying that he is innocent either. He only thought of himself because he had taught to behave that way. He was just mirroring the adults surrounding him who hid their weaknesses and wrongdoings behind “lies, social norms and hierarchy”.

Kim Dan and “You’re right”

Kim Dan’s world mirrors this in reverse. Where Jaekyung was forced to fight for survival, Dan was taught to yield. (chapter 57) With his grandmother and with every authority he encountered — doctors, employers, even predators — he believed unquestioningly that others were right and he was wrong. Hence he trusted others blindly. He was trained to accept decisions made for him or against him. (chapter 70) Thus he accepts criticism with defending his own interest. He was not taught how to fight back or resist or even argue. (chapter 1) He never tried to seek justice. His “you’re right” was not recognition but submission, the language of someone who could not afford to resist. In season one, this made their relationship combustible: Jaekyung spoke only in victory and as such submission, while Dan accepted every loss as natural. He also adopted this mind-set. On the other hand, because their initial interaction was based on a contract, (chapter 6), both were forced to discuss with each other about the “content of the agreement”. That’s where the champion was trained to communciate with the physical therapist. Thanks to the champion, because of this victory/loss mentality, the doctor learned gradually to argue and “reply” with his “boss. However, due to his childhood, he couldn’t totally drop his old principles like for example “saying no”. (chapter 34) To conclude, before their fateful meeting, neither man had learned how to argue as equals. But in the kitchen in front of the stove, this changed: both are right and wrong! (chapter 76)

The Wolf’s Defeat in front of the Hamster

In the kitchen of chapter 76, Jaekyung does the unthinkable. (chapter 76) He lowers his head, leans against the wall, and mumbles words that would once have been inconceivable: “I lost. This is my undisputed defeat.” The phrasing is awkward, almost clumsy — the language of the ring awkwardly transplanted into the language of intimacy. But precisely because it sounds “wrong,” the moment feels real. For the first time, Jaekyung has no script to fall back on.

The body betrays what the words alone cannot carry. His feet are angled awkwardly, as if he does not quite know how to stand in this unfamiliar territory. His ears burn red, the involuntary flush of shyness. His voice is muffled, half-swallowed, the tone of a man who is both embarrassed and afraid. This is not the bold, aggressive fighter who has silenced others with insults or blows. This is Jaekyung stripped bare, caught between self-loathing and vulnerability. This is the child Jaekyung, the “cute cat”.

Self-loathing is essential to this moment. His confession is not a triumphant recognition of Dan’s worth, but a hesitant, guilty murmur: “I lost” is heavy with the weight of “I mistreated you, I don’t deserve you.” (chapter 76) He speaks like someone expecting rejection. Hence he keeps his distance. Yet the very fact that he says it at all signals change. Where once he would have doubled down — by barking an order, by firing Dan, by retreating into silence — he now admits defeat. The vocabulary of winning and losing, inherited from his father and reinforced by every adult in his life, collapses in the presence of Dan’s quiet honesty.

And paradoxically, this “defeat” is liberating. For Jaekyung, losing has always meant humiliation — the sneer of his father, the silence of his mother, the slap of his coach, the deafness of his manager. But here, losing does not bring scorn. It does not end in abandonment. It opens a space for recognition: losing to Dan means acknowledging that his heart has been touched, that someone else’s truth has entered his world and survived. In defeat, he is finally allowed to stop fighting.

This admission comes after a night of trembling restraint (chapter 76), where he literally grasps his own shoulder as though seeking the comfort of an embrace. The champion who once sneered at tears now reveals what he secretly longed for all along: to be reassured, to be held, to be forgiven. His “tap” against the wall is a silent gesture of surrender (chapter 76) — an acknowledgment that he can no longer keep his walls intact. He is now willing to rely on doc Dan exclusively.

The flashbacks frame this shift: (chapter 76). His confession reveals not strength but guilt. Kim Dan’s suffering was the price of his victories, and he knows it. On the other hand, his mea culpa should be relativized, for both were the targets of a plot! (chapter 76) These words expose both responsibility and shame: he had prioritized survival over connection, career over compassion. What boils under his skin is not pride but remorse.

And yet, within this defeat lies recognition: the fragile physical therapist, weak in constitution and endlessly battered by life, possesses a heart larger than his own. “When he not only failed to fulfill that role, but even showed me a weak side to him, it got my blood boiling” (chapter 76). The anger masked envy. Dan’s ability to remain soft, to cry openly, to keep caring despite his own pain — that is a form of strength Jaekyung never had. (chapter 76) The star’s thoughts in the kitchen are actually mirroring the ones in the bathroom: (chapter 68) In the bathtub, he still saw himself as the one in control, with the upper hand… but this is no longer the case in the kitchen. Through the physical therapist, the wolf is learning that even being in a vulnerable state doesn’t mean that this person is powerless. It is just that his “strength” lies elsewhere. In other words, someone struggling can also give comfort to another person in pain.

In front of the stove, (chapter 76) his words to Dan are clumsy and his tone hesitant, but the meaning is clear: this is the clean start of their relationship. He will no longer measure life by wins and losses, but by the courage to stand unguarded before another human being.

Thus the kitchen becomes a battlefield turned sanctuary. (chapter 76) The stove glows, not as an opponent’s spotlight, but as a hearth. The man who could never say “you’re wrong” to his father, mother, or coach finally confesses it in his own way: “I lost.” And in that defeat, Jaekyung discovers what victory in love looks like — not domination, but the freedom to lean, blush, and be weak without fear.

The bed, the table and the champion

If the table in Jaekyung’s childhood home was cluttered with ramen packs and soju bottles — (chapter 72) a place of solitary consumption rather than shared meals, the bed was the place where the little boy would drink his milk. (chapter 72) It is interesting that actually, Doc Dan wanted to bring the porridge to Joo Jaekyung to his bed during that full moon night, thus the latter made the following request: (chapter 76) But the wolf didn’t understand the hamster’s intention and followed his “hyung” to the kitchen. That’s how a misunderstanding was born which is also reflected in this interaction: (chapter 76) Here, what the wolf wanted was not to be a burden to the physical therapist. But he realized right away that his words could be misinterpreted. (chapter 76) However, doc Dan agreed to this, he remained calm. (chapter 76) Yet, the misunderstanding is not totally out of the room. Hence the doctor imagines that he has to leave the place right after the porridge is finished. However, what caught my attention is that in this brief scene, there was no table between them (chapter 76) contrary to the past, in particular in the penthouse. (chapter 41) The latter actually represented a hindrance between them, it marked their relationship: boss and “employee” (servant). Moreover, since the table in the champion’s childhood was linked to one person (the father), it is clear that the champion has never shared a table with someone. And this aspect brings me to my other observation.

The table under Park Namwook’s watch was no better. It was never about eating together as family, but about transactions. (chapter 22) Whether in meetings, weigh-ins, or dinners with the CEO (chapter 69), the table served as the stage for contracts, discipline, and deals. Even in chapter 36, where Namwook barked at him in front of guests, or in chapter 46, where he sat beside him during business discussions, the surface between them was never for intimacy. (chapter 46) It was a place where others dictated terms, while Jaekyung’s silence was mistaken for consent. And now, you comprehend why the two main leads could get closer in front of the stove in the kitchen. This place stands for warmth, care and family. (chapter 76) He lost, because there was no table… there is no contract, silence … this is no longer work, but home!

And this brings to my final observation. You certainly remember how the champion offered the doctor (chapter 13) a meal after his collapse. He refused to bring a meal to the bed, he asked him to join in the dining room and sit at the table. And what did they do there? The champion talked about his career, his fight etc… (chapter 13) the champion has long associated the table to business and not “care”. That’s why it is important for him to remember the significance of the bed in his childhood. It was the place where he could feel comfortable and safe, where he would eat! (chapter 72)

To conclude, the table represents the ultimate emblem of selfishness and deafness: a place where Jaekyung’s words and silences alike carry no weight and he is treated like an object.

Against this backdrop, the kitchen scene in chapter 76 shines with quiet revolt. (chapter 76) There, no table separates him from Dan, no manager is present to misread his silence. Both stand shoulder to shoulder by the stove, and what unfolds is not a deal but an exchange — fragmented, yes, but genuine. The kitchen, unlike the boardroom, is not a place of deafness but of listening, even in misunderstanding. In admitting “I lost,” Jaekyung finally answers an argument not with fists or silence, but with vulnerability. The table collapses, and with it the authority of all those who once claimed to know what was best for him.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: After All, Before It’s Too Late 🕚 📞

My avid readers might have been wondering why I haven’t released any new analysis yet. The reason is simple. I am back at school, and preparing lessons for my students had to come first. But when episode 74 was released, one detail immediately caught my attention. It was small, almost easy to overlook, yet the more I thought about it, the more it seemed to hold the key to understanding not only this chapter, but Joo Jaekyung’s entire story. 😮

So let me turn the question over to you. What is the common denominator between these three panels?

(chapter 73) (chapter 74) (chapter 74) What do they share? You might already have noticed it. At first glance, the answer seems obvious: each sentence turns around the word after. But if we pay closer attention, it is not just after that repeats, but after all. And here, the “all” quietly carries the weight of everything. A slight shift, but one that feels significant. But why this expression, and why here? Why does it resurface precisely in the context of Jaekyung’s family and past?

At first glance, after is nothing more than a temporal marker, a word of sequence. But in these sentences it feels heavier, almost final. It does not look forward — it looks backward. In other words, it doesn’t open a path; it shuts a door. And in episode 74 especially, it echoes like a refrain that has been defining the champion’s life. His world has always been framed in terms of after all. And this immediately raises another question: why did these people, so different in role and attitude, all use this idiom when addressing or describing the young champion?

But then—observe the contrast. When Joo Jaekyung embraced his fated partner, the words that rose within him were not about “after” but about “before.” (chapter 70) For the first time, the flow of time shifted. Besides, no explanation, no certainty—just an admission that something happened beyond his planning or reasoning. Where the earlier lines spoke with closure, this one arrived without a verdict. But what does this “confession” signify for the athlete now?

This is the mystery I want to unravel. What does “after all” truly embody in his life? Why has it shaped him so deeply, and why is the “before” so revolutionary when it finally appears? To answer these questions, I will proceed step by step: first examining the parents’ words, and finally the director’s cold repetition in episode 74. From there, I will turn to the symbolic role of the phone and its destruction, before concluding with the comparison between the manager and the grandmother—two figures who, each in their own way, perpetuate or challenge the cycle of “after.” And at the very end, I will return to the sentence that changes everything: (chapter 70)

The Parents’ After All

Joo Jaewoong’s Verdict

The first “after all” comes from the father: (ch. 73) At first glance, this might sound like a simple insult, a way to degrade the boy by comparing him to the woman who abandoned him. Yes, I wrote “him” and not them on purpose. Joo Jaewoong brought her up in direct response to his son, because the teenager had voiced his first wish in front of his “legal guardian”: (chapter 73) He was announcing his desire to leave this place, as if he wanted to abandon his father. Nevertheless, he just said it out of anger and frustration. Yet, those words pierced Joo Jaewoong, for they reminded him of his wife’s betrayal. Unable to face his own failures, he retaliated by thrusting her image back onto the boy. (chapter 73)

The staging is crucial. Father and son stand facing each other, (chapter 73) locked in confrontation, while in the past, the woman had already shown her back — a gesture of refusal that foreshadowed her desertion. She had withdrawn in silence; the man, however, lashed out in noise. Both abandon, but in different registers: hers in silence and absence, his in noise and abuse. But the father’s gaze was selective. (chapter 73) While he saw a mother holding a boy, he overlooked that the protagonist was actually clinching onto his own mother, who had already distanced herself from the child. In other words, he mistook rejection for embrace. What he perceived as proof of her influence was in fact the trace of her withdrawal.

Thus the father’s “after all” is more than a mere insult. It is an erasure. By shifting all blame to the absent mother, he buried his own wrongdoings. The bruises, the insults, the nights of terror (chapter 73) — all were rewritten into a story where the woman was the sole traitor, and the child nothing more than her extension. In this way, the boy was denied recognition as a victim in his own right. He had been abandoned too. He had been abused either. He became instead a mirror in which his father projects the wound of being left behind.

The tragedy is that this was Jaekyung’s first attempt at self-assertion in front of his father, his first voiced wish as a child. (chapter 73) And yet it was met not with listening and understanding, but with condemnation and mockery! (chapter 73) Why? It is because the father didn’t trust him, as he didn’t trust himself either! Because the father attacked him verbally, the boy replied in kind — escalating words he would later regret. (chapter 73) The cycle of reproach was sealed. From that moment on, he understood the danger and the destructive weight of words. (chapter 73) To speak was to wound, to be wounded in return. Besides, the boy could never speak of this truth. He carried the memory of that last conversation in silence, crushed by the belief that he bore guilt for his father’s death. Shame and responsibility bound his tongue. That is how words, once used against him as weapons, became impossible for him to wield in his own defense. However, this was only the beginning of his withdrawal into silence. His fists would become his language, his body the only safe instrument of reply.

In the end, the father was betrayed — not only by his wife, but by himself. (chapter 73) For in his world, there was no place for we, no place for a family. By reducing every bond to reproach and violence, he erased the very possibility of belonging. His after all thus becomes the verdict on his own life: a man left alone, responsible for his own misery. He complained the absence of gratitude from his son, while he had done nothing for him. (chapter 73) The betrayal he lamented was nothing more than the logical outcome of his own principle. There had never been a we — only a man clinging to his pride, a woman turning her back, and a child caught in between. His after all (chapter 73) exposes this rupture: instead of binding father and son, it isolates them, placing Jaekyung outside of any shared identity. By calling him “your mother’s son”, he does not recognize the boy as his own. The word becomes a substitute for “we,” a marker of distance rather than union. He also denies the very identity of his son: the boy is reduced to a reflection of the mother, and nothing more. In this moment, the child is stripped of individuality, framed only as an echo of the parent who had already left. For years afterward, this wound silenced him — until much later, when a reversal finally emerged. When Jaekyung embraced his fated partner, the words that rose within him began not with after all but with before I (chapter 70). Only then did he speak again as a person in his own right, expressing a wish unshaped by the verdicts of adults or the weight of guardianship. Thus he expressed his thoughts and emotions through the body.

The Mother’s Excuse

And it is precisely here that the mother enters the stage. If the father used after all to erase his own guilt and deny the possibility of togetherness, the mother confirms that distance with a final gesture (chapter 74) — not by facing her son, but by cutting him off, hiding behind a phone call and a single merciless click. (chapter 74)

The scene is loaded with irony. (chapter 74) In the past, the boy had dialed her number from the same public booth (chapter 72), clinging to the hope that she might answer one day. Eventually, those attempts ceased — but not the attachment. What remained was the number itself, saved under “Mom” on his phone (chapter 74) Here, he was old and rich enough to buy his own cellphone. The phone number was no longer a channel of communication, only a relic: a fragile thread he could not sever, because the fact that she never changed her number sustained the illusion that reunion was still possible. That dormant hope was shattered only when she finally picked up — not out of recognition, but by mistake, assuming the unfamiliar call must be important. (chapter 74) And so, after years of silence, his voice reached her at last.

What followed crushed him. She did not yell like the father; instead, she cloaked her rejection in polite detachment: (chapter 74) repeating “please” twice — not out of kindness, but because he had become a source of threat to her new life. (chapter 74) Her words, “please never call me again,” sealed the door he had long believed ajar.

What once seemed like a lifeline is revealed as evidence of her selfishness and cowardice (something I had already outlined before in The Loser’s  Mother: Fragments of a Mother), and the unchanged number, which kept him hoping, now exposes her duplicity. This is why remembering his past will not only free the champion, but also help him to move on. At the same time, it also set in motions a quiet karmic reckoning for the “mother,” whose very act of leaving the number unchanged betrays her. Interesting is that Joo Jaekyung is exactly like his mother: he has not changed his damaged cellphone and number either!! (chapter 66)

Her words presented abandonment as if it were a mutual choice (chapter 74), an agreement between equals. Yet, nothing could be further from the truth: the child had no choice, no power. Worse still, she used his own earlier words against him — the part-time jobs, the savings he had scraped together in order to welcome her back. Since he had money, he could keep living on his own. What for him had been a desperate declaration of love, for her became justification to let go: he was, in her eyes, already independent, already “grown-up.” (chapter 74) Only then comes her final blow: “After all, you’re all grown up now.” The position of after all here is crucial. (chapter 73) Unlike the father, who spat it at the end of his sentence as a weapon, the mother puts it first, as if it were the very foundation of her reasoning. Placed at the front, it functions like a gatekeeper — a barrier the son cannot pass through, because everything that matters has already happened before him.

In other words, she uses time itself as her excuse. (chapter 74) By saying after all, she makes his age and the passing years the justification for her betrayal. She turns maturity — the result of neglect and abandonment — into a pretext to abandon him further. In her mouth, time is not a healer but an alibi. For him, however, time is the enemy. Every night of waiting, every unanswered call accumulates into a debt that cannot be repaid. This is why, years later, Joo Jaekyung has been racing against time — as if by moving fast enough, by piling victory upon victory, he could undo the stillness of those years when nothing came back to him. His obsession with routine, with never stopping, mirrors the silent cruelty of her after all: if she made time the reason to let go, he would make time the proof that he never let go.

Here, the phrase does not simply refer to his age. All encompasses the totality of what she has built without him: her remarriage, her new family (her second child whom she calls “dear”), her wealth, (chapter 74) her present comfort. He stands after all of this — chronologically, emotionally, socially. In her reordered life, the child who once clung to her is relegated to the back of the line, behind every new bond she has chosen to recognize.

And yet, before uttering after all, she cloaks her rejection in seemingly gentle words: “Please understand… let’s just go our separate ways.” (chapter 74) At first glance, the sentence suggests civility, as if both parties had been walking the same road until now. But this is the deception. In truth, she had abandoned him long ago. This “family” (“our”) only existed in the boy’s mind, a dream born from her lies. For the mother, this “family” was already dismantled and replaced; for him, it was the one thing keeping hope alive. By phrasing it this way, she rewrites history, disguising her betrayal as a fresh, mutual decision rather than an old wound that never healed. The implication is that nothing was broken before — that only now, as adults, they might choose to part.

In doing so, she not only denies the rupture of the past, she also erases the promise that once tethered him to her. Why else would he plead, (chapter 74) unless she had once suggested that possibility? His words reveal that he had been clinging to a seed she planted long ago, a future she quietly abandoned while building a new life elsewhere. And what was that seed? Not just her vague suggestion that “once they have money”, or (chapter 72) “the father no longer represents a menace to her” but the very fact that she gave him her phone number. To a child, that number was more than digits on a page — it was proof of connection, a lifeline, an assurance that she could be reached, that she might one day answer.

But in reality, the number was a cruel illusion. She never changed it, which prolonged the fantasy that she still cared, that reunion was only a call away. Yet when the call was finally answered, it revealed not hope but finality. The “click” of her rejection was as violent as any blow from his father — the sound of a door closing forever.

Thus, her rejection is doubly violent: it crushes his final hope, that’s why the boy cried for the last time. (chapter 74) Furthermore, it gaslights him into believing that the abandonment never occurred — that the break is only beginning now. (chapter 74) The repeated please underlines her fear: he is not a son to welcome back, but a threat to the fragile world she has constructed without him. She has a lot to lose!

The irony (chapter 73) (chapter 74) is merciless: in just three letters, all hides the immensity of his suffering — (chapter 72) neglect, starvation, abuse, loneliness, betrayal — and yet the parents invoke it not to acknowledge his pain, but to hide their wrongdoings (justify their betrayal) and as such their failure! By placing after all at the front of her sentence, (chapter 74) the mother tries to turn the page unilaterally, as though this single phrase could close the chapter for good. It is not dialogue but dismissal, a way of shutting down the past before her son can reopen it. In other words, it’s a verdict too disguised as an excuse!

Placed at the end of the father’s sentence (chapter 73), after all erupted in the heat of reproach — spontaneous, yes, but no less destructive. It was triggered by his wounds, by the memory of betrayal he could not bear. Yet even in its impulsiveness, it carried no apology, no trace of self-reflection. Like the mother, he used the phrase as a verdict, not an opening — a way to wound, not to reconcile.

By contrast, the mother’s after all sits at the beginning of her sentence, cloaked in calm reasoning, stripped of any trace of spontaneity. Where the father lashed out, she closes off. Joo Jaekyung is now trapped between these two “after all”: one erupting in rage, the other draped in reason. Together they form a prison of words where apology has no place and the child’s voice is nowhere to be found. No wonder why the celebrity has never apologized to doc Dan in the end. At the same time, it explains why after this phone call, Joo Jaekyung had nothing to “lose”. The adults had destroyed the child’s soul and heart.

For Joo Jaekyung, there is no way back from this sentence. With ‘after all, you’re all grown-up now,’ his mother denies him the right to still be a child in need of care. ”After all”, he can also not deny his ties to her. His origins and even time itself become his enemies — he can never rewind, never reclaim the place of the baby who once clung to her. Her words brand him as someone beyond help, beyond nurture, beyond belonging. What she frames as maturity is, in fact, abandonment dressed as inevitability. The problem is that she is still alive. Unlike the father (dead) or the director (dying), she cannot escape judgment — not from her son, nor from others. By keeping the same phone number for years, she left behind proof of her continued existence. She could have fetched the boy at any moment, but she never did. Her responsibility doesn’t end simply because she decided to draw a line. (Chapter 74) Motherhood is not dissolved by a polite “please” or by a remarriage. She cannot erase this fact, however much she hides behind a new family or a change of circumstances. In this sense, the father’s words return as a curse for her: the truth of origin cannot be undone. The author is already implying this notion through narrative details.

The story itself shows us how enduring such responsibility is. (chapter 74) When the boy once caused trouble, the police looked for Joo Jaekyung’s guardian. In the cutthroat town, they reached out to Hwang Byungchul — not because he was legally responsible, but because everyone knew the boy was close to him (“we”). Guardianship, then, is never erased by silence. Even if you abandon the child, others will still hold you accountable.

And here lies the deeper irony: once Joo Jaekyung left for Seoul, he knew no one there. (chapter 74) In a city of anonymity, hearsay cannot replace documents. She left a paper trail — a legal identity that binds them together. Should the champion cause trouble in Seoul, or even become the victim of a crime, the police would have to turn to his legal guardian. And that can only be her.

The narrative already dramatizes this irony through the arcade incident (chapter 26). Oh Daehyun mentions that the young fighter broke the punching machine so many times he was blacklisted. Such destruction could easily have brought police intervention — and if it had, they would have been forced to search for his legal guardian. That guardian is none other than the mother who abandoned him and her new family. In other words, her erasure was never complete: every act of the boy risked pulling her shadow back into the open. Furthermore, this is what Kim Changmin revealed to his friend and colleague: (chapter 26) But Joo Jaekyung had long discovered sports and MMA, when he arrived in Seoul and met Park Namwook for the first time. (chapter 74) He had left his hometown because of the director’s suggestion.

Chapter 74 exposes the cracks in the narrative first built in episode 26. Back then, Kim Changmin and Oh Daehyun repeated what they had heard: that Joo Jaekyung had once been a troublemaker, a rich, spoiled brat who smashed arcade machines and got into fights — but that in the end, he was “saved” by sports, and especially by MMA and MFC. That’s why he didn’t recognize himself in the introduction: (chapter 26) This story clearly originates with Park Namwook, the manager, who positioned himself and the sport as Jaekyung’s saviors.

But episode 74 reveals the reality behind the myth. The boy wasn’t saved by MFC, nor by Namwook. It was the director, Hwang Byungchul, who intervened, who sent him to Seoul, (chapter 74) who redirected him before he was swallowed by the wrong path. The discrepancy between these accounts exposes more than just the manager’s manipulation: it points to the shadow of another intervention. How could he afford to destroy machine after machine without consequence? The only plausible answer is the “mother” and her new family, whose money and silence allowed him to pass as the “self-made” Emperor while erasing their own responsibility from the tale. And now, you comprehend why The Emperor was made voiceless. [For more read The Night-Cursed Emperor] Both MFC and the mother had a vested interest in silencing his true origins. For MFC, the myth of the “self-made champion” polished their image, free from any stain of thuggery — no whispers of money laundering, drugs, illegal gambling, or rigged games. For the mother, erasing the child meant erasing her own betrayal. The champion’s past was not only a personal wound but also a liability for others — a truth that had to be buried so that the façade of the Emperor could stand unchallenged. His silence, then, was never a choice; it was imposed, enforced by all those who profited from keeping his story untold. Should he ever speak up, he would expose not only the mother, but also MFC!

Because of episode 74, I came to resent the mother even more than before. She not only abandoned him twice, but toyed with his feelings. By answering once, she allowed his hope to flare up — only to extinguish it immediately. The phone that symbolized connection became the very tool of execution, its click as violent as the father’s punch. And just like her husband, she deceives herself. She imagines she can cut off ties completely with a single sentence, but until her death she remains legally and symbolically his mother.

The two after alls function like iron bars: one forged in the father’s rage, the other in the mother’s reason. Together, they create what you called a prison of words — a place where the boy cannot speak, cannot be heard, cannot be recognized. From that moment, he is not only abandoned but linguistically erased. His origins are denied, his childhood revoked, his future disowned.

And so, after the phone call, it is no wonder that Joo Jaekyung believed he had nothing left to lose. The boy’s heart had already been gutted; the rest of his path was merely survival. If he “went the wrong way,” it was because the adults had already led him there, sealing off every other route. They had destroyed the child before the teenager even had a chance to build himself.

This prepares the ground for the transition to the director: if his parents’ after alls built the prison, then Hwang Byungchul is the figure who becomes the witness of that imprisonment. Unlike them, he doesn’t openly wound with words — but his silence, his blindness, and his refusal to protect the boy make him complicit. He becomes the guard outside the prison walls.

The Director’s After Everything

When Hwang Byungchul says (chapter 74), the breadth of everything seems, on the surface, to acknowledge the sheer weight of Joo Jaekyung’s suffering. The word is heavy, expansive, suggesting years of accumulated pain, betrayal, and neglect. Yet, paradoxically, this very expansiveness is also a way of avoiding precision. By collapsing starvation, countless humiliations, abandonments, and traumas into a vague everything, the director sidesteps naming the concrete betrayals he himself witnessed. His silence here is telling: he cannot bring himself to articulate the parents’ cruelty, nor his own passivity in letting it happen. In front of the doctor, he had admitted himself that he had not raised him: (chapter 74) For doc Dan who embodies the present, such a statement can only become the ultimate truth: the star had been an orphan like him.

Moreover, his next word probably — betrays another form of distance. If he truly knew how the boy felt, if he had ever asked or listened, there would be no need for such hedging. Probably admits that he never entered the boy’s inner world, never gave him the space to voice his despair. It is the language of a bystander, not of a guardian. In fact, this hesitation exposes his complicity: Joo Jaekyung “went down the wrong path” not only because of the parents’ abandonment, but also because the one adult who remained nearby chose observation over intervention. (chapter 74) At the moment when Joo Jaekyung shattered the cellphone, Hwang Byungchul was not by his side but standing at a distance, directly in front of him. This means he must have seen the boy’s face — the tears, (chapter 74) the trembling hands, the rage that barely concealed heartbreak. He did not need to overhear the mother’s words; the child’s body language told the story with brutal clarity. (chapter 74) In that instant, the director could have stepped closer, offered consolation, or simply acknowledged the wound he was witnessing. Instead, he kept his distance, both physically and emotionally. He refused to assume a role as legal guardian.

The same pattern repeats at the father’s funeral. (chapter 74) Once again, the director was there — but his presence was mute. He placed a hand on the boy’s shoulder, yet he never lent him an ear. He never invited the boy to speak, never created a space where grief, anger, or longing could be put into words. In other words, he was present in body but absent in voice and heart. Thus the director’s pat was a gesture of pity. It was a substitute for words, a way of saying “poor boy” while protecting himself from deeper involvement. But precisely because he withheld speech and listening, it denied Jaekyung the chance to articulate his own grief. It comforted without connecting.

This silence is not neutral. By withholding words, he deprived Jaekyung of language at the very moment he most needed it. A child learns to process suffering by speaking it into existence and having someone else respond. Denied this, Jaekyung internalized the pain wordlessly — forced to embody it through his fists, through destruction (chapter 74), through fighting. Thus the director’s quietness, his refusal to engage, became a formative wound in itself. He chose the safety of distance over the risk of involvement, and in doing so, left the boy’s cries unanswered.

Thus, the director’s after everything is double-edged: it gestures at recognition, but functions as concealment. He names the boy’s burden while sidestepping his own. What sounds like empathy is, in truth, pity — a way of acknowledging suffering without engaging it. It allows him to speak about Jaekyung’s pain while avoiding both the betrayal he witnessed and the silence he himself maintained. In this sense, after everything is less an opening than a shield: a phrase that distances him from responsibility under the guise of compassion.

And because the boy had no one by his side that night, he concluded he had nothing to lose. Stripped of home, voice, and care, he stood in a void where even those who should have protected him kept their distance. The director’s silence, his refusal to step in or give the boy an ear, reinforced the sense of abandonment. Far from steering him away, this absence of guidance nudged him toward the wrong path. In this way, the man who might have been a safeguard became instead a silent accomplice to the boy’s fall. Hence he put the blame on the main lead. (chapter 74)

Hwang Byungchul was called to the police station in order to correct his past wrongdoing. (chapter 74) He was given a chance to step in, to finally become the guardian he had failed to be on the night of the boy’s deepest collapse. Therefore it is no coincidence that he claims to have raised him, while the readers are well aware of the truth. (chapter 74) Yet the way he handled the moment revealed the full extent of his contradictions.

The director was never one to turn his back on Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 74) He always faced him, (chapter 74) or sometimes stood beside him, kept him in sight. On the surface, this could seem like loyalty, but in truth it was another form of failure. Facing him head-on meant constant confrontation, constant judgment. His presence was physical, but never protective; it was discipline, surveillance, not refuge. He never had his back!!

Instead of offering himself as support, he wielded the parents as weapons. (chapter 74) The father was dragged into memory as a warning: “Do you want to end up like him?” The mother, already gone, was turned into a conditional model: “Would she even want to live with you if she could see you now?” In both cases, the boy was denied his right to grieve. His parents were not mourned, but transformed into instruments of discipline. He was forced to run from one shadow and to chase another, leaving him no space to simply exist. The director maintained the future champion trapped in the chains of the past.

This strategy erased the present. Jaekyung’s worth was always defined against the dead or the vanished, never in who he was here and now. It was never about him!! Happiness, stillness, or pride in the moment were impossible; only punishment and striving remained.

When the director invoked the mother again that night, it exposed his blindness. (chapter 74) For him, she was a symbol — fuel for perseverance, as he was projecting his own mother onto the boy’s! For the teenager, the mother was the deepest wound. By naming her, the director imagined he was motivating; in reality, he was tearing it open once more. But how could Jaekyung reveal the truth — that his own mother had rejected him, not just once, but twice? To admit this would have been to confess that the hope she dangled before him, the dream of reunion, had been nothing but a cruel game. His silence was not pride but a shield, for voicing it would mean exposing that even his mother’s love had been counterfeit. (chapter 74) Thus his silence was not indifference but defense: he was protecting her name, even when it burned him to do so. In shielding her, he also buried himself.

And the director used this hesitation to his own advantage. This shows that Hwang Byungchuld had no intention to listen. He answered with his fist right away. The punch to the chest crystallized his stance: discipline over empathy, control over dialogue. What he offered was not guidance but force, unwittingly echoing the very violence of the father he condemned. (chapter 74) That is how another pattern emerges: every exchange the boy endured was never true conversation, but always structured as an argument or a challenge. Even here: (chapter 72) At home, his father turned dialogue into a bet — a contest of strength where affection was absent and only victory mattered. Later, in front of the police station, the director reproduced the same pattern: invoking the mother not to console, but to provoke, to test, to challenge. In both cases, words became weapons. They did not open space for Jaekyung to speak; they cornered him, forcing him either to resist or to submit. This explains why in season 1, the two protagonists had similar interactions.

Thus when the boy lashed out and the director struck him, the failure was complete. He had been given a chance to correct the past — to be a guardian rather than a spectator — but instead he repeated the cycle. His discipline came without empathy, his presence without listening. In the end, he did not save the boy from the wrong path; he helped push him further along it, for MFC is strongly intertwined with crimes.

However, the argument followed by the punch seems to have functioned as a wake-up call for the director as well. (chapter 74) For the first time, he shifted ground and no longer invoked Jaekyung’s parents as warnings; instead, he summoned the memory of his own mother. After everything she had done for him, he insisted, the boy should repay her sacrifice by leading a better life. Yet here again the same logic returns: time weaponized, gratitude demanded, obligation imposed. What might have been a tender remembrance of maternal care was turned into a debt-ledger pressed onto Jaekyung’s shoulders. (chapter 74) For him, discipline was always bound to her presence, her food, her care, her silent labor that sustained the gym. By invoking “the mother” as a motivator, he was, in truth, repeating the only model of loyalty and endurance he had ever known. But this was borrowed authority, not Jaekyung’s. What may have given the boy a flicker of purpose in the moment — to endure, to fight “for her sake” — (chapter 74) could not last. It was never his voice, never his wound being acknowledged. It was an external script imposed upon him. And so, over time, that imposed motivation faded, eclipsed by the title and the money. (chapter 54) The director’s form of guidance could not sustain him; it was external, borrowed, conditional. Therefore, it is not surprising that he was never contacted after the main lead’s departure for Seoul. By then, the director had already become like his own mother — reduced to a memory (chapter 70) and nothing more. He neither possessed the boy’s number nor showed the desire to stay connected; worse, he had told him explicitly never to return. (chapter 74) Through both words and attitude, he conveyed that their paths were to diverge for good. Yet, this was never truly his intentions. In cutting him off so decisively, he enacted the very separation he condemned later. The boy had taken his words too seriously.

Park Namwook’s Lately

If Hwang Byungchul cloaked his failure under the phrase after everything, Park Namwook disguises his own negligence in the word lately. (chapter 56) (chapter 66) His care always comes after, never before. The word itself reveals his stance: he notices change, but belatedly, when damage is already done. The main lead is now escaping his control. And now, you comprehend why PArk Namwook blamed Joo Jaekyung and slapped him at the hospital. (chapter 52) That way, he could divert attention from the “before and circumstances”. And in season 2, the man hasn’t changed at all. Instead of asking what caused Jaekyung’s crisis, he chides him for straying from the routine — for not showing up at the gym, for being absent.

This exposes the essence of Namwook’s guardianship: reactive, not proactive. He does not anticipate storms; he waits until they break and then demands the champion hold himself together. In this way, his “lately” becomes the twin of “after everything.” Both phrases externalize responsibility. Both erase the speaker’s complicity in the boy’s suffering and downfall. Both subtly suggest that the fault lies with Jaekyung himself (chapter 52), either for not rising above (after everything) or for drifting from his prescribed path (lately).

But the crucial difference is that the boy no longer remains silent. With Namwook, for the first time, Jaekyung voiced his emotions. (chapter 52) The slap at the hospital was more than a physical outburst; it was the eruption of long-repressed truth. Where he once swallowed pain in silence for his mother, and later endured fists in silence for his coach, here he answers back. Lately thus marks not only Namwook’s delay but also Jaekyung’s refusal to bear the weight alone anymore. (chapter 52)

The paradox is sharp: Namwook embodies all three guardians at once — the father’s abuse (chapter 73), the mother’s silence through the cellphone (chapter 74), the director’s passivity. He is their synthesis, a distorted heir to their failures. Like the mother, he has his own family on the side, (chapter 45) his true life hidden elsewhere. Like her, he conceals his absence behind a phone call, creating the illusion of presence without truly standing by the boy. (chapter 45)

Hwang Byungchul and Park Namwook echo the same blind pattern: they fault the fighter for straying (chapter 52) , (chapter 70), while remaining oblivious to the rot within their own world and the medical world. The director accused Joo Jaewoong of “choosing the wrong path,” (chapter 74) never admitting that boxing itself was already entangled with the underworld. Likewise, Park Namwook reproached Joo Jaekyung for the mess, while in reality he had been a victim. The incident with the switched spray was reduced to two people: doc Dan and Joo Jaekyung. Funny is that by invoking lately and after all , they have the impression that delayed blame could substitute for real support. Both stand as authorities who issue reprimands only once the harm is irreversible—always too late, always at a remove. In doing so, they preserve the illusion of responsibility while avoiding the real corruption at the core of their institutions. They deny the existence of “victims”. By doing so, both Hwang Byungchul and Park Namwook sustain the illusion that the system itself is clean, and that all fault lies with the individual fighter. In their eyes, there is no exploitation, only bad choices. This explains why the CEO’s fabricated apology disturbed Namwook (chapter 69): for the first time, a figure of authority assumed responsibility, however insincerely. What to others looked like shallow PR, to Namwook appeared as a dangerous break with the rule of denial. It highlighted the emptiness of his own guardianship, where reproach replaces protection and victims are erased from the narrative.

This is why the expression lately becomes so important. With it, the manager pretends to care but really reveals distance. He notices changes but reacts belatedly, hoping the boy will revert to the old champion who endured everything. “Lately” is less concern than crisis delayed, a signal of his failure to respond in time. Instead of seeing the broader corruption of MFC, the scheming of rivals, or the weight of past trauma, Namwook shifts the blame onto the champion himself. The reproach he delivered in the hospital — his version of a slap — confirms this change. For the first time, Joo Jaekyung answered back, voicing emotions rather than swallowing them.Yet unlike them, he faces a Jaekyung who has begun to change. The boy he could once manipulate through reproach and delay now resists, signaling that the cycle of belated guardianship may finally fracture. This means that the very first meeting between Joo Jaekyung and Park Namwook in episode 74 is already announcing the end of their “collaboration.” 8chapter 74) His first words expose his true nature: ruthless and blindness. For him, Joo Jaekyung was just a fresh meat. The latter is not recognized as an individual and human. And if he remained by the manager’s side for many years, by recollecting their past, the main lead should recognize how the “wrestler” started distancing himself from the “boy”. At some point, he got married and got three kids…

Moreover, from the beginning, the manager could never be more than a placeholder, because Jaekyung would not remain his “boy” forever. By recalling their past interaction, the champion can now recognize that Namwook was never truly part of his life. Why? Because after all — the language of the “guardians/adults”— is tied to the night, the moment of deepest loneliness and loss. (chapter 73) (chapter 74) (chapter 74) The night represents what Jaekyung has always been missing: not training, not discipline, but a home where warmth endures after dark. A place where he can expose his vulnerability and be himself! (chapter 74) Honestly, it would be funny, if the champion used the same words than his own mother against the manager (chapter 74) and this would take place because of a cold!! Another possibility is blocking his number. It would close the circle of abandonment, but this time he would be the one in control. The irony is sharp: what once marked him as powerless and discarded becomes a tool of emancipation. Instead of being silenced, Jaekyung would be the one drawing the boundary, declaring that the “family” Namwook pretended to provide was nothing but an illusion.

And if this scene were triggered by something as simple as a cold, the irony deepens. A cold is usually dismissed as trivial, but for Jaekyung it would symbolize care denied. Nobody in his childhood noticed his fevers or his wounds — and Namwook, too, is too far away to notice that he is sick. He has always treated sickness as weakness to be hidden or endured, not as a moment to express love and care. (chapter 70) Thus the manager is confident that the star can return to the ring. By cutting the manager off in such a moment, Jaekyung would be affirming that he no longer accepts neglect disguised as toughness. Both “directors” are trapping the champion in the chains of the past and the future. For them, there’s no present and as such no happiness or fulfillment. Hence Hwang Byungchul is even bored, when he watched the MFC match. (chapter 71) Deep down, he has been longing for company too. Now, he is finally talking…. (chapter 70) As you can see, it is never too late… Thus we saw this on the roof of the hospital: a real and intimate conversation between the “guardian” and his pupil: (chapter 71) The director has changed!

Shin Okja’s before

And now, you are wondering how the halmoni has been affecting the champion’s life, for the former met the celebrity rather late in her life. If the director’s vocabulary circled around “after everything” and the manager’s around “lately”, the halmoni’s word is “before.” It is the most deceptive of the three, because it does not point to a rupture or a change, but instead dissolves them. Keep in mind what she confided to the main lead on the beach: She presented her grandson as an orphan, right from the start. (chapter 65) So for someone like Joo JAekyung who suffered from constant betrayals and abandonment, his lover’s childhood must have sounded like a “blessing”. She tells the story of Dan’s life as if he had simply always been without parents. When she recalls, “He grew up without a mom and dad… my heart just breaks for him,” the formulation makes it sound as though nothing was ever lost, nothing was ever taken away — it was simply his condition from the start. Doc Dan didn’t get hurt by his parents through their words or actions.

This is the function of her “before”: to erase abandonment itself. Instead of admitting there was a moment after which Dan was alone, she rewrites the narrative so that he never had parents at all. By doing so, she transforms tragedy into fate. The parents vanish not as agents of betrayal, but as if they never existed. This absolves not only them but also herself: there is no wound to confront, no injustice to name.

This is why her “before” is so insidious. In her version of events, Kim Dan was never abandoned — he was “lucky” to always have her. She erased the loss of his parents by rewriting the story: no trauma, no wound, no victim. Just a boy who had someone by his side. And contrary to Joo JAewoong, the champion’s mother and Hwang Byungchul, she had been gentle and attentive. She had seen him drinking, smoking… she had nagged, but the physical therapist had never listened to her. (chapter 65) She can appear as the perfect role model in the athlete’s eyes. No wonder why he listened to her and brought doc Dan to a huge hospital in Seoul. But here is the thing…. (chapter 65) The grandmother’s narrative culminates in a deceptively simple phrase: “And then, one day, he just grew up.” Unlike after all, which implies endurance, patience, and a long lapse of time, her then one day compresses everything into a brief, almost casual instant. In her telling, there is no slow accumulation of wounds, no process of wear, no history of pain to be endured. The transformation is presented as sudden and natural, as if nothing of significance had preceded it.

This brevity is precisely what makes her before so insidious. She denies the child the depth of his suffering by reducing the entire loss of his parents, his struggles (bullying) (chapter 57), and his forced maturity to a single, fleeting day. No trauma, no endurance — just inevitability. By collapsing years of hardship into a harmless “day,” she erases both the past and the victim. And now, you can understand why doc Dan is trapped in the present! By erasing the “before” (abandonment, trauma) and trivializing the process of “becoming an adult,” she collapses time into a single, static present. Kim Dan is not allowed a past that hurts (because she erased it), nor a future that could unfold differently (because “he just grew up” is presented as inevitable).

All that remains for him is the present moment of survival — working, enduring, fulfilling duties, without a sense of continuity. He cannot look back with clarity (since the story of his childhood has been rewritten), nor forward with hope (since his adulthood was framed as an instant fait accompli).

That’s why, compared to Joo Jaekyung — who is bound to the past (after all, memory, endurance) — Kim Dan is bound to the present: caught in an eternal now, where nothing really changes. Under this new light, my avid readers can grasp why doc Dan has not confided to his halmoni about the incident with the switched spray. First, the grandmother would remain passive and secondly, this would be erased and even diminished to a single and insignificant moment.

Before I knew it, I was…

With this simple phrase, (chapter 70) Joo Jaekyung crosses the invisible threshold that has defined his entire life. For years, he had existed only under others’ names and authorities: the son of a failed boxer, the mother’s son, the pupil of a coach, the protégé of a manager, the champion of a league. His identity was always tethered to someone else’s frame of reference, never to his own. But this line signals the birth of the I—a voice no longer spoken for, but speaking.

What makes this moment decisive is its anchoring in the present. In the past, the present was unbearable: nights of insomnia, rooms filled with silence, the sense of living only for the next fight or the next insult. The after all had become a synonym for “painful nights”. The guardians around him distorted time itself—“after all” became an endless call for endurance, “then one day” reduced years of suffering into nothing but a passing moment. In reclaiming the present, Jaekyung finally escapes those distortions. The present no longer equals absence, fear, or punishment; it becomes the ground of tenderness, heartbeat, and authentic feeling.

Yet feelings, as Kim Dan reminded him before (ch. 62)— (chapter 62) cannot, by themselves, sustain love. Emotions flare and fade, tied to the immediacy of the present. Thus the mother could break her promise and even lie to him later. What endures is not emotion alone, but the principles that Fromm identified as the essence of love: care, responsibility, knowledge, and respect. These qualities stabilize the fleeting nature of feeling and transform the present into something continuous, something that can grow. In this sense, the teddy bear bridges the gap between “present” and “future”: (chapter 65) it transforms the fleeting moment of emotion into a promise of constancy. After all, before it’s too late, what both men longed for was never glory or escape, but a home where they could rest — not alone, but in each other’s arms. By discovering emotions and learning to live in the present, the champion also rediscovers his inner child. His line — “Is this a joke?” — marks that shift, since jokes, like emotions, only exist in the immediacy of the moment. It is only a matter of time, until he laughs because of a joke. By embracing doc Dan like a teddy bear, he allows himself to cling and regress, no longer the wolf or the Emperor but simply a boy seeking warmth. Even his cold becomes symbolic: (chapter 70) illness forces him to slow down, to be vulnerable, and to receive care — something denied to him in childhood. In this way, love turns the regression into healing, transforming weakness into the possibility of renewal.

Thus Jaekyung’s story closes the circle: once trapped in the timelines of others, he now inhabits his own time. The “I” he has found is not just the voice of desire, but of choice. Love is no longer an illusion or a prison—no longer tied to debt, silence, or obligation—but a deliberate act that carries him into the future.

PS: I am suspecting that the mother is hiding behind this name: Seo Gichan, (chapter 5) and if it’s true, then this person would be the second husband.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Birth of the Shotgun 🔫🪨 (part 1)

Reading a Life Through Glimpses

Baek Junmin is not a character the story introduces directly, yet his presence has cast a long and invisible shadow over Joo Jaekyung’s life. Though he appears in only a handful of chapters—47, 49, 51, 52, and 73 [I am excluding the match]—his role is far from minor. He is, in fact, one of the main invisible architects of the champion’s trauma and jinx, the one who once stood across from him on a night that would shape the course of both their lives. Long before he was known as the Shotgun, Baek Junmin might have pulled the trigger on something else entirely: the last remnant of Jaekyung’s innocence. (chapter 73) Their violent encounter may have led to the vanishing of the young boy’s smile, replacing it with the hardened scowl of the Emperor, the tyrant in the ring. (chapter 1) If Hwang Byungchul gave Jaekyung the tools to fight, Baek Junmin gave him the reason to fight like a bloodthirsty tyrant. He did not simply scar the soul — he engraved rage into the champion’s core. The tragedy is that Joo Jaekyung never even learned his name. Thus he didn’t react to his name, only to his face and his smile. (chapter 47) And yet, Baek Junmin reappears, not as a stranger, but as the remnant of a past that refuses to stay buried. Additionally, he appears only through the narration of others (fighter) (chapter 47) or in flashes (chapter 73) — a gesture here, a line there (chapter 73) — before vanishing again. To understand him, we have to read between the panels, compare the boy we meet in episode 73 (chapter 73) to the man who resurfaces much later. (chapter 47) This is how we catch glimpses of him — by holding the present up against the past, by noticing what has changed and what has stayed the same.

The clues are scattered like pieces of a puzzle: a way of standing, the choice of clothing, how he hides among others or suddenly steps forward, the company he keeps. Each fragment feels small on its own, but when placed side by side, they begin to sketch an evolution — not told directly, but implied.

And like any puzzle, the final picture depends on how the pieces are arranged. What follows is the story that emerges when I fit these fragments together — a version that exists only because I chose to see the connections this way.

The Ears: Traces of Unspoken Fights

Though his hoodie and shadowed posture attempt to conceal him, Baek Junmin’s body betrays traces of a buried past. (chapter 73) A careful look at his face in chapter 73 reveals the early signs of cauliflower ear, particularly on the right side—a subtle swelling, the deformed curvature of the cartilage. These are not the ears of a novice. They speak of blows taken in silence, of matches fought outside the spotlight. (chapter 73) Such an injury is not congenital, nor cosmetic. It is the ear’s irreversible memory of repeated trauma, often earned through unregulated or unsupervised fighting.

This visual clue confirms what his words and clothes only hint at: (chapter 73) Baek Junmin was already an illegal fighter before becoming The Shotgun. And yet, unlike Joo Jaekyung—whose cauliflower ears are far more pronounced (chapter 47) than Junmin’s ears (chapter 49) Jaekyung’s ears mark him as a champion who faced real opponents in real matches, many of them brutal. His injuries are the price of transparency, visibility, and legitimacy. They are scars earned in the light, while Baek Junmin is supposed to be a novice. (chapter 47)

This contrast exposes the truth. Not only Baek Junmin’s ears were the evidence of a long career in the ring (illegal fights), yet they feel more secretive—a residue of unsanctioned violence and criminality. If Jaekyung’s ears are a badge of honesty and legality, Junmin’s are a whisper of something illicit. They suggest that while the fights may have been real (death), the stage was hidden. (chapter 47) His damage was earned in the shadows and in staged fights manipulated by higher powers. (chapter 47)

The Face – From Full to Hollow

The first thing that changes is his face. (chapter 73)

As a teenager, Baek Junmin has fuller cheeks and healthy skin—a face still marked by youth and perhaps untouched by prolonged hardship. But years later, his skin adult face is hollowed out. (chapter 49) His cheeks have sunk, his jaw stands out more sharply, and his features seem carved by something deeper than age. This is not the look of someone forced to cut weight for competition, (chapter 37), for the new rising star is already much smaller and thinner than the protagonist. (chapter 49) It’s more likely the result of long-term stress, emotional corrosion, or drug use.

But it’s not just the face that speaks—it’s the context in which these bodies live.

In chapter 73, Park Juho casually offers drugs to Joo Jaekyung, claiming (chapter 73) This line is telling. It reveals not only the normalization of drug use among these teenagers, but also how intimately it’s tied to fighting. Juho isn’t offering an escape—he’s offering a tool. For him, drugs aren’t about rebellion or recreation; they are a performance enhancer. They’re marketed as part of the fighter’s toolkit.

This moment confirms that in the environment where Baek Junmin came of age, violence and substance use are not only linked—they are institutionalized. The discipline of the gym has been replaced by street rules, where the edge you gain doesn’t come from technique, but from chemical courage. And Park Juho is no outsider: he was once a member of the gym. His descent—and his promotion of drugs under the guise of athletic benefit—reflects the rot that spreads when survival replaces structure and true care.

In contrast, Joo Jaekyung—despite the violence of his career—has retained a kind of “babyfaced” youthfulness. (chapter 44) His skin is clearer, his features softer, and his face shows fewer signs of internal collapse. This is the effect of healthy food, structured discipline, clean training, and perhaps even emotional restraint. While Junmin’s face has been thinned by chaos, Jaekyung’s has been preserved by control. Under this light, it becomes comprehensible why the athlete fell in love with doc Dan at first sight. Despite being older, (chapter 7) the “hamster” still carries a baby face: a visual marker of youth, innocence, and gentleness. He embodies everything the Shotgun does not: vulnerability without corruption, softness without vice. If Baek Junmin stands for a corrupted adulthood — weapons (The Shotgun), shadows, and counterfeit gold — then Kim Dan, by contrast, becomes the sanctuary of all that was lost: the child, the smile, the safe bed.

Even before the gloves go on, the face tells the story: Baek Junmin’s path diverged long ago. He didn’t just take hits—he absorbed a life that ate away at him from the inside.

The Boy in the Hoodie

The first time we see the young Baek Junmin, he is not framed as a fighter. There are no gloves on his hands, no stance that invites a challenge. He is simply there — standing off to the side, wrapped in a black hoodie whose shadow swallows his shoulders and the line of his jaw. The garment is loose enough to blur the contours of his body, turning him into a shape rather than a figure.

His appearance captures the essence of what English calls “keeping a low profile.” But in French, the idiom garder un profil bas unfolds with even greater nuance—each of its synonyms revealing a different facet of his behavior and circumstances. Se faire discret (to make oneself discreet), être modeste (“to be modest”), rester dans l’ombre (to stay in the shadows), and ne pas attirer l’attention (to avoid attracting attention) all resonate with how he moves through this scene. The hoodie conceals his expression, his posture erases his presence, and his silence blends him into the background (“fade into the background“). He appears modest (être modeste), even passive —yet this modesty is not a personality trait, but a form of self-erasure taught by danger. He has become so invisible that he has succeeded in being forgotten (se faire oublier = to keep a low profile). Years later, when he finally stands before the protagonist again, the champion doesn’t recognize him. But Baek Junmin remembers. His question in chapter 49 (chapter 49) reveals that anonymity was never his desire. It was his sentence.

Why was he hiding? The answer lies in the world he came from. As hinted in chapter 18, (chapter 18) criminals don’t want attention. They avoid the law. They train their subordinates to vanish, to move through shadows, to speak only when spoken to. Baek Junmin wasn’t just playing a role —he was surviving a system that required him to erase himself. His hoodie was not simply clothing; it was a muzzle, a shadow he had to wear. That’s why the protagonist has not made a connection between his nemesis Baek Junmin and a Korean gang yet. (chapter 69) How is this possible, when it is clear that the antagonist is already a thug? It is because Joo Jaekyung has no idea about his true identity. He only knows him as a cheater and liar!! (chapter 51) In the past, he bought someone… but let’s return our attention to the past.

In a scene where others choose to stand out — one boy in white, another in red — (chapter 73) he blends in by choice. Black is not a neutral here; it is a decision to recede, to be part of the backdrop. The fabric pools around his hands, hiding the skin, while the hood hangs like an unspoken “no comment.” Even when he speaks, it is without volume or force. (chapter 73) His role in the exchange is that of a conduit — not the source, not the decision-maker, but the man in between. Striking is that another French synonym for “to keep a low profil” is “staying quiet” (se tenir coi) or “making himself small” (se faire tout petit) which totally reflects this scene.

And yet, he is not one of the low-tier errand boys either because he knows a higher-up (“his hyung”) (chapter 73) His positioning in the group is telling: physically closer to the speaker of authority, not lumped with the ones who will later be sent to do the dirty work. He is high enough to be trusted, low enough to avoid exposure. The hierarchy is implicit, mapped not by dialogue but by body placement. However, let us not get deceived. Despite Park Juho’s seemingly confident address—“Your hyung”—a closer look at the actual power dynamics reveals something far more fragile and unstable. (chapter 73) In the panel where Park Juho seeks verbal confirmation (“Right, Junmin?”), Baek Junmin’s response is subdued and minimal: “Yeah, that’s right.” He can just confirm what the other said. In fact, he is merely echoing the boy’s words—repeating them rather than asserting his own. This is not the confident affirmation of someone in control, nor the proud acknowledgment of a respected enforcer. It is the submissive response of someone complying with expectations, playing a role assigned to him—one he does not command.

Moreover, the fact that Baek Junmin physically removes his hood at that moment (chapter 73) —exposing his face—feels less like a gesture of confidence and more like a necessary performance to project even a semblance of authority. But that display only reveals how hollow his authority truly is. The power rests elsewhere: with the unnamed hyung behind the scenes.

This moment shatters any illusion that Baek Junmin has standing in the criminal underworld. He is no legend—just a middleman, entirely expendable. His presence, reduced to compliance and posturing, contrasts sharply with that of Park Juho. Though younger, Park Juho is no longer passive. He is making decisions, initiating conversation, and trying to recruit a new member. His behavior signals an emerging agency. In fact, Juho is gradually stepping into the very role Baek Junmin once tried to fill—but failed to claim. (chapter 73) The balance of power is shifting in real time, and Junmin seems to be on the verge of being silently replaced. This explains his intervention at the end. He doesn’t want a new recruit because he fears in him a rival.

There is another subtle but telling detail in this scene: the antagonist is introduced simply by his first name—Junmin. On the surface, this might suggest familiarity or equality. Yet this lack of a full name also reveals something deeper. It speaks to the absence of legacy, the absence of recognition. Junmin already has the ears of a fighter (chapter 73), this means that he is already fighting in the illegal underground ring, but he has no name that echoes his “success”. He is not the legend in the Gwanwon Province yet. (chapter 47) He is a man without renown, without lineage, this explicates why he is involved in drug dealing. This anonymity stands in sharp contrast to Joo Jaekyung, whose name will soon be attached to his first tournament win, marking the beginning of a visible, documented ascent, though I don’t think, the main lead will ever come to enjoy his victory… Not only because of his father’s death… but because of the Shotgun! My theory is that The Shotgun will make him lose his “trophy”, his victory! I will explain it further below!

Anyway, Junmin’s namelessness foreshadows his descent into the shadows, while Jaekyung’s path points toward visibility, acclaim, and transformation into a symbol: fame and success. He will be able to live out his father’s dream. (chapter 73) And notice that the legend is trapped to a province, indicating that he could never make it out of there like the champion! Therefore it already implies that the future “Shotgun”‘s association with the hyung is not based on loyalty or mutual respect—it is circumstantial, even transactional. It is about money and usefulness. And now, you comprehend why Baek Junmin’s position in this gang is quite precarious.

In this light, Junmin’s silence and brief confirmation expose his true position: subordinate, replaceable, and dispensable. He is not the king of this realm, but already a shadow… almost like a ghost! He’s lingering on the margins of both the law and the underworld, hovering between anonymity and infamy. After his painful encounter with Joo Jaekyung, he was told to keep a low profile. And he succeeded. He disappeared so thoroughly that not even Joo Jaekyung, whose life he once upended, could remember him. He ghosted himself (another synonym for keep a low profile) into oblivion—until the day he was reloaded.

Years later, he emerges again—but this time as a tool. Yet, I have the feeling that this man has always been a device, yet he failed to grasp his true position, as he has always faded into the background and copied others. Though he was never prosecuted for the deaths mentioned in chapter 47, (chapter 47), the five tattooed lines above his eye silently proclaim his kill count: 5 people. (chapter 73) That’s the same number of persons in the dark alley, when you exclude Joo Jaekyung and Baek Junmin (chapter 73) He has crossed the line: he entered the criminal world for good. Now he is no longer just a ghost, but a weapon with a body count. And this is precisely why his transformation into the Shotgun carries such grim symbolic weight. (chapter 49) A shotgun isn’t a subtle weapon—but it can be precise. It is powerful, direct, and designed for maximum impact at close range. In that sense, Baek Junmin isn’t just any tool—he is a weapon that must be pointed by someone else. His value doesn’t lie in legacy or longevity. It lies in the force he delivers when fired. He doesn’t aim; he is aimed. And like any tool of destruction, he can be reused, discarded, or silenced as needed. His body may carry tattoos and scars, but he has no voice in the system that uses him. Thus I deduce that this nickname was not entirely chosen by Baek Junmin, he was definitely influenced by his surrounding and he agreed to it, not realizing the true symbolism behind this name. Note that his nickname was only revealed, when he faced his nemesis. The target was the Emperor.

What makes this image linger is not just the hoodie (chapter 73), but what lies at its hemline: garbage bags. Stacked casually against the wall, their plastic skins catch stray glints of light. They are not the clean, tied-off kind; their surfaces are rumpled, slack in places, suggesting that some are only half full. It is a setting that smells — even if the page is silent — of neglect.

Garbage is not a neutral backdrop either. In visual storytelling, it speaks of disposability, of things used and discarded, of value extracted and then abandoned. And here, it frames Baek Junmin as much as the hoodie does. He is in this environment, not passing through it. Thus this motive appears once again: The refuse mirrors his role: useful for a time, easy to replace, meant to be kept out of sight until needed. It foreshadows what will happen to him years later, when he too will be treated as disposable by the very people who profited from him. (chapter 52) Note that Director Choi Gilseok doesn’t express concern for Baek Junmin, his attention is on the Emperor!

If we look carefully, the hoodie and the garbage share a function: both conceal. The hoodie hides the individual; the garbage hides the traces of past actions. Together, they create a space where identity and accountability dissolve. It also exposes his moral corruption.

This is the Baek Junmin we meet first — not the legend of the underground fighting circuit, not The Shotgun. He is almost anti-spectacle. And that is precisely why the contrast with his future self (chapter 47) — gold chains glinting, tattoos displayed, chin raised — feels so stark. To move from this shadow into the spotlight means something happened in between, something that flipped his calculation about visibility.

But for now, in this first glimpse, he is a boy learning the rules of survival: keep close to the powerful, keep your profile low, and never draw attention to yourself unless you can win the moment you do.

He doesn’t even enter the scene until the champion is gone. Joo Jaekyung has already brushed off the offer of drugs, already walked away into the dark, by the time Baek Junmin makes his approach. (chapter 73) This timing matters. It means the two men share a street that night but not a glance — the main lead never sees him, never knows they have crossed paths. And now, you know why the Shotgun could never forget him: a source of threat. This contrast exposes the truth: Not only the future Shotgun was already a thug, who kept his true nature well hidden, but also Joo JAekyung was totally misjudged: he is far from being a thug! He is totally honest (chapter 47),he doesn’t take pride in killing someone.

And yet, from Baek Junmin’s perspective, the scene in episode 73 is their first meeting. So he was never part of the “Hwang Buyngchul’s boxing studio”. For Joo Jaekyung, it is nothing — an evening that passes without incident. But this imbalance changes everything. When we later see them square off in the present-day hallway, it becomes clear that Baek Junmin is fighting a private, unfinished battle. (chapter 49)

The scene in chapter 73 becomes the prologue to a hidden chronology. Since the champion’s nemesis implied in the hallway that they had met personally before (chapter 49) and there was no direct interaction between them in the street, I come to the conclusion that their past must have crossed a second time between these two meetings. If we take the hallway encounter as their third meeting (chapter 49), there must have been at least a second — brief, sharp, and wounding enough to carve itself into Baek Junmin’s memory while leaving no conscious trace in Joo Jaekyung’s. The difference is telling: what the champion repressed, the Shotgun carried it like a scar. It means Baek Junmin knows more about him than the reverse, and every glare, every barb he throws later is sharpened by a history Joo Jaekyung couldn’t anticipate they share

The street itself is dim, (chapter 73) lit only in patches, with more shadow than clarity. In this kind of setting, the black hoodie becomes something more than clothing — it is camouflage. He is not merely wearing the dark; he is using it, letting the folds of fabric and the absence of light blur his edges. It is as if he intends to merge with the scenery, to be just another shadow leaning against the wall. This double concealment — in time and in space — ensures that, for now, he remains invisible to the one person whose attention he will one day crave. He began in the shadows not just by circumstance but by mandate. Yet as the boy in the hoodie fades into memory, a new figure will eventually emerge from those shadows—not to hide, but to strike. And he will no longer wear a hood. He will wear scars.

The Scar and the Tattoos: Carved Memory and Symbolic Death

In his youth, Baek Junmin bore no huge visible tattoos. (chapter 73) He only has a small one under the eye in the shape of a cross, an ambiguous symbol that could suggest death, a target or “devotion” (for the mafia). It was modest, even fearful. He seemed reluctant to mark his body, as though he feared being publicly identified as a thug or linked too closely to the criminal underworld. This caution contrasts starkly with his present appearance. (chapter 47) Now, his skin is heavily inked: an Oni demon slashes across his throat, a clear invocation of Japanese yakuza imagery and underground death culture. [For more read the essay Angels of Death: Shadows versus Serenity] So his transformation tells a story.

When Baek Junmin reappears in the present timeline (chapter 49), the change in his face is immediate and inescapable (chapter 73) — but only if we hold his past up against his present. The teenager in the black hoodie had smooth skin and no visible tattoos beyond a small mark under one eye, a calculated restraint that kept him from looking fully “claimed” by the underworld he moved in. His portray contrasts so much to the other teenager whose legs are covered by huge tattoos. (chapter 73) Now, Junmin’s face carries something far less deliberate: a scar running across his forehead above his right eye, a permanent reminder of an encounter that went violently wrong.

This is where the knife enters the story. Not as a vague metaphor for danger, but as an object with a history. We know Baek Junmin favors blades (chapter 47) — the demon tattoo on his throat clutches a knife between its teeth, a design too precise to be coincidence. In woodcarving, strokes are often carved with blades; in Baek Junmin’s case, the scar is a carving on flesh, an unwanted engraving that cannot be sanded smooth. The placement of the tattoo directly on his throat is almost poetic: the story of that scar is something he cannot speak, lodged like the blade between the demon’s teeth.

But the knife in Jinx carries an even sharper meaning. Hwang Byungchul once described the city as a cutthroat place — (chapter 72) and in this context, “cutthroat” is more than an idiom. It hints at the lurking threat of blades, at encounters in alleys and side streets where victory is stolen through speed and treachery. Joo Jaekyung has walked those streets without incident (chapter 72) (chapter 73) in the present timeline, but an assault there can happen any time.

And now, let me ask you where a knife was used before in the Manhwa? Naturally when the hero faced Heo Manwook (chapter 17) And what did the loan shark tell him before provoking him? (chapter 17) Based on the champion’s facial expression after hearing Heo Manwook’s questions, it becomes clear that Joo Jaekyung experienced in the past a scene where he faced a knife and his head was smashed with a bottle of soju. The criminals are recognizable due to their tattoos and their weapons, the knife! And the logic of the knife in this world is telling: as Heo Manwook showed (chapter 17), it appears when a fight is already lost. It is not a weapon of open combat, but of pride and desperation — a way to cheat fate when skill is not enough. Moreover, he was particularly vicious here. He attacked the champion from behind, a treacherous move. As you can see, the knife is strongly intertwined with the underworld, deception and cowardice.

You can actually detect many parallels between the argument with the champion’s father and the fight at doc Dan’s humble house: the twilight, the smashing of a bottle of soju on the head, (chapter 73) (chapter 17), a head injury (chapter 73), insults and provocations (chapter 73), (chapter 17) and finally an allusion to the “maker”, god versus father. (chapter 17) and finally DEATH!! (chapter 73) The loan shark was diminishing the young man’s skills and that his success was FAKE! Why? It is because the outcome was predicted. The winner and loser would already be determined.

And here the past/present contrast becomes more than physical. In his youth, he avoided conspicuous tattoos, perhaps to maintain a veneer of respectability and legitimacy — to pass under the radar, even as he acted as a middleman for his hyung. The black hoodie, the sparse ink, the way he let others handle the dirty work of selling drugs — all of it kept him in the gray zone, unremarkable to outsiders, even to Joo Jaekyung. But the scar changes that. A face without scars can blend in; a face with one becomes a story waiting to be told.

The most visible shift in his face is the scar on his forehead—a wound likely inflicted by Joo Jaekyung during their violent, knife-laced fight. Junmin must have decided to use it, when he felt threatened… but it backfired on him. This scar became a permanent reminder of his defeat, carved into flesh like a shameful birthmark. Its position on the forehead makes it impossible to ignore. It not only mars his appearance, but becomes an emblem of inferiority: a symbol that the world (and Baek Junmin himself) can see.

The connection between scar and the tattoo is more than symbolic—it’s thematic. Both involve penetration, cutting, and permanence. In Korean and Japanese culture, many traditional tattoos were made by hand, with needles or even small blades. (chapter 47) The Oni tattoo on Baek Junmin’s throat, where the demon wields a knife, is thus a mirror to his own scar: an acknowledgment of pain and an attempt to reclaim it as power. But there’s a paradox here. The tattoo shouts violence, but the original wound whispered shame. One was chosen; the other was inflicted. The thug is damned to keep this “humiliation” secret.

But his facial transformation doesn’t stop at the scar and the demon ink. Look closer, and you’ll see two small black dots beneath his right eye (chapter 49) —subtle, easily overlooked, yet loaded with meaning. These dots form a quiet counterpoint to the earlier cross tattoo under his left eye. They mirror each other, as if Junmin were trying to impose a kind of symmetry on his face—like a man seeking order through symbols after chaos has marred him. Their placement, right next to the scar, suggests something more: a visual strategy. Perhaps they are meant to divert attention from the wound, reframing the narrative of the face so the scar becomes part of a larger aesthetic rather than a standalone blemish.

Tattoo culture often loads such markings with coded meaning. In some circles, dots under the eye mimic teardrop tattoos, carrying associations of vengeance, mourning, or lived violence. It was, as if the criminal wanted to hide his “tears” and suffering. But Baek Junmin’s dots stop at two, not three—a gesture that resists completion. It’s as though he’s gesturing toward a story without finishing it, marking himself as wounded yet unfinished: they indicate his revenge. If the cross once stood for death or sacrifice, these dots represent his attempt to balance or bury that meaning, even as they draw the viewer’s eye to the very place he was disfigured. His body, and especially his face, has become a site of symbolic warfare—a battlefield of meaning, where shame, defiance, and imitation collide.

Contrast this with Joo Jaekyung, who also bore no tattoos in his youth. (chapter 73) Over time, the champion chose protective symbols— clouds and a dragon-like mask—tattoos designed not to intimidate but to shield. (chapter 1) (chapter 17) They represent protection, not aggression. Where Baek Junmin’s tattoos speak of death and destruction, Jaekyung’s express escape, survival and resilience. Even in their body art, the two boys tell opposing stories: one driven by resentment and darkness, the other by endurance and self-preservation.

But there is more. Baek Junmin’s body itself has become the evidence of a crime—his tattoos and scars forming a visual confession of his descent and his affiliations. Unwittingly, those who empowered him also helped preserve these signs. The very schemers who turned him into a weapon ensured he would one day become proof of their own corruption. In that sense, Baek Junmin truly is a shotgun—not just a tool of violence, but a loaded narrative, ready to backfire on those who pulled the trigger. Moreover, let’s not forget that the CEO vouched for Baek Junmin. (chapter 47) That’s the reason why the lady in red had to defend the Shotgun’s reputation and honor. (chapter 69) Nevertheless, they are here buying time. How so? If the champion were to fight again and even lose, they could bury the investigations. They were also biding time in order to stop investigations and the involvement of the media.

The shift in Baek Junmin’s appearance—from a cautious, hoodie-wearing boy to a tattoo-covered, self-styled villain—maps a descent into self-loathing and performative masculinity. He mimicked the criminal codes around him, but it was a copy without conviction. Hence years later, he is seen wearing a counterfeit Gucci t-shirt and fake jewels. (chapter 47) Is it a coincidence that back then one of the minions was wearing a fake Gucci t-shirt either? (chapter 73) No… he is copying others and in particular Joo Jaekyung whom he resents. Thus their attitude in the ring is similar (ruthless), yet both act that way for different reasons: pain and seriousness (chapter 15) versus fun and schadenfreude (chapter 47). His new persona feels exaggerated, theatrical, hollow. He wanted to become unforgettable, but ended up being another disposable fighter in a system that only remembers champions. Now, his face is ruined: he lost teeth and has a broken nose. (chapter 52) He can never look attractive again, hence he lost his value as MMA fighter for good. Despite the incident, Joo Jaekyung is still popular because he looks so young: (chapter 57) Hence the nurse felt sympathy for him. At the health center, he received his long due punishment. Baek Junmin learned through the hard way what it means fighting without rules. He got deceived himself, thinking that his “hyung” would have his back.

The irony is that the origin of his scar is one Baek Junmin cannot tell without exposing a deeper connection to his past and his criminal ties. And that would be “rigging a game”, making Joo Jaekyung lose his trophy! That’s why the ghost said this: (chapter 54) These words imply that the outcome was predicted… That’s the reason why Joo Jaekyung needs to remember the past. There lies the truth: they are “rigging the games because of bets!

And if our earlier deduction is correct — that the scar was the result of their unrecorded second meeting — then this is not just a wound, but the physical trace of their asymmetrical history. For Joo Jaekyung, that meeting was so brief, so quickly buried, that it left no visible mark. Yet don’t think, he was not traumatized. This changed the athlete forever. For Baek Junmin, it was formative, humiliating, unforgettable. The scar becomes both a reminder of his defeat and a motive for his revenge. (chapter 49) Imagine that the man has to see this scar on his face each day… the symbol of his defeat.

In this light, the knife and the scar are not separate symbols but intertwined: the weapon that failed him, the mark that betrays him, and the silence that binds them together. And now, you comprehend why he selected the Shotgun as stage name. It was to end his “curse”, living in the shadow of the celebrity.

The Shadow Trio: Joo Jaewoong, Baek Junmin, and the Ghost

Baek Junmin’s story becomes even more compelling (chapter 47) when set against two spectral figures in Jinx: the ghost (chapter 54) and Joo Jaekyung’s father, Joo Jaewoong. (chapter 73) These three form a symbolic trio—each marked by violence, marginalization, and a desire to escape the suffocating grip of their environment. Their most immediate shared trait? A smile that feels wrong. A grin not born of joy, but of cruelty, mockery, or powerlessness. Furthermore, all three are associated with trash and garbage: (chapter 47) (chapter 54) (chapter 72) Their words or flat reflect their mindset and role. They are waste, once used, they can be discarded. For me, it becomes obvious that the ghost from the champion’s nightmare is a combination of Joo Jaewoong and The Shotgun. Besides, observe how the father’s corpse (chapter 73) resembles to the “Shotgun” after receiving his “karma”: (chapter 52) Thus I deduce that Baek Junmin’s destiny was to go down the same path of Joo Jaewoong, unless he realizes the real root of his misery!

But let’s return our attention to the grins. The latter are paired with insults—bitter, scornful language that aims not only to hurt but also to humiliate. In all three, we detect a mix of resentment and impotence. And it’s no coincidence that all three are linked to the boxing world: (chapter 54), the father with his fading trophy, Baek Junmin with his own unspoken history in the underground ring and the ghost’s words linked to the champion’s hands. Together, they symbolize the toxic underbelly of combat sports, the place where dreams are sold and consumed.

But this trio isn’t a perfect mirror. There are divergences. Joo Jaewoong, though broken and addicted, had once been a professional athlete. (chapter 73) He had a past worth remembering—something he even clung to in his ruined apartment, preserving his medal and document like a relic. Baek Junmin, by contrast, never belonged to the gym. He wasn’t trained. He never received formal recognition. He fought in shadows, kept to the margins, and remained a “legend” only in the backrooms of Gangwon’s illegal rings because he trusted his “hyung”.

Joo Jaewoong also carried a paradox. He warned his son against the very path he had taken. He knew where it led—through the hands of people toward the underworld. (chapter 73) And yet he couldn’t resist gambling, drinking, or slipping further into that decay. He never kept a low profile. Baek Junmin, too, sought a way out. He almost wore no tattoos back then. His hoodie was black. He preferred to remain invisible. Unlike the younger thugs around him, he wasn’t flaunting power. He was navigating survival. His strategy was to stay hidden long enough to escape. Yet, deep down, (chapter 49). he desired to have a real title and admiration. (chapter 47)

But then something happened. He encountered Joo Jaekyung. And from that moment on, the fantasy of neutrality—the ability to remain on the fence—was destroyed. That’s why he approached Park Juho and questioned his actions afterwards. My avid readers will certainly recall my essay: Facing The Shotgun: Embracing Change The blond haired fighter embodies Change! Their fight which ended with a wound changed everything. Baek Junmin was defeated, scarred, exposed. And the shadows no longer provided cover.

That encounter became the turning point. While Joo Jaewoong gave up on boxing and rotted quietly, Baek Junmin doubled down on resentment and descent. If he couldn’t rise as a legitimate athlete, then he would find power elsewhere—on his own terms. (chapter 47) He wouldn’t become a better fighter; he would become a cheater. His new arena would be modeled after the streets: no rules, no weight classes, no referees. (chapter 47) His ring resembled the very fight that had marked his downfall—the alley, the knife, the shame. Yet here, surrounded by darkness and silence, he could finally rewrite the story. The violence felt earned now. People even died in these fights. To him, this was proof that his victories were real. Hence he smirked. (chapter 47) He couldn’t see that he had merely traded structure for spectacle, skill for savagery. He had confused bloodshed with honor. He was not an athlete, simply a thug.

He remained trapped in the same province, unable to leave (chapter 47)—but now he carried his own name. Baek Junmin! He is no longer Junmin, a teenager who tried to stay in the gray zone! But when he was televised, when the mobsters decided to polish his image and set him against the Emperor, he was reborn: The Shotgun. The stage name marks a shift—not just in visibility, but in function. He was no longer hiding. He could be seen, and therefore used. But by using his real name, he never realized that he could now be prosecuted. (chapter 47) He started dirtying his hands for the high-rollers.

From Junmin to Baek Junmin to The Shotgun—his very name charts a descent. He lost not only his identity, but his humanity. And perhaps most tragically, he never realized the extent of his manipulation. The high rollers never intended to hand him the champion belt. Their goal had been a tie (chapter 51) all along—a spectacle, not a coronation. Hence director Choi was overjoyed when he heard the verdict.(chapter 52) That’s why he earned a lot of money. They used this fight to remove the Emperor from the stage quietly. It was time for him to give up on his throne. If they had let Baek Junmin win the fight, people would have questioned the referees. The Shotgun was there to prepare the coup d’Etat, hence the new champion is someone else. Joo Jaekyung wouldn’t remain so calm hearing this: (chapter 69) They knew the Shotgun wasn’t strong enough. But he didn’t. He mistook cheating for skill. He mistook chaos for greatness. He believed he had earned what was scripted all along.

The Shotgun, the Ghost, and the Father—each longed to be seen. Each was eclipsed by Joo Jaekyung. And all three tried, in their own way, to mark or damage him. They resented him for his “talent, dream and happiness”. But the irony is bitter: none of them succeeded in shaping the Emperor. They only reflected what he overcame.

Hence he became the legend (chapter 47) in the illegal fighting ring, located in Gangwon

This very trait—keeping a low profile— was what initially distinguished him from Joo Jaewoong. The latter imagined that through admiration and recognition, he would get rich. That way, he would leave the place. (chapter 73) However, the opposite happened. Why? Through boxing, he came in touch with the criminal world. Striking is that in the beginning, Joo Jaewoong did the exact opposite to the Shotgun. He became famous because of his self-destructive behavior: (chapter 72) This explicates why Hwang Byungchul condemned the man and sided with the mother. But while Joo Jaewoong and Baek Junmin tried to escape through the sport, they both ended up in the criminal network. And neither made it out.

What unites all three—ghost, boxer, and Shotgun—is their resent towards the main lead. None of them intended to grow old in the same town, under the same weight of poverty, violence, and anonymity. Yet none succeeded. Baek Junmin never made it past the provincial legend status, until he was called to Seoul and brought to MFC. He may have become infamous, but he was never international. Hence the last match took place in Thailand… they were hoping that the new champion would get famous internationally. In the end, their stories are fragments of the same fate: young men crushed by the very world they hoped to transcend.

Conclusion to Part 1: The Puzzle

If Baek Junmin’s character feels complex, it is because he is built like a puzzle—fragmented, hidden, and deeply contradictory. Some pieces lie in the past; others only emerge in his present incarnation. We found signs in his tattoos, in the black hoodie, in the garbage-strewn street, and even in his silence. Each glimpse offered a new facet, and every comparison with Joo Jaekyung and Joo JAewoong cast another shadow into view.

But in the end, the puzzle you’ve read was not just Mingwa’s doing. It was also mine. This is only one way of assembling the fragments.

In the second part, I will try to bring the pieces closer together—to lay out what I believe truly happened between Baek Junmin and the Emperor, and how the Shotgun was born not in glory, but in humiliation.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Lavender-Tinted 🪻Pillow Talk 🛏️ – Part 2

Revisiting the Symbolism of Intimacy

In the first part of Lavender-Tinted Pillow Talk, the focus was on Kim Dan’s subconscious struggle with intimacy, as reflected in his body language, verbal hesitations, and use of physical barriers such as the pillow. It explored how his journey toward rejecting touch and emotional closeness paralleled his growing bond with Joo Jaekyung. He fears attachment out of pain. (Chapter 63) The presence—or absence—of clothing during their encounters symbolized the gradual dismantling of their emotional walls. Now, shifting the perspective to the champion, another layer of complexity emerges. Joo Jaekyung’s evolving approach to intimacy is not just a reflection of his growing feelings but also a silent, deeply ingrained struggle with dependence and control.

His behavior in Episode 63, particularly his decision to remain in his black boxer briefs while on the bed, invites a closer look. Given the kaleidoscopic storytelling of Jinx, where patterns and motifs repeat with shifting meanings, this small yet significant detail connects to previous moments of exposure and concealment. What does Jaekyung’s retention of his underwear reveal? (chapter 63) Why does he hesitate to strip entirely, even as he succumbs to desire? Notice that he released his erected phallus before removing his cloth. (chapter 63) To answer this, a comparative analysis of earlier sex scenes is necessary, unraveling the hidden dialogue between physical exposure and emotional vulnerability.

The Hidden Shame: Dependency Veiled in Fabric

A key parallel can be drawn to an early scene featuring Kim Dan’s embarrassment in the bathroom when confronted by the wolf. (chapter 30) The doctor instinctively tried to cover his gray boxer shorts with his t-shirt, prompting the champion to question his reaction:  (chapter 30) In Episode 63, this dynamic appears subtly reversed. (chapter 63) The champion, despite holding the dominant role, is now the one retaining a piece of clothing. This suggests an unconscious act of concealment—not of shame in the traditional sense, but of a growing dependency on Kim Dan.

In addition, the star’s arousal in Episode 62 was heavily emphasized by the author, (chapter 62) with a zoom-in shot on his erection still hidden by gray sweatpants. Striking is that on the one hand he let the doctor feel his reaction to his naked body, when he embraced the doctor: (chapter 62) The “hamster” could sense with his leg the excitement. On the other hand, these pants were only removed once he entered the bedroom and was on the bed (chapter 63), reinforcing the idea that vulnerability, for him, is confined to this private space. Moreover, the choice of attire in Episode 62 (chapter 62) —ridiculous floral-patterned pants—serves as an indirect reference to shame (in a good way), an unfamiliar emotion for the undefeated fighter. This pattern culminates in Episode 63, where Jaekyung’s thoughts confirm his internal battle:  (chapter 63) Only at this point does he fully expose himself. Yet, observe that during the intercourse, he is not looking at his companion. (chapter 63) Thus I deduce that exactly like the presence of the black underwear, the athlete’s low self-esteem hasn’t been removed completely. He still expects fear and rejection.

A Mirror to Episode 12: The Champion’s “Lucky Night”

Joo Jaekyung has always been a man of control. In the ring, in his career, and especially in his personal relationships, he has dictated the terms, ensuring that he is never in a position of vulnerability. Throughout Jinx, his approach to intimacy has been no different—he takes without giving (chapter 63), dominates without seeking connection (chapter 55), and ensures that every encounter follows his carefully constructed narrative. However, in Episode 63, a subtle but undeniable shift occurs. For the first time, Jaekyung’s actions reflect something deeper than mere desire or dominance. They reveal his growing emotional investment in Kim Dan, exposing a side of him that even he does not fully comprehend. (chapter 63)

This transformation becomes even more evident when comparing Episode 63 to the infamous “lucky day” scene from Episode 12. (chapter 12) In the earlier encounter, Jaekyung presented himself as a generous partner, offering Kim Dan a so-called privilege—an opportunity to enter a whole new world, thanks to him. However, his so-called generosity was nothing more than a facade, a way to conceal his inexperience in genuine intimacy. The tool he used was not just an object of pleasure but a mask for his own shortcomings as a lover. He did not know how to pleasure Kim Dan, nor did he care to learn. His focus was not on Kim Dan’s enjoyment but on reinforcing his own power and dominance.

In stark contrast, Episode 63 presents a very different Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 63) Here, he no longer portrays himself as the benevolent provider of an experience. (chapter 63) Instead, he openly admits his inexperience in giving pleasure, stating that he has never been on the giving end before. This moment of self-awareness is crucial because it marks a departure from his earlier arrogance and lack of honesty. No longer does he assume that his presence alone is a gift—he is beginning to recognize that intimacy is a two-way street. Moreover, unlike in Episode 12, where his so-called generosity was partially performative (chapter 12) – seeking both to display dominance and to elicit validation (chapter 12) —this time, in Episode 63, he prioritizes Kim Dan’s pleasure without explicitly expecting anything in return. (chapter 63) However, there remains an unspoken desire for recognition, as he unconsciously longs for Kim Dan to acknowledge his efforts in a way that he was once too proud to admit. I believe that this night is there to make him discover the power of giving.

Additionally, the impact of rejection in this scene cannot be ignored. (chapter 63) Up until this point, Jaekyung has never truly faced rejection. (chapter 63) His wealth, power, and physical prowess have ensured that people comply with his desires. However, in Episode 63, Kim Dan does not simply comply—he resists on an emotional level. While he consents to sex, he actively rejects any deeper connection. He avoids eye contact, creates physical distance, and refuses to acknowledge Jaekyung beyond the act itself. This rejection unsettles Jaekyung because, for the first time, his usual methods of control no longer work. He cannot use money to bridge the emotional gap, nor can he rely on his dominance to make Kim Dan want him. (chapter 63) This moment forces him to confront an uncomfortable truth: power and status cannot buy emotional intimacy.

What makes this shift even more significant is how Jaekyung reacts to Kim Dan’s rejection. In the past, his response to resistance was often intimidation (chapter 03) or passive-aggressive remarks. (chapter 6) However, in this moment, he does not react with anger or coercion. (chapter 63) While he does voice his frustration, he does so without force, showing an unprecedented level of emotional regulation. Instead of demanding compliance, he chooses a different approach—he focuses on Kim Dan’s pleasure, attempting to bridge the emotional gap through physical intimacy (chapter 63) rather than control. This decision is not merely about sex; it is an unconscious attempt to regain Kim Dan’s attention, to re-establish a connection that he does not yet fully understand but deeply craves.

Furthermore, his desire to see Kim Dan’s face highlights another key development. In earlier episodes, Jaekyung reduced their relationship to mere physical pleasure, going so far as to state that (chapter 29) This remark exemplified his detachment, his refusal to acknowledge Kim Dan as a person rather than just a body. Once again, the intercourse was linked to achievement and work. However, in Episode 63, he actively seeks Kim Dan’s gaze, subtly pleading for recognition. (chapter 63) This reversal is crucial because it indicates that he no longer sees Kim Dan as just a means to an end. However, his desire for recognition still lingers beneath the surface—just as he once sought validation through dominance, he now seeks it through Kim Dan’s acknowledgment. He wants something more, though he cannot yet articulate what that is, and his actions reflect a subconscious craving for emotional reassurance.

And since Episode 63 is mirroring Chapter 12 and the champion declared back then that it was Kim Dan’s lucky day, I come to the following deduction that in episode 63, it was the champion’s lucky night. He felt comfortable despite the doctor’s coldness. At the same time, it implies that Kim Dan’s lucky Day is about to come!! My avid readers should keep in mind that in the penthouse, the athlete was actually lying, (chapter 12) because this intimacy was taking place under the moon. However, notice that the next day, the doctor’s dream came true: he could rest, eat a warm home-made meal from the champion. (chapter 13)

The Wolf’s Shifting Approach to Intimacy: A Chronological Exploration

From the outset, the celebrity’s insistence on keeping his clothing on during intimate moments reveals a deep-seated struggle with emotional exposure. In Episode 2, (chapter 62) the sportsman welcomes the physical therapist in blue pajamas and a robe—an overt attempt to maintain distance and control. Even as the encounter begins, he leaves his pajamas on (chapter 3), removing them only (chapter 3) – this image marks the change) when the doctor’s back is turned. Then in Episode 8, during the shower, he continues wearing shorts and underwear (chapter 8), and his choice of the doggy style further reinforces his desire to avoid direct, face-to-face vulnerability.

Like mentioned above, in Episode 12, Jaekyung was not entirely naked. First, he was wearing his black briefs, (chapter 12) before removing it and adding the pink sex toy. (chapter 12) His erection was deliberately obscured by a sex toy, while Kim Dan, despite being partially undressed, was still concealing his injuries with a black pullover and a swollen eye. The layers of fabric and obstruction in this earlier scene signified emotional and physical distance. (chapter 12) Their bodies might have been close, but their minds remained divided. That’s why he couldn’t detect the huge bruises on his companion’s body. (chapter 12) This guarded approach is further underlined in Episode 20 (chapter 20), where even in the midst of nakedness, the athlete deliberately positions the doctor in the dog stance. At the same time, he uses another MO: the darkness of the room to hide himself. This calculated arrangement maintains an emotional buffer, allowing him to remain physically exposed yet emotionally detached—a recurring theme in his behavior.

A notable turning point occurs in Episode 29. Here, the champion initiates sex on the couch (chapter 29) while still cloaked in his familiar blue robe and pajamas. Interesting is that the room is not totally dark like in episode 20, the bedroom is illuminated by the huge TV screen. Importantly, this episode marks the first time they face each other in the bedroom, signaling a significant shift in their dynamic and announcing a switch in position. This newfound mutual visibility lays the groundwork for later developments.

Episode 33 deepens the narrative further. In this instance, the sportsman parks his car next to a light (chapter 33) —a deliberate act imbued with symbolism. Unlike earlier encounters, the champion remains fully clothed throughout this episode, (chapter 33) contrasting sharply with previous moments of exposure. The car scene, where they are now facing each other, reinforces the announced switch in intimacy; the light not only illuminates the scene but also serves as a metaphorical spotlight on his desire to see the doctor’s face and body (chapter 33) —a silent assertion that only he can truly satisfy the physical therapist. Let’s not forget that before having sex together, the fighter resorted to a dildo (chapter 33) rather direct physical intimacy, because he felt insecure after witnessing the actor’s advances toward Kim Dan. His goal? To reaffirm his dominance and make Kim Dan admit that he needed him for pleasure. It is important because it exposes that deep down, the champion views himself as a bad lover. There is no doubt that Heesung‘s criticism resonated with him. (chapter 33)

In Episode 39, another instance of calculated concealment unfolds. (chapter 39) While receiving fellatio, the champion keeps his t-shirt on, only removing it later when he invites the doctor into bed. (chapter 39) Maintaining the doggy style during this phase, he uses such intimate acts to mask his true longing and attraction—an effort to control the encounter while keeping his emotions under wraps. Then I noticed that they switched positions, when doc Dan asked for a break. (chapter 39) The wolf chose to lie down on the bed: (chapter 39) As you can see, through the different intercourses, we can see the different methods the star used to conceal himself, to hide his “weakness”, his growing feelings for the doctor.

A poignant recollection surfaces in Episode 61. (chapter 61) The physical therapist remembers an encounter bathed in bright light, where they stood before a couch: the doctor had removed his pants while the champion remained fully clothed, positioned behind him. (chapter 61) After both reached climax, the sportsman swiftly departed—a stark demonstration of his habitual retreat into distance and fear, even as he ensures the doctor’s pleasure. (chapter 61) This calculated “running away” underscores the return of old insecurities and the persistent need to assert control. Since the doctor was still living in the penthouse and as such was still working as the star’s physical therapist, it becomes comprehensible why the athlete could only resort to strength to keep his fated companion by his side. He had rejected his “gratitude” and “emotions” before.

Finally, in Episode 63, the dynamic evolves once more. (chapter 63) Now lying on the bed facing each other, the pair’s physical closeness appears more genuine. Yet, even in this seemingly intimate configuration, they avoid locking eyes during penetration. This subtle divergence speaks volumes: despite their newfound positioning, the champion’s reluctance to engage in mutual gaze highlights an enduring emotional barrier—a lingering fear of fully exposing his inner self. Simultaneously, pay attention that (chapter 63) the champion’s torso is not resting on his partner’s body, revealing the existence of the remaining huge gap between them. Finally, the star views this sex session as an action, and not as a moment of peace. Finally, though Kim Dan is now completely bare, yet he shielded himself with a pillow before, maintaining a psychological barrier. Meanwhile, Jaekyung retains his black briefs until the final moment, symbolizing an invisible boundary he has yet to overcome—his reluctance to fully embrace Kim Dan, not just physically but emotionally. This evolving pattern of clothed versus unclothed intimacy highlights how their relationship is progressing beyond a mere transaction into something neither of them fully understands yet.

Taken together, these episodes chart a complex evolution in the champion’s approach to intimacy. His behavior oscillates between acts of control—whether through maintaining a layer of clothing or strategically using light—and moments that hint at a deep-seated desire for connection. Each carefully choreographed encounter, from the early defensive postures in Episodes 2 and 20 to the conflicted displays in Episodes 29, 33, 39, 61, and 63, reveals an ongoing inner conflict: a yearning for closeness intertwined with a persistent fear of vulnerability.

The Meaning of the Black Underwear: Distance and Disguise

The black underwear Jaekyung clings to is not just a remnant of concealment—it is also a recurring symbol of his emotional armor. A significant clue can be found in the way he wakes up after sleeping with Kim Dan. In Episode 4 (chapter 4), we do not see whether he is wearing anything the morning after. After their “magic night” in the United States (Episode 39), the next morning, he is only shown taking a shower (chapter 40) —meaning the audience never sees him leaving the bed. However, in Episode 45, the author deliberately includes a shot of Jaekyung leaving the bed while still wearing his black boxer briefs. (chapter 45)

His reaction in this scene is telling. He expresses regret:  (chapter 45). This is just a rhetorical question, as he clearly remembers the night. (chapter 45) In reality, he was wondering why he had acted this way. This contradiction—pretending to forget while consciously recalling their time together—reflects his internal denial. His next thought,  (chapter 45) is a transparent excuse to avoid confronting his emotions. The presence of the black underwear in this scene confirms that he had not fully lowered his guard; he still maintained a psychological barrier between himself and Kim Dan.

Shame, Expectations, and the Invisible Chains of Control

Joo Jaekyung has built his entire existence on the foundation of invulnerability—physical, emotional, and psychological. The champion’s ability to endure, to dominate, and to suppress any sign of weakness is not merely a personality trait but a deeply ingrained survival mechanism. Unlike Kim Dan, who was shaped by guilt and self-sacrifice (chapter 53), Jaekyung was conditioned through shame and rigid expectations. His worth was not inherent but conditional, entirely dependent on his performance. (chapter 54) If he was not good enough, if he did not win, he was nothing.

This belief system did not emerge in a vacuum. (chapter 54) The specter that haunts him—an unnamed figure whose words still echo in his nightmares—was the architect of his relentless pursuit of strength. Striking is that in his nightmare, he is facing the mysterious ghost, a sign that he saw hatred and rejection in his counterpart’s eyes. While Kim Dan’s halmoni took his hand and provided warmth (chapter 22), Jaekyung’s guardian likely did the opposite. (chapter 54) The presence of the champion’s hand in his nightmare while recalling the parent’s words is telling. The contrast implies that in his youth, there was no comforting touch, no guiding hold—only harsh words and the looming specter of failure. He was left to fend for himself, to prove his worth in a world where physical prowess was the only currency. I came to this interpretation for two other reasons. First, in the doctor’s memory, we see Shin Okja holding her grandchild’s hand, while she is going to work (chapter 5) This represented a source of support for the elderly woman. Secondly, during the intercourse in the lavender-tinted bedroom, neither the champion nor the doctor are trying to take each other’s hand: (chapter 63) In the beginning, the champion grabbed doc Dan’s wrist. This shows that the athlete was not used to touch Kim Dan’s hand. And notice how the “hamster” reacted (chapter 63), when he felt his lover’s hand approaching his own: (chapter 63) He pushed it away. This means that taking the doctor’s hand represents the biggest challenge for Joo Jaekyung right now. In addition, the last panel indicates the champion’s transformation, he is now willing to seek the doctor’s closeness. It also implies the vanishing influence from his past guardian.

The guardian’s influence was likely tied to the world of sports or medicine, a figure who saw Jaekyung not as a child to be nurtured, but as a body to be molded, a tool to be sharpened. His physique was shaped to meet the guardian’s standards, his every action dictated by an unrelenting expectation of excellence. (chapter 54) There was no room for imperfection, no tolerance for hesitation. Thus I deduce that the champion’s choice of career could have been decided by the guardian, similar to the grandmother’s attitude with Kim Dan. Remember that he loves water and swimming. (chapter 27) Under this new light, it could explain why the fighter forgot his passion. They made sure that he would train restlessly. In this environment, vulnerability was a defect to be eradicated, not a human trait to be acknowledged. This description reminded me think of Park Namwook and his family. The manager is a former national wrestler who is married to an athlete too.

The manager’s dream of opening the gym to children may appear as a strategic business decision (that’s where the money is), but it also raises an ethical concern. Will these children truly be nurtured, or will they be trained with the same rigid expectations that shaped Jaekyung? Parents who have achieved a level of success in sports—or, conversely, those who failed to reach their own aspirations—often project their dreams onto their children. This creates an environment where a child’s worth is tied not to their happiness or well-being but to their ability to perform and meet external standards.

This concept aligns with Jaekyung’s upbringing and could suggest that his guardian was someone deeply involved in the athletic world, someone who saw him not as a child but as a future champion, an extension of their own ambitions. The emphasis on performance, endurance, and strength suggests that Jaekyung was never given the option to define his own path—he was molded into what was expected of him.

This perspective also adds another dimension to the conflict with Park Namwook. If Jaekyung’s guardian resembled the manager in some way—someone deeply embedded in the sports industry and medical world, someone who placed performance above emotional well-being—it would explain why Jaekyung instinctively resists authority figures like him. (chapter 5) At the same time, it would highlight the potential danger of Park Namwook’s vision for the gym: an institution that might perpetuate the same cycle of control, shame, and expectation rather than fostering true passion and individuality in young athletes. That’s how I realized why the manager slapped his “boy” after the funny sparring: (chapter 26) He explained that the main lead was just a doctor. However, I am quite certain, underneath, the manager thought that doc Dan was not fit to spare: so small and weak. He doesn’t fit the criteria to become a sparring partner. Look at his reaction, when Seonho faced the champion: (chapter 46) Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why Potato was also neglected by the manager. The young maknae belongs to a different weight category. There is this invisible rule that only strong people can become member from the gym. However, the purpose of such an institution shouldn’t be reduced to titles, strong and muscular men or boys. The gym should be opened to anyone who desires to have fun and improve their health.

This rigid conditioning is reflected in Jaekyung’s relationship with his own body and sexuality. He was formed into this model. I don’t think, the champion was able to perceive his own beauty in the past, (chapter 1), until he received the doctor’s massage in chapter 1. His attitude toward sex mirrors his training in the gym—focused on endurance, performance, and control. His body is a tool, a machine honed for efficiency. (chapter 63) Pleasure is secondary; the real goal is lasting, enduring, proving his stamina. Even in his most intimate moments, he is competing against an invisible opponent—his own ingrained fear of inadequacy.

And yet, despite this carefully maintained control, the cracks are beginning to show. In Episode 63, Jaekyung’s actions reveal a subconscious desire for validation, (chapter 63) for something beyond mere physicality. He wants Kim Dan to see him, to acknowledge him beyond his strength. But the conflict remains—his very conditioning tells him that intimacy is a weakness, that emotional attachment is a liability. This is why he hesitates by keeping his black briefs (chapter 63), why he keeps barriers between himself and Kim Dan, even when his body betrays his true desires.

The contrast between Jaekyung and Kim Dan is striking. The doctor grew up with an abundance of emotional connection but was shackled by guilt, while Jaekyung had all the resources necessary for success but was starved of love. Both were conditioned by their pasts, but where Kim Dan was shaped by an overbearing sense of duty, Jaekyung was forged in an environment that equated worth with winning. Hence he is still thinking of his title: (chapter 62)

In the end, Jaekyung’s rejection of vulnerability is not a sign of strength but a deeply ingrained fear. The unseen guardian may no longer be present, but their influence lingers in every step he takes, in every fight he wins, in every moment he suppresses his true emotions. He is still proving himself—to a ghost, to a voice that once told him he was never good enough.

Conclusion: The Last Invisible Barrier

Jaekyung’s struggle with exposure, mirrored through his gradual abandonment of clothing, speaks to the deeper conflict he faces. In the early days of their relationship, (chapter 4) nudity was a tool of dominance, a means of asserting control. Now, it has become a sign of submission—not in the physical sense, but in the way he is slowly relinquishing the emotional armor he has always relied upon. (chapter 44) His decision to keep his underwear on for as long as possible in Episode 63 is not a sign of detachment (chapter 63), but of his silent battle against the vulnerability he is beginning to feel.

The presence of fabric in their most intimate moments is not incidental; it is a subconscious language of distance and closeness. With each layer removed, Jaekyung is forced to confront an uncomfortable truth: for the first time, his body does not just crave release—it craves Kim Dan himself. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why the champion rejected this wonderful night in the penthouse: (chapter 44) He had violated all his rules: rather passive and submissive, light was on, while he was totally naked. Then he was facing the doctor. He could only justify his odd attitude with the alcohol.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Fickle Jinx 🐈‍⬛, Faded Past

Introduction: The Evolution of the Jinx

Joo Jaekyung’s perception of his ‘jinx’ has undergone a significant transformation since the beginning of Jinx. Initially, he believed that his routine (chapter 2) —having sex the night before a match—was a necessary ritual to maintain his champion title. However, by Episode 62, his view of the jinx had subtly shifted. (chapter 62) He now includes his entire routine with Kim Dan—not just sex, but also his physical therapy and treatment—as part of this so-called jinx. This shift is crucial because it implies an unconscious recognition of Kim Dan’s significance in his life. What once was purely about his career and success has now expanded to include a specific person and their role in his well-being.

Kim Dan, however, misinterprets Jaekyung’s words. First, the athlete employed the expression “usual pre-match routine” which is quite ambiguous. What was he referring to “usual pre-match routine”? The sex or the treatment he was receiving from Kim Dan: the tasty breakfasts, his company on his way to the gym (chapter 46), the stretching and massage at the gym? The problem is that the champion never complimented the “hamster” for his good work directly. So it was, as if his dedication was nonexistent. Without the champion’s genuine gratitude and appreciation expressed so openly, the physical therapist couldn’t perceive the true message behind the champion’s. Joo Jaekyung’s statement was actually an acknowledgment—a sign that the fighter values their routine, not just for performance but as an integral part of his life. So when the star mentioned his jinx (chapter 62), the doctor’s memory got triggered. Because of his past experiences, he has long associated the jinx exclusively with sex. This contrast in understanding highlights both Jaekyung’s lack of self-awareness and Kim Dan’s tendency to filter reality through his own expectations and trauma. However, the deeper significance lies in Jaekyung’s evolving perception of dependency. His jinx is no longer just a superstition tied to his performance in bed. It now subtly acknowledges that his success has been intertwined with Kim Dan’s intervention. (chapter 62). At the same time, his skills in the ring become more relevant. This explicates why the champion talked about it on the treatment table. The location is not anodyne. This implies that the champion’s torment is moving away from the bed and bedroom. This is not the first time the celebrity has recognized Kim Dan’s good work (chapter 61) By entrusting his care to Kim Dan, he was insinuating that the main lead was trustworthy and competent, yet his inability to verbally express appreciation keeps the doctor unaware of his true feelings. This struggle resurfaced in front of the hospice, where Jaekyung could only bring himself to admit that Kim Dan was not responsible for the incident with the switched spray. (chapter 62) His reluctance to openly acknowledge his gratitude suggests a deeper internal conflict—one that hints at a growing but unspoken emotional reliance on Kim Dan. 

Another cause for this inner struggle stems from his difficulty to separate his professional and personal life. While he continues to frame his reliance on Kim Dan as part of his career routine (chapter 62), his subconscious attachment tells a different story. The jinx, once strictly confined to his fights, has now extended beyond the ring, blurring the lines between necessity and emotional dependency. His hesitation to verbalize his appreciation reveals a man grappling with an unfamiliar vulnerability—one that he may not yet be ready to confront. 

The champion’s past: fixed foundation or distorted memory?

As you know, articles from Dr. Jennifer Delgado often assist me to grasp better the couple’s personality and issues. Funny is that her articles often coincide with the progression of Jinx. In her recent article, You Are Not Your Experiences, the author explains how people often mistakenly identify themselves with their past experiences, believing that their traumas, failures, or successes define who they are. She argues that while past experiences shape our perspectives, they do not have to dictate our future choices.

This means that people need to break free from their past. However, in order to achieve this goal, they have to recognize past experiences as a reference rather than a destiny—something to learn from, but not something that confines personal growth.

Emotional Traps: Fear and Avoidance

One of the most common ways people become trapped by their past is through fear-driven decision-making. Those who have faced failures, disappointments, or trauma may avoid opportunities for change out of fear of repeating past mistakes. This avoidance does not create true freedom but rather reinforces a cycle of limitation.

Conversely, others may become so deeply attached to their past choices that they justify and cling to them, believing that changing direction would undermine their previous efforts. This mindset prevents self-reflection and the possibility of meaningful transformation.

The Power of Choice

True autonomy comes from self-awareness and intentional decision-making. Instead of reacting based on past fears or past justifications, individuals can reclaim control over their future by making choices that align with their present values and aspirations. The ability to consciously choose a path forward, rather than following patterns dictated by past experiences, is what ultimately leads to growth, fulfillment, and personal freedom. I am quite certain that my avid readers could recognize the main characters in these descriptions. It becomes obvious that Joo Jaekyung belongs to the second category. His perspective on time is one of continuity and justification. He sees the past as an unchangeable foundation (chapter 62) that naturally determines the future, a mindset that enables him to move forward without regret. Hence he is sure that he will regain his title and can separate ways with Kim Dan. (chapter 62) It was, as if he was warding off bad luck by repeating the last match. For him, past choices are justified by their results—he has built a successful career through sheer discipline and sees no reason to question his trajectory. His mentality reflects the belief that one’s past is a stable structure upon which the present and future rest. This perception explains his resistance to self-reflection and emotional vulnerability; admitting a mistake would mean disrupting the stability he relies upon.

His refusal to listen to emotional advice, especially concerning Kim Dan’s well-being, can be traced back to his survival-driven upbringing (chapter 54), where emotions were likely dismissed as obstacles. Instead, he follows only what aligns with his success: the advice of figures like Park Namwook and Yosep, who reinforce his pre-existing beliefs about strength, control, and endurance. Hence he was pushed to fight despite his ankle injury. (chapter 50)

However, as recent events unfold, his foundation is beginning to show cracks—particularly with Kim Dan’s absence, forcing him into a state of emotional confrontation that he has never encountered before. His departure made him feel not only lonely, but also cold and stressed. And because his past determines his future, it signifies that Joo Jaekyung is caught in a cycle where his past successes and struggles dictate his present mindset. (chapter 61) This rigid perception prevents him from questioning his past choices or embracing change, reinforcing the illusion that repeating past patterns will restore stability. However, as his reliance on Kim Dan grows, the boundaries between his personal and professional life blur, challenging his belief that he can control his future by clinging to his past.  (chapter 61)

But what happens when the past is not remembered correctly? When Jaekyung convinces himself that everything was fine before his tie with Baek Junmin (chapter 62), he is unknowingly rewriting his own history. This distortion is further reinforced by external voices —MFC (chapter 57) and Park Namwook (chapter 54), who claim that Jaekyung ‘lost’ the fight, when in reality, it was a tie. The very way people around him are framing the event warps his perception, creating a false narrative where his struggles seem to stem solely from this supposed ‘loss.’ His belief in a stable past provides him with a sense of security, but that illusion is fragile. In addition, if his struggles predated his championship loss (chapter 29), then reclaiming his title cannot be the solution he believes it to be. Finally, what happens when he is forced to confront the reality that some of his past choices were mistakes – ones that he can no longer attribute to the jinx or external circumstances, (chapter 13) because they affected the doctor’s life? (chapter 41) In one case, he refused to listen to his friend’s advice, whereas he trusted the words from MFC, MFC doctors and his hyung. When the foundation he has relied upon begins to crack, Jaekyung’s entire mindset is shaken, forcing him to question whether his past truly holds the answers he seeks. We could say, the athlete needs to be betrayed by his own past in order to throw his old belief. The latter is strongly intertwined with the organization MFC and authorities in general. Questioning his past equals challenging the company MFC and his past “guardians”: the terrifying ghost and even his two hyungs.

As my avid Jinx-philes can sense, the champion is actually going through a similar path than his lover. Joo Jaekyung has a distorted perception of his past. In Episode 61 (chapter 61), he expresses the belief that reclaiming his championship title will rid him of his headaches, nightmares, and sleepless nights. However, the reality is different—he was already suffering from insomnia long before he lost his title. (chapter 29) The origins of his struggles existed before his recent failures, suggesting that his belief in a simple solution—reclaiming his title—is an illusion. This disconnect reveals how deeply his professional and personal life are entangled; his need for control in the ring has masked his deeper emotional vulnerabilities. He isn’t merely striving for victory—he is chasing the illusion of stability, believing that his success is the sole factor that determines his well-being. (chapter 54) But as his nightmares and frustration intensified, it becomes clear that his problem is not the loss of his title, but the erosion of the identity he has built upon it. This means that the longer he stays away from the gym, the more the fighter is learning about himself. He is more than just a MMA champion. To conclude, he is on his way to redefine himself, to discover his humanity.

  • The very fact that he associates (chapter 61) the headache and nightmares only with his loss suggests that he has rewritten his own history, convincing himself that he was completely fine before his tie with The Shotgun.
  • This distortion reflects his habit of suppressing personal struggles—a conditioned mindset that prioritizes his image and career over his mental and emotional well-being.
  • His unconscious rewriting of events serves a psychological function: blaming the championship loss allows him to avoid deeper introspection. Under this new light, you comprehend why he is not investigating the matter with the switched spray and the rigged game.

This pattern extends to his changing interpretation of the jinx. Originally, his pre-match ritual was about control. It was a way to ensure consistency and maintain a sense of power over his performance. However, by integrating Kim Dan into this ritual, he unknowingly shifts its meaning—it is no longer solely about control, but also about dependence. But there is more to it. The moment you contrast this recollection and belief (chapter 61) with the champion’s rejection in the bedroom with this excuse (chapter 29), you will realize that alone in his penthouse, Joo Jaekyung was actually admitting the importance of sleep and rest. His earlier belief in relentless training as the key to success now clashes with his realization that exhaustion is affecting him. This shift signifies an unconscious admission that his well-being is not just tied to physical endurance but also to recovery and relaxation—something he previously dismissed. This realization subtly parallels his growing dependence on Kim Dan, reinforcing the theme of blurring lines between his professional and personal life. And what had occurred after this magical blue night in the penthouse? (chapter 30) The athlete woke up later than usual. In fact, he was rather late, for he was still wearing his pajamas, while the doctor had already taken his shower. But back then, observe how he opened the door! Like a clumsy beast, grump leopard! Why? In the past, I explained that he was seeking the champion’s closeness, but didn’t know how to approach his partner. I am now adding another aspect. He was actually annoyed, because he had not been following his daily routine!! Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why the champion had such a “angry” facial expression, while deep down he was happy. The older version of this scene: (chapter 44) However, this means that in episode 30, he never acknowledged his dependency on the physical therapist for his rest loudly. On the other hand, it explains why the champion felt threatened, when the actor approached his “lavender-tinted pillow” or “sleeping pill”. (chapter 31) In fact, he used guilt to create a link between him and his roommate. That’s the reason why I am more than ever convinced that the champion will sleep better after this lavender-tinted night. (chapter 63) But contrary to the past, the athlete should come to recognize his lover’s great sleeping power officially. This made me laugh, imagining Kim Dan’s reaction, when the latter sees that his wish (chapter 62) won’t come true at all. 😉 He will stay longer and ask for Kim Dan’s presence during the night.

Kim Dan: The Past as a Lesson to Escape

Dr. Jennifer Delgado’s assertion that the past should be a reference, not a destiny directly applies to Kim Dan. Although the physical therapist believes he is actively shaping his future by rejecting his past, in reality, his decisions are still dictated by fear—fear of repeating past mistakes, fear of attachment, and ultimately, fear of abandonment. He belongs to the first case described above. He regrets to have developed feelings for the champion, therefore he wants to relive their first night together. (chapter 62)

Fear and Avoidance Dictate His Choices

Rather than truly choosing his future, Kim Dan structures his life around avoiding his past. (chapter 56) His childhood and early adult experiences, marked by financial hardship, emotional neglect, abandonment, betrayal and powerlessness, have conditioned him to associate attachment with suffering. Because of this, he withdraws from relationships (chapter 56) and opportunities that could offer him security, convincing himself that he is protecting his independence when, in truth, he is reacting to past trauma rather than making an intentional choice.

This aligns with Delgado’s concept of emotional traps, where individuals believe they are exercising free will when they are actually making fear-based decisions that keep them stuck. Kim Dan’s reluctance to let Jaekyung back into his life is not just about his personal preferences—it is an extension of his attempt to escape a future that resembles his painful past. (chapter 46) (chapter 46)

The Illusion of Control: Running Instead of Choosing

Delgado emphasizes that true freedom comes from conscious decision-making, not reactionary avoidance. Kim Dan, however, has yet to reach this level of autonomy. By pushing people away, he believes he is exercising control over his life—but in reality, his choices are being made for him by his unresolved fears. He resembles a lot to the athlete in season 1. He is not moving toward something new; he is merely fleeing from what once hurt him. This means that he is imitating his grandmother as well. And now you comprehend why both liked each other immediately. Both could recognize in each other. But living like his halmoni has terrible consequences, for unhealed wounds of the mind fester beneath the surface, seeping into the body like cracks spreading through glass—until even the strongest foundation begins to break. (chapter 19) She became terribly sick, while the other had to get surged and risked his career. There is no doubt that the halmoni is hiding her pain as well. Kim Dan’s declining physical and emotional state further reflects the consequences of living in avoidance. (chapter 61) He is endangering his life. Instead of taking action to improve his well-being, he isolates himself, refusing help even when it is necessary. His reluctance to accept care—be it medical, emotional, or relational—mirrors the very trap Delgado describes: mistaking survival for true agency.

The Turning Point: Breaking Free from the Past

For Kim Dan to truly reclaim his future, he must stop defining himself by what he is running from and start choosing based on what he genuinely wants. Someone needs to remind him of these feelings: (chapter 62) If he continues making decisions based on past fears, he will remain trapped in the same cycle, unable to experience true growth or emotional fulfillment.

Delgado’s article suggests that the key to breaking free lies in self-awareness—Kim Dan must first recognize that his past does not define him before he can truly take control of his life. That’s the reason why I perceive the doctor’s suggestion in a positive light: (chapter 62) Here, he is actually facing his past which he has strongly connected to regret and remorse. Don’t forget that after this night, he is expecting Joo Jaekyung’s departure. (chapter 62) That way, he can move on. But what the “hamster” fails to recognize is that the Jinx was brought up in a different location. (chapter 62) Unlike in the past, this conversation takes place in the living room indicating transition from transactional interactions to genuine connection. Unlike the bedroom (chapter 3), which has been the setting of power imbalances, physical dominance, and silence, the living room represents a shared space—a place where dialogue and openness can exist. But why is the bedroom linked to silence? It is because of the TV, the third invisible companion! (chapter 48) Hence during that night, none of the protagonists talked sincerely to each other. And now pay attention to the living room at the hostel: (chapter 62) The TV is not switched on!! That’s how it dawned on me why Mingwa made Joo Jaekyung live alone for a while. (chapter 54) He needed to get rid of this poor habit: watching TV or cellphone. He had to realize that the TV or cellphones were never real companions and never brought him peace of mind! This was the invisible “love” triangle. Back then, the athlete deceived himself by thinking that he was truly self-reliant, while in verity he was dependent on his cellphone and the TV.

In Episode 62, (chapter 62) the shift to the living room for their conversation about the jinx is significant because it suggests that Jaekyung and Kim Dan’s relationship is evolving beyond purely physical interactions. The living room is typically associated with comfort, social interaction, and daily life, meaning that their dynamic is subtly moving towards something less confined, more integrated into reality. Jaekyung and Kim Dan are neither strangers nor true partners, and the living room reflects this in-between state of their relationship.

For Jaekyung, this space signifies a growing familiarity and trust, as he now acknowledges Kim Dan’s presence in his routine beyond sex. For Kim Dan, however, it is still a space of unease—his perception of their relationship remains tied to his initial trauma, making it difficult for him to see the fighter’s shift in behavior.

Secondly, I would like Jinx-philes to compare Joo Jaekyung’s behavior on the treatment table between episode 62 and the previous scenes where patients received Kim Dan’s treatment:

ChapTER 1Chapter 27Chapter 34Chapter 37Chapter 43Chapter 61

Kim Dan doesn’t talk to his patients in general, unless he feels that it is necessary. In addition, all his comments were work-related. His silence is oozing indifference and neglect. This observation exposes his lack of professionalism. Thus no patient is chatting with him and thanking him for his good treatment. On the other hand, thanks to Joo Jaekyung, the “hamster” is also learning not to get too attached to his “patients” as well. A natural distance is still required. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why Kim Dan doesn’t feel his job as physical therapist not rewarding and why he felt differently in the past. (chapter 62) Right now, he is not receiving any compliment from his patients, for he is acting like a robot. However with the gym, it was different, for he felt recognized by members from Team Black. They would give him some positive feedback. (chapter 37) And all this started because Kim Dan had taken the initiative. (chapter 7) But now, it is no longer fulfilling for him, because his relationship with them didn’t go beyond their work.

So by relocating the champion’s new confession to the living room (chapter 62), Mingwa is announcing a change in their relationship. The living room acts as a threshold—a place between past and future, where the lines between professional and personal, dominance and dependence, jinx and reality begin to blur. (chapter 03) At the same time, I am also sensing that the treatment table could become the place where Kim Dan starts initiating conversations with his patients so that he can become an active listener and advisor.

To conclude, this confession marks a turning point not only for the champion, but also for the doctor. Both affect each other. Though Kim Dan didn’t grasp that Joo Jaekyung was emphasizing his role in his overall routine, I am quite certain that unconsciously, the “hamster” learned a lesson: the importance of listening and conversing with his patient. Let’s not forget that too focused on his own guilt due to his past trauma, he came to hurt one of his patients. (chapter 59) Striking is that here the doctor didn’t apologize to the elderly man, but only to the family. (chapter 59)

While Joo Jaekyung now sees Kim Dan’s care as part of what sustains him, even if he does not consciously acknowledge it as emotional attachment, the champion is not realizing that life is about to teach him a lesson. Past can not be a source of strength, but of torment, pushing him to throw over the board his belief about the past and jinx. (chapter 62) While he focused too much on his “loss”, he overlooked the importance of the incident with the switched spray on the doctor’s soul. Only through his conversation, he recalled his initial reaction (chapter 62) – which is quite understandable in my eyes. The ones who failed the couple were the two other hyungs from my perspective. The past affected the doctor so much that he views himself and his feelings as “trash” now, yet it is clear that neither Park Namwook nor the coach are suffering from guilt or remorse. The star’s follow-up statement, (chapter 62) further reinforces that Kim Dan has become an integral part of his preparation. Although Jaekyung does not yet frame this as emotional reliance, his words betray an unconscious attachment—one that Kim Dan himself does not recognize. Moreover, by including him in his jinx, the champion is only one step closer to include him in his “success”. Should the doctor be the target of malicious comments, the star will consider it as a personal assault or as his responsibility.

The Ghosts That Surface in Absence

A striking aspect of Jaekyung’s evolution is the way his subconscious reacted to Kim Dan’s absence. (chapter 54) The moment Kim Dan left, nightmares came to the surface The ghosts of his past—his insomnia, his unresolved emotions, his hidden fears—made its entrance revealing that the champion had a false perception of his own past. It was, as if he had erased his time before becoming the champion. This suggests that Kim Dan’s presence was acting as a stabilizing force, even if Jaekyung was unaware of it. He had become his “home”, which Joo Jaekyung forgot due to his intoxication. (chapter 43) Someone needs to remind the athlete of his own “statement”. Simultaneously, since the doctor never got curious about the fighter’s past and family, his presence could only be seen as a bandage covering a rotten body. In order to heal completely, he needs to expose his traumatic past and vulnerabilities.

This aligns with his distorted memory (chapter 61)—he tried to convince himself that everything would return to normal once he regained his title. However, reality proves otherwise:

  • The insomnia that he attributed to his championship loss existed in the past. Thus if the sportsman doesn’t change his life style, his sleeping problems should still be present after the recovery of his title.
  • The emptiness in his life remains, unaffected by his standing in the MMA world.
  • His frustration and irritability increased, indicating that his struggles were never truly about the title (chapter 56), but about something deeper. Here he felt the need to see his beloved “companion” again.
  • His instinctive blaming of Kim Dan at first is a defense mechanism—an attempt to deny that his life had already changed far more than he was willing to admit.

To conclude, as long as the champion doesn’t expose his past relationship with Baek Junmin and his childhood to Kim Dan, the athlete can not find inner peace and become his true self.

A New Kind of Jinx: The Unconscious Shift in Priorities

At the beginning of Jinx, Jaekyung’s only goal was to maintain his championship title. His ‘jinx’ was a superstition, a tool to reinforce his absolute focus on his career. However, by Episode 62, the nature of this jinx has evolved. (chapter 62)

  • It is no longer just about winning—it now includes a person.
  • By extending the jinx to include Kim Dan’s role in his routine, Jaekyung unconsciously acknowledges that his well-being is tied to someone outside himself. He was dropping his past conviction: self-reliance. This explicates why during the same episode, he was seen helping others in the village.
  • This suggests a new, hidden priority—a source of stability that extends beyond his career.

Whether Joo Jaekung realizes it or not, Kim Dan is now part of his happiness, even if the fighter has yet to define it that way. And if you contrast this to his previous definition of well-being, you will notice that it was defined by the absence of physical and mental pain. (chapter 61) We could summarize his statement with “peace of mind” which is a synonym for “happiness”. This confirms my previous interpretation that in the past, his abuse towards his own body was his way to express his emotional and mental suffering. (chapter 27) At the same time, this confession displays that his past was far from being perfect, the evidence of a distorted memory. After working so hard for the community, he came to receive a treatment from Kim Dan: (chapter 62) This means that he is now treasuring his own body. No wonder why he smiled. (chapter 62) That’s why I come to the following conclusion: The athlete must have felt happy in the living room, for he felt comfortable and safe. (chapter 62) But why did he show his back? One might say that he desired to hide his “satisfaction” and his “reliance” on his fated partner. Or he didn’t feel the need to watch the doctor’s facial reaction, when he would confide his new intentions and the transformation of his jinx. He didn’t expect the physical therapist to mock him for his absurd belief contrary to episode 2: (chapter 2) He trusted the doctor. Yet, in my opinion, there exists a bigger reason behind this change. It is related to his manager: The doctor is treating the star (chapter 62) where Park Namwook used to punish him physically. He is receiving his “sweet” and “reward”. Thus I interpret the sportsman’s admission in the living room as the moment where the manager is losing his influence over the champion. On the other hand, it is clear that the athlete has not realized it yet. Through the massage, the doctor is recognizing that the champion worked hard in his life.

The Convergence: A Future Defined by Choice, Not Circumstance

The irony in their opposing perceptions of time is that they both remain equally bound by their pasts—Jaekyung by his refusal to question it, and Kim Dan by his refusal to acknowledge its lingering control. However, the unfolding of their relationship is gradually pushing both toward transformation. Jaekyung, for the first time, is being forced to fight for something that is not guaranteed by his status, money or power, and Kim Dan is being forced to recognize that fear-based decisions are not true freedom.

Park Namwook exhibits a mindset similar to Jaekyung, where the past dictates his present and future actions. Unlike Jaekyung, however, he is entirely reliant on the champion’s success, living vicariously through him. He positions himself as a figure of authority, even claiming to be the gym owner (chapter 22) when he is not, using his seniority and past influence to assert dominance. His attitude is related to his past decision: from his perspective, he saved the athlete from turning into a criminal. (chapter 26) His dependence on Jaekyung’s achievements makes him resistant to any shift in the fighter’s trajectory (chapter 40), as it threatens his own stability. Rather than acknowledging change, he reacts negatively to it and shifts blame onto Jaekyung, avoiding responsibility for his own shortcomings.

Park Namwook’s reaction to Kim Dan’s presence highlights his discomfort with anything that disrupts his established control. He loves delegating tasks to others. He initially praised Kim Dan’s skills (chapter 43), but when confronted with a serious incident, he failed to take responsibility or make a decisive choice (chapter 50), allowing others to step in instead. Later, rather than addressing his inaction, (chapter 52) he deflected blame onto Jaekyung, holding him accountable for his own passivity and incompetence. Instead of facing the consequences of past mistakes, the coach and manager prefers to erase them entirely, bringing in a new physical therapist (chapter 53), as if the past never happened. By doing so, he reinforces Jaekyung’s belief in his so-called ‘jinx,’ manipulating the fighter’s perception of events and contributing to a distorted memory of reality. Meanwhile, the manager must face the reality that change is inevitable and that Jaekyung’s evolution does not mean his own irrelevance. However, his position must change.

Thus I am still expecting that the doctor will fall very sick. All of these men can not act, as if the past was like the future. They are not immortal. Kim Dan’s worsening condition would force the couple to reconsider their perceptions of time—Jaekyung in terms of regret, and Kim Dan in terms of embracing a future not defined by resignation and fear. I would even add that so far, the doctor has never confessed to the champion that he feels his life jinxed as well. (chapter 59)

The Fickle Nature of Jinx and the Power to Reclaim the Future

And now, you are wondering why I chose to focus on chapter 62 again, where I examined chapter 63 only one time. My reasoning is the following. In season 1, after his first night with Kim Dan, Joo Jaekyung made a terrific experience. (chapter 5) He felt so empowered that he won very quickly. (chapter 5) But this good vibe was attributed to the sex with Kim Dan and unfortunately linked to his match. The reality was that he had slept better and longer. So by recreating the past, Kim Dan places the athlete in front of a choice. What matters in his life? His title or his peace of mind? He is correcting the champion’s distorted memory. Kim Dan is the reason why he can rest properly and not the title. Don’t forget that he was suggesting to go separate ways during the massage. But if he sleeps better before gaining his title, he won’t feel the urge to return quickly to the ring. In the living room, he was still acting as the celebrity, but in the bed chamber he is now gradually pushed to leave his title out of the bedroom. Now, in the bedroom he becomes a man and can almost make a mistake as a lover. (chapter 63)

This analysis Fickle Jinx, Faded Past, encapsulates not only the essence of this transformation, but also outlines the existence of a crossroad. A jinx is something unpredictable, unstable—like Jaekyung’s belief in controlling his own path without interference. But just as a jinx can turn against its owner, his sense of certainty is now in flux. At the same time, relying on a certain person signifies taking a leap of faith. He is taking a new road. Meanwhile, Kim Dan’s faded past represents his attempt to erase what has shaped him, but fading does not mean disappearing—it lingers, influencing every step he takes. He can not erase the death of the poor puppy: (chapter 59) However, he needs to realize that his physical and mental recovery can only happen, if he truly wishes it. From my perspective, the doctor has to sense that he is not on his own, he has someone by his side who supports him emotionally and mentally.

Ultimately, both must reach a point where their decisions are no longer dictated by their pasts but by conscious choice. They need to recognize that freedom does not come from escaping the past or justifying it, but from choosing to move beyond it. However, this can only happen, when both meditate and become true to themselves. At the same time, both must become more curious about their partner and past life. Only then, they will be able to listen to each other and understand each other.

PS: I am still waiting for a confession outside, close to nature: in the woods and in front of the ocean.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: Bruised 🩸 by Choices, Bound By Sacrifice 😭

Exploring Kim Dan’s Psyche

In the complex narrative of Jinx, Kim Dan’s psyche is an intricate web woven from his upbringing, life experiences, and conditioned beliefs. Episode 61 serves as a focal point for understanding his internal struggles, particularly through the symbolic appearance of a bruise on his arm. (Chapter 61) However, this moment is not isolated—it reflects patterns in his personality that have appeared throughout the series. (Chapter 11) (chapter 18) This essay delves into the significance of Kim Dan’s physical and emotional bruises, examining how they symbolize his suffering, internal conflict and transformation. I will examine Kim Dan’s conflicted emotions surrounding gratitude and debt, contrasting his interactions with Joo Jaekyung and his grandmother, Shin Okja. Additionally, I will explore how Kim Dan’s conditioned identity as a caregiver drives his choices, even in his current living situation with the landlord, where he unconsciously replicates past dynamics. Ultimately, I will elaborate how Kim Dan’s newfound awareness could reshape his identity and relationships moving forward.

By comparing Episode 61 to earlier scenes, we can uncover recurring themes of sacrifice and rejection of help, shedding light on how Kim Dan’s mindset continues to perpetuate his suffering. This essay aims to unravel his internal contradictions, demonstrating how his struggles with gratitude, self-perception, and consent are deeply rooted in his past and manifest in his present relationships.

Bruised Flesh, Silent Cries

The bruise on Kim Dan’s arm in episode 61 (chapter 61) serves as a profound symbol of his neglect, overexertion, and silent suffering. More than just a physical injury, it reflects his exhaustion, malnutrition, and inability to recognize his own limits. Despite being a visible mark of his struggles, it goes unnoticed, until the champion, Joo Jaekyung, becomes the first to see it. (Chapter 61) His unexpected reaction catches Kim Dan off guard, further emphasizing how disconnected the doctor has become from his own well-being. However, contrary to the past (chapter 11), Kim Dan is truly responsible for the contusion. He caused the injury by removing the needle from the drip. (chapter 60) By taking this action, he absolved Joo Jaekyung of any responsibility for the injury, but this is merely a superficial conclusion. (Chapter 61) On the hand the circumstances surrounding the bruise, where Kim Dan removed the needle on his own, provide insight into his psyche. The deeper cause of the bruise lies in Kim Dan’s declining health, which is intrinsically connected to his malnutrition and the neglect he faces from those around him. It is important to recall that Joo Jaekyung was explicitly informed that Kim Dan needed rest (chapter 60). Yet, with his insistence, (chapter 61), he forced the physical therapist to keep working, adding even more strain than before. Though the physical therapist attempted to voice his disapproval, (chapter 61), he ultimately had no choice but to comply, as his order came from the hospice director. (Chapter 61) And why did the director override Kim Dan’s need for rest? Money and free PR. Joo Jaekyung’s influence secured the director’s approval, disregarding the doctor’s well-being in favor of business interests. This conversation at the director’s office makes one thing clear: words hold no power against profit. An d that realization led me to another connection—every one of Kim Dan’s bruises is linked to exploitation, whether by authority, obligation, or financial influence.

Chapter 11Chapter 18Chapter 43

To summarize, all his bruises were linked to money. In episode 11 and 18, it was related to the debts and the loan shark Heo Manwook. Then in episode 43 it was because of the expensive present Kim Dan wanted to offer to his boss and idol. However, notice that just before making the decision to offer a birthday gift, Kim Dan had been encouraged by his grandmother to show his generosity and gratitude towards the athlete. (Chapter 41) It is clear that she was inciting him to work harder than before. This displays that Kim Dan was not allowed to rest. During this encounter, she didn’t ask him about his well-being either. And what is the link between these 3 episodes? The grandmother and her poverty. The latter was responsible for the loan.

And because of money, Kim Dan never went on his own to the hospital in order to get treated. That’s how it dawned on me how the halmoni’s neglect could be exposed. No hospital or doctor has a file about Kim Dan as patient. When Shin Okja was transferred to the hospice, the hospice director and doctor received her patient file, hence he could make the following prognostics: she didn’t have much time to live. (chapter 56) Kim Dan has only visited the hospital once, and this was solely due to Joo Jaekyung’s intervention. The latter needed medical attention himself (chapter 18) and took Kim Dan along, ensuring he was seen as an emergency patient. However, this visit was brief and lacked any comprehensive medical examination—no blood samples were taken, and his underlying health concerns remained undiagnosed. This omission further underscores the neglect Kim Dan has suffered, as even in a medical setting, his long-term health issues were overlooked.

In other words, the moment the main lead’s health condition worsens and he is brought to the hospice, it is likely that the medical staff will seek details regarding his medical history. Given that he has never received proper care, they may turn to his grandmother, Shin Okja, for information about his past treatments and health status. And what did the old woman confess to the gentle and kind celebrity? (chapter 21) He had never been healthy and strong. Moreover, when he joined them, at no moment the senior asked if he had gone to the doctor, though he had been sick before. (chapter 21) But back then, the champion didn’t pay too much attention to it. In my opinion, her response will likely reflect her established pattern of emotional detachment and deflection of responsibility. Rather than admitting her lack of concern for his well-being, she may shift blame onto the staff or Kim Dan himself (chapter 57). In the last case, she will downplay the severity of his condition, insisting that he has always been stubborn and independent. She could even mention her conversation, when she tried to convince Kim Dan to return to Seoul, but the latter refused to listen to her.

Shin Okja might express surprise or even mild indignation at the idea that Kim Dan has been suffering in silence. She could feign ignorance, claiming that he never shared his struggles with her or that she assumed he was capable of handling his own affairs. Her response may also reveal an attempt to protect her own image, deflecting any potential criticism of her negligence. At the same time, she might subtly imply that Kim Dan’s health issues are the result of his own choices—his insistence on working tirelessly, his rejection of her past attempts to offer him food (chapter 5), or his general reluctance to ask for help. He rejected the athlete’s help and concern. (chapter 60) In addition, Jinx-philes should recall how the nurse 1 reacted to doc Dan’s dizziness and workaholism (chapter 57). She blamed the main lead, because she imagined that Shin Okja would worry about him. However, it becomes clear that the halmoni is not worried about her grandson at all. She is acting like a fan in front of the athlete. (chapter 61) One might argue that based on this scene, the grandmother didn’t see him with the bruise on his arm. (chapter 61) He only remained at the door. However, observe that there was a cut between this image (chapter 61) and the conversation between the main couple in front of the hospice. (chapter 61) So he could have made his presence known to his relative before asking Joo Jaekyung to follow him because of his treatment. To conclude, I believe that she had the time and occasion to see her grandchild and his bruise.

This confrontation with the hospice staff may serve as a pivotal moment, not only in exposing the extent of Kim Dan’s suffering but also in highlighting the grandmother’s true nature. If the medical professionals press further, requesting past medical records or details of where he had been treated, it will become evident that there is little to no documented history. She had never been worried about his health, since he was young. This realization could solidify the perception of Kim Dan as someone who has been neglected for years, forcing those around him—especially Joo Jaekyung—to reevaluate their understanding of his struggles.

And now, you know why Cheolmin is so important. (chapter 13) He is the only doctor who has ever examined the protagonist so closely and even paid attention to his fingernails! (chapter 13) At the same time, the chingu from the club was the first one pointing out that his wounds were never treated!! Furthermore, I realized that the doctor’s lies from episode 11 (chapter 11) could appear in a different light: he was not beaten by Heo Manwook, but he truly tripped on the stairs due to his weak constitution, a new version of this scene: (chapter 59) He would space out and even fall asleep at any moment.

Secondly, by contrasting these bruises, I noticed a pattern. First, it was the doctor’s left eye, then the right eye. The bruises on the eyes symbolized the doctor’s blindness. The latter had been avoiding reality. At the same time, the purple eyes exposed people’s sightlessness and indifference. Later the physical therapist injures his hands and knee, but no one intervened again. (chapter 43) They imagined that rest was the best solution, something the champion had heard from Cheolmin before. That’s why he listened to his manager’s suggestion. He let him sleep instead of urging him to eat something. He had heard that rest was crucial forgetting that Kim Dan was suffering from malnutrition. (chapter 13) The latter was the cause for the severe exhaustion. However, like mentioned above, the doctor is not blameless either, because he never questioned why his wounds on the hand were bleeding again. (chapter 43) He thought, it was related to the massage, yet the reality was that this incident showed that he had coagulation issues. To conclude, all the bruises could have always been noticed by people due to their locations (eyes, hands, arm)! (chapter 11) While the manager and Kwak Junbeom saw the injury and accepted the “excuse”, the nurses are now no longer paying attention to Kim Dan’s well-being contrary to the past. The bruise on the doctor’s arm reflects the staff’s neglect: they are not helping him. They are now more obsessed with handsome guys (chapter 61) and his relationship with Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 61) That’s how I recognized why these women’s warm welcome and curiosity about Kim Dan were rather superficial. (chapter 56) His arrival stands for novelty and a breath of fresh air at the institution. However, with this change, the female staff is forgetting their original duty: they need to pay attention to their colleagues. They are behaving like the grandmother (chapter 61): fangirling over the handsome guys visiting their little town. That’s why Mingwa drew flowers in the last two images. No wonder why no one around Kim Dan is observing the bruise and his deteriorating condition. Moreover, since the physical therapist has a relative at the hospice, the staff is envisioning that Shin Okja is doing “her work”, she is paying attention to Kim Dan’s mental and physical conditions. On the other hand, there is no doubt that the grandmother has already delegated her own responsibility onto others, Kim Dan and the hospice. It is a medical institution, therefore they should pay attention to his working conditions. In other words, since no one feels responsible for the protagonist’s health, no one is worried about Kim Dan at all. At the end of episode 61, he is even so pale and breathless (chapter 61) that I am anticipating a terrible incident leading to a rude awakening for everyone.

Furthermore, the bruise (chapter 61) also reflects Kim Dan’s personality—marked by his selflessness, deep-seated low self-esteem and sacrificing tendencies. His inability to prioritize his own well-being is a recurring theme throughout the story, and it is intrinsically linked to his perception of self-worth. Conditioned by his upbringing, he has internalized the belief that his existence is burdensome, reinforcing his tendency to endure pain in silence. The fact that he was never taken to a doctor only strengthened his negative self-perception—medical care was seen as an expense he was unworthy of, a burden his grandmother should not have to bear.

The doctor’s bruise and Shin Okja’s education

In reality, Shin Okja’s supposed sacrifices were not genuine acts of selflessness but a carefully maintained illusion. While Kim Dan grew up believing she had given up so much for him, the truth was that she consistently prioritized herself, shaping his perception of responsibility and guilt. By neglecting his health, she subtly ingrained in him the notion that he was undeserving of care, further reinforcing his compulsion to sacrifice himself for others. This duality—the physical fragility of his health and the emotional scars of a neglected childhood—underscores the profound symbolic weight of the bruise, marking not just his external injuries but also the wounds inflicted upon his psyche.

Furthermore, in Chapter 61, (chapter 61) Shin Okja offers her yogurt to Joo Jaekyung, expressing concern over his weight loss. This small act of care stands in stark contrast to her treatment of Kim Dan, who has visibly suffered from weight loss and paleness too. In season 2, she no longer asked him if he would eat or if he desired to eat the yogurts.

Her neglect does not merely stem from past interactions, such as when Kim Dan dismissed her offerings, claiming he was no longer a child. It is rooted in a deeper belief that her responsibilities toward him have ended. (chapter 47) For Shin Okja, raising him to adulthood marked the completion of her duty, and his current struggles are no longer her concern. This perspective becomes evident in her words from Chapter 57, where she tells him, he can’t stay here forever, and it’s not like he’ll stick around after she dies. (chapter 57) By declaring that Kim Dan is now responsible for his own life, she emotionally detaches herself, absolving herself of any accountability for his deteriorating condition. However, she is forgetting (chapter 56) that she is still relying on him, as he is the one paying her hospice bills. Besides, she still doesn’t know that the loan is no longer existent. It was, as if he had to clean up her mess before her death. At no moment, she asks about the loan or the doctor’s future. She is not thinking about his future at all.

Moreover, Shin Okja’s earlier acknowledgment of Kim Dan’s worsening health condition (chapter 57) —coupled with his refusal to heed her concerns (chapter 57) — reinforces her conviction that she has fulfilled her role. In her mind, his rejection of her advice places the burden of care entirely on him, allowing her to dismiss any further involvement. This emotional withdrawal directly connects to the symbolism of the bruise: (chapter 61) it signifies not only Kim Dan’s physical neglect but also the absence of meaningful support from those who should care for him. The bruise becomes a manifestation of his grandmother’s abdication of responsibility, leaving him to bear the weight of his sacrifices alone, even as his health visibly deteriorates.

The bruise also holds significance in the context of the debts. (chapter 18) In episode 18, when Joo Jaekyung confronts Kim Dan about the loan, the doctor has a bruise on his left eye, symbolizing his entrapment and helplessness. This earlier injury highlights how Kim Dan has been conditioned to view himself as responsible for burdens that are not his own, perpetuating a cycle of sacrifice and self-neglect. And a new bruise appeared just after the athlete reminded the physical therapist of his past promise: (chapter 61) His grandmother’s disregard for his well-being amplifies the injustice of this situation; she allowed him to shoulder the debt despite knowing it was never truly his to bear. The bruise becomes a recurring motif, a visual representation of how others have imposed their responsibilities on Kim Dan, leaving him physically and emotionally scarred.

Shin Okja’s role in Kim Dan’s life is pivotal in understanding his psyche. Her methods of control were often passive-aggressive, characterized by guilt-tripping and emotional manipulation. In flashbacks, we see her imposing adult responsibilities on Kim Dan at a young age, reinforcing the idea that he must grow up quickly to alleviate her burdens. This dynamic is exemplified in Chapter 47, where she remarks, “You still have a lot of growing up to do, don’t you?” (chapter 47) In Chapter 57, Shin Okja’s detachment becomes more evident as she advises Kim Dan to leave the hospice. (chapter 57) These words strip Kim Dan of any sense of belonging or familial connection, further isolating him. Her suggestion that he move on reflects her mental and emotional withdrawal from him, leaving him adrift. This detachment, however, creates an opportunity for Joo Jaekyung to step into her place. As Shin Okja relinquishes her hold over Kim Dan, Joo Jaekyung’s role in his life becomes increasingly significant. The question remains whether Joo Jaekyung will rise to the occasion, offering Kim Dan the emotional support and respect he has long been denied.

The Symbolism of the Setting

The hospice, Light of Hope, serves as a symbolic backdrop for Kim Dan’s journey. It represents both a place of healing and a stark reminder of his sacrifices (chapter 60). The juxtaposition of the vibrant environment with Kim Dan’s deteriorating health underscores the neglect he faces. The hospice is meant to be a sanctuary, yet it becomes a space where Kim Dan is further burdened by the champion and his grandmother’s expectations (chapter 61) and the weight of his past.

The setting also reflects the champion’s role in Kim Dan’s life. Joo Jaekyung’s presence at the hospice symbolizes a potential turning point (chapter 61), where Kim Dan might finally confront his suppressed emotions and begin to heal. However, the pivotal detail lies in where Joo Jaekyung first notices the bruise on Kim Dan’s arm—not within the hospice but outside, in front of the building. This distinction is significant, as it suggests that Kim Dan’s true healing will not occur within the confines of the hospice itself, but in the broader expanse of nature, away from the constructed sanctuary. It hints at a deeper connection to the natural world as a source of renewal and recovery, a theme subtly woven into Kim Dan’s earlier reflections.

The imagery ties back to Kim Dan’s own words about Joo Jaekyung: (chapter 55) This line “I finally feel like I can breathe again”, written by Kim Dan, reveals a subconscious acknowledgment that his relationship with the champion represents a breath of fresh air, a chance to escape the suffocating expectations and burdens he has carried for so long. The bruise, a physical manifestation of his struggle, signals the breaking point of his role as a selfless caregiver. It challenges the illusion of invulnerability that Kim Dan has maintained and forces those around him to confront his vulnerability.

Furthermore, this notion of healing outside the hospice aligns with the setting of Kim Dan’s unconscious cry for help—the beach. His suicidal disposition in that scene reflects a desperate need for release, a yearning for an escape that the structured environment of the hospice cannot provide. (chapter 60) The beach, with its open and untamed expanse, symbolizes freedom and a return to the self. It foreshadows that Kim Dan’s true journey toward healing will require him to step outside the roles and confines imposed upon him, finding solace not in what is expected but in what feels authentic and liberating.

The Burden of Debts and Sacrifice

Kim Dan’s relationship with the debts encapsulates his conditioned belief that he must bear burdens alone. (chapter 18) His grandmother, Shin Okja, played a significant role in this mindset by fostering the illusion that hard work and sacrifice would erase the debts. However, as revealed in episode 18, this was a lie. Shin Okja made the choice to take on the loan and not to seek help (chapter 5), yet she burdened Kim Dan with it, using his sense of duty and gratitude against him. Her statement in episode 57 (chapter 57) —“This place isn’t your hometown, and you don’t have any ties here”—further reinforces the emotional distance she has always maintained, treating him more as an obligation than family. However, she is forgetting that as a senior, she still has obligations towards her grandson.

Joo Jaekyung’s decision to pay off the loan (chapter 18) in Episode 18 introduces the theme of gratitude (chapter 18) —or, more accurately, the lack thereof. The champion’s actions were motivated by a desire to help (chapter 18), hence the star was waiting for a smile from Kim Dan. Yet the latter perceived it as meddling. His immediate response (chapter 18) —shock, disbelief, and rejection—revealed his inability to accept help. This reaction stems from his upbringing, where he was conditioned to equate self-worth with self-reliance. Even after moving into Joo Jaekyung’s penthouse, Kim Dan insisted on repaying the loan (chapter 53), leaving a note when he moved out that promises to settle the debt. However, by Episode 61, Kim Dan is no longer mentioning the debt, signaling a shift in his priorities and a possible breaking point in his adherence to his grandmother’s expectations. (chapter 61)

Kim Dan’s lack of gratitude toward Joo Jaekyung also stems from a deeper existential crisis. When the champion repaid the loan, he unknowingly deprived Kim Dan of what had become his sole purpose in life: assisting his grandmother. (chapter 47) The physical therapist’s entire existence had revolved around fulfilling her needs, from managing the debt to taking care of her health. With her now approaching death and actively pushing him away, Kim Dan is left grappling with a profound sense of meaninglessness. (chapter 60) He had never been given the opportunity to develop dreams or ambitions of his own, as his life was entirely defined by his grandmother’s circumstances. This lack of agency further explains his rejection of Joo Jaekyung’s generosity in Episode 18 and his later promise to reimburse the loan. Clinging to this promise was Kim Dan’s way of creating purpose and meaning in a life that had otherwise been dictated by others. It highlights how deeply entrenched his self-sacrificing tendencies are, as even his attempts to assert independence are rooted in his conditioned need to serve others. That’s why I come to the following prediction. Kim Dan needs to get confronted with illness and death (he could lose his life) so that his will for life comes to the surface. Right now, he imagines that since he is young, he will outlive his relative, but the death of the puppy was a warning to him that youth is no guarantee for a long life. (chapter 59) Death can take away anyone and at any moment. In my eyes, if Joo Jaekyung uses his own body to save the doctor again (like for example blood transfusion and CPR), this time Kim Dan would feel truly grateful towards the champion. So far, the doctor has not recognized the star as his savior yet. By removing the needle, he denied the protagonist’s intervention on the beach: (chapter 60) Hence his arm got bruised. The contusion was a reminder that something had happened during that night, but Kim Dan chose to ignore the incident. He never questioned why he was on the beach, he acted, as if Joo JAekyung had lied. (chapter 60)

The Hypocrisy of Gratitude

Kim Dan’s inability to express gratitude towards Joo Jaekyung is rooted in the hypocrisy of his situation. (chapter 18) Deep down, Kim Dan knows that the debt was never truly his responsibility, making it difficult for him to view the champion’s actions as a genuine act of kindness. This inner conflict is compounded by his suicidal disposition, which renders the concept of repaying the debt meaningless.

Additionally, Kim Dan’s relationship with gratitude is further complicated by his grandmother’s influence. Shin Okja used pity (chapter 53) and guilt to manipulate Kim Dan into fulfilling her wishes, framing his sacrifices as acts of love and duty. Her neglect and disregard for his well-being, even as he deteriorates physically and emotionally, highlight her selfishness. Through his past memories, readers can get a glimpse of his misery. (chapter 59) He worked so hard, was even beaten, but he could never voice his torment. (chapter 59) Why? It is because the grandmother was no longer by his side and she never talked to him either. The absence of communication indicates her lack of interest in Kim Dan. And it becomes comprehensible why during that night, he felt the need to go to the ocean and drown himself. It is because he was gradually realizing his loneliness. With his relative’s death, he would only keep living a terrible life determined by work and nothing else.

And because Kim Dan made the promise to the champion to reimburse him, it is clear why the fighter reminded him of the “unpaid debt” after their reunion. (chapter 60) (chapter 60) Since Kim Dan had not accepted the fighter’s generosity and even reaffirmed the need to pay back the “loan”, Joo Jaekyung imagined that his fated partner was very principled about money. The latter was used to drive an edge between them. However, the MMA fighter made a terrible mistake at the hospice. With his remark (chapter 60), he created the impression that he was impatient, expecting to be paid back, and as such his past generosity was in truth fake. He never desired to assist the doctor with this problem. And note that from that night on, the physical therapist is no longer bringing up the topic of the unpaid debts. (chapter 61) In my opinion, the physical therapist has now internalized that he is not responsible for the unpaid debts. It is only a matter of time, until Kim Dan confronts the fighter with his biased prejudices (chapter 11) and even uses his own words against him: (chapter 22) The loan was the result of his grandmother’s decision. He never helped him, rather his grandmother.

The dynamic between Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung also reveals the former’s hypocrisy. Despite feeling trapped and powerless, Kim Dan had choices. He could reveal the truth to the athlete, when he begged for his help: (chapter 11) However, he never explained his circumstances to the generous athlete. By keeping him in the dark, he reinforced his negative disposition about the doctor. And chapter 61 exposes this reality. His suffering was the result of his own decision. (chapter 61) Do you recognize the room? That was the doctor’s (chapter 19) (chapter 53) His decision to allow Joo Jaekyung into his bedroom in episode 61 demonstrates that he consented to the relationship, even if begrudgingly. (chapter 61) However, his reaction afterward (regret) suggests that he struggles to take ownership of his choices. The fact that he recalled this sex scene in the restroom divulges a certain resent towards the athlete. The latter abandoned him right after their interaction. Hence I come to the following deduction. In reality, he is projecting his frustrations onto Joo Jaekyung, masking his true feelings about his grandmother, who is the root cause of his conditioned self-sacrifice. And this observation brings to my next remark. People wondered when this intercourse took place. One might think that this took place rather early in the story because of the way Joo Jaekyung acted. He didn’t remove his pants (chapter 61) and acted like in episode 6. (chapter 6) or 8 (chapter 8) where he would abandon the protagonist right after the climax and not care about his partner’s conditions and feelings: (chapter 61) I might be wrong, but for me, it took place much later in the story, around the time the athlete was about to face Alfredo. Why? First notice that they had sex in the doctor’s bedroom. This means that Kim Dan was already living in the penthouse. The words from the champion implied that he would return to his own bedroom, where the doctor’s thoughts implied that he was standing close to his bed. However, so far, they only had sex in the champion’s bedroom, when it was the evening before the match: (chapter 13) Since the doctor mentioned that a match was right around the corner (chapter 61) It leaves us four possibilities. Randy Booker, Dominic Hill, Alfredo (chapter 47) and Baek Junmin. However, for the intercourse took place in the doctor’s bedroom (he wished to be carried to his own bed) (chapter 61), I am already excluding Randy Booker. Secondly, this sex session can not have taken place before his match with Dominic Hill (chapter 36), for they had sex every day. However, in episode 53, we discover their night before the match against the Shotgun (chapter 53) So this scene can only have taken place in chapter 47, when the match with Angelo got canceled and Kim Dan had been confronted with the terrible news about his terminally ill grandmother. (chapter 47) In the previous part of this essay, my avid readers could see the strong parallels between 61 and 47. But there exists another reason why I am inclining to think that the sex scene took place later in the story. It is because during that “magical night” (44), Kim Dan learned the notion of “consent”. (chapter 44) During that blue hour, Kim Dan discovered that he could say no! And notice that in his memory, he clearly thought that he could have rejected the athlete’s advances. (chapter 61) The other reason for this theory is Park Namwook’s advice at the gym: (chapter 46) He should mistrust the members from the gym and keep his distance from people. So during that time, Joo Jaekyung did follow his hyung’s advice (chapter 47), yet I can’t imagine that this man could become abstinent like in episode 19. Hence at some point, he must have felt the urge to possess Kim Dan, a mixture of fear and dominance. He imagined that way that he could impose his will onto the doctor and control his “loyalty”. With this submission, he would force the doctor to remain by his side. But naturally, this sex as “power play” could increase the gap between the main leads.

Interesting is that in episode 53 (chapter 53) doc Dan was copying the champion’s behavior from episode 61. Right after the sex, he would leave the bed and return to his bedroom. How did Joo Jaekyung recall this night? (chapter 53) He saw his attitude as a sign of disloyalty and “abandonment”. And that’s how Kim Dan is feeling in the restroom: (chapter 61) The darkness around the eyes is a metaphor for his resent and anger. And the moment you contrast the two memories (53 and 61), you can detect the hypocrisy of the two main leads. They only recall scenes where they were hurt and felt betrayed. However, in reality, they were both victims and perpetrators, because none of them chose to open up and talk to each other. Why? It is because both chose to listen to their “guardian” and their “favor”. Like mentioned before, in a quarrel, no one is right and wrong. The purpose of an argument is to listen to the counterpart and view incidents from their perspective. Finally, the physical therapist’s recollection serves as an important evidence that he had never been powerless and helpless. He could have refused all the time because their deal was never official.He could have used the contract as a shield. But the best evidence of Kim Dan’s power is this rejection: (chapter 61) I had already pointed out the increasing resistance and resilience from Kim Dan in episode 60: (chapter 61) My prediction came true. In the past, he could have denied the existence of the deal, Joo Jaekyung was free to seek another physical therapist. He never realized that he had some leverage. Yet he still followed the athlete’s requests. He saw himself bound by obligations. However, this was just an illusion. Hence in episode 61, we see him legitimating his consent that there was an imminent fight. (chapter 61) This shows that he always used others to justify his choices. That way, he could portray himself as a dutiful and loving person, while his sacrifices would all go unnoticed.

The doctor’s fate: a reflection of Joo Jaekyung’s life

Kim Dan’s bruises are more than just marks of exhaustion and overexertion; they symbolize the way his body is used for the benefit of others. (chapter 61) He is expected to work despite his declining health, his suffering dismissed by those around him. (chapter 61) His well-being is secondary to business interests, whether it be the hospice director valuing money and PR over his need for rest or Joo Jaekyung imposing additional strain despite knowing better. Every bruise on Kim Dan’s body is a reflection of a system that prioritizes productivity over humanity.

This, however, mirrors Joo Jaekyung’s own existence. (chapter 40) He is paid to receive bruises, to push his body past its limits (chapter 50), to endure pain while the public watches and profits are made. His suffering is entertainment, a spectacle that fuels the business of MMA. Though he is a champion, he is still a commodity, expected to perform regardless of his condition. (chapter 61) He understands, better than anyone, what it means to be physically used for the sake of others, yet he remains blind to the fact that he has placed Kim Dan in the same position. While one has no file about his health condition, the other has many files, but they are not studied, because this would push the manager to question his decision and even ruin the business: (chapter 17) I doubt that Park Namwook studied them, and notice that the recently hired PT didn’t ask for the champion’s files first: (chapter 54) Thus I deduce that the champion’s files are in reality a subterfuge. They give the impression that the doctors and Park Namwook truly care for his well-being, but it is not correct. They are only interested in his body because of wealth and reputation. But let’s return our attention to episode 61 and the champion’s attitude towards Kim Dan.

The hypocrisy is undeniable. (chapter 61) Joo Jaekyung pressures Kim Dan to work through his pain, (chapter 61) despite living a life where he is forced to do the same. He became what he despised—someone who forces another to sacrifice their well-being for business. (chapter 60) The reality is, both of them exist in a world where their worth is determined by what their bodies can endure. Kim Dan’s value is measured by his ability to work, just as Jaekyung’s is determined by his ability to fight. They are both trapped in a system that demands their suffering for profit, used by those in power who see them as tools rather than individuals.

If Joo Jaekyung fails to recognize this parallel, he will only perpetuate the very cycle that has shaped his own pain. But if he does, it could be the key to not only freeing Kim Dan from this exploitation but also breaking himself out of the same cycle. The question remains: will he see the truth before it’s too late? (chapter 54) It is clear that the manager wants Joo Jaekyung to return to the ring as soon as possible to erase the last “debacle”. In my opinion, the doctor’s illness could serve Joo Jaekyung as an excuse to delay his return to the ring and even not to accept the next challenge.

A Caregiver’s Identity

Kim Dan’s choice to rent from an elderly landlord (chapter 57) is another manifestation of his conditioned role as a caregiver. By living with an older man, he creates the illusion of a familial bond, mirroring the dynamic he shared with his grandmother. This decision highlights his struggle to break free from the identity imposed on him—one defined by servitude and selflessness. He assumes that he should take care of the landlord, offering to cook and expressing guilt for not fulfilling this perceived duty. Yet, the landlord subtly challenges this narrative. By inviting Kim Dan to eat breakfast (chapter 57) and dismissing his apologies, the landlord treats him as an equal rather than a caretaker. This dynamic forces Kim Dan to confront his false perception of himself.

The landlord’s care, though understated, contrasts sharply with Kim Dan’s expectations. In Episode 57, the landlord observes Kim Dan’s declining health and attempts to address his drinking habits. (chapter 57) Despite this, Kim Dan rejects the advice, demonstrating his resistance to being cared for. This moment underscores his internal conflict—he craves independence yet clings to the role of the selfless provider. The landlord’s actions expose the fallacy of Kim Dan’s identity, revealing that his caregiving is not always necessary or effective.

Kim Dan’s Transformation: From Self-Sacrifice to Self-Awareness

Chapter 61 marks a significant shift in Kim Dan’s psyche—he begins to view himself with self-pity. That’s why he recalled the sex in the restroom. (chapter 61) He was not feeling well, yet the champion still demanded to have sex with him. (chapter 61) However, like pointed out above, he could have objected and even explained the situation. But no… he chose silence and submission in the end. This exposes the long internalized belief that Joo Jaekyung is stubborn and won’t listen or even get angry. Moreover, it is related to the grandmother’s education which privileged money, obedience, silence and taboo. However, the recollection (chapter 61) is indicating the increasing resent and anger towards the star. Joo Jaekyung is no longer seen as a celebrity and idol, but as a inconsiderate man. This transformation is subtle but meaningful, as it reflects his burgeoning awareness of his own worth and the unjust treatment he has endured. For the first time, Kim Dan acknowledges himself as pitiful (chapter 61), a clear departure from his habitual role of unquestioned self-sacrifice. This moment signals the emergence of a new identity, where Kim Dan starts “treasuring” himself, even if only as someone who deserves more respect than he has been given. In his recollection, he has a wish: to have a companion who would take care of him.

Kim Dan’s realization that he was not respected by Joo Jaekyung (chapter 61) parallels the emotional and mental detachment of Shin Okja. While his grandmother had long imposed the role of a caregiver upon him, (chapter 61) her current disregard for his health and well-being forces him to confront the fragility of his own existence. His bruised arm and poor health serve as physical manifestations of this awakening—he is no longer the tireless, invincible caregiver but a vulnerable human being who could fall gravely ill (chapter 61) or even abandon others first. (chapter 53)

The Emotional Transition: Joo Jaekyung’s Role in Kim Dan’s Life

This transformation in Kim Dan reflects a deeper narrative shift in Jinx: the exploration of self-worth and emotional reciprocity. It signals that relationships should not be defined by obligation and sacrifice alone but also by mutual respect and care. As Kim Dan begins to recognize his own worth, the dynamics of his relationships with both Shin Okja and Joo Jaekyung are poised to change dramatically. (chapter 61) This chapter sets the stage for a redefinition of Kim Dan’s identity (chapter 61), no longer bound by the roles others have imposed on him but shaped by his own choices and growing self-respect.

Shin Okja’s emotional detachment opens a door for Joo Jaekyung to step into her place, but this transition is contingent on Joo Jaekyung admitting his feelings for Kim Dan. (chapter 61) The physical reminder of Kim Dan’s poor health is not only a wake-up call for Joo Jaekyung but also for Kim Dan himself. It emphasizes that caregiving cannot define his identity entirely, and he too needs care and consideration.

This dynamic creates a powerful opportunity for growth in their relationship. If Joo Jaekyung is to fill the void left by Shin Okja, he must evolve from a figure of dominance to one of emotional support and genuine affection. Similarly, Kim Dan must shed the remnants of his belief that his only worth lies in what he can do for others. His growing self-awareness, catalyzed by his deteriorating health, paves the way for this mutual transformation.

The Role of Health as a Narrative Reminder

Kim Dan’s health, deteriorating as it is, serves a dual purpose. For Joo Jaekyung, it is a stark reminder of the consequences of his past neglect (chapter 13) and the fragility of Kim Dan’s existence. For Kim Dan, it challenges his self-perception as an indestructible caregiver. This realization could lead him to an inevitable conclusion: his own needs and well-being are just as important as those of others.

Ironically, this reversal also suggests a possibility that Kim Dan could be the one to abandon his grandmother first—not out of malice but as a natural consequence of his newfound understanding of his humanity. He wants to live, he doesn’t want to die now. His physical limitations and emotional exhaustion could compel him to prioritize his own survival over the expectations imposed on him, marking a definitive break from his past.

To conclude, Kim Dan’s deteriorating health presents a pivotal moment in his journey, marking a potential shift from mere survival to truly embracing life. His identity, long defined by caregiving and sacrifice, could face a profound challenge if his condition worsens, forcing him into a role of dependency. Joo Jaekyung’s role in this transformation could be equally transformative. Witnessing Kim Dan’s vulnerability might inspire the champion to step into the role of a true caregiver, fostering a deeper emotional connection between them. This shift would starkly contrast Kim Dan’s relationship with his grandmother, where care was one-sided and manipulative. Instead, it could establish a foundation of mutual respect and shared responsibility, breaking the cycle of transactional relationships that have defined Kim Dan’s past.

Ultimately, Kim Dan’s illness could become a catalyst for healing—not just physically but emotionally—for both him and Joo Jaekyung. It sets the stage for a relationship rooted in genuine care and respect, underscoring the broader theme of personal growth and the rediscovery of self-worth.

Conclusion

“Bruised by Choices, Bound by Sacrifice” encapsulates the complexities of Kim Dan’s character and his relationships. The recurring motif of the bruise serves as a powerful symbol of his struggles, reflecting both his physical pain and the emotional scars left by his upbringing. The debts, gratitude, and the hospice setting further illustrate how Kim Dan’s sacrifices have shaped his identity, forcing him to navigate a path filled with contradictions and unspoken resentments.

This examination also underscores the profound link between silence and sacrifice in Kim Dan’s journey. His suffering largely went unnoticed not just due to external neglect but because of his own choice to remain silent. Kim Dan never expressed his thoughts or emotions, choosing instead to endure in silence to avoid burdening his grandmother. Ironically, this silence was unnecessary, as Shin Okja herself was blinded by his youth, assuming that his vitality ensured he would outlive her. This assumption prevented her from recognizing his vulnerabilities, highlighting yet another layer of neglect in their relationship.

Through this lens, Kim Dan’s journey becomes a poignant exploration of the cost of selflessness and the courage it takes to reclaim one’s agency. His silence, once a symbol of sacrifice, now stands as a barrier he must overcome to truly heal and redefine his life on his own terms. By breaking free from the constraints of unspoken expectations and misplaced gratitude, Kim Dan’s transformation holds the promise of a future where his choices are guided by self-respect and a newfound understanding of his worth.

In earlier chapters, such as Chapter 57, Kim Dan’s landlord invited him to share breakfast, showing a degree of care and concern. However, Kim Dan deflected this gesture, maintaining his self-imposed role as a caregiver. In Chapter 58, despite sitting at a table with Heesung, Potato, and the landlord, Kim Dan’s disengagement from the meal—leaving most of the chicken untouched and avoiding the rice wine—highlighted his hidden struggles with both malnutrition and alcoholism. His deliberate avoidance of the rice wine reflects an effort to conceal his drinking habits, adding another layer to his isolation.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx / Doctor Frost : Harmony’s clash⚡: Prince S 👸 and Emperor 🤴- part 2

1. The prince S and his negative reflection

In the first part, I examined Kim Dan’s mentality more closely. There, I portrayed the physical therapist as someone suffering from Dependent Personality Disorder. Moreover, I underlined that so far, Kim Dan had been raised under the influence of toxic positivity. Therefore he was constantly denying his own pain and struggles. Because of these two characteristics, I came to the following interpretation: the physical therapist was raised like a princess, and by meeting Joo Jaekyung, he got confronted with reality. Hence the argument with his fated partner incited him to change his mind-set. First, he was pushed to acknowledge the existence of his broken heart. Then from that moment on, he would no longer rely on the champion. (chapter 46) On the other hand, chapter 47 exposes that the doctor didn’t lose his interest and attention towards his boss. (chapter 47) This exposes that Kim Dan didn’t choose resent or indifference towards Joo Jaekyung despite the inflicted pain. On the other hand, why did I write that the celebrity is Kim Dan’s reflection? Why is the athlete the doctor’s mirror of truth? It is because Joo Jaekyung embodies his negative reflection: independency and toxic negativity. But what is the latter exactly?

Interesting is that I connected the physical therapist to Dependent Personality Disorder thanks to the case of “Tears of Princess Pyeonggang” from the Manhwa Doctor Frost. When the patient Sihyun met Doctor Frost, the latter explained to her why her last relationship was doomed to failure. How so? (chapter 31) It is because when the psychologist met the patient with her boyfriend for the first time, he paid attention to his micro-expressions, and more particularly to his mouth. He saw his smirk. Here, I feel the need to give an explanation how these micro-expressions were discovered. (chapter 30) As my avid readers can detect, the expression from the boyfriend’s mouth displeased the white-haired psychologist. He could recognize his emotion, though such facial expressions are very short-lived.(chapter 30) So what was the “jerk” feeling, when he was conversing with Sihyun? Cynicism. (chapter 31) And the reason why he stated that as soon as cynicism or scorn was present in a relationship, the couple would end up breaking up is because of John Gottham’s observations and conclusions. (chapter 31) And now, you are wondering how this is related to Joo Jaekyung. It is because the famous sportsman is full of cynicism (chapter 45) We could sense it in different scenes, though I would say that his cynicism was slowly vanishing: (chapter 3) (chapter 40) This is the so-called toxic negativity. Therefore it was to expect that the champion would reject the doctor’s present. He could only doubt the sincerity behind his gesture. How so? Remember how the team desired to celebrate his birthday: a surprise party. They bought a cake… (chapter 43) but what happened afterwards? Yosep spoke in the name of the gym’s owner: the latter would pay for the dinner (beef restaurant) (chapter 43) So technically, they offered a cheap cake and got in exchange a super expensive dinner. One might say that this was just a joke. But cynical people are taking things very seriously. This is what the champion learned from this experience, the cake in exchange for a super expensive meal … and now imagine that the next morning, he received an „expensive“ present from Kim Dan which was similar to the gifts from fans (exchange of favors). It is normal that he doubted the genuineness from his doctor, not only because of his past experiences, but also because of the parties before. But there exists another reason why he had to refuse the gift: Cynicism… the end of relationship. Thus dating for the athlete was impossible. (chapter 45) He is not ready yet. But was it Cynicism exactly and how does it represent a hindrance for a healthy relationship?

2. The cynic dog-wolf

First, I would like to present the philosophy of Cynicism in order to outline certain positive aspects of such a mind-set. The latter, originating in ancient Greece, is often associated with the notion of living a life of simplicity, virtue, and independence. The term “Cynic” comes from the Greek words “kynikos,” meaning “dog-like,” and “kyôn,” meaning “dog.” While the origins of this name are not entirely clear, there are two popular beliefs regarding its origin:

Firstly, it is believed that the Cynics were called dogs because the first Cynic, Antisthenes, began teaching in the Cynosarges gymnasium in Athens. “Cynosarges” translates to “the place of the white dog,” hence the association with canines. Another possible origin for the term “dog” in Cynicism is attributed to Diogenes of Sinope, one of the most famous Cynic philosophers. Diogenes famously lived in a large ceramic jar (known as a “pithos”) and embraced a lifestyle of extreme simplicity and disregard for social conventions. He would reportedly wander the streets of Athens with a lantern in broad daylight, searching for an honest man.

Cynic ethics revolve around the principles of freedom, parrhesia (frank speech or fearless expression), living according to nature, and rejection of societal norms and conventions. Cynics believed that true happiness and virtue could only be attained by living in accordance with nature and rejecting the desires and comforts of society. They often practiced asceticism, eschewing material possessions and living a life of self-sufficiency.

The Cynics emphasized the importance of living in accordance with one’s true nature, rather than conforming to societal expectations or pursuing external desires. They criticized authorities and traditions, they valued self-reliance, resilience, and inner strength, believing that true freedom could only be achieved by freeing oneself from the constraints of society and material wealth. In addition to their rejection of societal norms and conventions, Cynics also challenged the traditional notion of family and social hierarchies. They believed that attachments to family and social status were sources of unnecessary suffering and constraint on individual freedom.

Cynics advocated for a radical form of individualism, promoting self-sufficiency and independence from familial ties and obligations. They viewed the traditional family structure as a hindrance to living a virtuous and authentic life, arguing that it often led to conflicts of interest, attachment to material possessions, and moral compromise. Instead of relying on familial relationships for support and identity, Cynics encouraged individuals to cultivate relationships based on mutual respect and philosophical kinship. They believed that true friendship and community could only be found among those who shared their commitment to living a life of simplicity, virtue, and freedom from societal constraints.

By rejecting the traditional notion of family, Cynics sought to liberate themselves from the expectations and obligations imposed by social norms and hierarchies. They embraced a lifestyle of radical individualism and self-sufficiency, prioritizing personal autonomy and philosophical integrity above all else.

Central to Cynic philosophy was the concept of parrhesia, or fearless expression of truth. Cynics advocated for speaking openly and honestly, even if it meant challenging social norms or offending others. They believed that by speaking truth to power and living authentically, individuals could cultivate inner freedom and achieve true happiness.

In summary, Cynicism is a philosophical school that advocates for living a simple, virtuous life in accordance with nature, free from societal constraints and material desires. It emphasizes the importance of parrhesia, self-sufficiency, and fearless expression of truth as essential elements of living a truly fulfilling and authentic life.

After reading this short presentation, Jinx-philes can sense some similarities between the athlete and this philosophical movement. First, he rejects norms and conventions. He is behaving like an animal, compared to a wolf. (chapter 7) This approach also gives us an explanation how Joo Jaekyung came to develop such an exhibitionistic sexual behavior: sex in the shower room (chapter 8), in the office, in the car, in front of a mirror, in front of Heesung in the living room… Don’t forget that Diogenes would even masturbate in public.

Additionally, he doesn’t see Team Black as “family”, but as a place to learn toughness and endurance. That’s where he could experience “freedom”. Thus his honesty is brutal. (chapter 46) (chapter 46) Consequently, he never tried to get close to his members either. In fact, he is expecting from the staff to follow his lead. Potato could only get rejected with such a request. (chapter 23) The latter had to act like a true disciple and follow the champion’s recommendation. (chapter 23) The gym is like his sacred temple. Yet, the gym is just a simulacre of “nature”, as it is in the middle of Seoul. Therefore I realized why after their argument, Joo Jaekyung avoided the penthouse and Kim Dan in the end. (chapter 47) It is because deep down, the champion sensed that his flat had become a home. He wanted to ensure that the penthouse was still a workplace or a hotel room. Thus he refused to eat the breakfasts prepared from his PT. In his eyes, these meals must have appeared as a violation of his self-imposed discipline. It was more than self-sufficiency. Under this new light, Jinx-philes can grasp why he rejects presents and prefers donating money. (chapter 41) He is looking for freedom and self-sufficiency, detached from any material need. This explains why the golden keychain from Kim Dan could only offend him. (chapter 45) It symbolized everything he hates: a reminder of wealth, superficiality, attachment, secrecy and silence. It also exposed the huge difference in their mind-set. Kim Dan is not his disciple! He imagined that he had found a kindred spirit, especially after that night: (chapter 39) The reason is simple. The champion had finally found someone who accepted his roughness in bed and could match his stamina.

As you can imagine, Joo Jaekyung is naturally a fake Cynic, for he is not giving up on his comfort. (chapter 10) He is not resigning on designer clothes. (chapter 42) His dress room is the evidence of his hypocrisy. He might have encouraged Kim Dan to have sex in “public places”, yet he is still hiding his sexual orientation. Furthermore, his jinx is the evidence of his dishonesty. (chapter 2) He needs someone to have sex. This stands in opposition to Diogenes’ masturbation. Besides, he had to pay the goblin and Kim Dan in order to have a sex partner. Hence he needs to be confronted with truth as well. Manhwaworms can grasp the rage from the athlete, when he heard the doctor’s justification: (chapter 45) He might advocate autonomy and self-sufficiency, the reality is that he likes luxury. Hence he is unable to live in harmony with nature. This shows that the fighter is in denial and is living in an illusion. Thus he can not find true happiness, for his freedom is not real. He is attached to the gym which is also strongly connected to his career as the Emperor. (chapter 46) With his brutal attitude, he is doing himself a disservice. Exactly like Kim Dan, he is even ruining his career and own reputation. Not only he lost 4 athletes (I am including Seonho), but also his loyal admirers are calling him a thug now: (chapter 47) Even Potato announcing the gradual Coming-Of-Age from his admirer. However, like Dr. Frost mentioned it, humans are social beings. No one can survive on his own. This explicates why Cynics had disciples in the end. And now, you comprehend the role of Kim Dan in Joo Jaekyung’s life. It is to remind him of his true nature. He is a human and not a dog-wolf. Thus the champion recommended his PT to live elsewhere, a sign that he was indeed a human. (chapter 10)

Yet, pure cynicism is not the way to find happiness. We have the perfect example with Diogenes:

He had the impression that it was never enough, and the pure action from the child caught him by surprise. He seems to have been obsessed with his theory.

3. The cynic emperor

However, in the first part, I mentioned Cynicism from a psychological perspective. So now, it is time to examine what Cynicism means for psychologists.

In other words, they have no trust in human beings. Hence Cynicism is undermining relationships. They judge people as selfish hypocrites. Therefore they use Cynicism as a way to keep people at a certain distance. (chapter 2) This explicates why the champion was crossing his arms while confronting the goblin. He was on the defensive. That’s how it dawned on me why the celebrity fell in love with Kim Dan at first sight, and why he enjoyed their first night together. The “hamster’s fear” was genuine. His desertion displayed respect towards the celebrity. He was recognizing his strength and power. (chapter 1) Then the micro-expressions from Kim Dan exposed his lie (chapter 3) On the one hand, the champion’s worldview about humans got reinforced, on the other hand the doctor’s deception symbolized his purity. He was a virgin, which was contradicting his “theory” too.

But wait… the title of this essay is Prince S and Emperor and not wolf or dog. Interesting is that the notion of an emperor or ruler could indeed symbolize cynicism, especially in the context of power and authority. Here’s why:

Skepticism and Distrust: Cynicism often involves skepticism and a general distrust of motives and intentions. An emperor or ruler, representing authority, may be associated with a cynical outlook on the motives of others, assuming that actions are driven by self-interest. This explicates why the champion assumed another intention behind the doctor’s present. (chapter 45) He imagined that the doctor had ulterior motives. This explicates why he felt no empathy, when Kim Dan asked for an advance. (chapter 11) He even looked like a ruler abusing his authority. (chapter 11)

Negative Interpretation of Intentions: Cynicism often leads to a negative interpretation of others’ actions. An emperor or ruler, when used symbolically, can represent someone who interprets the actions of others with suspicion, assuming that individuals are motivated primarily by personal gain.

Lack of Idealism: It tends to reject idealism and a positive view of human nature. (chapter 11) Here, the champion thought that Kim Dan had been gambling. An emperor or ruler, especially one characterized by a lack of idealism, may embody the cynical belief that individuals are primarily driven by self-interest and that altruistic motives are rare. Therefore the celebrity rejects the notion of soulmate (chapter 33) or even the idea of friendship (chapter 30) Heesung was not just taking advantage of his reputation, he was also teasing the sportsman. Joo Jaekyung has such a negative perception of humans. (chapter 33) Hence he looks down on poor people. (chapter 10): Gamblers, laziness, no sense of hygiene etc. Consequently, he is not capable to understand the worries from Kim Dan (chapter 42), Park Namwook (chapter 46) and Jeon Yosep. He feels like they are questioning his success. It was, as if they had other motives. He only relies on himself, he is not “truly” listening to others… though it is not correct. He is getting manipulated by his “counselors”. (chapter 36)

Use of Power: An emperor or ruler traditionally holds significant power, and cynicism may be associated with the idea that those in power are inherently self-serving. This aligns with the cynical perspective that individuals act in their own interest, particularly when they hold positions of authority. Thus the protagonist is selfish and abused his position during their first night together: (chapter 2)

On a personal level, cynicism can have several impacts. While it may provide a form of self-protection against exploitation or disappointment, chronic cynicism can also contribute to stress, alienation, chronic pessimism, hopelessness, depression and anxiety. It may inhibit personal relationships and lead to a reduced sense of life satisfaction or happiness. Though the champion is rich and even famous, he is far from being happy, as his negative perception of humans represents a hindrance to his inner freedom and peace of mind. He rejects society, yet he needs people to fight and spare with. And now, you comprehend the origins of his inner passivity and emptiness. (chapter 26) He is standing in front of a dilemma. Fighting is the expression of nature and self-reliance, yet his fights serve as entertainment for MMA lovers. MMA is strongly intertwined with business and money.

That’s the reason why he was condemned to loneliness, until he met the physical therapist. As time passed on, he had the impression that he had found a kindred spirit, his real new disciple. But the present which was bought in secret ruined everything. What Joo Jaekyung failed to realize is that the golden keychain (chapter 45) was showing the doctor’s golden heart. He was just judging his lover based on his past experiences and his negative worldview. And this brings me to list the cause for Cynicism:

Manhwaworms can grasp why the athlete is a control-freak, why he hates to expose his vulnerability (chapter 45) He fears to be taken advantage. There is no ambiguity that his negative mind-set is definitely influenced by his childhood and family. I would even say that he must have been exposed to emotional blackmail. I came to this hypothesis, because I detected that the champion had been using “blackmail” as MO in order to control Kim Dan. (chapter 6)

Emotional blackmail within parent-child relationships can have particularly damaging effects on the child’s emotional development and well-being. Here’s how emotional blackmail may manifest in the context of a parent raising a child:

  1. Threats of abandonment or punishment: A parent may use threats of abandonment, punishment, or withdrawal of love to manipulate their child into compliance. For example, a parent might threaten to stop loving their child or to send them away if they do not behave according to the parent’s expectations. This can instill fear and insecurity in the child, leading them to comply with the parent’s demands out of fear of losing their love or approval.
  2. Guilt-tripping: A parent may use guilt-tripping tactics to make their child feel responsible for the parent’s emotions or actions. For instance, a parent might say things like, “You’re making me so unhappy by not doing what I want,” or “If you really loved me, you would do as I say.” This can create feelings of guilt and shame in the child, causing them to prioritize the parent’s needs and desires over their own.
  3. Victim-blaming: In some cases, parents may engage in victim-blaming by attributing their negative emotions or behavior to their child’s actions. For example, a parent might blame their child for causing them stress, frustration, or disappointment, even when the child is not at fault. This can lead the child to internalize feelings of guilt and self-blame, eroding their self-esteem and sense of worth.
  4. Withholding affection or approval: Parents may withhold affection, attention, or approval as a form of punishment or manipulation. For instance, a parent might give their child the silent treatment or withdraw affection when the child fails to meet their expectations or challenges their authority. This can leave the child feeling unloved, unworthy, and desperate for the parent’s validation and approval.
  5. Emotional manipulation: Emotional blackmail often involves subtle forms of manipulation aimed at undermining the child’s autonomy, self-esteem, and emotional well-being. For example, a parent might use gaslighting techniques to distort the child’s perception of reality or invalidate their feelings and experiences. This can lead the child to doubt themselves and their own emotions, making them more susceptible to the parent’s control and manipulation.

This would explain why Joo Jaekyung fears and even rejects any affection and relationships. This is the lesson he learned through his bad experiences. No attachment and no love is freedom, as love is synonym for vulnerability, That’s why he chose independency, rejection of norms and brutal honesty. He sees relationships as a source of danger and vulnerability. I am quite certain that no one would suspect the emotional abuse from his family. Hence he came to view people as selfish hypocrites. The absence of his “family” for his birthday is the proof of their bad education and “abuse”.

That’s how I realized why Joo Jaekyung chose MMA fighting as career too. It was not just a mere coincidence. (chapter 26)

The adrenaline from the training and fighting is diverting his attention from his misery. He can mask his depression behind his anger and his fighting. It was to numb his negative thoughts and emotions. Hence he can not “meditate”. But he knows that Kim Dan is fragile, he can not treat him like the others. (chapter 2) He learned through Cheolmin that he could kill him. This shows his good nature in verity. Hence he resorted to such gestures, when his cynical depression resurfaced: (chapter 32) (chapter 36) (chapter 37) (chapter 45) As you can see, little by little, the champion is learning to control his rage and “cynicism”. During the last argument, he didn’t touch the physical therapist at all. He still allows him to stay at his place and he is shown as caring later. (chapter 46) The irony is that Joo Jaekyung is not recognizing his own transformation. The most obvious evidence for his metamorphosis is the absence of his jealousy towards the doctor. (chapter 47) It shows a certain trust. One might argue about this interpretation. This could be seen as indifference. However, I believe that his altercation with Seonho must have been quite an eye-opening for the champion. (chapter 46) It is because Kim Dan had not talked back to Joo Jaekyung during their argument. He had accepted his criticism silently contrary to Seonho. Right now, he has the impression that he still has the upper hand, but he couldn’t be more wrong.

Since the champion has such a long mistrust in people, Jinx-philes can grasp why the champion believes in the power of money. (chapter 26) He has the impression that he can control people, since he is wealthy. Yet, he is not realizing that he can get stabbed because of money as well. We have two perfect examples. Because of the drug incident, the MFC security guys betrayed him, as they protected the organization (chapter 40) Then in episode 47, the emperor got manipulated by his so-called loyal advisors. (chapter 47) First, I would like to outline that neither the manager from the Entertainment agency nor his acolyte brought up the underground fighting ring and Baek Junmin’s dubious success. (chapter 47) With their video, they presented him as an average and reliable fighter. (chapter 47) Observe the divergence between the advisors’ words and the members’ from Team Black. (chapter 47) The latter portrayed Baek Junmin as dangerous, for he would use any mean to win the fight. He doesn’t stand for fairness and responsibility. The champion didn’t get to hear anything about these rumors.

And how can the champion change his cynical view of life? Naturally, through pain… as he needs to be confronted by his fears. Nonetheless, I believe that the halmoni next to Kim Dan has a huge role in his healing as well. Since the latter is so weak and gentle, he doesn’t fear danger from her. (chapter 21) Moreover, the grandmother’s mortality could serve as a reminder for the champion that he is also a human… just like the others he condemns. Besides, she embodies true selflessness and gratitude. Hence she took the champion’s hand to thank him (chapter 22) This is what psychologists recommend to overcome Cynicism:

As you can see, COMPASSION, GRATITUDE, MEDITATION and CONVERSATION play a huge role in changing the mind-set. So far, the couple never shared their fears and own thoughts. They still kept secrets from each other and they didn’t converse a lot. Moreover, the problem was that Kim Dan had acted in secrecy for the gift, which could only reinforce the fighter’s negative disposition. That’s the reason why I believe that Joo Jaekyung needs to learn through a positive experience that not all people are selfish and have ill intentions. He has to discover his own bias through the doctor’s reflection. He needs to receive unconditional love and respect: (chapter 41) He never heard her recognition. In addition, until now, Kim Dan spoke in the name of others or didn’t defend his own point. Team Black’s loyalty would be the evidence that it is dangerous to judge people based on prejudices and past experiences. He needs to reflect on his own actions as well. If the Emperor heard “his members”, he would realize that MFC as an organization is corrupted and is even involved with criminality. He is already sensing something, but he can not identify the problem. (chapter 47) Should Kim Dan divulge Baek Junmin’s connections to the underground fighting ring or simply show him the message, (chapter 47), he would prove his faithfulness and sincerity to the fighter. And the vicious circle would be broken. Though he is broke, he would give up on an opportunity to earn some money easily. To conclude, as long as the champion is still a cynical character, he can not enter a relationship with Kim Dan. For that, he needs to open up his heart and third eye so that he can recognize his partner’s selflessness and honesty. Finally, he will realize that he needs the assistance of others in order to be able to keep his reputation intact (witnesses, supporters). There is no doubt that the Emperor will be badmouthed again.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx / Doctor Frost: Harmony’s clash⚡: Prince S 👸 and Emperor 🤴 – part 1

Anyone can imagine that with the name “emperor”, I am referring to the fighter Joo Jaekyung. That’s his nickname in the MMA world. (chapter 14) On the other hand, some readers might wonder why I am connecting Kim Dan to princess (Prince S). I have many reasons for this association.

1. Princess Pyeonggang and Kim Dan

Have you ever heard about the Korean folktale of Princess Pyeonggang and her “idiot” husband Ondal? It is the story of a “stubborn” princess who helped her timid and poor husband Ondal to become a famous general during the 3 kingdoms era.

Moreover, their marriage transcends social classes, which reminds us a lot of Jinx. On the other hand, if we compare the Manhwa with the legend, the champion resembles more to the princess due to his status, actions and personality. He is the one helping the doctor, and Kim Dan appears more like the fool “husband” with his weak and poor relative. However, I came to make the association between the famous Korean princess and the physical therapist, when I was rereading Doctor Frost. How so? (chapter 30) This woman, named Sihyun, is suffering from Dependent Personality Disorder. And the author of the Webtoon Doctor Frost called her story: “The tears of Princess Pyeonggang”. Due to her personality, she was linked to the famous “princess”. She would do everything for her companions, yet she kept getting dumped. What caught my attention is that both women defined themselves through their partner. Their ultimate goal in life is to assist them, to make the other happy or recognized. But how is it a problem?

Let me give you an example with Sihyun and her first boyfriend.

Doctor Frost chapter 33

Yes, she asks her first boyfriend to make choices and as such decisions. She is unable to voice her own opinion, to make a statement. She needs the support and advices from her boyfriends. By asking for her partner’s judgment, she imagines that she is respecting him. Nonetheless, the call at such a hour looks more like intrusion and disregard. By acting this way, she burdened all her boyfriends so that at the end, they all felt the need to break up with her.  (chapter 33) What appeared as caring turned out to be a load, for the partners were all forced to be responsible for her and in every aspect of her life. They definitely felt asphyxiated, hence they could only get sick of her. Interesting is that this person would find shortly after the separation a new boyfriend, a sign that she could not live on her own. (chapter 33) And now, you are wondering how Sihyun is similar to Kim Dan, who only had one person in his life before he met the champion. It is related to traumas in their childhood. (Doctor Frost, chapter 39) After reading this, Jinx-philes can realize that Kim Dan is also suffering from Dependent Personality Disorder, though it is less obvious. He got abandoned by his parents making him feel insecure. (chapter 21) We could detect his low self-esteem (chapter 25) (chapter 46) and his overprotectiveness (chapter 16) (chapter 26) (chapter 42) on many occasions. He was risking his livelihood and health for the sake of others (his halmoni, Potato and Joo Jaekyung). His selflessness is actually the sign of his DPD. He had no purpose or ambition in his life… That’s why he is not able to project himself in the future. Until chapter 45, his life and future was determined by the celebrity, (chapter 42) and before it was by his halmoni’s fate. (chapter 19) However, here please don’t get me wrong. For me, the athlete is the physical therapist’s emancipator. This huge argument in the dining room pushed him to differentiate himself from the champion. In my eyes, Kim Dan would have returned to his old bad habits… relying on someone else, sacrificing himself for someone’s else sake. He would have neglected his career in the end.

As you can see, the problem is that his personality is affecting his career. At no moment, he voiced his own opinion concerning the champion’s health. He always used other doctors as references (chapter 27)  (chapter 42) or he delegated the examination to a hospital. (chapter 31) Here, we get an explanation why he couldn’t detect the trick from Choi Heesung. He feared to make a diagnosis on his own, as he didn’t desire to question the words from the comedian. The hospital seems to be the sacred place in the doctor’s eyes. (chapter 41) There, nothing can go wrong. But by entrusting his patients to hospitals, he didn’t realize that he was appearing as untrustworthy or even “incompetent”. His lack of confidence and hesitation explicate why the athlete replied to his suggestion like this: (chapter 41) How could he question the doctor from MFC, when he kept hiding behind a hospital or the words from other physicians? That’s how the physical therapist got silenced. He couldn’t confront the athlete with his diagnosis. Interesting is that he never gave him the file later! (chapter 42) Consequently, it is not surprising why the champion complained about the doctor’s negligence. The latter was avoiding any responsibility in the end. On the other hand, the report is the symbol of his hard work, but also of his knowledge. That’s the reason why I am still considering the dispute in chapter 45 as a good omen for the physical therapist. He needs to develop his own identity. They are two different people. He needs to live for himself, to give a meaning to his life and not: (Doctor Frost, chapter 30)

Nevertheless, one detail caught my attention in this panel:  (chapter 27) The presence of the personal pronoun “I”. Contrary to the conversation in the car (chapter 42), where there is no personal pronoun “I”, the doctor made a mini-statement. Jinx-philes can now grasp why the champion asked him to become responsible for his day-off. (chapter 27) That’s how it dawned on me why the doctor reverted to his old habits (not participating to the meeting, taking odd jobs, not voicing his own judgment, relying on others) after the night, when he was treated as sex toy. However, in my eyes, the trigger for this switch was the release of the tabloid article. (chapter 35). Why did the doctor appear so confident in front of his client to the point that he could reject his hand after going to the hospital? (chapter 27) It is because his self-esteem had been boosted by Dr. Lee. The latter had complimented him which didn’t fall on deaf ears. However, the relationship between the respectable hospital and the athlete went sour due to his article. (chapter 35) Imagine what it meant for Kim Dan. He could only remain passive, as he is called “doctor”. He views himself as a member from the medical field. Furthermore, observe what the sports therapist told him during the treatment session: (chapter 42) He mentioned the lawsuit against the most reputable hospital. The dispute could only diminish his self-esteem. As time passed on, there is no ambiguity that this lawsuit must have burdened more and more the physical therapist. Besides, there is no doubt that he felt some loyalty towards doctor Lee who had been complimenting him. Secondly, let’s not forget that despite his “efforts”, he had not been able to convince his patient to stop training for one day.  (chapter 29) Hence he jumped to the conclusion that his patient would not listen to him anyway. (chapter 42)

After being confronted with harsh reality, he is forced to reflect on his own situation, to worry about himself. That’s the reason why I judge this scene as a positive moment in the doctor’s life. He is no longer seeking love and reliance on others in order to value himself. (chapter 46) This is not surprising that Mingwa zoomed on his feet. (chapter 46) It is full of symbolism. For the first time, he is standing on his own feet. His walk in direction to the trash bin illustrates his choice. (chapter 46) Besides, he is using the personal pronoun “I”. (chapter 46) It is his Coming-Of-Age. He is on the verge to become independent. On the other hand, he didn’t fight back verbally against his boss. He accepted his reproach. (chapter 46) He was just a physical therapist and nothing more. This shows his lack of criticism. He is still not mentally strong enough to question the champion’s words and argue back. In the past, he could do it, for he was identifying himself with his grandmother and her values. (chapter 18) This signifies that he needs to develop his own philosophy and values. What does he treasure in his life?

And here I feel the need to bring up the green-haired guy. (chapter 42) The latter was also dependent on the champion, but his “addiction” was money and not love or recognition. Therefore he picked up the money before leaving the flat (chapter 2), while the other threw away the expensive keychain (chapter 46). This scene exposes the return of Kim Dan’s dignity. This comparison reinforces my interpretation that the champion misjudged the doctor’s present and actions. He imagined that Kim Dan had been acting like his “previous sex-partners” or stans. They would offer him some gifts in exchange of favors. Another contrast with the goblin is the absence of a fight and discussion. (chapter 2) I would even add that contrary to the green-haired guy, the doctor is not judging his patient’s personality, he is blaming himself. (chapter 46) Hence we should see it in a positive light: Kim Dan is not rejecting the athlete per se, but he is putting a distance between himself and his boss. Moreover, the presence of guilt is important, because in order to overcome DPD, the patient needs to recognize his own issues in order to change. By admitting his own flaws, he is able to move on. Our “Princess “Sihyun always put the whole responsibility on her boyfriends who dumped her. They were the bad guys, only interested in her money or body. (Doctor Frost, chapter 32) Interesting is that doctor Frost revealed to her later that her condition made her an easy target, as she kept relying on others. (Doctor Frost, chapter 39) And this observation brings me to my next conclusion: he will be approached by really bad guys, the mysterious Mr. Choi! (chapter 46) Thus I assume that his next lesson is to judge people correctly, to question their true motivation. So far, he fell into the same trap twice: (chapter 1) (chapter 1) He even needs to learn the difference between good guy and nice guy, but this remark applies to the grandmother.

Here, I was thinking of Heesung and Joo Jaekyung. Both acted as generous and gentle guys (chapter 21), yet their actions were not truly selfless.

2. Dependence versus attachment

Finally, I don’t think that the doctor’s choice for the present (chapter 45) is random, for it stands for “attachment”.

Because of his abandonment issues, there is no ambiguity that the doctor belongs more to the second type, whereas the champion is more connected to the third type. Since Joo Jaekyung is suffering from philophobia, the keychain could only be rejected, as it symbolized “restrain” and “attachment”.

In my opinion, the princess must learn how to love without “attachment” and as such without expectations. Yes, Kim Dan has to discover the existence of “love without conditions”.

On my search about attachment and conditional love, I found this blog where the author’s statement opened my eyes to the princess’ destiny.

Kim Dan is better than other characters in Jinx, as he is not greedy by nature. He is not motivated by money and fame. Nevertheless, what did the physical therapist think during the Summer Night’s Dream? (chapter 44) He found fulfilment in sex, which stands in opposition to the recommendation of zackbeach. Moreover, I would like to underline that the doctor reduced knowledge to sex: (chapter 44) How could he get to know the champion better, when the latter was supposed to be drunk and they would have sex? Getting closer to someone means communication and not really sensuality. Hence his happiness could only be short-lived and illusory. He didn’t take the reality into consideration. Thus I see the physical therapist’s tears as a therapy session: (chapter 46) He allows himself to cry, to grieve and to admit his pain and loneliness. (chapter 46) It helps him to face reality. He is on his own, he needs to stop relying on others. I would even say, he is encouraged to make decisions and as such to become responsible for his own life. It is important, because this means that he will have to fight back, if he wants to survive. He can not make any desperate and hasty decisions, like this one: (chapter 1) However, since he listened to the champion’s reproach and became submissive again, their relationship seems to have returned to normality. They even appear as close. (chapter 46) But this is not real communication. It shows that Kim Dan is now waiting for the right time and opportunity to leave Joo Jaekyung. He doesn’t need to rush anything.

3. The Prince S Sleeping Beauty

But Kim Dan is not just connected to Princess Pyeonggang, but also to Sleeping Beauty. My avid readers will certainly remember my comparison between Kim Dan and Sleeping Beauty. [For more read Painful awakening of Sleeping Beauty I have to admit that his mind-set  (chapter 41) reminded me of the ending of a fairy tale: they lived happily ever after. But the doctor was forgetting that life doesn’t end after the match in the States. Life ends with death. In verity, the champion is destined to be challenged, until he retires. What the doctor saw was not the end. This exposes his naivety. How could he have such a view? It is influenced by his grandmother. (chapter 19) His goal in life was determined by his familial and financial situation: (chapter 10) At no moment he pondered about himself. Happiness was never his goal, exactly like in fairy tales. Sleeping Beauty is rather passive. She sleeps, until the prince charming appears and kisses her. After that, they have kids. Interesting is that they don’t get married right away, so that the princess initially has the status of a mistress or concubine. Once the prince can secure his position, he marries her. Then the moment her husband leaves her side for war, she is tormented by her mother-in-law, the ogress. She can only escape death thanks to the intervention of her husband. We could say that happiness fell on her lap. Sleeping Beauty stands for passivity, dependence on her parents and husband and lack of critical thinking. Why? It is because the princess in fairy tales, in particular Sleeping Beauty, embodies toxic positivity.

But what is toxic passivity?

This means that such a person is denying reality, for they refuse to face negative emotions. Thus they are unable to express their true human emotions and don’t receive unwavering support. And now, you are wondering where in Jinx, the author left traces of Toxic Positivity. The first example which could come to your mind would be this: (chapter 21) She rejected her grandson’s fear and tears. She didn’t allow him to express his abandonment issues. She diminished his anxiety by questioning his behavior: “It’s okay, grandma was just in the kitchen getting a glass of water.” Then in the present, we could use his visit at the hospital: (chapter 41) While the halmoni didn’t mention her suffering, the doctor gave expensive gifts to the nurse and his grandmother. He acted, as if money was no longer a problem… as if everything was fine, as if she would recover soon. Yet, he never mentioned his problems with the champion during his stay in the States (no drug incident, the humiliation, the harsh words). He is never voicing his problems to his grandmother. Both are putting smiles on their face. And the moment, I connected Kim Dan to Toxic positivity, I had another revelation. The best example for this negative attitude is actually his own birthday. 😱 (chapter 11) Imagine that the grandmother had left the house without her grandchild. He was left behind in the house. Though she meant it well, for the child, this must have been a real torment, as he constantly feared to be abandoned. However, he knew that he was not allowed to cry or to complain. Hence when he saw her returning, he put a huge smile on his face. Moreover, this is what they had for dinner: a sweet bread and two yoghurts. The grandmother must have been hungry. Both acted, as if nothing was wrong. (chapter 45) With this contrast, the fear from the champion becomes more palpable. Joo Jaekyung got angry, for he had been put in the same situation. But the latter was never influenced by Toxic Positivity. Besides, he was fighting against his own inner demons. Nevertheless, this new interpretation of the birthday made me recognize why the author chose this chronology concerning Kim Dan’s past:

Chapter 5Chapter 11Chapter 19Chapter 21

The longer Kim Dan lived on his own, the more he got confronted with reality. (chapter 1) However, he could never confide to his grandmother about the physical abuse from the loan shark. However, the moment his hope got up (chapter 11), as he imagined that he could pay off the debts, he recalled his birthday. He had a nice “souvenir”… convincing himself that everything was fine. He would be able to do it, like his grandmother had told him. (chapter 18) Nevertheless, the moment he was forced to move out, he couldn’t help himself to recall how he got abandoned by his parents. And the moment he saw his halmoni fighting for her life, his abandonment issues resurfaced. Hence this terrible memory came through a nightmare. The betrayal from the parents is what had been deeply buried by the grandmother’s philosophy. The fact that the halmoni never allowed Kim Dan to talk about his parents and the circumstances of his arrival to the humble mansion, is the evidence of Toxic Positivity. In my eyes, the relative was already struggling herself, for she had also been left behind. But here it is important not to mix Toxic Positivity with Gaslighting.

But what are the consequences of Toxic Positivity? A low self-esteem, stagnation, constant anxiety and guilt. But there’s more to it.

This explicates why Kim Dan kept his “innocence”, why he came to deny the existence of his own body and became a ghost. By denying all emotions, he got disconnected to his own body. (chapter 12) Therefore I understand why the doctor didn’t fight back against Heo Manwook and his minions. (chapter 1) It was his way to deny reality, hence he was covering his face. Because he trusted his grandmother, he imagined that as long as he was paying the interest on time, nothing would happen to him. (chapter 1) (chapter 11) But the moneylender and his minions are no honest bankers, but criminals. They enjoy using their strength, that makes them feel powerful. It boosts their ego.

Yet, until now, I didn’t explain how a princess from fairy tales embodies toxic positivity.

  1. Perfection Expectation:
    • The concept of a princess is often associated with an idealized, perfect image. At no moment, Sleeping Beauty voiced her pain or despair. When she got hurt, she felt asleep right away. Similarly, toxic positivity can perpetuate the idea that one should always maintain a perfect, positive façade.
  2. Dismissal of Struggles:
    • Princesses in fairy tales often face challenges but are expected to handle them with grace and a positive attitude. Toxic positivity may similarly dismiss or downplay real struggles and difficulties, urging individuals to maintain a positive front regardless of their experiences.
  3. External Validation:
    • The image of a princess often involves seeking external validation, and toxic positivity can encourage individuals to seek validation through projecting a constantly positive image, even if it’s not authentic. Sleeping Beauty’s fate hinges on an external event—the prince’s kiss. This external validation is necessary for her to be acknowledged, valued, and freed from the curse.
  4. Dependence on Others: The princess’s well-being and the resolution of her situation are not within her control. She is dependent on the actions of the prince for her happiness and liberation.
  5. Symbol of Approval: The prince’s kiss becomes a symbol of approval and acceptance. It signifies that the princess is worthy of love and that her life gains meaning and purpose through external validation.

To conclude, Kim Dan embodies two negative traits, Dependent Personality Disorder and Toxic Positivity, due to his raising and traumas in his childhood. The elephant in the room was never brought up, the “rejection from the parents”. Therefore this secret could only poison the air in the little house.

The heavy silence had terrible consequences, he turned Kim Dan into a puppet, even a ghost. This explicates his passivity. For the grandmother, it looked like everything was fine, because her grandson did everything for her. There was never an argument between them. That’s the reason why I see this crying as a liberation. He allows himself to accept his wounds and tears. (chapter 46) (chapter 46) He allows himself to voice his thoughts. He admits to have denied reality. Mind and body are now united and synchronous. Consequently, I deduce that he is determined not to get fooled in the future.

And this brings me back to the story of Pyeonggang and Ondal!! Thanks to the selfish and stubborn “Prince S”, the fool Kim Dan received money and got trained. He became a true man, because he is now making decisions on his own. This means that from that moment on, the champion will have to become proactive in order to keep his “partner” by his side. Thanks to Joo Jaekyung’s attention, the doctor is now getting noticed by people. (chapter 46) This is the rising of the prince S. But this harbors a problem: he is also about to become the target of real bad guys. Yes, like in any historical k-dramas, we are about to assist to a battle of power, and this outside the ring.

The essay is already so long that I chose to introduce the Emperor in the second part. Naturally, I will include the scenes from chapter 46.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.